EX  LIBRJS 


MOUNTAIN  SCOUTING 


A  HAND-BOOK  FOR 


Officers  and   Soldiers  on   the    Frontiers 


PROFUSELY  ILLUSTRATED  AND  CONTAINING 

NUMEROUS  NOTES  ON  THE  ART  OF 

TRA  VEL, 


BY 

EDWARD  S.  FARROW,  U.  S.  ARMY. 


Assistant  Instructor  of  Tactics  at  the  L.  &  Military  Academy,  and  For- 
merly Commanding  Indian  iScovta  in  the  Department  of  the 

( olvmbia. 


NEW   YORK : 

PUBLISHED  BY  THE  AUTHOR. 
1881. 


[A 

F"3 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  t38i, 

BY  EDWARD  S.  FARROW, 
In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


INSCRIBED 


TO 


OLIVER  OTIS  HOWARD, 


Brigadier  and  Brevet  Major  General,  U.  S.  Army 


AS  A  TRIBUTE  TO  HIS 


UNEQUALKD  ENTERPRISE  AND  PATRONAGE 


OF  THE  ART  OF  WAR, 


FROM  HIS  AFFECTIONATE;  FRIEND 


THE  AUTHOR. 


M25521 


PREFACE. 


THE  object  of  my  book  is  to  investigate  that  chain  of  many 
minor  successes,  each  link  of  which  must  be  perfect,  in  order 
to  insure  the  success  of  any  expedition. 

A  long  and  dangerous  journey,  without  the  loss  of  properly, 
comfort,  nealth  or  life,  can  only  be  accomplished  after  having 
learned  how  to  prepare  for  all  emergencies;  how  to  avoid  un- 
necessary hardships;  and  how  to  find  out  the  capabilities  of 
the  country  and  of  the  party. 

I  make  no  claim  to  discoveries  in  mountain-craft,  nor  do 
I  p,  etend  to  present  any  facts  which  have  not  occurred  to  others 
in  similar  situations. 

I  have  endeavored  to  present,  in  small  compass,  such  knowl- 
edge as  the  young  officer  often  acquires  by  bitter  experience 
and  under  the  most  unfavorable  circumstances. 

My  book  is  not  intended  for  officers  who  have  seen  service 
on  the  frontiers,  many  of  whom  are  my  competent  teachers; 
but  for  the  novice,  who  is  so  placed  that  he  must  depend  upon 
himself  in  times  of.  emergency. 

To  complete  my  -vork,  I  have  drawn  largely  on  the  experi- 
ences of  older  officers  and  have  introduced  frequent  notes  re- 
corded during  the  study  of  Indian  character  while  in  their 
peaceful  villages,  following  their  rugged  trails,  and  in  their  hos- 
tile camps. 

I  have  also  freely  consulted  SCOTT'S  MILITARY  DICTION- 
ARY, WALKER'S  MANLY  SPORTS  and  other  works  of  reference. 

I  hope  my  readers  will  for  *  ard  me  any  additions  or  correc- 
tions that  may  appear  to  them  to  add  to  the  value  of  the 
work. 

E.  S.  F. 
WEST  POINT,  N.  Y.,  December,  1881. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.— THE  HOESE.        ....  9 

II.— THE  RIFLE.         ....  25 

III. — MEDICAL  AND  SURGICAL  HINTS.         .  41 

IV. — USEFUL  INFORMATION  IN  POST  AND  FIELD.    62 

V.—  FIELD  EQUIPAGE  AND  SUPPLIES.        .  88 

VI.- — MOUNTAIN  TKAVEL.       .           .           .  100 

VII.— PACK  MULES  AND  PACKING.   .           ,  111 

VIII.— MAECHING.          .                       .           .  130 

IX. — FOKCED  MARCHES.         .            .            .  141 

X.—  CROSSING  RIVERS.         .           .           .  152 

XI.— THE  CAMP.          ....  164 

XII.— THE  MESS.           ....  176 

XIII. — LIVING  OFF  THE  COUNTRY.      .            .  194 

XIV.— INDIAN  CHARACTER.      .            .            .  213 

XV.— THE  TRAIL,  SIGNS  AND  SIGNALS.        .  228 

XVI.  —SKIRMISHING  239 


APPENDIX. 


I. — A[  SYSTEM  OF  SWIMMING.        .  .  3 

II.— ROWING.  ....  19 

III.— THE  CHINOOK  VOCABULARY.  22 


MOUNTAIN    SCOUTING. 


CHAPTER    I. 

THE    HORSE. 

A  THOROUGH  knowledge  of  the  horse  and  his  judicious 
treatment  are  essential  to  a  successful  mountain  journey.  If 
there  be  left  any  latitude  in  the  selection  of  your  horse,  see 
that  "  he  is  not  less  than  fourteen  nor  more  than  sixteen  hands 
high  ;  weighs  not  less  than  seven  hundred  and  fifty,  nor  more 
than  eleven  hundred  pounds  ;  age  not  less  than  five,  nor  more 
than  eight  years  ;  head  and  ears  small  ;  forehead  broad  ;  eyes 
large  and  prominent  ;  shoulders  long  and  sloping  well  back  ; 
fore  legs  straight  and  standing  well  under;  chest  broad  and 
deep  ;  barrel  large,  and  increasing  from  girdle  to  flank  ;  withers 
elevated  ;  back  short  and  straight  ;  loins  and  haunches  broad 
and  muscular  ;  hocks  well  bent  and  under  the  horse  ;  pasterns 
slanting  ;  and  feet  small  and  sound." 

My  idea  of  the  perfect  horse  is  depicted  in  the  following 
drawing. 


Range  horses,   or  those   that  have  been  raised    exclusively 


io  Mountain  Scouting. 

on  grass,  are  better  suited  for  mountain  service  than  those  fed 
on  grain.  Hence  it  is  that  the  square-built,  large-trunked, 
short-legged  Indian  pony  endures  this  service  so  much  better 
than  the  American  horse  that  has  been  accustomed  to  grain. 

The  Indian  pony,  generally  believed  to  be  the  result  of  a 
cross  between  the  Southern  mustang  and  a  small  type  of  the 
Canadian,  is  never  fed,  stabled,  combed,  shod  nor  doctored  ; 
and  when  not  under  the  saddle  is  left  to  shift  for  himself.  In 
the  winter  he  is  a  mere  animated  skeleton. 

His  proportions  vary  according  to  the  localities  in  which  he 
is  found,  but  he  seldom  exceeds  thirteen  hands  in  height.  He 
is  wonderfully  sagacious  and  sure-footed.  He  can  climb  a 
steep,  rocky  hill  with  assurance  and  activity,  and  rush  down  a 
precipitous  declivity  with  much  indifference.  He  will  get 
over  and  through  places,  which  appear  utterly  impracticable, 
with  ease  and  rapidity,  while  the  American  horse  would  labor 
to  travel  at  r.  walk.  He  particularly  excels  in  the  passage  of 
swamps,  marshy  places  and  sands  perforated  with  gopher 
holes. 

When  full  mouthed,  the  horse  will  have  forty  teeth,  twenty 
in  each  jaw.  The  mare  possesses  only  thirty-six.  The  age  of 
the  horse  may  be  determined  by  observing  the  teeth,  the  times 
at  which  they  appear,  are  shed  and  replaced,  and  the  altera- 
tions in  their  form  and  markings  ; — 2  years,  all  milch  teeth, 
which  are  easily  distinguished  from  the  permanent  by  being 
smaller,  whiter  and  having  necks  ; — 3  years,  two  permanent 
teeth,  central  incisors  ; — 4  years,  four  permanent  teeth,  central 
and  lateral  incisors  ; — 5  years,  all  permanent  teeth. 
.  From  this  time  on,  the  age  of  the  horse  is  decided  by  the 
marks  on  the  teeth  ; — 6  years,  the  marks  on  the  central  incisors 
«re  worn  out,  and  the  points  of  the  tushes  are  blunted  ; — 7  years, 
the  marks  on  the  central  and  lateral  incisors  are  worn  out, 
those  on  the  corner  incisors  still  showing ; — 8  years,  all  the 
cavities  are  filled  up.  Beyond  this  age  the  criteria  are  uncer- 
tain. 


The  Horse.  u 

The  markings  on  the  teetli  (except  those  of  crib-biters)  are 
moie  distinct  in  the  upper  than  in  the  lower  jaw,  and  may  be 
easily  examined  by  the  aid  of  a  mirror. 

The  following  facts  are  noted  in  connection  with  the  horse's 
nature,  management  and  capabilities  : 

1.  He  judges  everything  by  seeing,  smelling  (feeling),  and 
hearing. 

2.  He  will  resist  no  demand  consistent  with  the  laws  of  his 
nature,  being  unconscious  of  his  strength. 

3.  He  has  a  strong  memory  of  places,  and  very  readily  finds 
again  a  trail  or  road  which  he  has  once  before  traveled. 

4.  He    possesses    the  faculty  of  directing  his  course  to  the 
nearest  water. 

5.  The  absolute  command  of  him  can  only  be   obtained  by 
an  admixture  of  kindness  and  firmness. 

6.  His  lips  and  teeth  adapt  him  to  clipping  short  herbage — 
he  can  find  an  abundance  where  the  ox  would  starve. 

7.  A  good  horse  is  ruined  by  the  practice  of  passing  a  loop- 
ed rope  around  the  lower  jaw,  which  is  too  often  employed  as 
an  aid  in  keeping  the  seat  when  riding. 

8.  Avoid  raising  the  arms  when  driving  a  horse.     He  is  con- 
stantly in  fear  that  they  may  fly  off  and  strike  him. 

9.  When  he  hangs  back  and  will  not  lead,  never  get  in  front 
of  him  and  pull,   for    there  is  no  use,  unless  you  are  stronger 
than  the  horse.      Place  yourself  opposite  his  shoulder  and  hold 
his  head  in  front  of  you  by  grasping  the  bridle  near  the  mouth, 
touching  him  with  a  whip  held  in  the  other  hand. 

10.  Never  whip  a  horse  to  hurt  him.     When  he  is  stubborn, 
apply   the   whip  lightly  about  his  legs  and  flanks,  and  not  pn 
his  back. 

n.  When  a  horse  will  not  stand,  and  is  addicted  to  the 
habit  of  kicking,  tie  up  one  of  his  fore  legs  and  leave  him  on 
three.  He  can  then  neither  run  away  nor  kick,  and  will  soon 
learn  that  you  do  not  intend  to  hurt  him.  If  not  pressed,  he 
can  hop  two  or  three  miles  on  three  legs.  Two  miles  of  hop- 
ping is  a  sure  cure  for  a  kicker  or  a  jibber. 


12  Mountain  Scouting. 

12.  To  overcome  the  stubbornness  of  ahorse  that  has  thrown 
himself  down,  do  not  flog  him.     Twisting  or  biting  his  tail  is 
the  usual  way  to  manage  him.     A  tuft  of  grass  set  ablaze  and 
placed  under  his  nostril  will  cause  him  to  rise. 

13.  It  is  not  well  to  use  a  whip  on  the  horse  from  which  you 
shoot ;  if  so,  when  you  raise  the  gun  to  fire  he  is  sure  to  be  un- 
steady, feeling  a  dread  of  its  being  the  whip. 

14.  A  load  on  a  horse's  back  is  the  worst  application  of    his 
strength  ;  he  can  draw   about    seven    times    as   much   as   he 
can  carry. 

15.  An  average  horse  equals  six  men  at  a  pull,  and  requires 
about  five  gallons  of  water  daily. 

16.  Experiment    has    shown     the    following    endurance    of 
horses  : — A  healthy  horse  will  live  on  water  alone  twenty-one 
days  ;  he  will  live  without  eating  or  drinking  about  fifteen  days; 
he  will   live  if  fed,   and   without  water,   for  about   six  days. 
The  average  length  of  life    of  the   horse   in   all  localities    and 
under  all  circumstances  is  about  twenty-one  years. 

Before  starting  on  a  long  journey,  on  horseback,  every  effort 
should  be  made  to  secure  a  proper  equipment. 

In  selecting  a  saddle,  see  that  it  is  light,  strong  and  large 
enough  to  permit  the  weight  to  be  evenly  distributed  over  the 
horse's  back.  It  should  be  sufficiently  raised  to  admit  a  free 
circulation  between  it  and  the  spine,  while  the  pommel  is  high 
enough  to  prevent  the  rider  from  being  thrown  forward. 

The  cynch  should  be  made  of  some  soft  and  elastic  material, 
such  as  hair,  and  not  less  than  four  inches  in  width. 

I  have  ridden  on  a  hunting  saddle,  shown  in  the  drawing 
on  the  page  opposite,  very  much  on  the  order  of  the  present 
milit  iry  saddles,  but  so  constructed  as  to  better  fit  the  horse, 
and  less  liable  to  produce  a  'sore  back.'  This  saddle 
seems  well  adapted  to  use  in  a  wild  country.  It  may  be 
supplied  with  rings  and  '  DV  at  pleasure.  The  stirrup  iron 
is  of  large  size,  so  as  to  admit  the  free  passage,  in  and  out,  of 
the  boot  with  mud  or  clay  about  it.  It  is  also  heavy,  and  the 


The  Horse. 

foot    can    readily    find    it    should    it 
when  the  horse  is  in  rapid  motion. 


13 
be    lost    for  a  moment 


The  saddle-blanket  should  be  folded  smoothly  and  evenly 
and  cover  all  the  back  touched  by  the  saddle.  A  piece  of 
linen  cloth  placed  under  the  blanket  will  often  prevent  sore 
back. 


14  Mountain  Scouting. 

If  a  horse  is  sweating  very  much  when  unsaddled,  it  is  well 
to  allow  the  saddle-blanket  to  remain  strapped  upon  his  back 
until  he  is  dry.  Cold  water  should  never  be  applied  to  the 
back  while  heated — it  is  all  right  to  wash  it  after  it  cools,  but 
not  before. 

The  bridle  should  fit  the  horse  comfortably  and  there 
should  be  room  for  the  finger  between  the  chin  and  the  curb- 
chain.  If  the  horse  be  tender-chinned,  the  chain  should  be 
covered  with  leather. 

The  bit  should  be  sufficiently  light  and  easy  not  to  fret  or 
chafe  the  horse.  Many  bits  are  instruments  of  torture  and 
the  horse  will  often  set  his  >jaws  against  them  to  alleviate 
the  pain. 

An  excellent  bridle  is  one  so  constructed  that  the  bit 
may  be  removed  by  unbuckling,  thus  converting  it  into  a 
halter  for  leading  or  picketing,  and  at  the  same  time  ad- 
mitting of  the  use  of  any  bit. 

The  bit  cannot  be  too  carefully  adjusted.  If  the  horse 
open  his  mouth,  writhe  his  jaws  and  throw  out  his  tongue — if 
he  have  no  appuy,  violently  toss  his  head  up  and  down,  carry 
it  low  or  refuse  to  go  forward,  the  bit  needs  a  proper  and  im- 
mediate adjustment. 

The  spur  should  be  used  by  accomplished  riders  only,  and 
then  with  great  prudence  and  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
horse.  It  is  often  advantageously  replaced  by  a  light  switch 
or  Indian  whip. 

The  first  two  essentials  for  good  horsemanship  are  a  firm 
seat  and  a  light  hand. 

To  mount  safely  and  easily,  stand  at  the  left  shoulder  of  the 
horse,  looking  to  the  rear  ;  take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand, 
dividing  them  by  the  middle  finger  of  the  left  hand  until  the 
horse's  mouth  is  felt  ;  close  the  left  hand,  about  ten  inches  in 
front  of  the  saddle,  firmly  on  the  mane  and  reins,  and  throw 
the  loop  to  the  off  side,  with  the  right  hand  ;  place  the  left 
foot  into  the  stirrup,  the  right  hand  assisting  after  quitting  the 
mane  ;  then  using  the  mane  as  a  slight  hold,  raise  the  body 


The  Horse.  15 

into  the  air,  passing  the  right  leg  over  the  horse,  assisting  in 
this  by  taking  hold  of  the  back  of  the  saddle  and  steadying  the 
fall  of  the  body  by  placing  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel. 

Dismounting  may  be  accomplished  by  a  reverse  process. 

In  dismounting  on  rough  and  dangerous  trails,  to  avoid 
accident,  it  is  better  to  disengage  both  feet  from  the  stirrups 
at  once  and  vault  from  the  saddle  to  the  ground. 

Having  gained  the  saddle,  the  rider  should  seat  himself  so 
as  to  place  every  part  of  the  body  in  such  position  that  it  can 
act  upon  the  horse  in  every  emergency. 

The  proper  length  of  stirrup  is  when  the  tread  of  the 
stirrup  is  about  one-half  inch  below  the  inner  ankle-bone — and 
when  the  feet  are  in  the  stirrups,  the  heels  should  be  two  or 
three  inches  lower  than  the  toes. 

The  grip  in  riding  should  be  maintained  by  the  thigh  and 
knee,  and  not  by  the  knee  and  calf  only.  The  positions  of 
the  feet  and  hands  exercise  some  influence  on  the  security  of 
the  seat  ;  and  without  the  acquisition  of  a  firm  seat,  the 
acquirement  of  good  hands  is  impossible. 

The  rein-hold  varies  with  the  design  of  the  rider  and  the 
propensities  of  the  horse.  The  drawings  show  the  usual 
methods  of  holding  and  shifting  the  reins. 


In  holding  them  separately,  one  passes  into  each  hand, 
between  the  third  and  fourth  fingers,  and  out  over  the  fore- 
finger, where  it  is  held  down  by  the  thumb. 

Frequently  the  reins  are  held  in  the  left  hand,  as  when  first 
taken  up.  Here,  the  left  rein  passes  under  the  little  finger,  and 


i6 


Mountain  Scouting. 


the  right  under  the  third,  both  passing  through  the  hand,  and 
the  superfluous  rein  uanging  over  the  first  joint  of  the  fore- 
finger, the  thumb  securing  it. 

Sometimes,  the  right  rein  enters  the  hand  over  the  fore- 
finger from  abt>ve  and  crosses  the  left  rein  in  the  palm,  where 
the  fingers  close  upon  them.  The  loop,  formed  of  the  residue, 
hangs  down  between  the  hand  and  body. 

The  reins  must  be  shifted  expertly  without  breaking  the 
time  or  altering  the  pace. 

To  shift  them  from  the  left  hand  : — Turn  the  thumbs  toward 
each  other  and  carry  the  right  hand  over  the  left ;  place  the 
fore-finger  of  the  right  hand  downward,  in  the  place  of  the 
little  finger  of  the  left  hand,  between  the  reins  ;  and  pass  the 
reins  through  the  right  hand,  placing  the  thumb  upon  the  left 
rein,  near  the  second  joint  of  the  fore-finger. 

To  return  them  to  the  left  hand  : — Carry  the  left  hand  over 
the  right  and  place  the  little  finger  of  the  left  hand  downward 
between  the  reins  ;  then  carry  them  smoothly  upward  through 
the  hand,  and  let  the  ends  hang  over  the  fore-finger. 

Quickness,  firmness,  gentleness  and  lightness  are  essentially 
necessary  to  good  hands. 

The  necessity  for  readiness  in  the  rider's  hand  is  obvious  in 
both  the  standing  and  flying  leaps.  Without  it,  the  horse  will 
be  embarrassed  and  both  the  animal  and  his  rider  endangered. 

While  the  rider  quickly  and  fearlessly  gives  the  horse  his 


The  Horse.  17 

head,  he  must  preserve  his  own  equilibrium,  by  leaning  for- 
ward as  the  horse  rises,  and  backward  as  he  alights. 

In  the  leap,  the  rider  should  not  raise  his  body  upright,  nor 
slacken  the  hold  with  his  legs,  before  the  hind  feet  of  the  horse 
come  to  the  ground.  The  horse  requires  no  support  or  assist- 
ance from  the  hand  until  he  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

I  have  stated  that,  in  theory,  the  rider  should  lean  forward 
during  the  time  in  which  the  horse  is  on  his  hind  legs  ;  but, 
in  practice,  this  position  is  so  momentary,  and  the  spring  from 
the  hind  legs  is  so  powerful,  that  it  is  dangerous  to  lean  for- 
ward at  all,  and  would  be  difficult,  if  not  impossible,  to  get 
back  in  time  to  render  the  horse  the  assistance  he  needs  when 
his  feet  touch  the  ground. 

The  drawing  shows  the  theoretical  position  of  the  rider,  and 


the  danger  of  the  same  is  apparent,  should  the  horse  not  go 
fair,  or  refuse  to  take  his  leap. 

The  hand  and  leg  should  at  all  times  work  together  in  guid- 
ing the  horse — the  hand  will  retain  the  head  and  neck  in  proper 
position,  while  the  leg  will  communicate  the  forward  impulse. 

It  should  also  be  remembered  that  the  strongest  part  of  the 
horse  and  the  center  of  action  is  a  little  in  rear  of  his  shoulder- 
blades  ;  hence,  riding  rather  forward  in  the  saddle  is  a  relief  to 
the  horse,  while  leaning  back  and  bearing  upon  his  loins — his 
weakest  part — cause  much  fatigue. 


1 8  Mountain  Scouting. 

In  all  critical  situations,  with  a  horse  addicted  to  bolting, 
rearing,  kicking,  etc.,  the  seat  should  be  maintained  as  in  leaps. 

If  the  horse  runs  away  do  not  devote  your  strength  to  vain 
pulling,  but  guide  him  out  of  danger  and  let  him  run  until  he 
is  tired.  For  a  bolting  horse  a  Bucephalus  nose-band  is  very 
useful. 

If  he  rears  give  him  his  head  and  lean  forward. 

If  he  kicks,  sit  firmly  in  the  saddle  and  keep  his  head  up. 

Before  mounting  any  horse,  the  rider  should  ascertain 
whether  the  saddle  and  every  article  of  equipment  are  good 
and  well  fixed. 

The  shoes  on  a  horse's  feet  have  much  to  do  with  the  com- 
fort of  both  his  rider  and  himself.  Many  horses  are  rendered 
absolutely  unserviceable  by  improper  shoeing. 

It  should  be  one  of  the  first  duties  of  those  having  the  man- 
agement of  horses  to  study  the  nature  and  structure  of  the 
horse's  foot  and  the  best  manner  of  keeping  it  shod. 


The  drawing  represents  the  ground  surface  of  the  hoof  pre- 
pared for  the  shoe  :  a,  a  i,  a  2,  show  the  front,  inner  and  outer 
toe  ;  b  i,  b  2,  show  the  inner  and  outer  quarter  ;  c  i,  c  2,  show 
the  inner  and  outer  heel ;  d,  d,  d,  show  the  sole  ;  e,  e,  show  the 
crust  or  wall  of  the  hoof  ;  f,  f,  show  the  bars  ;  g,  g,  show  the 


The  Horse.  i9 

commissures  ;  h,  k,  1,  show  the  frog  (h  being  immediately  un- 
der the  navicular  joint)  ;  i,  i,  show  the  bulbs  of  the  heels. 

If  the  following  simple  suggestions  be  followed,  the  horse 
will  carry  his  rider  over  rough  roads  and  will  not  be  in  pain 
while  traveling. 

Remove  the  old  shoes,  one  at  a  time  (withdrawing  the 
clenches),  rasp  the  edge  of  the  hoof  all  around  and  remove  any 
stubs  that  may  be  left  in  the  crust. 

Pare  out  the  foot,  without  cutting  the  sides  of  the  bars, 
shaving  the  frog,  or  opening  the  heels.  Neither  heel  nor  frog 
s  lould  be  pared  more  than  is  necessary  to  remove  what  is  ragged, 
for  no  reproduction  occurs  here  as  in  the  case  of  the  hoof. 

If  the  horse  has  a  low  heel,  the  foot  should  be  pared  at  the 
toe  only.  Under  no  circumstances  should  the  fore  part  of 
the  hoof  be  allowed  to  grow  long  ;  if  so,  it  is  sure  to  throw  the 
horse  very  much  on  his  heels,  making  them  tender  and  causing 
lameness,  and  also  to  strain  the  ligaments  of  the  fetlock  joints. 

Do  not  select  a  shoe  that  is  too  light.  A  light  shoe  is  apt  to 
bend  long  before  it  is  worn  out,  and  the  consequent  pain  is 
injurious  to  the  horse.  As  a  rule,  select  the  short  shoes  for 
the  horses  having  short  pasterns. 

The   '  seating  '  should  be  carefully  looked  after  at  all  times. 

The  nail-holes  should  be  stamped  so  as  to  pass  straigh^ 
through  the  shoe,  and  come  out  in  the  flat  of  the  web. 

In  this  way  the  nail  will  come  out  low  down  in  the  thickest 
part  of  the  hoof,  and  give  a  strong  clench  (made  out  of  the 
shank  of  the  nail),  thus  securing  a  firmer  hold  for  the  shoe, 
without  pricking  the  foot. 

The  soundness  of  the  foot  is  greatly  influenced  by  the 
number  of  nails,  and  where  they  are  placed.  To  prevent 
unsoundness,  the  nails  should  be  so  placed  as  to  allow  the 
foot  to  expand.  The  inner  quarter  and  the  heel  of  the  hoof 
expand  the  most,  and  should  be  left  free  from  nails. 

Pressure  on  the  heels  may  be  prevented  by  driving  the  nails, 
toward  the  toe,  a  little  tighter  th  an  the  heel  nails. 


2o  Mountain  Scouting. 

For  a  fore  shoe,  five  nails  are  a  sufficiency  ;  three  on  the  out- 
side and  two  on  the  inside.  For  rough  roads,four  on  the  out- 
side might  be  advisable,  but  never  more. 

A  '  clip  '  should  be  turned  UD  at  the  toe  to  keep  the  shoe 
steady  and  prevent  its  being  forced  back  ;  but  one  should 
never  appear  at  the  side  of  the  shoe,  as  it  interferes  with  the 
expansion  of  the  hoofs. 

A  new  shoe,  turned  up  at. the  toe,  feels  to  the  horse  like  an 
old  shoe  and  insures  better  traveling. 

Be  careful  to  have  the  shoe  fitted  to  the  foot,  and  not  the 
foot  to  the  shoe,  as  is  too  often  done. 

The  shoe  should  not  project  bevond  the  hoof  at  the  sides 
and  in  rear.  Many  shoes  are  lost  through  this  fault  ;  more- 
over, the  projections  will  check  the  sinking  of  the  pastern 
bone,  and  cause  the  horse  to  step  short. 

To  properly  fit  the  shoe,  it  should  be  made  hot  enough  to 
scorch  the  hoof  all  around — a  hot  shoe  does  not  injure  the 
hoof. 


The  drawing  shows  an  excellent  form  of  front  shoe  and  the 
position  of  nail-holes  ;  a,  a,  show  the  heels,  same  thickness  as 
the  rest  of  the  shoe  ;  b,  b,  show  the  points  at  which  the  heels 


Th:  House.  21 

of  hoof  terminate  ;  c,  c,  show  the  seating  ;  d,  e,  show  the  posi- 
tion of  nail-holes. 

After  nailing  on  the  shoe  the  clenches  should  not  be  trim- 
med by  rasping.  The  rasp  should  never  be  used  above  the 
clenches,  as  it  tears  off  the  outer  covering  of  the  hoof — thus 
leaving  the  horn  exposed  to  the  air,  when  it  soon  becomes  dry 
and  brittle  and  breaks  off. 

The  functions  of  the  hoof's  covering  are  the  same  as  those 
of  the  finger-nail. 

On  a  well  formed  foot,  the  horny  crust  is  about  one-half 
inch  thick  at  the  edge  and  the  angle  formed  by  the  front  of 
the  foot  and  the  horizontal  surface  should  be  fifty  degrees. 

In  consequence  of  the  weight  of  a  horse  falling  differently 
on  the  hind  feet,  certain  strains  of  the  hock  and  back  sinews 
should  be  guarded  against  by  raising  the  heels  of  the  shoe. 
The  hind-foot  expands  less  than  the  fore-foot,  and  the  inside 
quarter  and  heel  should  be  left  free  to  expand. 

The  holes  on  the  inside  should  be  closer  together  than  those 
on  the  outside,  and  should  be  placed  forward  toward  the  toe. 
Three  nails  on  each  side  is  sufficient  to  firmly  hold  the  hind 
shoe.  A  small  hind-foot  may  be  shod  with  three  nails  on  the 
outside  and  two  on  the  inside. 

The  largest  foot  should  never  have  more  than  seven  nails. 

The  shoes  should  be  removed,  placed  ii?  the  fire,  and  refitted 
or  replaced  by  new  ones  once  a  month. 

Tender-footed  horses  travel  better  when  the  sole  has  a 
leather,  gutta-percha  or  water-proof  felt  covering. 

Indian  ponies,  having  very  tough  and  elastic  hoofs,  can  make 
long  journeys  without  being  shod  ;  but  if  this  is  permitted,  the 
hoof  soon  wears  so  smooth  that  it  is  difficult  for  them  to  walk 
on  grass  or  rocks. 

Horses  that  brush  and  kick  should  be  furnished  special 
shoes. 

In  ' -ise  of  lameness,  remove  the  shoe  and  carefully  examine 
the  foot  yourself.  It  avails  nothing  to  direct  a  farrier  to  ex- 
amine a  foot  that  he  himself  has  sh<»l. 


22  Mountain  Scouting, 

In  order  that  horses  may  stand  up  well  they  should  be  sur> 
plied  with  nutritious  forage. 

Oats  contain  about  three-fourths  their  weight  of  nutritious 
matter.  When  good,  they  should  be  dry,  sweet,  heavy  and  rat- 
tle like  shot.  They  are  most  preferable  when  about  one  year 
old.  New  oats  are  difficult  to  grind  down,  and  often  occa- 
sion colic  and  staggers.  All  such,  or  those  that  are  wet 
and  musty,  should  be  kiln-dried  before  feeding.  Oats  possess 
an  invigorating  principle  not  found  in  any  other  grain.  Oat 
meal  in  the  form  of  gruel  constitutes  one  of  the  most  satisfac- 
tory articles  of  food  for  the  sick  and  tired  horse. 

Barley  contains  about  nine-tenths  its  weight  of  nutritious 
matter,  but  is  not  so  good  as  oats  as  an  article  of  food.  Horses 
fed  upon  it,  are  subject  to  mange,  surfeit,  and  inflammatory 
complaints.  Barley  straw  induces  diseases  of  the  skin. 

Hay  should  be  one  year  old,  if  procurable,  when  fed.  New 
hay  acts  as  a  purgative.  Old  hay  becomes  dry,  tasteless,  in- 
nutritive,  and  often  mow-burnt,  in  which  condition  it  becomes 
really  poisonous.  Horses  fed  on  such  soon  become  languid, 
hide-bound,  worthless,  and  often  victims  of  diabetes.  Hay 
must  not  be  fed  in  too  large  quantities.  Many  diseases  of  the 
horse  are  the  results  of  over-feeding  with  hay.  Horses  are 
prone  to  eat  more  than  they  should,  hence  it  is  necessary  to 
add  grain  containing  more  nutriment  in  a  smaller  compass. 

Wheat  contains  more  nutritious  matter  than  barley  and 
more  gluten  than  any  other  grain.  It  should  be  fed  in  small 
quantities,  or  colic  and  fomentation  will  result.  It  is  difficult 
of  digestion,  and  the  horse  fed  on  it  should  have  but  little  hay 
and  water  soon  afterwards. 

Peas  and  beans,  in  small  quantities  and  about  one  year  old. 
are  excellent  articles  of  food  for  horses.  They  should  be  weii 
crushed  before  feeding  and  generally  fed  with  hay.  If  fed 
alone,  they  might  produce  the  megrims  or  staggers. 

Carrots,  when  sliced  and  mixed  with  grain,  make  a  splendid 
provender  for  the  horse,  and  are  found  to  be  very  beneficial  in 


The  Horse.  23 

all  breathing  and  skin  disorders,  coughs  and  broken  wind. 
They  should  be  fed  in  small  quantities,  as  they  are  slightly 
laxative  and  diuretic  at  £rst. 

Potatoes  possess  great  virtue  as  an  article  of  horse  food.  If 
they  are  slightly  steamed  before  feeding,  horses  will  prefer 
them  to  oats.  If  they  are  mixed  with  other  provender,  there 
is  a  great  saving  in  expense  and  an  increased  capability  for 
work.  One  acre  of  potatoes  is  equivalent  to  four  acres  of 
hay. 

I  was  first  convinced  in  1879  that  potatoes  (even  raw)  con- 
stituted a  most  valuable  article  of  food  for  horses.  I  had 
made  along  journey,  following  the  trail  of  a  few  marauding  In- 
dians, over  very  barren  and  rocky  mountains.  After  traveling 
three  days  without  any  grass  or  substantial  food  for  the  horses, 
I  camped  on  the  south  fork  of  the  Salmon  river.  Near  my 
camp  were  the  remains  of  a  ranch  to  the  extent  of  a  small  po- 
tato patch.  The  Indians  had  murdered  the  owners  and  set  fire 
to  the  grass  and  buildings  a  few  days  before.  I  ordered  the 
herd  to  be  turned  into  the  potato  patch,  thinking  that  the 
green  potato  tops  would  be  better  than  nothing  for  them  to  eat. 
It  was  not  long  before  the  males  were  discovered  rooting  up 
the  ground,  like  so  many  hogs,  and  eagerly  devouring  the  raw 
potatoes.  The  horses  followed  suit.  The  next  day  the  march 
was  along  one  of  twenty-five  miles,  over  a  hi^h  and  exceedingly 
difficult  mountain;  but,  notwithstanding,  every  animal  went  in- 
to camp  with  a  light  and  elastic  step,  holding  his  head  high. 

If  the  horse  can  be  supplied  a  reasonably  fair  amount  of  nu- 
tritious forage,  and  his  feet  be  kept  in  proper  condition,  he  is 
not  likely  to  become  unserviceable  in  the  field. 

In  mountainous  countries  some  means  should  be  contrived 
to  prevent  horses  from  '  balling '  and  slipping  in  winter  and 
from  picking  up  stones  in  summer.  The  '  Wheeler  Anti-Snow 
Ball  Pad  and  Hoof  Protector '  is  the  best  preventive  for  these 
troubles  that  I  ever  used. 


24  Mountain  Scouting. 

The  drawings  show  the  form  of  this  pad  and   the  manner  of 


FORM   OF  PAD. 


ADJUSTED   PAD. 


adjusting  it.  It  is  made  in  sizes  to  fit  any  foot,  and  is  fitted 
without  removing  the  shoe.  It  is  made,  of  vulcanized  rubber 
into  which  a  brass  spring  with  catches  is  molded.  Neither 
straps  nor  nails  are  required.  When  properly  sprung  into  po- 
sition (the  frog  uncovered)  it  cannot  be  thrown  out  by  the 
strongest  actioned  horse. 


The  Rifle,  25 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE  RIFLE. 

WHILE  drills,  dress  parades  and  guard-mountings  make  up 
the  rudiments  of  a  soldier's  education,  the  rifle  and  rifle  prac- 
tice should  form  the  subjects  of  the  first  and  most  important 
chapter. 

I  will  not  here  go  into  the  details  of  this  interesting  study, 
but  will  confine  my  remarks  to  some  of  the  errors  and  inac- 
curacies of  fire,  susceptible  of  practical  correction,  chief  among 
which  is  that  resulting  from  the  miserable  sights  forced  upon 
the  service  rifle. 

When  firing  in  vacuo,  the  trajectory  is  easily  traced  and  its 
properties  simply  discussed.  Considering  its  position  with 
reference  to  the  line  of  sight  it  will  be  seen  that  near  the  muz- 
zle it  is  below  the  line  of  sight  for  some  distance,  then  it  cuts 
it  ;  beyond  this  point  it  rises  above  the  line  of  sight  for  some 
distance,  then  falls  and  cuts  it  again.  This  second  point  of 
intersection  is  the  point  blank  and  determines  the  point  blank 
range.  With  a  good  rifle,  up  to  175  or  even  200  yards,  the  line 
of  fire  will  not  cut  the  line  of  sight  ;  or,  in  other  words,  it  will 
not  shoot  high. 

In  my  practice  with  a  50  calibre  Remington  in  a  still  and 
light  atmosphere,  this  point  was  found  to  be  at  an  average  dis- 
tance of  183  feet  from  the  muzzle.  Now,  inasmuch  as  it  is 
necessary,  in  order  to  hit  an  object  within  or  beyond  the  point 
blank,  to  aim  below  or  above  it  certain  distances,  it  is  readily 
seen  how  indispensable  are  the  contrivances  (sights)  which  will 
so  alter  the  point  blank  as  to  make  it  coincide  with  any  object 
directly  aimed  at.  The  range  in  vacuo  equals  ^~  in  which  x 
and  y  are  the  horizontal  and  vertical  components  of  the  im- 


26  Mountain  Scouting. 

pulsive  force,  and  g  the  acceleration  due  to  the  force  of  grav- 
ity. From  this  we  see  that  (velocity  being  constant)  the  range 
will  be  the  same  when  the  angles  of  fire  are  equally  distant 
from  45°  ;  thus,  angles  of  fire  36°  and  54°  will  give  the  same 
range.  It  is  also  seen  that  the  range  will  be  a  maximum  when 
xy  is  a  maximum,  or  when  x=y,  or  when  the  angle  of  fire  is 
45°.  Also,  that  when  the  angle  of  fire  is  45°,  the  height  of  the 
culminating  point  of  the  trajectory  is  equal  to  one-fourth  the 
range  and  is  a  maximum — that  it  is  o  when  the  angle  of  fire 
is  o  or  90°.  These  simple  laws  of  motion  of  a  projectile  in 
vacuo  are  greatly  modified  when  the  movement  is  through  air. 
For  instance,  in  air  the  maximum  range  with  our  service  rifle 
is  attained  with  an-  elevation  of  about  30°  (while  it  is  45°  in 
vacuo). 

The  progressive  velocity  of  fall  of  the  bullet  being  so  much 
less  than  its  initial  velocity,  the  air  resistance  opposed  to  its 
descent  will  be  inappreciably  small  in  comparison  with  that  in 
the  direction  of  its  motion  of  translation  (the  resistances  being 
proportional  to  the  squares  of  the  velocities).  Hence,  when 
the  bullet  would  have  been  at  certain  points,  in  vacuo,  it  will 
in  reality  be  at  points  below  and  in  rear  of  them,  by  distances 
increasing  from  the  point  of  departure  (since  the  resistance  of 
air  causes  the  spaces  passed  over  in  equal  times  to  become 
progressively  smaller  and  smaller),  thus  causing  the  trajectory 
in  air  to  be  constantly  below  and  in  rear  of  its  place  in  vacuo 
and  changing  its  curvature,  so  that  the  left  branch  presents  a 
flattened  form  while  the  right  branch  approaches  the  vertical. 
From  thus  destroying  the  symmetry  of  this  curve,  there  results 
that  the  angle  of  fall  is  greater  than  the  angle  of  ascent,  and 
more  considerably  so  as  it  is  distant  f'rom  the  origin,  that  the 
point  of  culmination  is  lowered,  and  that  the  range  is  greatly 
diminished. 

In  practice  the  object  aimed  at  has  a  certain  height ;  hence, 
it  will  not  only  be  struck  when  at  point  blank,  but  also  when  at 
points  in  rear  or  in  front  of  the  point  blank  where  the  vertical 


The  Rifle. 


27 


distances  of  the  trajectory  from  such  points  shall  be  equal  to 
or  less  than  the  height  of  the  object.  This  distance  between 
these  two  points,  known  as  the  dangerous  space,  is  greater  as 
the  trajectory  is  flattened  or  as  the  height  of  the  object  is 
greater. 


The  illustration  represents  an  object,  P  P',  in  advance  of  the 
point  blank,  which  is  struck  at  P'.  If  it  were  at  point  blank, 
it  would  be  struck  at  P.  An  object  may  also  be  struck  when 
in  rear  of  the  point  blank.  The  sum  of  the  distances  in  front 
and  rear  of  the  point  blank,  at  which  the  object  could  be  struck 
at  its  bottom  and  top,  is  the  dangerous  space.  This  permits  us 
to  make  slight  errors  in  estimating  distances  ;  we  can  either 
over  or  underestimate  them  so  long  as  the  errors  do  not  exceed 
the  limits  of  the  dangerous  space.  (Fbr  dangerous  spaces  of 
the  service  rifle  and  carbine  see  Chapter  IV.) 

I  think  I  am  echoing  the  opinions  of  our  best  sportsmen 
when  I  say  that  the  Remington  rifles  are  far  in  advance  of 
others  in  the  attempt  to  increase  the  dangerous  space,  and 
hence  the  accuracy  of  the  arm. 


28  Mountain  Scouting* 

The  diagram  shows  how,  with  an  equal  Divergence  of  the 
bullets  in  both  cases,  those  having  flat  trajectories  hit  the 
target,  while  the  two  having  highly  curved  trajectories  miss 
it,  the  one  striking  above  and  the  other  below  it. 

In  hunting,  or  when  firing  at  an  enemy  over  an  unknown 
distance,  the  importance  of  a  flat  trajectory  is  evident — but  it 
is  still  important  even  where  the  distance  is  definitely  known. 

When  firing  at  long  range  a  delicate  estimation  of  distance  is 
necessary  to  obtain  accuracy  of  fire,  even  when  using  the  best 
and  most  accurately  graduated  sights.  Any  ordinary  man  can  be 
drilled  to  estimate  distances  up  to  600  yards  with  great  accuracy 
and  dispatch.  Distances  may  be  appreciated  by  the  eye  alone 
or  by  the  aid  of  instruments.  The  latter  method  is  of  no  prac- 
tical value  in  the  field  before  an  enemy,  and  should  only  be 
employed  on  the  drill  ground  as  an  aid  where  time  is  an  im- 
portant element. 

The  tige  and  stadia  are  *  worthless,  and  should  not  be  noticed. 

The  stadiometer  is  but  little  superior.  The  form  described 
by  General  Wingate  is  the  best. 

The  writer's  stadiometer,  the  principle  of  which  is  based  on 
the  proportionality  of  the  corresponding  sides  of  similar  tri- 
angles and  an  application  of  the  plummets,  does  good  work  on 
an  undulating  and  broken  drill  ground,  where  actual  chain 
measurement  would  be  impracticable  if  not  impossible.  Pro- 
longed practice  and  experience  in  the  appreciation  of  distances 
are  necessary  to  give  the  coup  axil  that  insures  sufficient  ac- 
curacy. The  practice  should  be  conducted  over  smooth, 
broken  and  undulating  ground,  and  frequently  from  elevated 
points.  The  distances  should  also  be  estimated  in  all  direc- 
tions as  regards  light  and  the  condition  of  the  atmosphere. 

The  following  are  the  important  causes  which  vary  the  direc- 
tion and  intensity  of  the  forces  acting  on  the  bullet,  and  which 
may  be  greatly  obviated  by  carefulness  and  an  understanding 
of  the  subject  : 

i.  A  frequent  cause  of  inaccuracy  of  fire  is  a  false  or  defect- 


The  Rifle.  29 

ive  barrel,  short  swells  and  long  depressions  being  often  found 
on  its  interior.  These  swells  or  ridges,  by  increasing  the  fric- 
tion, may  so  affect  the  recoil  as  to  have  an  injurious  effect  on 
the  fire,  or  so  affect  the  exterior  form  of  the  bullet  as  to  pro- 
duce an  irregularity  in  its  motion.  The  depressions  or  swells 
change  the  interior  lines  of  the  piece  and  give  the  bullet  a  false 
direction. 

2.  Another  cause  of  inaccuracy  of  fire  is  the  vibration  of  the 
barrel  when  firing,  caused  by  the  want  of   a  homogeneous  dis- 
tribution of  metal  about  its   axis,  and   often  to  binding  bands. 
These  vibrations  tend  to  alter  the  direction  of  the  bullet  as   it 
leaves  the  muzzle. 

3.  Recoil  causes  the  man  to  turn  to  the  side  from  which  he 
fires,  and  produces  deviation  in  that  direction.     It  is  supported 
by  pressing  the  butt  firmly  against  the  shoulder  with    the  right 
hand,  the  left  hand  supporting  the  weight  of  the  rifle,  and  varies 
with  the  position  of  the  rifle  relative  to  the  horizontal,  being  a 
maximum  when  the  shot  is  fired  vertically  upward.     The  shock 
of  the  recoil  against  the  shoulder  is  diminished  by  the  bend  in 
the  stock,  serving  to  decompose  the  force  into  two  components, 
one  acting  through  the  stock  against  the  shoulder,  the  other  in. 
the  direction  of  the    axis  of    the  barrel,    tending  to  raise    it. 
Whatever  lessens  the  recoil  theoretically    increases   the   range 
The  recoil  is  only  95  Ibs.  for  the    Remington    rifle    (70    grains 
powder  and  bullet  of  450  grains),  while    in   our   service    rifle, 
caliber  .45,  it  is  174  Ibs. 

4.  When  the  bullet  reaches  the  muzzle   of  the    rifle,  it    will 
revolve  about  its  axis  nearly  800  times  in  a  second,  and  a  point 
on  its  exterior  side  surface  will  have  an  axial  velocity  of  about 
ninety  feet  per  second.     This  in  connection  with  the  resistance 
of  the  air  produces  a  lateral  drifting  of  the  bullet  in  the  direc- 
tion in  which  the    grooves    have  a  turn.       This    is    known    as 
drift,  and  is  greater  in  the   descending  than   in   the   ascending 
branch  of  the  trajectory.      It  increases  as  the  diameter   of    the 
bullet,  the  angle  of  fire,  the  velocity  of  rotation   and  the  range 


30  Mountain  Scouting. 

increase,  and  as  the  velocity  of  translation  decreases.  The 
drift  in  our  service  rifle  (caliber  .45,  seventy  grains  powder)  at 
500  yards  is  two  feet. 

5.  The  pull  of  the  trigger    should  not  be  too  great,  a  three- 
pound  pull  being  the  minimum.      It   should   be  pressed  by  a 
steadily  increasing  pressure  of  the.  finger  in  the  direction  of  the 
axis  of  the  barrel,  without  communicating  motion  to    the   rifle, 
the  breath  being  held  until  the  hammer  falls.     If  the  trigger  is 
too  hard  and  is  pulled  convulsively,  the  muzzle  will  be  turned 
to  the  right.     There  should  be  a  quick    and  decided  connec- 
tion   between  the  mind  and    finger.       Few   men    can    pull  off 
the  trigger  of  our  average  service  rifle  with  the    first  joint  of  a 
single  finger.      I  have  frequently  supported    the  whole   weight 
of  the  rifle,  at  full  cock,  on  the  trigger,  without    pulling  it   off, 
and  I  consider  this  a  very  serious  defect.     Every  man   should 
invariably  fire  his  own  and  the  same  gun,  in    order  to  become 
acquainted  with  its  defects  of  construction,  and    learn  how  to 
make  allowances  for  consequent  deviations  from  the  theoretical 
trajectory. 

6.  The  principal  cause  of  the  inaccuracy  of  fire  of  our    ser- 
vice rifle  is  that  it  is  sighted  too    coarsely.     Without    apparent 
movement,  this  rifle  may  be   sighted    on    any  object  within    a 
horizontal  radius  of  many  feet.     It  seems  that  very  little  atten- 
tion has  been  paid  to  this  most    important  part    of  the    rifle's 
construction.     If  our  rifle  is  to  be  furnished    with   the    rough, 

and  too  frequently  misplaced,  plain  bead  fore- 
sight and  open  rear-sight,  we  certainly  have  no 
right  to  look  for  good  shots  in  the  Army.  I 
think  it  would  be  well  to  follow  the  Remington  system  in  this 
matter. 

Replace  the  present  bead  sight  by  the  '  Beach  Combination 
Sight,'  which  is  such  that  it  forms  either  an 
open  bead  or  a  globe  sight  with  cover,  ac- 
cording as  the  leaf  is  turned  up  or  down, 
thus  adapting  it  either  to  hunting  or  target 
use  (and  if  I  mistake  not  our  frontier  field 


The  Rifle.  31 

service  is  more  on  the  order  of  hunting  than  range  practice). 
The  globe  of  this  sight  is  so  constructed  as  to  permit  the 
use  of  all  descriptions  of  sights,  detachable  pieces  of  the 
various  forms  in  use  being  slipped  into  a  slot  in  the  globe 
and  held  by  a  screw 


The  four  sights  represented  seem  to  be  favorites  with  the 
best  long-range  shots. 

A  spirit-level  and  wind  gauge  adjustment  may  be  attached  to 
this  sight,  and  insure  any  degree  of  nicety. 

Then  replace  the  open  rear-sight  by  such  a  sight  as  is  found 
on  the  Remington-Creedmore  rifle  and  represented  on  the  fol- 
lowing page — one  provided  with  a  vernier  scale  operated  by 
a  screw' that  will  accurately  mark  an  alteration  of  less  than 
tSie  one-hundredth  of  an  inch  in  the  elevation,  each  minute  of 
elevation  on  the  scale  corresponding  to  about  one  inch  for 
each  100  yards  of  range, — and  we  will  have  a  system  of  sights 
in  keeping  with  our  rifle  and  the  efficiency  of  the  arm  will  be 
assured.  There  is  nothing  objectionable  in  such  sights,  and 
their  adjustment  is  extremely  simple.  To  adjust  the  rear 
sight,  the  eye-piece  is  first  loosened,  then  after  the  sight  is 
properly  set  by  means  of  the  screw,  the  eye-piece  is  tightened 
and  holds  the  slide  firmly,  irrespective  of  the  screw,  which 
is  intended  only  for  convenience  in  adjusting  the  eye-piece. 

We  have  an  excellent  rifle,  handy  in  itself  and  a  hard  shoot- 
er, but  its  sights  have  annoyed  every  officer  who  has  had  oc- 
casion to  use  it. 

Before  proceeding  I  will  call  attention  to  a  rear  sight  made 
by  William  Lyman,  of  Middleford,  Conn.,  which  is  most  ex- 
cellent. I  can  do  better  shooting  with  it  than  with  any  other, 
when  the  target  is  a  moving  object. 

When  aiming,  it  has  the  appearance  of  a  ring  or  hoop,  which 
shows  the  front  sight  and  the  object  aimed  at,  without  inter- 


J/.VY/  h  lain  Scouting « 


The  Rifle. 


33 


cepting  any  part  of  the  view.  Its  rim  may  be  instantly  changed 
to  give  it  a  large  aperture  with  a  narrow  rim,  or  a  small  aperture 
with  a  wider  rim.  For  all  quick  shooting  the  large  aperture 
should  be  used.  It  possesses  the  following  advantages  :  it  allows 
an  instantaneous  aim  to  be  taken — the  object  being  sighted  as 
quickly  as  if  only  the  front  sight  were  used  ;  it  readily  permits 
one  to  shoot  moving  objects,  running  or  flying,  with  both  the 
eyes  in  use  ;  it  is  also  very  accurate,  simple  and  strong.  Any 
kind  of  front  sight  may  be  used  with  it,  and  it  may  be  put  on  any 
rifle  in  the  same  way  that  a  peep  sight  is  attached  and  adjusted 
for  shooting  any  distance  up  to  1,000  yards. 


The  engraving  shows  the  manner  of  its  construction. 


34  Mountain  Scouting. 

7.  It  will  be  readily  seen    that  a   defective  position   of   the 
line  of  sight  will  cause  an  inaccuracy  of  fire,  and    this   may    be 
occasioned  by  a  false  position  being  given  to   either   the  front 
or  rear  sight.      If  the  front  sight  be  to  the  right  of   its  proper 
place,  the  bullet  will  go  to  the  left  and  vice  versa.     The  bullet 
will  also  be  raised  (range  increased),  since  the  top  of  the  sight  is 
lower  than  it  is  when  in  its  proper  position.     If  the  rear    sight 
be  to  the  right  or  left  of  its  true  place,  the  bullet  will  go  to  the 
right   or  left,  and  will  be   lowered    (range    diminished),    since 
the  top  of  the  sight  will  be  lower  than  when    in   its    true  posi- 
tion. 

8.  A  very  frequent  cause  of  inaccuracy  of  fire  is   the    incor- 
rect graduation  of  the  rear  sight.     Of  course,  if  the    elevations 
corresponding  to    certain    ranges  are   not    accurately    marked, 
the  fire  will  be  wild.     In   determining  the  graduation  .for  any 
particular  rifle,  avoid  all  proportions  and  make  a  series  of  ex- 
periments with  the  greatest  care.     With  a  properly    made  arm 
and  cartridge,  and    the    elevating    sight    accurately  graduated, 
any  one  can,  by   care   and    practice,    become    a    good    marks- 
man. 

9.  A  serious  cause  of  inaccuracy,  originating  with  the    firer, 
is  the  faulty  position  that  he  gives  to  the    musket   in    firing,  by 
inclining  to  the  right  or  left,  which  tends  to  carry  the  bullet  to 
the  side  to  which   the    rifle  is    inclined,    and    to  diminish  the 
range.     When  firing  at  long  ranges  a  trifling  inclination  to  the 
right  or  left    will  throw    the  bullet  very  wide  of  the  target. 

10.  To  prevent  inaccuracies  while  aiming,  in  addition  to  keep- 
ing the  sight  vertical,  the  firer  should  observe  the  following  : 

The  eye  should  glance  from  the  sights  to  the  target,  being 
constantly  on  the  target. 

If  the  particular  rifle  carries  higher  or  lower  than  the  aver- 
age, it  must  be  remedied  by  aiming  with  a  fine  or  a  coarse 
sight.  In  aiming  raise  the  rifle.  Upward  motion  acts  against 
gravity,  and  has  a  tendency  to  prevent  any  lateral  motion  of 
•;he  muzzle. 


The  Kiflc.  35 

Held  the  butt  firmly  against  the  shoulder,  and  do  not  turn 
the  head  away  at  the  instant  of  pulling  the  trigger.  Fire  low 
rather  than  too  high. 

u.  After  firing  a  few  shots  on  a  dry,  hot  day,  the  /bullets 
gradually  fall  lower  and  lower,  in  consequence  of  the  fouling 
of  the  barrel.  The  barrel  should  be  kept  clean  and,  as  far  as 
possible,  not  over-heated. 

12.  The    condition    of    the  atmosphere    noticeably    affects 
the  course  of  the  bullet.     The  more  moisture   there    is  in   the 
air,  the  less  the  elevation  required.     The    bullet   is    frequently 
noticed    to  fall  immediately  after  a  rain.     Warm  air  offers  less 
resistance  to  the  bullet   than  does  cold  air.     A  fall    of    20°  in 
temperature    will    cause     the    bullet    to  lower   ten   or    eleven 
inches  at  300  yards  range.     In  firing  over  water   the  elevation 
must  be. increased,  in  consequence  of  the  lower  temperature  of 
the  air  over  the  water.      In  ascending  the  mountain  the  air  be- 
comes more  and  more  rare,  and  consequently  the  resistance  to 
the  bullet  is  less  on  the  mountain  than  at  its  base.     Mirage,  an 
optical  illusion  occurring  in  level  districts  on  very  warm    days, 
causes  the  target  to  apparently  raise   in  the    air    and    become 
distorted  in  shape.     This  materially  affects  such  objects  as  are 
near    the    ground,    and  engenders    a    tendency  to    shoot    too 
high. 

13.  The    influence    of     light    and   shade    on    the    firing  is 
very  remarkable.      On  a  bright  day  the  target  is  refracted  so  as 
to  apparently  stand  higher,  which  would    theoretically    require 
a  lower  elevation  than  on    a  very    dull    day.     When    the  light 
shines  directly  on  the  target,  when  the  target  is  against  a   light 
background  (so  that  the  details  are  better  brought   out),  when 
the  sun  shines  on  the  firer's  back,  when  the  atmosphere  is  clear, 
when  the  ground  is  level  and  uniform  in  appearance  or  when  it 
gradually  rises  toward  the  target,  the  same  will    appear    much 
nearer,  and  will  theoretically  require  a  higher  elevation.     The 
best  shooting  is    invariably  done    on   cloudy   days    when    the 
sun's  light  is  evenly  diffused.     It  is  very  difficult  to    shoot  well 


36  Mountain  Scouting. 

when  passing  clouds  intercept  portions  of  the  sun's  light  and 
heat.  It  is  readily  seen  how  this  disturbance  might  set  up  cur- 
rents in  the  air  which  would  tend  to  carry  the  bullet  from  its 
course,  and  how  the  rays  of  light  deflected  from  their  course 
before  reaching  the  eye  would  cause  the  target  to  apparently 
occupy  a  false  position.  It  will  be  well  to  diminish  the  ele- 
vation should  the  sun  suddenly  appear  and  light  up  the  target 
while  the  firer  still  remains  in  the  shade,  and  to  increase  it 
should  the  target  remain  in  the  shade  while  the  sun  shines  on 
the  firer. 

14.  Bright  sights  and  barrels    are    obviously    objectionable. 
The  reflection  of  the  sun's  light  on  the  sights    causes    them   to 
appear  as  brilliant  points  and  precludes    the   possibility    of   an 
accurate  aim.     If  the  sun's  rays  come  laterally  the  trouble  will 
be  yet  greater,  inasmuch  as  they  will  brighten  the  rear   side  of 
the  front  sight  and  the  opposite  side  of    the    rear    sight    notch 
and  cause  a  tendency  to  shoot  away  from  the  sun. 

The  refraction  of  the  sun's  rays  from  the  polished  barrel 
causes  the  target  to  become  indistinct  and  to  assume  the 
appearance  of  motion.  The  sights  and  barrel  about  the  muzzle 
should  be  blackened  with  smoke  if  nothing  better  is  at  hand. 

15.  The  effect  of  the  wind  upon  the  trajectory  and  the  allow- 
ance to  be  made  therefor  are  most  troublesome    questions   for 
the  marksman.     Winds  are  generally  classified  as  follows  : 

Gentle,  4  n  iles  per  hour. 

Moderate,  10  miles  per  hour. 

Fresh,  20  miles  per  hour. 

Strong,  35  miles  per  hour. 

Very  high,  50  miles  per  hour. 

Gale,  80  miles  per  hour. 

Inasmuch  as  the  wind  is  continually  changing  in  intensity 
and  direction,  it  is  almost  impossible  to  make  tables  of  allow- 
ances for  it.  The  best  skill  and  judgment  of  the  marksman 
are  brought  into  play  when  firing  in  mountain  districts,  where 
there  are  many  cross-currents  with  which  to  contend.  All 


The  Rifle.  37 

winds,  except  toward  the  target,  retard  the  bullet  and  render 
a  higher  elevation  necessary.  A  wind  from  the  rear  helps  the 
bullet  and  tends  to  high  shooting.  Experience  has  shown  it 
necessary  to  alter  the  wind  gauge  twelve  or  more  feet  between 
two  consecutive  shots  over  a  range  of  1,000  yards,  in  order  to 
make  a  bull's  eye  each  time,  when  the  wind  was  too  high  or 
variable.  The  inclination  is  generally  to  under-estimate  for 
wind  allowance,  nearly  every  one  disliking  to  aim  far  away 
from  the  target.  I  believe  that  any  one  with  a  good  mind  and 
clear  sight,  possessing  nerve,  coolness  and  a  quick  connection 
between  will  and  finger,  can  by  practice  and  endeavors  to  cor- 
rect the  inaccuracies  pointed  out  in  this  chapter,  do  good 
shooting. 

The  enlisted  men  in  our  service  are  anxious  to  learn  how  to 
shoot  well,  and  in  the  majority  of  cases  are  very  apt  scholars. 
It  is  only  necessary  that  the  officers  teach  them  the  practical 
correction  of  the  errors,  which  they  are  to  investigate  theoreti- 
cally. 

In  Busk's  '  Hand-book  for  Hythe '  it  is  stated  that  "  one 
hour  a  day  of  private  practice  in  aiming  drill  will,  in  a  few 
weeks,  make  a  man  a  first-class  shot."  I  believe  this,  for  the 
position  and  the  aiming  drills  constitute  the  very  foundation 
of  any  system  of  practice.  It  is  an  absurd  mistake  in  our  ser- 
vice to  have  recruits  fire  off-hand  at  a  target  one  hundred  yards 
distant,  when  they  scarcely  know  the  difference  between  a 
rifle  and  a  shotgun,  and  cannot  hit  a  barn-door  thirty  paces 
distant  with  either. 

H.  M.  Quackenbush,  of  Herkimer,  N.  Y.,  manufactures  an 
air  rifle,  which,  in  my  opinion,  is  excellent  for  practice.  I  am 
confident  if  it  was  adopted  at  the  various  posts  as  a  means  of 
practice  in  short  range  shooting,  it  would  be  of  great  benefit  to 
the  soldier. 

The  drawing  illustrates  its  principle  and  shows  the  gun 
loaded,  ready  to  shoot.  Pulling  the  trigger  releases  the  piston 
,  which  is  then  thrown  forward  by  the  spring,  expelling  the 


Mountain  Scouting. 


air  from  the  chamber  (C)  through  the  barrel  (E)  with  great 
force,  carrying  the  dart  or  slug  before  it.  To  load,  the  barrel 
(E)  is  pushed  into  the  chamber  (C)  which  re-sets  the  piston 


and  compresses  the  spring,  as  above  shown.  The  barrel 
is  then  withdrawn  until  the  opening  (/)  in  it  corresponds 
with  the  opening  in  the  head  at  (O)  so  that  the  dart  or  slug  may 


The  Rifle.  39 

be  inserted,  after  which  the  barrel  is  to  be  drawn  out  as  far  as 
possible,  as  shown.  The  barrel  is  easily  pushed  into  the 
chamber,  by  placing  the  muzzle  upon  the  floor  or  against  some 
firm  object,  as  shown  in  the  drawing. 

Having  learned  by  practice  the  capabilities  of  the  rifle,  care 
must  be  exercised  in  its  preservation.  Mercurial  ointment  or 
belmontyle  oil  is  an  excellent  preventive  of  rusting  of  the 
barrels  and  gun  furniture — sweet  oil  frequently  ' gums'  and  is 
not  so  good.  Spirits  of  turpentine  is  good  for  cleaning  the 
interior. 

A  good  vegetable  oil  for  the  locks  and  small  parts  may  be 
obtained  by  pouring  a  handful  of  shot  or  a  few  bullets  into  a 
bottle  of  oil,  and  allowing  it  to  remain  in  the  air  uncorked  for 
several  days,  when  the  clear  oil  on  top  is  drawn  off  for  use. 

The  stock  is  frequently  broken,  in  the  field,  and  it  is  often 
difficult  for  either  a  smith  or  a  carpenter  to  mend  it.  This  is 
best  accomplished  by  rawhide  lashings.  I  have  seen  stocks, 
broken  into  splinters  when  struck  by  bullets,  mended  and 
made  as  strong  as  ever  by  rawhide  sewn  around  them  and  left  to 
dry.  Tendons  and  stout  fish  skins  may  be  used  for  like  pur- 
poses. Often,  instead  of  sewing,  the  skin  of  an  animal's  leg 
may  be  drawn  over  the  stock  and  left  to  dry  and  contract. 
•  When  the  soldier,  in  haste  or  in  the  dark,  snatches  up  his 
rifle  without  his  cartridge  belt,  he  is  often  annoyed  by  its 
becoming  useless  after  the  first  discharge.  This  might  be 
obviated  by  making  fast  to  the  rifle  a  small  sack  carrying  a 
few  cartridges,  or  by  letting  a  spring  locker  into  the  butt  of 
the  stock  for  the  same  purpose.  In  the  absence  of  both  of 
these  precautions  the  soldier  should  at  all  times  carry  a  few 
loose  cartridges  in  his  pocket. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  fire  at  night,  when  the  sights  cannot 
be  distinctly  seen,  a  dampened  lucifer  match  should  be  rubbed 
on  the  top  of  the  front  sight  and  on  the  bottom  of  the  notch 
of  the  rear  sight. 


40  Mountain  Scouting. 

In  case  the  rear  sight  is  replaced  by  one  with  a  more  ac- 
curate graduation,  care  should  be  taken  not  to  place  it  too 
near  the  eye,  else  it  might  become  out  of  focus  and  indistinct 
when  the  eye  is  directed  at  the  object  aimed  at. 

It  is  a  good  rule  to  carry  the  rifle  at  half-cock,  and  never 
allow  it  to  point  at  any  one,  whether  loaded  or  not.* 

*  Those  desiring  a  more  thorough  knowledge,  of  this  subject  are 
referred  to  the  excellent  work  of  General  George  W.  Wingate. 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints.  41 


CHAPTER    III. 

MEDICAL    AND    SURGICAL    HINTS. 

Peculiar  and  local  diseases  prevail  in  nearly  every  section 
of  country ;  and  wounds  from  gun-shot  and  weapons, 
bruised  and  broken  bones,  are  casualties  that  may  befall 
men  in  the  field  at  any  time.  It  is,  therefore,  important  for 
those  in  command  to  have,  in  all  cases  of  emergency,  a  suf- 
ficient knowledge  of  medicine  and  practical  surgery  to  en- 
able them  to  relieve  the  sick  and  wounded  (both  men  and 
horses)  until  professional  aid  can  be  secured. 

Before  taking  the  field,  for  a  long  or  indefinite  period,  if 
the  transportation  will  permit,  see  that  you  have  compactly 
stored,  in  good  shape  for  packing,  the  following  articles  : 
a  case  of  pocket  surgical  instruments,  consisting  of,  at  least, 
a  lancet,  scalpel,  small  knife,  forceps  and  scissors  ;  a  few 
rolls  of  sticking  and  adhesive  plaster  ;  some  silk,  needles 
and  waxed  thread  ;  an  assortment  of  bandages,  splints, 
sponges  and  some  red  flannel  ;  some  lint,  oil- silk  and  tow  ; 
a  flask  of  wine  or  brandy  ;  a  hypodermic  injection  syringe  ; 
a  tourniquet  and  small  cup  ;  blue  mass,  quinine,  opium 
and  cathartic,  put  up  in  usual  doses  ;  a  little  chloroform, 
laudanum,  hartshorn,  camphor,  solution  of  morphia,  iodine, 
tincture  of  chloride  of  iron,  chloride  of  lime,  tincture  of 
myrrh  and  aloes,  tincture  of  arnica  (excellent  for  strains 
and  contusions),  spirits  of  nitre,  ammonia  and  turpentine  ; 
sulphates  of  iron,  zinc  and  copper  ;  pulverized  indigo,  car- 
ron  oil,  saltpetre,  tartar  emetic,  nitrate  of  potash,  prepared 
chalk,  tincture  of  opium  and  catechu,  cantharides  (in  pow- 
der), sugar  of  lead,  acetic  acid  and  powdered  mustard  ; 
emetics  and  aperients  (mild  and  powerful)  ;  nitrate  of  silver 


42  Mountain    Scouting. 

in  a  holder  ;  cold  cream  or  glycerine  (cooling  for  irritated 
surfaces)  ;  a  cordial  for  diarrhoea,  a  sudorific  (Dover's 
powders  excellent),  and  some  simple  cerate  or  a  mixture  of 
wax  and  lard  ;  some  alum,  Jamaica  ginger,  castor  oil,  lin- 
seed oil  and  meal,  flaxseed,  and  an  assortment  of  cathartic, 
diuretic,  sedative,  febrifuge  and  alterative  'balls';  also 
some  astringent  ointment  (one  part  acetate  of  lead  and 
three  parts  of  lard),  hoof  ointment  (equal  parts  of  tar  and 
lard)  and  strong  liniment. 

I  would  urge  that  each  soldier,  on  going  into  the  field, 
carry  on  his  person,  in  a  waterproof  pocket  or  envelope,  a 
bandage  and  piece  of  lint — such  a  precaution  will  often  avoid 
much  suffering. 

If  easily  procured,  any  of  the  following  excellent  dress- 
ings and  disinfectants  against  decomposition  of  wound 
discharge  swill  be  found  very  useful  ; — carbolic  acid  (in 
weak  solution),  permanganate  of  potash  (applied  with 
glass  syringe),  chloride  of  zinc  (in  weak  solution),  chloride 
of  lime  (as  a  lotion),  and  charcoal  (powdered  and  sprinkled 
on  the  poultice). 

The  fracture  or  dislocation  of  a  limb  is  the  most  frequent 
of  all  accidents  attending  a  mountain  journey.  A  mis-step 
of  the  traveler  or  a  fall  of  the  horse  often  results  in  this 
mishap. 

For  the  benefit  of  those  who  are  not  informed  as  to  the 
shapes  and  locations  of  the  most  exposed  bones  of  the  body, 
I  will  produce  on  the  opposite  page  an  accurate  illustration 
of  those  in  the  upper  and  lower  extremities. 

Referring  to  the  arm  is  seen  H,  the  shoulder  blade  ;  N, 
the  clavicle  ;  O,  the  humerus  ;  Q,  the  ulna  ;  P,  the  radius; 
R,  the  carpus  ;  S,  the  meta-carpus  ;  T,  the  phalanges. 

Referring  to  the  leg  is  seen  C,  the  femur  ;  E,  the  fibula  ; 
D,  the  tibia  ;  F,  the  heel-bone  ;  G,  the  tarsus  ;  H,  the 
meta-tarsus  ;  I,  the  phalanges. 

By  carefully  observing  the   shapes  and  positions  of  these 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints. 


4-i 


44 


Mountain    Scouting. 


bones,  any  one  might  reset  the  parts,  place  the  splints  and 
greatly  alleviate  the  suffering  in  the  absence  of  the  surgeon. 

When  fractures  occur  and  there  are  no  splints  at  hand, 
they  must  be  improvised  from  such  materials  as  may  be 
found.  If  the  thigh  be  fractured,  a  rifle  may  be  used  for  a 
splint,  placing  its  butt  in  the  axilla,  and  allowing  it  to  pr.ss 
along  the  outside  of  the  limb,  being  secured  by  bandages 
around  the  trunk  and  ankle. 

A  fractured  leg  may  be  secured  with  a  splint  of  any  de- 
scription placed  along  its  outside  and  the  whole  then 
wrapped  in  a  coat  or  blanket  and  made  fast  by  straps. 


It  is  a  splendid  plan  to  tie  the  fractured  leg  at  the  ankles, 
and  convenient  points,  to  the  uninjured  leg,  and  rest  it  on  a 
knapsack  or  piece  of  board.  Coats,  blankets  or  some  soft 
material  should  be  placed  underneath  the  leg.  In  this 
manner  the  two  legs  will  move  as  one  and  the  broken  bone 
will  not  injure  the  flesh. 


A  fractured  leg  may  be  'put  up'  with  a  gun  stock  or 
sword  scabbard — even  a  roll  of  straw  or  grass  makes  a  good 
temporary  splint. 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints.  45 

A  fracture  of  the  arm  may  be  '  put  up  '  with  a  bayonet 
scabbard  or  with  thin  bundles  of  straw  or  grass.  Light 
pieces  of  board,  bark  or  even  the  soles  of  shoes  or  boots 
are  often  useful  for  splints.  The  fore-arm  should  be  care- 
fully supported  in  a  sling.  Often  a  severe  shock  or  collapse 
from  pain  or  nervous  fear  follows  the  fracture,  in  which 
case  a  stimulant  (whisky  and  water)  should  be  adminis- 
tered. 

Dislocated  and  broken  ribs  are  often  the  results  of  falls 
and  other  accidents.  The  following  illustration  shows  the 


normal  position  of  the  ribs  and  adjacent  bones — a  is  the 
breast-bone  ;  c.  c.  c.  the  ribs,  which  are  fastened  at  one  end 
to  the  spine  b.  £.,  and  at  the  other  end  are  attached  to  the 
breast-bone  by  means  of  strips  of  cartilage,  d.  d.  d ;  e  is  the 
collar  bone.  There  are  twelve  (12)  ribs  on  each  side,  all  of 
different  lengths — the  shortest  are  at  the  top  and  have  the 
smallest  curves  ;  descending  they  increase  in  length  to  the 
seventh,  which  is  the  longest,  then  decrease.  The  last  two 


46  Mountain   Scouting 

have  no  cartilages,  are  very   short,  and  are  attached  to  the 
spine  only. 

The  following  drawing  shows  the  formation  of  the  pelvis, 
and  the  sacrum,  which  supports  the  spine. 


It  is  frequently  injured  by  gun-shots,  and  it  might  be  well 
to  bear  in. mind  its  form  and  position. 

To  know  how  to  arrest  bleeding  is  all-important,  as  life 
may  often  be  saved  by  promptly  adopting  simple  means. 

Bleeding  may  be  from  veins  or  from  arteries.  In  the  first 
case  the  blood  is  of  a  dark  color,  and  flows  slowly  in  a 
stream  towards  the  heart  ;  in  the  second  case  it  is  of  a 
bright  red  color,  forcibly  issues  in  jets,  and  is  in.  a  direction 
from  the  heart. 

In  ordinary  venous  hemorrhage,  such  as  the  bursting  of 
a  varicose  vein,  the  bleeding  may  be  stopped  by  pressure  or 
elevation  of  the  limb.  Should  there  be  any  difficulty  in 
checking  it,  ligatures  should  be  applied. 

When  the  bleeding  is  arterial  the  limb  should  be  firmly 
grasped  by  both  hands  above  the  wound,  so  as  to  cut  off 
the  current  from  the  heart  by  firmly  compressing  the 
wounded  vessel  against  the  bone,  until  a  tourniquet  may  be 
applied. 

A  temporary  tourniquet  may  be  adjusted  by  placing  a  flat 
or  roundish  stone  over  the  course  of  the  artery  and  above 
the  wound,  between  it  and  the  center  of  circulation,  holding 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints.  4y 

it  in  situ  by  means  of  a  band,  handkerchief,  string  or  thong, 
the  ends  of  which  are  securely  tied.  A  stick  or  bayonet  is 
then  passed  through  the  band  or  thong  and  twisted  round 
and  round  several  times,  until  the  band  is  so  tightened  as  to 
press  the  stone  forcibly  on  the  artery,  which,  being  com- 
pressed against  the  main  bone  of  the  limb,  will  cut  off  the 
passage  of  blood  through  the  vessel.  If  the  bleeding  be 
from  the  hand,  fore-arm  or  arm,  apply  the  tourniquet  or 
bandage  near  the  shoulder.  If  from  the  foot,  leg  or  thigh, 
apply  it  between  the  knee  and  hip. 

As  a  rule  the  main  arteries  are  so  placed  that  they  are 
not  likely  to  be  reached  and  injured  ;  they  are  deep  in  the 
flesh,  and  follow  the  courses  of  the  inner  seams  of  the  coat 
sleeves  and  pants.  Thus  the  main  artery  of  the  arm  runs 
from  the  axilla  down  the  inner  side  of  the  arm,  at  the  lower 
edge  of  the  biceps  muscle,  to  the  end  of  the  elbow  ;  that  of 
the  thigh  runs  from  midway  the  groin,  down  the  inner  side 
of  the  thigh,  under  the  deeper  muscles  to  the  back  of  the 
thigh  near  the  ham. 

Ice,  if  convenient,  may  be  applied  to  wounds  of  small 
vessels,  with  good  results,  causing  a  rapid  congelation 
of  the  blood.  Hot  water  will  accomplish  the  same,  and  is 
far  preferable  if  the  patient  be  feeble.  When  the  patient 
becomes  faint  and  insensible  from  loss  of  blood,  he  should 
be  placed  flat  on  his  back,  with  his  head  low.  Cautery  may 
be  resorted  to  when  the  tourniquet  fails  to  do  its  work. 

The  accompanying  drawing  will  serve  to  show  the  at- 


tachment of  the  muscles  a  b  to  the  bone,  the  functions  of 
ligaments  and  the  manner  in  which  the  arteries  are  covered 
and  protected  by  the  muscles. 


48  Mountain  Scouting. 

In  resetting  a  strong  and  muscular  limb  it  is  often  neces- 
sary to  keep  up  a  great  strain  on  the  muscles  in  order  to 
weary  them  and  cause  them  to  relax,  when  the  bone  may  be 
set  with  less  difficulty. 

Besides  the  wounds  caused  by  gun-shots,  a  person  in  the 
field  is  liable  to  a  great  variety  of  others,  which  might  be 
classified  according  to  the  nature  of  the  article  or  weapon 
with  which  they  are  inflicted,  as  incised,  punctured,  lacer- 
ated and  contused. 

Incised  wounds,  such  as  are  made  by  a  sword  or  knife, 
should  be  carefully  cleansed,  all  extraneous  substances  re- 
moved, the  edges  brought  together,  adhesive  plaster  applied, 
and  the  muscles  near  by  relaxed. 

Punctured  wounds,  such  as  are  made  by  bayonets,  pointed 
rocks,  etc.,  very  often  excite  inflammation  in  their  vicinity, 
cause  formation  of  matter  under  the  fascia  and  frequently 
result  in  hemorrhage.  The  wounded  part  should  be  kept 
at  rest,  all  sub-cutaneous  oozing  of  the  blood  prevented,  and 
an  exit  made  for  the  discharge.  If  suppuration  sets  in, 
an  incision  should  be  made  at  once  in  order  to  let  out  the 
pus.  Probing  in  search  of  extraneous  matter  is  very  hurtful. 

Lacerated  wounds,  such  as  are  inflicted  by  blunt  and 
obtuse  bodies,  are  invariably  attended  with  severe  pain,  are 
slow  in  healing,  and  are  very  liable  to  gangrene.  They 
should  be  thoroughly  cleansed,  all  foreign  bodies  removed 
and  the  flaps  of  torn  skin  replaced  as  far  as  possible.  A 
good  poultice  and  disinfectant  should  be  applied  to  the 
wound. 

Contused  wounds,  such  as  are  produced  by  any  blows  with- 
out breaking  the  skin,  should  be  attended  to  without  delay, 
the  parts  restored  to  the  normal  state  by  a  few  days  of  rest, 
and  some  stimulating  liniment  applied. 

For  a  contusion  of  the  head,  apply  cold  water,  administer 
cathartics,  make  the  diet  light,  take  no  stimulants  and  re- 
main quiet. 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints.  49 

For  scalp  wounds,  cleanse  the  exposed  surfaces  and  re- 
place the  torn  scalp — the  parts  will  generally  heal  ;  if 
abcesses  form  they  should  be  evacuated  by  timely  incisions. 

In  the  treatment  of  wounds  the  diet  should  be  carefully 
atten  led  to.  In  cases  like  a  wounded  lung  it  is  necessary 
to  reduce  the  patient  to  nearly  a  state  of  starvation. 

The  most  excruciating  pains  from  shots  are  readily  re- 
lieved by  the  hypodermic  injection  of  a  solution  of  morphia. 
Ice,  if  procurable,  will  subdue  inflammatory  symptoms. 
No  description  of  spirits  should  be  poured  upon  a  bleeding 
wound,  as  it  only  serves  to  irritate  and  influence  it. 

A  wounded  man  is  always  thirsty  ;  give  him  cold  water, 
but  never  spirits. 

The  following  remedies  may  often  be  used  to  great 
advantage : 

-Scurvy  may  be   prevented  by  using  the  following    anti- 
scorbutics : 

1.  Fresh  vegetables,  wild  onions,  fresh  fruit,  and  even  un- 
ripe fruit,  with  a  risk  of  diarrhoea. 

2.  Dried    or  canned   vegetables,  especially  potatoes  and 
cauliflower. 

3.  Vinegar,  citric  acid  or  lemon  juice. 

4.  Citrates,  malates,  tartrates  and  lactates  of  potash,  used 
in  food  or  drink. 

5.  Pure  air,  exercise  and  cleanliness. 

6.  Tincture  of  chloride  of  iron,  taken  daily,  or  infusion 
of  hemlock  leaves. 

7.  Raw  potatoes  and  fresh  raw  meat. 

Malaria  should  be  promptly  checked.  Quinine  in  suffici- 
ent doses  is  the  remedy.  A  halt  to  the  leeward  of  a  marsh 
or  swamp  should  be  avoided.  A  camp  on  low  ground  is 
often  less  affected  by  malaria  than  the  low  hills  that  over- 
look it.  Violent  exertion,  resulting  in  exhaustion  and 
perspiration  often  averts  an  attack,  and  any  simple  aperient 
is  likewise  good. 


50  Mountain   Scouting. 

Diarrhoea  may  be  treated  with  an  ounce  of  castor  oil  and 
fifteen  drops  of  laudanum  suspended  in  water.  The  patient 
should  eat  neither  bread  nor  meat,  but  confine  his  diet  to  a 
little  rice  broth,  thickened  milk  and  the  like.  If  it  is  ac- 
companied by  severe  cramps,  apply  hot  rocks  or  pans  to  the 
feet  and  hot  fomentations  to  the  stomach. 

Poisoned  persons  must  be  treated  with  the  greatest 
caution,  inasmuch  as  it  is  necessary  to  deal  with  dangerous 
remedies.  Some  poisons  are  best  ejected  by  vomiting,  and 
an  emetic  should  be  promptly  given  ;  in  others,  the  action 
on  the  stomach  may  be  diminished  by  oily  and  mucilaginous 
drinks,  such  as  magnesia,  milk  and  oil,  barley  water,  flour 
and  water  and  raw  eggs. 

For  poisonous  acids,  such  as  nitric,  oxalic,  muriatic  or 
sulphuric  acid,  avoid  emetics.  For  nitrate  of  silver,  give 
plenty  of  salt  water,  followed  by  barley  water  or  gruel. 

For  strychnine,  narcotic  poisons,  opium,  mushrooms, 
belladonna,  etc.,  give  strong  emetics  at  once,  pour  cold 
water  on  the  head,  neck  and  shoulders,  place  mustard  poul- 
tices on  the  feet  and  keep  the  person  moving  about,  giving 
strong  coffee  as  a  stimulant. 

Water  should  always  accompany  the  emetic,  to  make  the 
vomiting  easy,  and  great  effort  made  to  prevent  the  patient 
from  becoming  drowsy  and  stupid.  A  charge  of  gunpowder 
swallowed  in  water,  mustard  in  hot  water,  or  warm  soap- 
suds are  prompt  emetics. 

In  the  absence  of  all  these  a  careful  tickling  of  the  throat 
often  does  the  work. 

The  following  are  good  poultices  :  Mustard  poultice — 
two  ounces  powdered  mustard,  two  ounces  linseed  meal, 
eight  ounces  boiling  water ;  Charcoal  poultice — one-third 
ounce  charcoal,  two  ounces  bread,  one  ounce  linseed  meal, 
eight  ounces  boiling  water. 

For  suffocation  by  gases,  etc.,  remove  the  patient  to  pure 
air,  apply  cold  water  to  the  face  and  chest,  rub  the  body 


Medical  and  Surgic-al  Hints.  51 

lively,  give  hot   coffee   or  spirits,  and  endeavor  to  induce 
artificial  respiration. 

To  revive  an  apparently  drowned  man,  proceed  as  set 
forth  in  the  Appendix. 

For  sore  and  blistered  feet,  strong  whisky  and  melted 
tallow  rubbed  on  the  foot,  which  is  afterwards  covered  with 
a  sock,  act  well.  Great  relief  is  found  in  tepid  bathing,  a 
small  quantity  of  alum  or  salt  being  dissolved  in  the  water. 
The  feet  should  be  washed  daily,  while  on  the  inarch,  and 
both  the  feet  and  inside  of  the  stockings  should  be  well 
soaped.  In  severe  cases  of  soreness,  a  raw  egg  broken  in 
the  boot  before  putting  it  on  is  a  splendid  antidote.  Blis- 
ters of  the  feet  should  not  be  opened,  but  a  thread  should 
be  drawn  through  them  and  the  liquid  allowed  to  run  off. 
If  the  foot  soreness  is  simply  owing  to  bad  boots  or  socks, 
relief  may  be  often  found  by  changing  the  boots  and  socks 
from  one  foot  to  the  other,  and  turning  the  stockings  inside 
out. 

Chafing  is  remedied  by  keeping  the  parts  clean  and  pow- 
dering with  fuller's  earth.  Sprains  are  relieved  by  hot 
fomentations  and  by  rags  kept  saturated  with  cold  water 
and  bound  round  the  parts. 

Burns  and  scalds  are  treated  by  keeping  them  from  ex- 
posure to  the  air  and  applying  carron  oil  (a  mixture  of  equal 
parts  of  oil  and  lime  water),  flour,  or  scraped  potatoes. 

Snow  blindness  is  an  affection  to  be  met  with  in  all 
mountainous  localities  where  there  are  glaring  sheets  of 
snow.  Some  persons  are  simply  blind,  others  experience 
great  pain,  the  lips  chapping  and  the  face  and  exposed  parts 
severely  blistering. 

A  person  having  once  experienced  snow  blindness,  is 
subject  to  frequent  attacks. 

Green  or  blue  glasses  and  a  green  lined  broad  brimmed 
hat  give  the  eye  protection.  In  the  absence  of  glasses,  wet 
powder  and  grease,  or  charcoal,  smeared  on  the  nose  and 
nhvit  the  eves,  will  afford  much  relief 


5  2  Mountain   Scouting. 

A  few  drops  of  opium,  in  tincture,  placed  within  the  eye- 
lids will  also  afford  relief 

Water  and  weak  brandy  is  an  excellent  eye-wash. 

For  sunstroke,  remove  the  collar  and  stock,  loosen  the 
shirt  and  coat,  and  continue  to  throw  cold  water  on  the  head 
and  spine  until  consciousness  returns. 

For  wasp  and  scorpion  stings,  etc.,  extract  the  sting,  if  it 
remains  in  the  wound,  and  rub  acetic  acid,  the  nicotine  from 
a  pipe  or  chewed  tobacco,  upon  the  wound. 

Rattlesnakes  and  venomous  reptiles  are  met  with  on  nearly 
every  mountain  trail.  Rattlesnakes  seldom  bite  (except  in 
August,  when  they  are  blind  and  snap  at  anything),  yet  it  is 
well  to  know  the  antidotes. 

The  Western  mountaineers  place  great  dependence  on 
strong  whisky.  The  action  of  the  poison  seems  to  counter- 
act the  effects  of  the  whisky,  and  a  very  large  quantity  may 
be  taken  without  causing  intoxication.  No  time  should  be 
lost  in  administering  the  spirits. 

Hartshorn  applied  externally  and  taken  internally,  in 
small  doses,  is  a  good  remedy. 

Plantain  leaves  finely  chewed  and  applied  to  the  wound, 
after  sucking  out  the  poison,  are  also  good. 

Pulverized  indigo  made  into  a  soft  poultice  will  draw  out 
the  poison  when  applied  to  the  wound.  The  poison  turns 
the  indigo  white.  When  the  indigo  ceases  to  change  color 
it  is  a  sign  that  the  poison  has  been  withdrawn. 

In  the  absence  of  antidotes,  tie  a  ligature  as  firmly  as  pos- 
sible above  the  wounded  part,  suck  the  wound,  if  the  mouth 
and  lips  be  free  from  sores,  and  caustic  it.  If  no  caustic  be 
at  hand,  explode  gunpowder  into  the  wound,  or  burn  it  out 
with  the  end  of  a  bayonet  or  ramrod  heated  to  a  white  heat, 
avoiding  the  arteries. 

Use  every  effort  to  prevent  the  patient  from  falling  into 
the  lethargy  and  drowsiness  that  always  follow. 

The  following  cruel  course  is  taken  by  the  Indians  of  the 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints.  53 

Northwest  in  treating  a  poisonous  bite  : — a  bird  or  animal 
with  a  quick  circulation  of  the  blood  is  secured,  an  incision 
is  made  into  the  flesh  of  the  creature  and  placed  in  contact 
with  the  wound.  The  bird  or  animal  soon  dies.  This  is 
repeated  several  times  until  the  contact  produces  no  effect, 
when  the  victim  is  considered  out  of  all  danger.  A  ban- 
dage is  generally  placed  between  the  wound  and  the  heart 
to  prevent  the  return  of  venous  blood. 

A  few  years  since  an  Indian  scout  was  riding  with  me, 
several  miles  in  advance  of  the  command.  While  crossing 
a  timbered  ridge  we  came  upon  a  number  of  'fool-hens.' 
Not  wishing  to  fire  shots,  we  secured  long  poles  and  began 
to  knock  them  off  the  logs  and  trees.  As  the  unfortunate 
Indian  stooped  to  pick  up  his  first  bird,  not  dead,  but  merely 
stunned,  an  immense  rattlesnake  struck  him  on  the  back  of 
the  left  hand.  Without  hesitation  he  made  an  incision  in 
the  breast  of  the  fool-hen  and  applied  it  to  the  wound.  At 
his  request  I  secured  four  other  birds,  which  he  used  in  like 
manner.  Three  died  from  the  poison ;  the  fourth  one 
was  not  affected  by  it,  but  was  subsequently  killed  and 
eaten.  The  Indian  continued  in  good  health,  and  never  ex- 
perienced any  suffering  or  inconvenience  from  the  bite. 
Indians  have  been  known  to  sacrifice  their  dogs  and  even 
horses  in  this  manner,  when  no  bird  or  other  animal  could 
be  secured.  , 

On  taking  the  field,  provision  should  always  be  made  for 
transport  for  the  sick  and  wounded,  in  case  there  be  any. 
If  wagons  are  to  accompany  the  command,  one  or  more 
should  be  so  fitted  up  as  to  be  easily  converted  into  ambu- 
lances in  cases  of  emergency. 

The  drawing  represents  such  a  contrivance.  The  two 
stretchers  shown  are  detachable,  and  may  be  placed  inside 
the  wagon  when  moving  over  level  roads,  or  may  be  removed 
and  transported  by  men  when  moving  over  rough  and  rocky 
country,  or  when  it  becomes  necessary  to  take  the  wagons 


54  Mountain  Scouting. 

apart  in  order  to  get  them  up  or  down  very  steep  places. 


The  stretchers  are  so  constructed  with  hinges  and  hooks  as 
to  be  folded  into  a  very  small  space  when  not  needed,  and 
to  permit  the  supports  to  be  used  as  handles. 

Being  frequently  detached  from  all  transportation,  an  of- 
ficer in  command  might  be  called  upon,  in  case  of  accident, 
to  resort  to  numerous  expedients  to  relieve  the  sick  and 
succor  the  wounded.  He  should  know  how  to  make 
stretchers  and  how  to  transport  them. 

Avoid  carrying  the  stretcher  on  the  shoulders.  The  front 
and  rear  bearers  of  the  stretcher  should  be  'out  of  step,' 
and  men  of  equal  height,  strength  and  length  of  step,  so  far 
as  is  practicable,  should  be  selected.  The  sick  or  wounded 
man  should  be  carried  with  his  face  toward  the  direction  in 
which  he  is  moving.  In  crossing  ditches,  dikes,  hollows, 
fences,  etc.,  the  stretcher  should  be  kept  horizontal. 

The  following  stretchers  may  be  readily  extemporized  : 

i.  A  blanket  is  held  by  four  men,  one  at  each  corner,  and 
is  then  doubled  so  that  the  two  loops  shall  be  brought  to- 
gether at  each  end  ;  one  pole  (or  tf,vo  rifles  lashed  together) 
passes  through  the  four  loops,  while  another  passes  within 
the  double  of  the  blanket  on  the  other  side. 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints.  55 

2.  Roll  a  small  stone  into  each  corner  of  the  blanket, 
and  thus  form  projections  which  will  prevent  the  slipping 
of  the  strings  or  thongs  with  which  it  is  made  fast  to  a  frame 
of  poles  (or  rifles  lashed  together),  as  shown  in  the  drawing. 


Strips  of  the  blanket  may  be  used  for  strings. 

This  stretcher  may  be  still  further  simplified  and  less  ma- 
terial required  when  two  corners  of  the  blanket  are  fastened 
to  a  short  cross-piece  at  the  head,  while  the  other  end  is 
gathered  up  and  tied  altogether  to  the  main  pole. 

The  pressure  of  the  pole  on  the  shoulder  (most  readily 
borne  on  the  shoulder)  when  bearing  the  stretcher,  may  be 
diminished  by  a  short  pole  or  gun  held  lever-wise  over  the 
other  shoulder,  so  as  to  take  a  portion  of  its  weight. 

3.  Four  rifles  and  two  coats,  in  a  great  emergency,  may 
be  made  into  a  stretcher.  The  sleeves  of  one  coat  are  turn- 


ed into  the  inside.  The  rifles  are  then  passed  through  the 
sleeves  (muzzle  to  muzzle)  and  firmly  lashed  together,  when 
each  coat  is  buttoned  throughout  the  front. 

For  a  man  who  can  sit  up,  one  rifle  through  the  sleeves  of 
a  coat,  and  the  coat  tail  lashed  to  another  rifle,  will  form  a 


5  6  Mountain   Scouting. 

good  stretcher.     The  sick  man  may  bear  against  one  of  the 
bearers  and  let  his  legs  hang  down 

4.  A   stretcher  may  be  made  by  suspending  an  ox,  mule 
or  horse  hide  between  two  poles,  or  by  interlacing  the  belts 
and  gun-straps.     Even   the   knapsack    may  be  fastened  be- 
tween the  poles  or  rifles  so  as  to  form  a  good  transport. 

5.  If  it  is  possible  to  transport  a  wagon,  a  stretcher  made 
of  belts,  ropes,  etc.,  may  be  hung  from   its  sides  within,  or 
the    bottom    of  the  body  of  the  wagon    may   be  filled  with 
blankets,  small    branches   covered   with  straw,   hay,  ferns, 
rushes  or  any  soft  material. 

A  man  who  is  unable  to  walk,  but  who  can  sit  and  prac- 
tically support  himself,  may  be  transported  by  two  men, 
who  either  support  him  6n  a  short  pole  held  between  them, 
with  his  arms  upon  their  shoulders,  or  join  their  hands  and 
arms  so  as  to  make  a  comfortable  seat  for  him. 

6.  Three    cross   pieces  are  lashed  to  two  elastic  poles, 
eight  or  ten  feet  long.     This  frame-work  is  then  supported 
over  the  wounded  man  as  he  lies  on  his  blanket   or  canvas 
and  the  latter  is  securely  fastened  to  the  frame.     One  cross- 


piece  is  in  front  of  the  feet,  another  behind  the  head,  and  the 
third  one  being  over  the  man,  will  steady  him  in  the  trans- 


Medical  and  Surgical-  Hints  57 

port.  Small  twigs  may  form  a  framework,  which,  covered 
with  a  blanket  or  coat,  will  protect  the  sick  man  from  the 
sun,  wind  or  rain. 

After  a  fight  the  Indians  carry  their  wounded  wonderful 
distances,  palanquin  fashion. 

If  horses  can  be  spared  they  may  transport  the  litter  in- 
stead of  men.  In  this  event  the  poles  should  be  very  elas- 
tic, about  eighteen  feet  long,  united  by  cross-pieces  three- 
and-a-half  feet  long,  the  ends  being  firmly  secured  to  the 
sides  of  the  animals  by  strong  fastenings.  The  Indians  of- 
ten use  one  horse  with  this  litter,  allowing  one  end  to  trail 
on  the  ground.  When  only  one  animal  can  be  spared, 
great  caution  must  be  exercised  in  passing  over  broken  and 
rocky  ground. 

In  case  of  a  ^reat  emergency,  after  knotting  together  the 
ends  of  a  blanket,  two  men  could  be  laid  in  the  bights  and 
transported,  one  on  each  side  of  the  horse,  the  central  part 
of  the  blanket  being  laid  across  the  horse's  back  and  se- 
cured. The  Indians  frequently  transport  their  children  in 
this  manner. 

The  foregoing  are  some  of  the  numerous  contrivances 
for  transport,  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  material 
available  and  the  officer's  ingenuity. 

*  Bed  sores,'  a  form  of  gangrene  from  pressure,  appear  on 
the  sacrum,  elbows,  shoulders,  back  of  head  and  trochanters, 
when  the  patient  is  constrained  to  lie  for  a  long  time  in  one 
position.  For  treatment,  remove  pressure  as  far  as  possible, 
wash  and  remove  sloughs  if  they  exist,  and  apply  a  soft 
poultice.  Myrrh,  resin,  iodine  and  other  warm  astringent 
applications  are  good. 

If  possible,  visit  a  dentist  and  see  that  your  teeth  are  in 
good  order  before  going  into  the  field. 

This  chapter  would  hardly  be  complete  without  a  few 
hints  and  directions  as  to  the  treatment  of  the  stock,  in  the 
absence  of  a  qualified  veterinary  surgeon. 


58  Mountain  Scouting. 

Sore  mouth  is  caused  by  the  cutting  and  tearing  of  the 
bit  at  the  corners  of  the  mouth.  To  cure  it  wash  the  mouth 
clean  and  sprinkle  common  salt  on  the  sores  or  apply 
tincture  of  myrrh. 

Cut  tongue  is  caused  by  severe  jerks  of  the  bit,  and  is 
often  very  serious.  Salt  water,  alum  water,  saltpetre  and 
tincture  of  myrrh  are  good  remedies. 

Sore  back  should  never  occur  in  a  well-regulated  expedi- 
tion. The  slightest  tendency  to  gall  should  be  promptly 
looked  after  ;  and,  if  necessary,  the  rider  should  walk  until 
the  back  is  perfectly  sound.  Hot  water  and  poultices  make 
the  best  early  treatment.  Leather,  burned  to  a  crisp  and 
finely  powdered,  when  spread  over  the  wound,  causes  it  to 
heal  very  promptly.  There  is  no  excuse  for  the  frightful 
wounds  on  the  backs  of  mules  and  horses  due  to  improper 
saddling. 

Diarrhoea,  often  caused  by  exposure,  over-exertion  and 
an  excess  of  spring  water,  is  best  treated  by  giving  a  mix- 
ture of  tincture  catechu,  prepared  chalk  and  tincture  of 
opium  (in  the  proportion  of  one,  two  and  four  parts)  fol- 
lowed by  gruel  and  hay. 

Colic  is  one  of  the  most  frequent  ailments  of  the  horse. 
The  water,  grain  and  grass  of  many  districts  cause  severe 
attacks.  As  remedies,  mix  a  tablespoonful  of  laudanum 
and  twice  as  much  whisky  in  a  cupful  of  water,  or  dissolve 
some  chloride  of  lime  (about  a  tablespoonful)  in  a  cup  of 
water,  and  pour  down  the  horse's  throat. 

If  there  be  much  constipation  give  dissolved  aloes  (four 
drachms),  apply  hot  fomentations  and  bleed,  taking  about 
one  gallon  of  blood. 

To  bleed  the  horse  rub  the  neck  on  the  near  side,  near  the 
throat,  until  the  vein  rises,  tie  a  bandage  around  the  neck 
about  its  middle  and  strike  the  flearn  into  the  vein  ;  when  it 
is  full,  hold  the  horse's  head  well  up  and  pry  open  his  jaws 
until  the  blood  flows  sufficiently. 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints.  59 

Megrims  or  vertigo — a  sudden  rush  of  blood  to  the  head 
of  the  horse,  generally  when  ascending  a  hill,  may  be  re- 
lieved by  prompt  bleeding,  followed  by  the  'cathartic  ball.' 
A  horse  so  affected  suddenly  stops,  shakes  his  head  and 
often  falls  unconscious. 

Cramps,  colds,  spasmodic  coughs,  etc.,  are  often  caused  by 
applying  cold  water  to  the  heated  back  or  by  drinking 
cold  water  when  overheated.  To  cure,  blister  the  throat,  if 
sore,  and  give  a  little  nitre  or  aloes  ;  or,  give  a  mixture  of 
one  ounce  Jamaica  ginger,  one  cup  of  rum  and  two  cups  of 
water  in  moderate  doses. 

Corns,  or  the  bruising  of  the  sensitive  parts  of  the  foot  by 
the  contraction  of  the  hoof,  if  neglected,  will  produce  se- 
vere lameness  or  even  quitter.  They  are  indicated  by  the 
horse's  placing  one  foot  in  advance  of  the  other  and  resting 
upon  the  toe.  For  treatment,  cut  away  the  hoof  so  as  to 
relieve  the  pressure,  cut  out  and  cauterize  the  corn. 

Apply  flaxseed  poultices  and  hoof 
ointment,  and  shoe  carefully  when  the 
foot  will  permit  it. 

The  illustration  shows  a  convenient 
form  of  boot  to  be  used  while  the  foot 
is  undergoing  treatment. 

For  ikrush,  a  deceased  action  of  the 
sensible  frog,  secreting  pus  instead  of 
horn,  wash  the  feet  with  soap  and 
water  and  apply  ointment  (equal  parts 
of  tar  and  lard  melted).  If  neglected 
it  will  run  into  canker. 

Sand-crack,  a  disposition  in  the  hoof 
to  crack,  often  occasioned  by  poor 
shoeing,  may  be  abated  by  frequent  applications  of  linseed 
meal  poultices,  after  washing  with  soap,  water  and  pow- 
dered charcoal.  Cautery  is  necessary  in  severe  cases. 

Quarter-crack  is  caused  by  pressure  and  contraction,  most 


6d  Mountain    Scouting. 

frequently  the  result  of  fitting  the  shoe  too  tightly  on  the 
inner  quarter,  in  order  to  prevent  interfering. 

It  is  treated  by  making  a  groove  (with  a  rasp)  under  and 
parallel  with  the  cornet,  to  the  extent  of  about  one-half 
inch  on  each  side  of  the  crack.  A  few  small  notches  are 
then  cut  on  each  side  of  the  groove,  and  the  edges  of  the 
crack  cut  away.  Finally  the  crack  is  cauterized  and  dressed 
with  tar  every  morning  for  several  weeks.  In  the  course 
of  time  the  incision  works  its  way  down  to  the  bottom  of 
the  hoof,  followed  by  a  sound  foot  covering. 

For  punctured  feet,  extract  the  cause  of  injury  and  poul- 
tice until  the  pain  subsides  ;  then  apply  tar  and  tincture  of 
myrrh,  keeping  the  foot  in  the  boot. 

For  'grease,'  remove  the  hair,  apply  finely-powdered  char- 
coal and  poultices;  give  'cathartic  ball'  and  feed  green 
food,  if  possible. 

When  ticks  are  abundant,  oil  or  fat  smeared  around  the 
fetlock  or  pastern  is  a  protection  against  them. 

For  epizootic,  influenza,  distemper,  etc.,  give  an  ounce  of 
spirits  of  nitre  in  a  bucket  of  water  three  times  daily.  Feed 
little  grass  or  hay,  but  give  oatmeal  gruel  frequently,  and 
blister  the  parts  if  there  be  much  soreness. 

Certain  flies  often  deposit  their  eggs  in  wounds,  and 
even  in  the  'sheaths'  of  well  animals,  which  soon  develop 
into  a  living  mass  of  carnivorous  larvae.  The  remedy  is  to 
thoroughly  cleanse  the  parts  and  blow  calomel  into  the 
wounds. 

Animals  are  frequently  poisoned  by  drinking  alkaline 
water.  For  treatment,  rake  the  animal  and  pour  grease  or 
mild  acid  down  his  throat,  or  dose  him  with  flour  and 
water. 

Wounds  and  contusions  should,  if  possible,  be  cured  by 
the  continued  application  of  hot  fomentations,  poultices  and 
cold  water ;  still,  an  escharotic  is  often  necessary,  and  blis- 
tering is  good  in  severe  cases  of  sprains. 


Medical  and  Surgical  Hints,  61 

The  drawing  will  give  an  idea  of  the    osteology  of   the 
horse 


1.  The  seven  bones  of  the  neck. 

2.  Breast  bone. 

3.  Shoulder  blade. 

4.  5  and  6.   Humerus,  radius  and  ulna. 
7,  8.  Cartilages  and  ribs. 

9,   10.   Carpus  and  meta-carpal  bones. 

n,  12,  13,  23,  24,  25.  Upper  and  lower  pasterns  and  coffin 
bones  of  the  fore  and  hind  feet. 

14.  The  eighteen  bones  of  the  spine. 

15.  The  six  bones  of  the  loins. 

16.  The  haunch. 

17.  18,  19,  20.  The  femur,  knee-cap,  tibia  and  fibula. 
21,  22.  The  hock  and  meta-tarsal  bones. 

26.  Caudal  vertebree. 

A  knowledge  of  the  functions  and  location  of  these  bones 
will  often  assist  greatly  in  treating  fractures  and  disloca- 
tions. 


62  Mountain  Scouting. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

USEFUL    INFORMATION    IN    POST    AND    FIELD. 

SHOULD  the  substance  of  the  following  items  become  im- 
pressed upon  the  memory  of  the  soldier,  I  feel  sure  that  he  will 
find  some  of  the  hints  useful  when  in  positions  of  responsibility 
and  having  few  or  no  facilities.  I  have  numbered  the  para- 
graphs for  the  convenience  of  future  reference. 

1.  When  the   boots  or  shoes  become  water-soaked,   it  is  a 
splendid   plan   to  fill  them  full  of  oats  or  barley,  if  at   hand. 
The  grain    rapidly  absorbs   the   moisture  and,   in  expanding, 
prevents  the  boot  or  shoe  from  shrinking. 

2.  The  efficiency  of  the  following  method  of  picketing  horses 
or  of  even  securing  the  ropes  of  a  tent  in  a  dry  and  sandy  soil, 
where  the  pickets  or  pins  will  n  A  hold,  is  wonderful. 

Simply  tie  to  the  end  of  the  rope  some  article  with  a  longi- 
tudinal dimension  of  at  least  four  inches;  anything  will  do — a 
stick,  some  twigs,  a  stone  or  tent  peg.  Plant  this  from  one  to 
three  feet  in  the  sand.  If  it  be  buried  one  foot  deep  in  ordi- 
nary dry  and  sandy  soil,  it  will  require  a  strain  of  about  25 
pounds  to  draw  it  up;  if  it  be  buried  two  feet  deep,  it  will  re- 
quire a  force  of  more  than  80  pounds  to  draw  it  up,  and  it  will 
require  more  than  500  pounds  if  buried  three  feet  deep. 

Theoretically  this  is  obvious — for,  supposing  the  earth  to 
consist  of  smooth,  spherical  grains  of  one  size,  and  granting 
that  these  grains  cannot  move  horizontally  at  the  moment  of 
drawing,  and  that  they  must  move  vertically  upwards,  it  is  plain 
that  the  substance  attached  to  the  rope  when  moved  upwards 
must  start  before  it  an  inverted  pile  of  grains.  Take  the  most 
unfavorable  case,  supposing  it  to  be  a  triangular  pile,  then  the 


Use  fid  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  63 

n  (n  4-  i)  (  n  +  2), 


number  of  grains  to  be  started  varies  as 

I.       2-        3. 

or  in  a  ratio  greater  than  n*  (n  being  the  number  of  layers  of 
sand  above.) 


A  rope  attached  to  several  of  these  planted  ropes,  and  rest- 
ing on  the  ground,  will  form  a  good  picket  line. 

3.  When  cavalry  and  infantry  are  advancing  rapidly  together, 
the  infantry  are  greatly  assisted  when  permitted  to  lay  hold  of 
the  stirrup-straps  of  the  horsemen. 

4.  To  calculate  the  weight  of  a  stack   of  hay,  measure  the 
length  and  breadth  of  the  stack,  also  its  height  from  the  ground 
to  the  eaves,  and  from  the  eaves  to  the  top. 

Find  the  continued  product  of  the  length,  breadth  and 
height  from  the  ground  to  the  eaves,  augmented  by  i  the 
height  from  the  eaves  to  the  top,  and  multiply  the  result  by 
fourteen-thirds.  The  product  will  be  the  weight  of  old  hay  in 
pounds. 

New  hay  weighs,  in  bulk,  f  as  much  as  old  hay. 

For  example,  suppose  a  stack  of  old  hay  to  measure  sixty 
feet  in  length,  twenty-four  feet  in  breadth,  nine  feet  from  the 
ground  to  the  eaves,  and  six  feet  from  the  eaves  to  the  top; 


64  Mountain  Scouting. 

then,  60  X  24  x  (9  -f  |)  X  ¥=  73,920  Ibs.       The  same  sized 
stack  of  new  hay  would  weigh  49,280  Ibs. 

5.  To  render  canvas,  duck  or  even  calico  waterproof,  prepare 
a  mixture  of  melted  wax  and  spirits  of  turpentine  in  the  pro- 
portion of  one  ounce  wax  to  one  pint  of  spirits.     After  having 
stirred  the  mixture  well,  "dip   the  material  into  it  and  hang  it 
in  a  current  of  dry  air. 

To  make  tarpaulins,  soak  the  canvas  in  salt  water  and  apply 
the  dressing;  as  the  water  evaporates  the  tar  enters  the  fabric. 

Boiled  linseed  oil,  when  soaked  into  cloth  or  linen,  will  cause 
it  to  resist  the  action  of  water. 

6.  Frequently  of  necessity,  the  camp  is    made  on  a  sandy 
beach  where  there  is  no  sign  of  fresh  water.     In   such  a  case, 
the  mules,  if  permitted,  will  paw  and  dig  up  the  sand  near  the 
water's  edge,  and   slowly   satisfy  their  thirst  by  drinking  the 
fresh  water  as  it  trickles  through  the  sand  in  small  quantities — 
but  this  process  is  very  slow. 

To  distil  salt  water  in  an  emergency,  take  a  camp  kettle  full, 
cover  the  top  and  insert  a  gun  barrel  at  the  top  inclining  down- 
ward. Keep  the  barrel  cool  by  means  of  water,  and  cause  the 
water  in  the  kettle  to  boil.  The  condensed  steam  may  be 
caught  at  the  lower  end  of  the  barrel  and  consumed. 

If  there  be  no  conveniences  at  hand,  find  a  hollow  in  the 
rocks,  or  make  a  hole  in  the  earth  and  fill  with  salt  water. 
Drop  hot  stones  into  it  until  the  water  hisses  and  gives  out 
large  clouds  of  vapor,  which  may  be  caught  by  a  cloth  suspended 
above,  and  then  be  wrung  from  it  or  sucked  out.  One  drop  a 
second  would  make  about  a  gallon  in  one  day. 

Muddy  water  may  be  purified  by  filtering — sand,  charcoal, 
sponge,  grass,  moss,  stone  and  cloths  being  good  filters. 

The  illustration  represents  a  convenient  apparatus  for  puri- 
fying muddy  and  impure  waters.  It  is  so  constructed  as  to  fit 
into  the  mouth  of  a  canteen  or  bottle,  and  permits  the  water 
to  be  sucked  out  after  passing  through  the  filtering  substances, 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  65 

and  being  freed  from  the  ova  and  larvae  of  many  water  insects 


and  other  impurities  suspended  in  it.  In  its  absence,  suck 
the  impure  water  through  the  handkerchief  or  a  handful  of 
grass  or  rushes  held  close  together,  or  even  through  snow. 

A  small  piece  of  alum  placed  in  muddy  water  will  purify  it 
wonderfully  well,  the  alum  and  mud  forming  a  clayey  deposit. 

Putrid  water  should  be  boiled  with  charcoal  before  drinking 
it.  The  Indians  purify  all  waters  by  plunging  hot  irons  and 
rocks  into  them. 

When  very  thirsty,  and  only  a  very  small  amount  of  water  is 
at  hand,  drink  it  with  a  spoon,  or  through  a  small  hole  in  the 
cork  of  the  canteen.  It  will  do  as  much  good  as  when  taken 
in  large  mouthfuls. 

7.  The  following  is  a  table  of  the  dangeious  spaces,  in  yards, 
of  the  Springfield .  rifle  and  carbine,  calculated  under  the 
assumption  that  the  gun,  when  fired,  is  56  inches  above  the 
ground,  and  aimed  at  the  middle  points  of  infantry  and  cavalry 
soldiers,  34  and  48  inches  above  the  horizontal,  respectively. 

The  dangerous  space  will  be  increased  by  the  fir^r  lying 
down  or  aiming  at  his  adversary's  feet. 

For  the  rifle,  the  range  corresponding  to  the  maximum 
dangerous  space  is  262  yards  for  infantry  and  291  yards  for 


66 


Mountain  Scouting. 


cavalry;  and  for  the  carbine,  204  yards  for  infantry  and  230 
yards  for  cavalry. 


K1FLE. 


Agst.  Infantry. 


Agst.  Cavalry. 


C 

Q 

Falling 
branch  of 

i 

Palling 
branch  of 

.1 

trajectory. 

I 

trajectory. 

«j           "a" 

g 

1 

O 

"o 

P 

I 

.1 

1  i 

| 

i 

I 
5* 

•g 

£ 

43 

* 

o 

^ 

i 

0 

O 

la 

bO 

1 

1 

s 

JL 

JL 

s 

1 

1 

100 

40 

60 

77    ;  40 

60 

130  ; 

200 

90 

110 

71    i  90 

110 

103 

300 

52 

100 

55       71 

150 

80 

400 

28 

60 

41      33 

88 

60 

500 

21 

40 

30  ij  22 

59 

42 

600 

15 

29 

24  i'  16 

40 

34 

700 

12 

23 

21       13 

32 

31 

800 

9 

20 

18  !    10 

28 

25 

900 

8 

17 

15        8 

23 

20 

1,000 

6 

13 

12        7 

19 

17 

1,100     5       11        7        6       16 

8 

t/AXUflJNJ].. 

Agst.  Infantry. 

Agst.  Cavalry. 

! 

Falling 
branch  of 

| 

Falling 
bianch  of 

8 

trajectory. 

8 

trajectory. 

'5" 

I 

c 

0 

o 

JA 
O 

fi 

+j 
1 

i 

1 

1 

1 

1 

f 

¥ 

? 

? 

i  g, 

£ 

o 

t3 

X 

"a 
| 

o 

5 

« 

j 

1 

• 

« 

1 

A 

;  40 

60 

59 

40 

60 

99 

HO- 

120 

53 

80 

120 

80 

ST 

60 

42 

29 

84 

60 

20 

43 

37 

18 

60 

53 

13 

36 

30 

14 

50 

43 

11 

29 

22 

10 

41 

30 

8 

19 

15 

8 

28 

21 

6 

13 

12 

7 

18 

18 

5 

12 

10 

8 

15 

15 

5 

9 

•7 

5 

13 

11 

4 

6 

2 

4 

9 

6 

8.  When  detached  without  canvas  for  a  long  period  of  time, 
it  is  better  to  spend  the  spare  time  in  making  a  temporary 
house  than  in  idleness. 

A  good  hut  may  be  readily  constructed  on  suitable  ground 
or  a  hillside  by  excavating  and  covering  with  a  roof;  but  if 
timber  is  convenient,  it  is  better  to  build  a  log  hut,  covering 
with  bark,  skins,  bushes,  reed  mats,  sea  weeds  or  any  suitable 
material  procurable. 

In  building  the  hut  four  poles  are  planted  in  the  ground 
where  the  corners  are  to  rest. 

The  logs  are  then  piled  one  above  another  against  these 
poles,  as  shown  in  the  drawing,  being  notched  where  they  cross 
so  as  to  bring  their  sides  together. 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  67 

Aiter  the  walls  are  completed  the  doors  and  windows  are 


rut.  a  hole  chopped  through  the  logs,  including  that  on  the 
gr  ,-_iiid,  for  a  fire-place  (a  chimney  and  fire  back  may  be  formed 
of  clay,  turf,  stones,  etc.,)  and  the  roof  put  on. 

A  roof  of  split  logs  gouged  out  in  the  center,  like  a  long 
curved  gutter,  is  good.  A  layer  is  placed  side  by  side,  with 
the  hollow  side  up,  and  a  second  layer  is  put  on  them,  with 
the  hollow  side  down. 

Bark  taken  in  long  strips  makes  good  roofing  or  sides. 

The  roof  should  have  a  pitch  of  not  less  than  45°  to  keep 
out  the  rain.  All  the  cracks  should  be  carefully  filled  with, 
moss,  grass,  mud,  clay,  etc. 

Good  substitutes  for  window  panes  are  waxed  or  oiled  paper 
or  thin  white  cloth. 

The  huts  of  Indians  and  all  savages  are  generally  round  or 
approximate  to  the  circular  form,  probably  because  of  the 
maximum  house  for  a  minimum  cover. 

It  might  be  well  to  remember  that  logs  split  better  from  the 
crown  or  small  end  toward  the  butt. 

9.  When  destitute  of  all  tools,  to  fell  a  tree;  light  a  small 
fire  about  the  root,  prevent  the  same  from  flaming  upwards  by 
applying  leaves,  etc.  After  the  fire  has  burned  out  a  portion 
of  the  tree,  move  it  aside  and  knock  away  the  charred  wood, 
thus  exposing  a  fresh  surface  for  the  action  of  the  fire.  One 
man  can  attend  to  the  burning  of  many  trees  at  once,  if 
desirable. 


68 


Mountain  Scouting. 


After  the  trees  fall,  the  tops  and  branches  may  be  burned  off 
as  they  lie  on  the  ground. 

10.  The  following  weights  and  estimates  are  often  valuable 
when  purchasing  supplies  in  the  field:  One  bushel  of  wheat 
weighs  sixty  pounds;  of  rye,  fifty-eight  pounds;  of  barley 
fifty-four  pounds;  of  oats,  forty-two  pounds;  of  beans,  sixty- 
two  pounds;  of  peas  and  maize,  sixty-six  pounds;  of  potatoes, 
sixty  pounds;  of  onions,  fifty-six  pounds.  About  fifty  pounds 
of  wheat  and  thirty  pounds  of  oats  go  to  the  cubic  foot.  One 
cubic  yard  of  well-pressed  hay  weighs  225  pounds;  one  cubic 
yard  of  straw  weighs  145  pounds;  one  cubic  yard  of  grain  will 
average  twenty  bushels.  The  following  numbers  of  bushels 
will  safely  go  to  the  acre;  wheat,  rye  and  beans,  25;  oats,  45; 
barley,  37!;  peas,  25;  maize,  30;  potatoes,  250. 

n.  To  properly  pitch  the  ordinary  wall  tent,  after  selecting 


H 

L 


a  suitable  spot,  place  the  ridge  pole,  A  B,  upon  the  ground, 
approximately  beneath  its  place  when  in  position.  Drive  pins 
at  A  and  B.  From  A  and  B  continue  A  B  to  C  and  Z>,  by 
stepping  one  pace  from  each  end.  From  C  and  D  make  four 
paces  at  right  angles  with  C  D  on  each  side,  and  determine  the 
points  E,  F,  Gy  H.  At  these  points  drive  the  corner  tent  pegs. 
By  following  these  directions  the  tent  may  be  promptly  pitched 
and  will  make  a  beautiful  appearance,  every  portion  of  canvas 
being  in  proper  position  and  free  from  wrinkles. 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field. 


69 


The  drawing  shows  the  form  ot    the  tent  when  properly 
pitched. 


12.  The  cubical  contents  of  a  trench  equals  J  h  (db  -f  cd 
+  £  ad  +  %  be)  in  which  «  and  b  are  the  length  and  breadth 
of  the  top  of  the  ditch,  c  and  d  are  the  length  and  breadth  of 
the  bottom  and  h  the  depth. 

( 

13.  The  mean  velocity  of  water  in  rivers  equals 


when  v  is  the  surface  velocity  expressed  in  inches. 

The  surface  velocity  may  be  determined  by  carefully  noting 
the  time  required  for  a  chip  or  any  small  substance  to  float  a 
measured  distance. 

The  following  are  the  usual  expressions  applied  to  river 
velocities: 

Sluggish,  about  1|  ft.  per  sec.  ,  or  1  mile  per  hr. 


Ordinary, 

Rapid, 

Very  Rapid," 

Torrent, 


3 
5 
8 
9  or  more 


14.  When  using  hand  spikes,  avoid  placing  more  than  two 
men  at  one  spike.  See  that  the  fulcrum  is  stable  before  bear- 
ing down,  or  time  will  be  lost.  Do  not  allow  men  to  put  their 
shoulders  under  a  lever  while  lifting,  or  their  chins  and  heads 
over  it  when  bearing  down. 


70  Mountain  Scouting. 

In  raising  a  heavy  gun  on  skidding,  do  not  allow  its  axis  to 
slope  more  than  3°,  or  the  gun  may  rush  to  the  front  or  rear. 

15.  In  uncoiling  a  new  coil  of  rope,  pass  the  end  at  the  core 
to  the  opposite  side  and  draw  it  out;  the  turns  of*  the  rope  will 
then  run  out  without  kinking. 

16.  When  using  the   howitzer  or  any  gun   on  wheels,  in  the 
mountains,  great  care  should   be  taken  to  have   the  wheels  on 
the  same  horizontal  while  firing. 

The  deflection  caused  by  one  wheel  being  higher  than  the 
other  =  R  tan.  a.  tan.  £,  in  which  R  =  range,  0  =  elevation 
and  ^  =  the  angle  of  the  trunnions  with  the  horizon. 

17.  The  following  table  shows  the  weights  of  certain  woods. 

Willow  weighs  about  25  Ibs.  per  cubic  ft. 

Poplar  "  24 

Fir  "          32 

Elm  36 

Sycamore  37 

Pine  "          40 

Beech  43 

Ash  "          47 

Oak  54 

When  green,  the  weight  is  about  one-fourth  more. 
To  find  the  weight  of  a  tree,  calculate  its  contents  in  cubic 
feet,  and  multiply  the  result  by  the  weight  of  one  cubic  foot  of 
the  wood. 

1 8.  Opera  glasses   are    invaluable   as   night  glasses.      With 
most  persons  they  nearly  double  the  limit  of  vision,  and  enable 
their  eyesight   to   compare  fayprably  with   that  of  the  night- 
roving  animals. 

19.  The  glittering  of  the  sun  upon  the  arms  of  distant  troops 
indicates  the  direction  of  their  march.     If  the  rays  seem  per- 
pendicular, and    constant,   they  are    moving  toward   ycu;    if 
slanting  to  the    right  and    downwards,   they   are  moving    to 
your  right;  if  the  rays  are  varied  and  intermittent,   they  are 
moving  away  from  you. 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field-  71 

Dust  raised  by  infantry  forms  a  dense  low  cloud,  while  that 
raised  by  cavalry  forms  a  higher  and  lighter  one. 

20.  All  soldiers  should  practice  making  the  simple  and  im- 
portant knots;  a  knowledge  of  their  uses  and  being  able  to 
make  them  are  essential  in  nearly  all  makeshift  appliances. 

The  most  elementary  ones  are  the  timber  hitch,  the  bowline 
and  the  clove  hitch. 


tit* 


The  drawing  shows  these  knots,  also  a  simple 
form  of  tourniquet.  A  single  or  double  band 
encloses  the  two  pieces  it  is  desired  to  lash  to- 
gether. A  stick  is  then  placed  in  the  band  and 
forcibly  twisted  around. 
For  a  more  complete  description  of  knots,  see  page  114. 

21.  By  means  of  the  clove  hitch,  clothes  or  other  articles  are 
tied  to  tent  poles  when  jointed,  notched  or  at  all  uneven. 

The   illustration   shows   the   method.      The  clothing,  bags, 
etc.,  are  hung  upon  the  button  at  the  end  of  the  rope. 

22.  The  following  seems  a  good  disposition  of  the  rifle   at 
night,  when  wishing  to  avoid   its  misplacement  and  prevent 
sneaking  savages  from  stealing  it. 

'  When    getting  sleepy  you  return   your  rifle  between   your 
legs,  roll  over  and  go  to  sleep.      Some  people  may  think  this  a 


72  Mountain  Scouting. 

queer  place  for  a  rifle;  but,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  the  position 
of  all  others  where  utility  and  comfort  are  most  combined. 
The  butt  rests  on  the  arm,  and  serves  as  a  pillow  for  the  head; 
the  muzzle  points  between  the  knees  and  the  arms  encircle  the. 
lock  and  breech,  so  that  you  have  a  smooth  pillow,  and  are  al- 
ways prepared  to  start  up  armed  at  a  moment's  notice.' 
(Parkyns'  'Abyssinia.')  The  stock  may  be  raised  up  and 
supported,  if  desired,  to  avoid  any  unpleasant  pressure  on  the 
arm.  The  longer  the  gun  the  better. 

23.  It  is  very  important  to  have  all  Government  horses  dis- 
tinctly branded   *U.   S.'   immediately  upon   purchase.     Many 
frontier  horse  thieves  acquire  considerable  skill  in  changing 
these  letters,  by  means  of  additions,  so  as  to  conform  to  certain 
legal  brands. 

A  clear  wood  or  charcoal  fire  is  best  for  heating  the 
branding  iron,  and  it  should  be  heated  hot  enough  to  thor- 
oughly singe  the  skin  without  burning  it.  To  effectually 
brand,  the  roots  of  the  hair  should  be  destroyed  by  burning. 

It  is  readily  seen  how,  by  additions,  etc.,  the  U.  S.  may  be 
converted  into  J.  S.,  O.  S.,  etc. 

24.  When  you   wisli  to  roll  up  your  shirt  sleeves,  do  not 
turn  the  cuffs  inside  out,  but  turn  them  inward  and  roll  up  the 
sleeves,  inward  to  the  arm.     By  following  this  plan  the  sleeves 
will  remain  tucked  up,  without  being  touched,  while  if  they  be 
rolled  outward  they  become  loose  every  few  minutes. 

25.  To  determine  the  time  of  march  (T)  of  a  column: 

Let  D  =  the  distance  (infect)  to  be  passed  over;  L  =  the 
length  of  the  column  in  feet;  Dl  =  the  distance  (in  feet)  passed 
over  in  one  minute  by  the  column,  including  halts,  and  T1  = 
the  time  of  delay  (in  minutes)  due  to  the  elongation  of  the  col- 
umn in  passing  defiles,  the  physical  condition  of  the  command 

L 
and  the  irregularities  of  the  route;  then,   —  =    the     time  (in 

D1 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  73 

minutes)  for  the  column  to  pass  over  a  distance  equal  to  its 
length,  and  T  (in  minutes)  = 

L         D  D1  Tl  +  L  +  D 

T+ 1 = 

D1       D1  D1 

Thus,  for  a  column   of  troops   860  feet  in  depth,  moving  at 
the  rate  of  100  yards  per  minute  (including  halts)  and  delayed 
eleven  minutes,  to  pass  over  six  miles, 
300  x  ii  +  860  4-  31680 

T= =  119^  m.  =  i  h.  59.47  m. 

300 

26.  To  facilitate  the  climbing  of  a  large  tree  with  rough 
bark,  unite  the  feet  by  dampened  handkerchiefs,   towels,   or 
raveled  ropes  tied  together  (avoiding  a  round  rope)   so  that 
their  distance  apart  shall  be  about  f  of  the  diameter  of  the 
tree.     Every  time  that  the  body  and  arms  are  raised  in  climb- 
ing, press  the  connecting  rope  or  substance  against  the  bark 
with  the  feet.     The  roughness  of  the  bark  and  the  oblique 
pressure  against  the  trunk  of  the  tree  will  prevent  the  rope 
from  slipping  down. 

27.  To  calculate  the  distance  of  an  enemy's  gun,  count  the 
beats  of  the  pulse  (the  average  pulse  beats  at  the  rate  of  sev- 
enty-five in  a  minute)  between  the  moment  of  the  flash  and  the 
sound  of  the  report  by  300 — the  result  will  be  the  distance  in 
yards.     If  a  watch  be  handy,  the  same  distance,  nearly,  may  be 
determined  by  multiplying  the  number  of  seconds  between  the 
flash  and  report  by  365. 

The  numbers  300  and  365  are  taken  because  easily  memo- 
rized and  giving  results  sufficiently  correct  for  practical  pur- 
poses. 

28.  In  the  following  drawing  is  represented  the  Malay  hitch. 
I  would  urge  that  all  soldiers  and  travelers  become  familiar 
with  it,  and  learn  how,  by  its  means,  to  attach  together  wisps 
of  grass,  straw,  reeds,  poles,  laths,  planks,  etc.,  and  form  flexi- 


74 


Mountain  Scouting. 


l)lc  mattings.      Innumerable  articles,  from  a  boat-sail  to   the 
roof  uf  a  house,  may  be  thus  constructed. 


The  great  advantage  of  the  Malay  hitch  is  that  when  no 
longer  required,  the  structure  may  be  shaken  to  pieces,  leaving 
neither  holes  or  imperfections  in  the  material  nor  kinks  or 
knots  in  the  rope. 

29.  To  dig  for  water  without  spade  or  shovel,  proceed   as 
follows  in  a  soil  free  from  rocks: 

Take  a  bamboo  or  pole  from  six  to  fifteen  feet  long  and  two 
or  three  inches  in  diameter,  and  split  the  larger  and  lower  end 
into  ten  or  twelve  pieces.  Tear  away  the  grass  and  work  the 
pole  up  and  down  vertically.  The  soil  soon  works  its  way  up 
into  the  splits  of  the  pole,  which  is  then  withdrawn.  After 
shaking  the  earth  out,  it  is  again  introduced  into  the  soil  and 
used  as  before.  Small  holes  eight  or  ten  feet  deep  may  be 
made  in  this  way. 

30.  To  procure  water  for  the  stock  when  it  is  inaccessible 
by  reason  of  precipices,  etc.: 

If  in  a  forest  where  poles  are  at  hand,  and  the  water  is  not 
to  be  raised  more  than  fifteen  feet,  take  a  long  pole  and  cause 
it  to  act  as  a  lever  over  a  rock  or  limb,  a  bucket  being  attached 
to  the  long  arm  so  as  to  reach  the  water,  and  a  heavy  stone  or 
rock  to  the  short  one. 

If  the  water  is  to  be  raised  many  feet,  take  a  long  rope,  or 
connect  the  lariats,  and  fasten  the  bucket  to  one  end;  make 
the  other  end  of  the  rope  fast  to  a  horse,  after  passing  it  over 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  75 

a  smooth  log  or  rock,  and  have  the  horse  driven  over  a  certain 
calculated  distance. 

I  have  procured  water,  in  this  way,  from  the  Salmon  river 
when  it  was  ninety-five  feet  below  the  camp. 

31.  If  without  matches,  a  spark  may  be  obtained  as  follows: 
ist.  Take  out  the  object  glass  of  a  telescope,  if  there  be  one, 

and  use  it  as  a  burning  glass.  The  inside  of  a  highly  polished 
watch  case  might  answer. 

2d.  Try  the  Indian  method  of  producing  fire  by  the  friction 
of  two  pieces  of  wood,  called  the  drill  stick  and  the  fire-block. 
Any  hard  and  dry  stick  will  do  for  the  former,  but  the  latter 
must  be  an  inflammable  wood,  with  a  medium  softness  and  little 
grain.  A  walnut  gun  stock  is  excellent.  The  drill  stick  is 
roundly  pointed  at  the  end  and  brought  to  bear  upon  the  fire- 
block  with  pressure,  while  it  is  rapidly  revolved  by  means  of  the 
Hands  or  a  string  passing  around  it. 

A  little  powdered  charcoal  sprinkled  on  the  fire-block  (which 
may  be  scraped  off  the  trees  in  most  any  section  where  forest 
fires  have  raged)  will  greatly  assist  in  the  production  of  the 
spark. 

3d.  By  means  of  a  flint  and  steel.  The  flint  may  be  replaced 
by  silicious  stones — quartz,  agate,  jaspar,  etc.,  or  even  by 
granite.  Crockery  wil1  often  make  a  good  spark.  If  there  be 
no  steel  at  hand,  a  link  of  chain,  a  piece  of  a  bit  or  horse  shoe 
may  be  case-hardened  and  used.  Pyrites  is  frequently  em- 
ployed. 

32.  When  it  is   necessary   to  use  feed  bags  on  the  stock  in 
consequence  of  mud,  sand,  water,  etc.,  it  is  all  important  to 
provide  some  means  of  ventilation.      I  have  seen  horses  suffer 
intensely  when  their  noses  were  confined  in  a  close  feed  bag, 
so  that  the  jaws  could  not  be  opened  without  compressing  the 
nostrils  so  as  to  prevent  the  ingress  of  sufficient  air,  and  this 
for  nearly  an  hour. 


J6  Mountain  Scouting* 

The  drawing  represents  Boyle's  ventilated  nose  bag,  which 
in  every  respect  is  excellent. 


33.  When  traveling  with  a  wagon  train  and  attacked  by  In- 
dians,   if   practicable,    make   the   following   plan  of   defense: 
Hasten  to  the  nearest  water  and  place  one  wagon,  containing 
the  sick  and  the  ammunition,  near  it.     With  this  as  a  center, 
form,  as  nearly  as  possible,  the  other  wagons  in  a  circle  about 
it,   so  that  each  inner  fore  wheel  shall  nearly  touch  the  outer 
hind  wheel  of  the  wagon  preceding,  the  poles  extending  out- 
ward.    Place  the  men  and  stock  inside  the  circle,  lock   the 
wagons  by  means   of   drag   or   other   chains,  and   throw   up 
earth,  rocks,  logs  or  bushes  under  them.     When  desirable,  by 
moving  a  single  wagon  slightly  forward,  the  stock  may  be  led 
out  and  hitched  without  confusion. 

34.  To  secure  a  prisoner  with  the  minimum  amount  of  string, 
bring  his  hands  behind  him,  back  to  back,  and  tightly  tie  the 
thumbs   together,  also  the   little  fingers.     In  the  absence    of 
strings,  a  strip  torn  from  the  linen  will  suffice. 

In  darkness,  or  when  the  prisoner  might  escape  by  running, 
it  is  well  to  pass  his  arms  around  a  standing  tree  or  tent  pole 
before  tying  his  hands. 

Several  prisoners  are  made  fast  to  a  pole  or  rope,  behind  one 
another. 

If  the  prisoner  is  to  be  mounted,  see  that  he  is  made  fast  to 
the  saddle  or  girth  on  the  horse  ridden  by  the  guard  (the  off 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  77 

stirrup  may  be  used  in  absence  of  any  other  fastening),  and 
that  his  ankles  are  strapped  together  under  the  horse's  belly. 

35.  To  trace  a  right  angle  on  the  ground,  take  a  rope  twelve 
feet  long  and  mark  distances  of  three  and  four  feet  from  the 
ends,  respectively.     Peg  the  central  section  of  five  feet  to  the 
ground  and  bring  the  two  ends  of  the  rope  to  a  point  on  the 
ground,  and  thus  form  a  right  angle.      Any  multiple  of  twelve 
feet  may  be  used  for  convenience,  since  any  triangle  whose  sides 
are  in  the  proportion  of  three,  four  and  five,  is  right  angled. 

36.  A  scale  of  equal  parts  may  be  made  by  folding  a  slip  of 
paper  in  half,  then  folding  each  part  in  half,  and  so  on. 

The  diagonal  fold  of  a  sheet  of  paper  with  a  square  corner 
makes  an  angle  of  45°,  or  four  points  of  the  compass.  This 
again  diagonally  folded  will  give  22!°,  or  two  points  of  the  com- 
pass, and  so  on. 

37.  The  meridian  may  be  determined  at  night  by  passing  a 
plane  through  a  plumb-line  and  the  north  star. 


•       .........  *  .......  *  .....  _ 

«  *-  —  ^ 

i         rjrande   Ourse 


1                        * 

I 
\          i- 

fjole  arctiyucf 

T    N 

^    \ 

poiaire 

i 

,/ 

The  trace  of  this  plane  on  a  horizontal  plane  will  be  the  pro- 
jection of  the  meridian  sought,  the  north  star  being  only  ii° 
from  the  true  pole. 


78  Mountain  Scouting. 

It  is  easy  to  recognize  the  north  star — it  is  the  seventh  star 
of  the  little  bear  and  is  found  precisely  in  the  prolongation  of 
the  two  first  stars  of  the  great  bear  (grande  ourse),  a  const;  Na- 
tion disposed  in  symmetrical  order  as  in  the  drawing.  (Aide 
Memoir e  d '  Etat  Major. ) 

To  practically  determine  the  variation  of  the  compass,  erecu 
a  pole,  and  at  a  distance  of  200  yards  set  up  another,  so  that 
the  two  are  in  a  line  with  the  true  north;  the  variation  of  the 
compass  may  be  ascertained  the  next  morning  by  taking  the 
bearing  of  one  pole  from  the  other. 

n(n  4-  i)  (04-  2) 

38.  In  a  triangular  pile  of  spherical  shot,  S  = — 

n(n  4-  i)  (2n  4-  i)  1.2.3 

in  a  square  pile,  S=— ;  in  a  rectangular  pile, 

1.2.3 
n  (n  4-  i)  (2n  4-  yn  +  i) 

S  = ;  where  S  =  number  of  shots,  n  = 

1.2.3 

number  of  courses,  and  m  =  difference  between  the   number 
in  the  length  and  the  number  in  the  breadth  of  the  base  course. 

The  triangular  and  square  piles  terminate  each  in  a  single 
ball. 

The  number  of  balls  in  a  triangular  face  is  found  by  multi- 
plying half  the  number  in  the  breadth  at  the  base  by  the  num- 
ber in  the  breadth  at  the  base  plus  one. 

In  all  piles,  the  breadth  at  the  bottom  is  equal  to  the  number 
of  courses. 

In  an  oblong  pile,  the  top  row  is  one  more  than  the  differ- 
ence between  the  length  and  breadth  of  the  bottom. 

In  the  case  of  Armstrong  shot  or  shell, 
m  r 

S  =  (20  4-  r —  i) ;    where  n  =  the  number  in  the  length 

2 

of  the  top  course,  r  =  the  number  of   courses,  and  m  =  the 
number   in   the   breadth. 

39.  Ink,  in  an  emergency,  may  be  made  by  rubbing  charcoal, 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field. 


79 


gunpowder  or  soot  into  a  little  milk  or  warm  water,  to  which  is 
added  a  small  quantity  of  gum  or  glue.  Very  strong  coffee 
will  make  a  fair  ink  that  will  not  rub. 

40.  The  working  loads  of  hemp  ropes  are  about  as  follows: 


Circumference  of 
rope  in  inclies. 
1             

\ 

V'orki 

If' 
4 

n» 
4 

11 
16 
1 
8* 

16 

44- 

ng  load. 

CWt. 
<  ( 


2     

2i                

3     

3*  . 

1  ton  and 

4  

1    " 

44- 

1    ••       " 

5  . 

..2   "       " 

The  breaking  weight  (in  tons)  of  hemp  rope   is  C*X«8,  and 

C2 

its  weight  (per  fathom)  is  — ,  C  being  the  circumference  of  the 

4 

rope  expressed  in  inches. 

The  working  loads  of  ordinary  chains  are  as  follows: 


Diameter 
of  link. 


Weight  per  Working 

fathom.  load. 

Ibs...  .  0.7  tons. 


8 

..10 

14 

17 

22 

.     2  8 

32 

4.0 

43 

5.5 

.  56 

.  7.0 

Chains  are  heavier  than  ropes,  for  a  given  strength,  in  the 
proportion  of  seven  to  two. 

A  stay  across  the  link  of  a  chain  increases  its  strength  about 
one-sixth. 

41.  The  following  are  good  make-shift  candlesticks:    A  bay- 
onet stuck  into  the  ground;  an  empty  bottle;  a  hollow  bone; 
a  nail  driven  through  a  board  and  projecting  upward;  a  hole 
cut  into  the  ground,  or  into  a  potato,  slice  of  bread,  etc. 

42.  The  formula  for  finding  the  weight  of  animals,  in  pounds, 


8o 


Mountain  Scouting. 


is  (G  x  .08)  L  X  42;  in  which,  G  is  the  girth  in  feet,  taken  close 
behind  the  shoulder,  and  L  is  the  distance  in  feet  from  the 
fore  part  of  the  shoulder  blade  to  the  bone  of  the  tail. 

For  cattle,  fifty  per  cent,  should  be  allowed  for  skin,  offab 
head,  etc.;  about  forty-five  per  cent,  for  sheep;  and  twenty- 
five  per  cent,  for  swine. 

43.  In  the  case  of  beams  supporting  weights  over  ditches, 
ravines,  etc.;  if  the  depth  of  the  beam  be  doubled,  other  things 
equal,  its  strength  will  be  increased  four  times;  if  its  breadth 
be  doubled,  other  things  equal,  its  strength  will  be  doubled. 

By  increasing  the  distance  between  the  supports,  the  strength 
of  the  beam  is  decreased  in  the  same  ratio.  Half  the  distance 
between  the  supports  will  enable  the  beam  to  bear  twice  the  load. 

Place  a  prop  or  skid  under  the  center  of  the  beam,  when 
possible.  If  instead  of  concentrating  the  load  at  the  center  of 
the  beam,  it  be  equally  distributed  over  it,  the  beam  will  bear 
twice  the  load. 

The  effect  of  the  load  on  a  beam  will  decrease  in  the  *-atio 
of  its  proximity  to  the  support.  A  beam  fixed  at  one  end  and 
loaded  at  the  other  will  bear  one-half  the  weight  of  the  same 
when  supported  at  each  end. 

The  strength  of  round  timber  is  about  one-half  of  chat  of 
square  timber,  whose  side  =  the  diameter  of  the  round  timber. 

44.  To  measure  the  breadth  of  a  river  without  instruments 
and  without  crossing  it: 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  81 

ist.  Assume  dc  in  any  direction,  and  make  be  =  bd  (ab 
being  as  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  banks  as  practicable);  then, 
locating  e  on  ac  produced,  make  bf=be\  join  /  and  d  and 
prolong /#  to  ab  at  g;  then  bg  =  ab. 

2d.  Produce  be  until  the  angle  ^0  =  45°;  then,  be  =  ab. 

3d.  Without  reference  to  figure,  the  following  methods  may 
be  used  according  to  the  location  of  the  distance  to  be  meas- 
ured with  respect  to  the  surrounding  country. 

a.  Let  AB  =  the  distance  to  be  measured.     Produce  AB  to 
any  point,  D,  and  bisect  BD  in  C.     Through   D,   draw  Da, 
making  any  angle  with  DA,  and  take  ~Dc  and  D£=DC  and 
DB,    respectively.     Join    B<r,    Cb   and   Kb.     Through    E,    the* 
intersection  of  *Bc  and  Cb,  draw  DEF,  meeting  Kb  in  F.     Join 
BF,  which  being  produced  will  meet  Da  in  a\  then  #£  =  AB. 

b.  From  any  point,  C,  draw  any  line  cC  and  bisect  it  in  D; 
take  any  point,  E,  in  the  prolongation  of  AC  and  draw  the  line 
E<?,  making  De  =  DE.     In  like   manner  take  any  point,  F,  in 
the  prolongation  of  BC,  and  make  D/=  DF.     Produce  AD 
and  ec  till  they  meet  in  b\  then  Kb  =  AB. 

c.  At  any  point,  E,  in  AB  drop  a  perpendicular  and  on  it 
make  E£  =  50  feet,  and  EF  =  60  feet.     Trace  a  line  through 
F  perpendicular  to  EF.     Then  plant  pickets  at  M  and  N,  so 
that  M,  G  and  B  will  be  in  the  same  right  line;  as  also  the 
points  N,  G  and  A.     Measure  the  distance  (d)  between  M  and 
N,  then  the  distance  required  equals  5  d. 

4th.  An  impassable  distance  may  be  determined  by  firing  a 
bullet  at  a  well  defined  mark  at  the  further  end  of  the  distance, 
with  the  sight  adjusted  to  the  estimated  distance,  and  noticing 
whether  the  bullet  falls  short  or  passes  beyond  the  mark. 

It  might  also  be  well  to  remember  that  sound  travels  one 
statute  mile  in  about  4!  seconds,  and  one  geographical  mile  in 
about  5*  seconds. 

5th.  To  measure  AB,  prolong  it  any  distance  to  D;  from  D, 
in  any  direction,  take  equal  distances,  DC  and  G/,  and  produce 


Mountain  Scouting. 


BC  to  b,  making  Cb  =  CB;  join  db  and  pro- 
duce it  to  a,  where  AC  produced  intersects  it; 
then,  ab  —  AB. 

Or  proceed  as  follows:  Lay  off  any  con- 
venient distance,  BC,  perpendicular  to  AB; 
make  CD  perpendicular  to  AC,  and  note 
the  point  D,  where  it  intersects  AB  produced; 

BC2 

measure  BD;  then,  AB  = 

BD 

45.  To  determine  the  height  of  a  tree: 
i st.   By  means  of  its  shadow.     Plant  a  ver- 
tical measured  staff  (L)  and  measure  the  length 
of  its  shadow  (S)  upon  a  horizontal  ground; 
measure  also  the  length  (/)  of  the  shadow  of 
the  object  whose  height  is  to  be  determined; 
a  then, 

L  X  / 

height  of  the  object  = 

S 

2d.  Plant  a  vertical  staff  (equal  in  length  to  the  height  of  the 
observer's  eye)  at  such  distance  from- the  foot  of  the  required 
height  that  the  observer,  lying  upon  his  back  with  his  feet 
against  the  bottom  of  the  staff,  is  in  the  same  line.  Then,  the 
height  of  the  object  =  the  distance  from  the  eye  to  its  base. 

3d.  Plant  two  vertical  staves  L  and  L1  feet  in  length,  on  the 
horizontal  plane  through  the  base  of  the  object,  so  that  their 
tops  and  the  top  of  the  object,  whose  height  is  required,  are 
in  the  same  right  line.  Measure  the  distances  D  and  D1  be- 
tween the  staves  and  between  L  and  the  base  of  the  object. 
L  x  D1  x  (L1— L) 

Then,  the  height  = 

D 

4th.  If  you  have  a  looking-glass,  place  it  upon  the  ground 
and  level  it  by  placing  a  cup  full  of  water  upon  it;  retire  until 
the  top  of  the  object  is  seen  reflected  in  it.  Then,  the  height 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  33 

>f  the  object  equals  the  height  of  the  eye  above  the  mirror, 
multiplied  by  the  distance  of  mirror  from  the  object  divided  by 
the  distance  of  mirror  from  the  observer. 

These  methods  apply  only  to   such  objects   as   trees,  walls, 
precipices,   etc.,   where  the   highest    point  is  vertically    above 
the  accessible  base.     Still,  when  the  base  is  not  accessible,  its 
distance  may  be  readily  calculated,  as  shown  in  paragraph  44. 
To  determine  the  height  of  a  mountain  by  means  of  a  ther- 
mometer: Let   T  =  the   temperature   of  boiling  water   at   any 
station,  deducted  from  212°;  and   H  =  the  height,   in  feet,   of 
the  station  above  the  sea.     Boil  some  water  and  ascertain  T  by 
leans  of  the  thermometer;  then,  H  =  52oT  +  T2. 
To  determine  its  height  by   means  of  a  barometer  and  ther- 
lometer:    Observe  the   altitudes  A  and  A1  of  the  mercurial 
:olumn  in  inches  and  fractions  of  an  inch,   at  the  base  and 
summit  of  the  mountain.      Also,  note  the  mean  of  the  readings 
>f  the  thermometer  (Fahrenheit)  at  the  times  of  the  baromet- 
•ical  observations.     Then,  height  of  mountain  (in  feet)  = 

A— A1 

55,000  X 

AA1 

For  a  mean  temperature  of  55°  Fahrenheit,  augment  or 
diminish  this  result  by  its  ^  part  taken  as  many  times  as  there 
is  a  difference  (in  degrees)  between  the  mean  readings  noted 
and  55°.  The  determined  height,  when  not  greater  than  2,000 
feet,  will  be  very  accurate. 

46.  The  "  Toe  and  Side  Weights  "  shown  in  the  drawing  are 


excellent  for  all  horses  that  knee-knock,  hitch,  click,  interfere, 


84  Mountain  Scouting. 

or  single  foot.  They  are  entirely  metallic,  without  straps  or 
buckles,  and  are  held  on  the  foot  by  small  steel  screws,  which 
pass  through  the  shoe  and  into  the  spurs  on  the  weights.  A 
few  should  be  taken  on  every  journey  with  stock. 

47.  The  weight  (in  pounds)  of  an  iron  shot  =  the  diameter 
cubed  X^T;  the  weight  (in  pounds)  of  a  leaden  shot  =  the  di- 
ameter cubed  x  A;  the  diameter  (in  inches)  of  an  iron  shot  = 
(the  cube  root  of  the  weight)  x  1.923;  the  diameter  (in  inches) 
of  a  leaden  shot  =  the  cube  root  of  4*  times  the  weight. 

The  weight  (in  pounds)  of  an  iron  shell  =  A  x  (the  difference 
of  the  cubes  of  the  external  and  internal  diameters). 

The  weight  of  powder  (in  pounds)  contained  in  a  shell  equals 
the  cube  (in  inches)  of  the  interior  diameter 

^57-3 

The  weight  of  powder  (in  pounds)  required  to  fill  a  box 
equals  the  continued  product 

of  the  inches  in  the  length,  breadth  and  depth 

30 

If  the  powder  is  not  shaken,  divide  by  31.4182  instead  of  30. 
The  weight  of  powder  (in  pounds)  to  fill  a  cylinder  equals 
the  length  (in  inches)  x  square  of  the  diameter 


The  diameter,  in  inches,  of  a  shell  to  contain  a  weight  of 
powder  =  (the  cube  root  of  the  number  of  pounds)  X  57.3. 

The  length  of  the  bore  of  a  gun  (in  inches)  filled  by  n 
pounds  of  powder  equals 

72x38.2 

square  of  the  diameter  of  bore 

48.  It  is  important  to  learn  how  to  use  the  lasso.  It  consists 
of  a  very  strong  thin  plaited  rope  made  of  raw  hide.  One  end 
is  attached  to  the  saddle,  the  other  end  forms  a  noose.  When 
going  to  use  it,  the  rider  keeps  a  small  coil  in  his  bridle  hand, 
and  in  the  other  holds  the  running  noose,  ^having  a  diameter 


Useful  Information  in  Post  and  Field.  85 


from  3  to  8  feet;  this  he  whirls  around  his  head,  and  by  a  dex- 
terous movement  of  the  wrist  keeps  the  noose  open;  then, 
throwing  it,  he  causes  it  to  fall  over  the  head  of  the  animal. 

49.  At  30  yards,  a  person  with  ordinary  sight  can  distinguish 
the  white  of  the  eye;  at  80  yards,  the  eyes  can  be  seen;  at  100 
yards,  the  body  and  movements  of  same  can  be  seen  and  the 
buttons  counted;  at  200  yards,  the  buttons  look  like  faint 
stripes;  at  300  yards,  the  features  of  the  face  are  distinguish- 
able; at  400  yards,  the  face  appears  like  a  dot,  and  the  move- 
;nts  of  the  legs  and  arms  are  distinct;  at  500  yards,  the  head  is 
ible;  at  600  yards,  individual  movements  are  observed,  but 
tails  disappear;  at  700  yards,  the  movements  of  the  legs  and 
ns  become  indistinct;  at  800  yards,  individual  movements 
cannot  be  observed;  at  900  yards,  the  head  appears  like  a  dot; 
at  1,000  yards,  a  line  of  men  appear  like  a  broad  ragged  line; 
2,000  yards,  infantry  presents  a  thick  line  with  a  bright  one 
bove  it,  cavalry  a  thicker  one  with  an  uneven  top  and  a  single 
an  or  horse  looks  like  a  dot. 

The  sun  on  your  back,  or  looking  over  a  light  surf  ice,  such 
water  or  snow,  tends  to  make  objects  look  near;  while  with 
he  sun  in  your  face,  or  looking  ->ver  a  lark  jackground  or  un- 
ulating  surface,  has  the  contrary  effect. 

50.  To  prevent  a  mule  from  braying,  when  silence  is  neces- 
ry  in  a  hostile  country,  tie  a  heavy  rock  to  his  tail.     A  mule 

invariably  elevates  his  tail  when  he  wishes  to  bray,  and  if  this 
heavily  weighted  down,  an  end  is  put  to  one  of  the  greatest 
f  nuisances. 

The  Indians  cruelly  avoid  such  noises  by  so  placing  a  needle 
hat  it  will  prick  the  mule  whenever  he  endeavors  to  open  his 
jaws. 

51.  The  Block  House  is  a  useful  defense  against  Indians  in 
a  mountainous  country,  where  the  surrounding  heights  cannot 
be  held. 

They  are  usually  placed  at  the  two  diagonal  corners  of  a 
picket  work.     Its  plan  should  have  re-entering  angles,  or  be  m 


86 


Mountain  Scouting. 


the  form  of  a  cross,  so  that  the  faces  may  be  defended  by  flank 
fires.  When  used  against  Indians,  without  artillery,  square 
logs,  laid  on  each  other,  replace  the  usual  double  row  of  piles. 


A— 


The  height  of  each  story  should  be  about  ten  feet,  the  upper 
one  projecting  all  around  and  serving  as  a  machicoulis.  The 
roof  should  have  a  layer  of  earth  or  sand  upon  it,  as  a  guard 
against  fire,  and  escapes  should  be  provided  in  it  for  the  smoke. 
All  trees  an'd  bushes,  within  range,  that  would  afford  cover, 
should  be  removed,  if  possible. 

52.  All  travelers  should  endeavor  to  be  'weather  wise,'  and 
a  small  aneroid  barometer  should  be  carried  and  frequently 
observed. 

A  change  of  the  moon  greatly  influences  the  weather.  A 
halo  around  the  moon  indicates  approaching  wet  weather;  the 
greater  the  circle  the  nearer  the  rain.  It  is  generally  believed 
that  *  the  third  day  before  the  new  moon  regulates  the  weather 
on  each  quarter-day  of  that  lunation,  and  also  characterizes  the 


Vseful  Information  in  Post  and  Field. 


general  aspect  of  the  whole  period.  Thus,  if  the  new  moon 
happened  on  the  26th  of  May  the  term  day  was  the  24th;  the 
weather  of  that  day  was  to  be  that  of  the  26th  and  the  3d,  nth 
and  ipth  of  June,  the  quarter-days,  respectively.' 

Fine  weather  may  be  expected  when  swallows  fly  high;  but 
when  they  or  any  birds  of  long  flight  hang  about  home  or  fly 
p  and  down  or  low,  rain  and  wind  may  be  expected.  When 
the  stock  seek  sheltered  places  and  do  not  cover  their  usual 
range,  when  smoke  does  not  ascend  readily  during  a  calm,  an 
unfavorable  change  must  be  expected. 

Dew  and  fog  are  indications  of  fine  weather — neither  occurs 
under  an  overcast  sky,   or  when  the  wind  is  blowing. 

A  constant  study  of  the  heavenly  phenomena  will  enable  any- 
ne  to  know  what  sort  of  sky  precedes  a  storm  or  fair  weather. 


88  Mountain  Scouting, 


CHAPTER  V. 
EQUIPAGE  AND  SUPPLIES. 

When  a  regular  command  is  ordered  into  the  field,  the 
commanding  officer  should  use  his  own  discretion  in  desig- 
nating the  equipage,  supplies  and  individual  outfits  to  be 
taken.  The  following  observations  may,  however,  be  use- 
ful, when  with  a  view  to  comfort  and  efficiency,  certain  de- 
viations from  the  general  regulations  are  permitted. 

CLOTHING. 

The  importance  of  flannel  (or  cotton  in  its  absence,)  next 
to  the  skin  cannot  be  overrated.  Both  shirt  and  drawers 
should  be  made  of  well  shrunken  material  of  good  quality 
and  unobtrusive  color.  The  shirts  should  be  supplied  with 
turn-down  collars  and  breast  pockets,  which  are  very  con- 
venient for  holding  a  variety  of  small  articles  when  no 
waistcoat  is  worn.  Long  woolen  stockings,  to-be  worn 
with  shoes  and  over  the  bottoms  of  the  pants  should  also 
be  taken.  The  Government  woolen  sock  is  excellent,  but 
in  a  locality  where  the  ground  is  very  hot,  I  prefer  some- 
thing still  thicker.  For  the  coat  and  waistcoat,  nothing 
can  surpass  the  Goodyear  garments.  A  waterproof  or  can- 
vas blouse,  cut  sufficiently  short  to  clear  the  saddle  and  pro- 
vided with  numerous  convenient  pockets,  will  be  useful  and 
handy  on  all  occasions. 

The  drawings  show  the  outside  and  inside  finish  of  a  con- 
venient pattern. 


Equipage  and  Supplies. 


89 


The  waistcoat,  generally  worn  without  the  coat,  should 
be  cut  rather  long,  have  several  pockets  and,  by  means  of 
bands  tacked  on  it,  be  made  to  carry,  like  a  cartridge  belt, 
about  twenty  cartridges. 

The  pants  should  be  constructed  of  thick  woolen  material, 
reinforced  on  the  inside  where  they  touch  the  saddle,  with 
soft  buckskin  or  leather.  They  may  be  greatly  protected 
by  wearing  a  light  pair  of  overalls.  There  should  be  no 
hem  at  the  bottoms  of  the  legs,  as  the  dampness  is  thus  re- 
tained for  a  long  time. 

In  the  selection  of  all  outer  clothing  some  attention  should 
be  paid  to  color.  Gray,  buff,  or  neutral  tints  not  only  ab- 
sorb but  little  heat  in  very  warm  weather,  but  are  the  least 
conspicuous. 

A  soft  and  dark  felt  hat,  with  a  moderately  wide  brim,  is 
the  best  headdress.  A  pair  of  warm  mittens  and  a  pair  of 
stout  driving  gloves,  with  buckskin  put  in  between  the  fing- 
ers, will  suffice  for  the  hand  covering.  A  few  silk  or  cotton 
handkerchiefs  for  neckwear  are  indispensable. 

As  a  general  thing,  when  on^a  rugged  trail,  boots  rapid- 
ly impair  the  soundness  of  the  feet,  and  are  most  judici- 
ously replaced  by  flexible  low-cut  shoes,  covered  with  buck- 
skin leggings,  of  the  style  represented,  or  worn  with  long 


90  Mountain  Scouting. 


woolen  stockings    containing  the  bottoms  of    the  pants,  so 
as  to  protect  from  the  sun,  dust,  snake  bites,  etc. 

If  boots  must  be  worn,  considering  comfort  and  econo 
my,  I  know  no  pattern  preferable  to  the  Government  B.  S. 
boots.  They  should  be  selected  about  one  size  too  large 
and  so  as  to  come  well  up  to  the  knee  and  fit  the  leg  com- 
pactly, after  admitting  the  bottoms  of  the  pants.  They 
should  have  broad  soles  and  low  heels,  and  be  sufficiently 
flexible  to  allow  the  wearer  to  walk  with  freedom. 

When  traveling  through  snows,  light  moccasins  covering 
two  pairs  of  woolen  socks,  are  excellent.  The  Indians  wear 
the  lightest  possible  moccasin  on  all  occasions,  probably  be- 
cause of  comfort  and  the  custom  of  creeping  up  on  game 
without  any  noise. 

I  have  often  found  comfort  in  a  dressing  gown  while  in 
the  field.  Such  a  garment  is  a  relief  when  put  on  after 
making  camp,  or  when  around  the  campfire,  and  serves  as  a 
warm  extra  dress  in  which  to  sleep.  A  pair  of  old  slippers 
is  another  luxury  in  the  camp. 

THE  TOILET. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  dirt  and  grease  protect  the 
skin  against  inclement  weather.  An  Indian  will  seldom 
wash  unless  he  can  grease  himself  afterwards — and  with 
him,  in  many  instances,  grease  takes  the  place  of  clothing. 

We  can  readily  see  the  necessity  of  an  equality  of  the  ac- 
tivity of  the  skin  and  the  calls  upon  it,  and  why,  when  ex 
posure  is  very  great,  the  pores  should  be  defended. 

No  very  extensive  preparation  is  necessary  in  this  part  of 
the  outfit,  but  the  traveler  should  see  that  he  has  his  tooth 
brush,  comb  and  brush,  a  few  towels,  both  large  and  small, 
and  soap,  all  placed  in  a  water-proof  wrapper  or  traveling- 


Equipage  and  Supplies.  91 

case  made  for  the  occasion.  This  part  of  the  outfit  should 
be  transported  upon  the  saddle,  in  the  saddle  bags  or  in  the 
clothing  bag  in  order  tnat  the  articles  may  be  convenient 
for  use  upon  arriving  in  camp.  The  soap  may  be  nicely 
kept  and  preserved  in  a  suitable  tin  box. 

1  do  not  think  it  well,  in  rough  travel,  to  wash  in  the  early 
i  art  of  a  dark  wintry  morning.  The  best  time  is  after  the 
morning's  ride  or  march,  or  after  making  an  early  camp. 

BEDDING. 

It  is  absurd  for  a  soldier  to  take  a  mattress  in  the  field, 
even  on  a  short  journey.  A  buffalo  robe  and  three  blank- 
ets;  or  even  the  blankets,  poncho  and  the  allowance  of  can- 
vas, will,  if  properly  placed,  make  a  most  inviting  bed. 

I  have  used  with  great  satisfaction  what  is  known  as  the 


ter  bed.  It  is  made  of  strong,  light  rubber.  When  not  in 
Use,  it  may  be  wrapped  about  the  clothing  bag,  inside  the 
on  Her  canvas  covering,  and  will  form  a  waterproof  protec- 
tion for  its  contents.  When  required  for  use,  it  is  filled  with 
water  and  placed  upon  the  ground  or  bed. 

Elie  water  pillow  is  another  invaluable  article    of  similar 
and  construction.       When  being  transported  this  may 
be  wrapt  about  official  papers  and  will  prove  a  good  protec- 
tion for  them  in  case  the  pack  should,  by  accident,  go  under 
the  water. 

When  preparing  the  pillow  for  use,  it  is  easily  filled  with 


92  Mountain  Scouting. 

air  exhaled  from   the  body  and  is  made  to  assume  any  de- 


gree of  softness  by  varying  its  contents  of  air. 

In  many  camps  water  is  a  scarce  article,  and  in  order  to 
be  on  the  safe  side,  I  would  recommend  an  air  bed  and  pil- 
low, and  for  convenience  would  have  them  combined  in  one. 


In  addition  to  the  clothing  and  bedding,  it  is  a  good  plan 
to  have  a  small  satchel  or  sort  of  'ditty  bag'  accompany  the 
personal  outfit.  It  should  contain  thread,  needles,  wax,  a 
roll  of  tape,  a  ball  of  twine,  a  few  buttons  of  all  sorts,  a  pa- 
per of  pins,  a  bodkin,  a  thimble,  a  pair  of  scissors,  a  few  shoe- 
strings, a  small  awl  or  sail  needle  and  some  buckskin. 

The  provision  of  a  suitable  quantity  of  reading  matter 
and  writing  materials  should  never  be  neglected. 


The  drawing  shows  an  ingenious  contrivance  for  fasten- 


Equipage  and  Supplies.  93 


tg  on  buttons  which  is  of  great  use  in  the  field.     A  few  of 
ese  fasteners  may  be  carried  in  the  vest  or  hip  pocket,  and 
a  button  lost  while  on  the  march  may  be  easily  replaced. 

Before  leaving  the  settlements,  each  man  should  provide 
some  means  of  exactly  measuring  feet  and  inches.  It  is 
well  to  mark  a  scale  of  inches  on  something  sure  to  be  at 
hand,  for  instance  on  the  gun-stock  or  inside  the  belt.  I 
would  recommend  that  every  man  know  his  height,  the  full 
stretch  of  his  extended  arms,  the  exact  height  of  his  eye 
above  the  ground  when  standing  and  when  kneeling,  his 
cubit,  the  length  of  his  foot,  the  width  of  his  fingers  and 
the  exact  amount  contained  in  his  cup  or  canteen.  Some 
of  these  will  daily  prove  a  convenient  unit  of  measurement. 


The  small  combination  mirror,  pin  cushion  and  tape 
leasure  here  represented  is  very  useful,  may  easily  be  trans- 
ported in  the  pocket  and  will  be  called  into  frequent  requi- 
sition. 

The  clothing,  bedding  and  personal  effects  are  usually 
rolled  tightly  and  tied  up  in  the  tent  or  canvas  when  pre- 
pared for  transportation.  Most  frequently  a  modification 


94  Mountain  Scouting. 

of  the  Tente  d'  Abri  of  the  French,  is  furnished  our  scout- 
ing columns  in  the  field  and  is  well  suited  for  such  work; 
but,  when  there  is  left  any  choice  or  selection  in  the  matter 
of  canvas,  it  may  be  very  much  improved  upon. 

In  selecting  the  tent,  one  should  consider  its  lightness,  its 
capability  of  being  quickly  pitched  (and  in  different  ways 
depending  upon  the  climate  and  the  facilities  for  securing 
poles,)  its  ventilation,  its  capability  of  neatly  enclosing  the 
bundle  and  serving  as  a  waterproof  covering  for  the  bed 
when  not  pitched,  but  merely  wrapped  about  it 

It  is  believed  that  the  author's  Combination  Shelter, 
Storm  and  Common  Tent  better  meets  the  requirements  of 
the  tentage,  to  be  used  in  all  climates  and  independently 
of  the  transportation,  than  any  other  that  has  been  tested. 

The  tent  may  be  made  on  a  large  scale    and  will  well  re- 


place the  present  form  of  Hospital  Tent,  affording  a  max- 
imum available  sheltered  space  for  the  minimum  amount 
of  canvas  and  will  admit  of  being  combined  so  as  to  form 
a  single  shelter  for  any  number  of  men,  standing  either  high 
or  low.  This  combination  tent  (service  size)  and  its  capa- 
bilities will  be  noticed  at  length  in  the  chapter  'Forced 
Marches.' 

The  French  Officers'  Tent,  here  represented,  is  a  very  sat- 
isfactory one    so  far  as  room   and  lightness    are  concerned, 


Equipage  and  Supplies.  95 

>ut  it  possesses  the  disadvantages  of  numerous  pegs  and  guy 
ropes  and  not  being  suitable  for  wrapping  about  the  bundle. 


Every  man,  on  going  into  the  field  should  take  an  extra 
lariat,  as  one  will  generally  wear  out  during  a  long  journey, 
and  besides,  they  will  be  found  very  useful  in  making  the 
bundles  secure  and  in  crossing  deep  streams,  etc.  If  the 
transportation  will  admit  of  it,  a  coil  of  half-inch  rope  should 
also  be  taken. 

A  few  extra  locks,  screws,  springs,  tumblers,  etc.,  should 
be  taken  along,  in  order  to  keep  the  arms  in  thorough  re- 
pair. 

A  sufficient  number  of  spades  and  axes  (a  few  hatchets 
never  come  amiss)  should  be  packed  with  the  equipage.  A 
small  hand  saw,  a  rasp,  a  few  gimlets,  brad-awls,  saddler's 
awls,  nails,  screws  and  coils  of  wire  packed  closely  in  a 
small  chest  or  canvas  roll  will  be  found  well  worth  the 
transportation  and  frequently  useful. 

A  good  hunting  knife  is  indispensable,  and  I  know  noth- 
ing more  valuable  in  this  connection  than  the  trowel  bayo- 
net of  Colonel  Rice  (one  edge  kept  sharp.)  While  invaluable 
as  an  intrenching  tool,  the  soldier  soon  learns  to  use  it  as  a 
knife,  a  hatchet,  a  spade  and  chopping  axe. 

A  proper  supply  of  horse  and  mule  shoes  and  nails  should 
be  carefully  provided.  They  should  be  transported  in  sev- 
eral small  leather  or  canvas  sacks,  each  furnished  with  a 
hammer,  rasp  and  pincers,  which  will  become  very  handy 
in  case  the  command  is  divided  into  detachments. 


96 


Mountain  Scouting. 


The  value  and  importance  of   a  portaole  forge  cannot  be 
overestimated.     The  drawing  represents  a  convenient  form. 


It  is  very  simple  in  its  construction,  gives  a  strong  and 
steady  blast,  with  but  little  labor,  and  its  dimensions  are 
such  that  it  may  be  easily  packed  in  a  cracker  box  and  form 
a  very  handy  side  or  top  pack  for  the  pack  mule.  This  forge 
is  twelve  inches  by  seventeen  inches  and  fifteen  inches  in 
height,  has  a  seven  inch  fan,  and  weighs  a  little  less  than  fif- 
ty pounds.  In  case  there  be  no  forge  or  no  facilities  for  shoe- 
ing the  animals,  it  will  be  well  to  provide  a  few  sandals  like 
represented  in  the  _g^tfl£  drawing,  to  be  used 

in  case  a  horse  loses  his  shoe  and  cannot 

Sufficient  has  been  W|i  ^jjir  already  said  in  con- 
nection with  the  ^JH^r  horse  equipment; 
but  make  sure  that  the  saddle  is  sufficiently  roomy,  well 
padded  and  without  hem  or  edging. 


Equipage  and  Supplies. 


97 


A  pair  of  light  saddle  bags  should  al- 
ways accompany  the  saddle.  The  draw- 
ing represents  a  very  suitable  style, manu- 
factured especially  for  scouting  purposes, 
and  furnished  with  a  small  assortment  of 
instruments  and  necessities  for  the  march. 

The  smaller  the  spurs  the  better,  un- 
less the  animal  is  very  lazy;  then,  a  pair 
of  substantial  Mexican  spurs,  with  wide 
straps,  will  be  found  the  most  satisfacto- 
ry kind  of  'persuader.' 


U  9 


It  is  a  good  rule  to  leave  behind  all  notions  of  snaffles 
and  double  reins,  and  to  ride  with  nothing  but  an  easy  curb. 
A  temporary  but  not  desirable  substitute  for  the  curb  may  be 
made  by  noosing  a  string,  and  putting  the  noose  around 
the  horse's  lower  jaw. 

Have  no  more  buckles  in  the  equipment  than  are  abso- 
lutely needed.  Nothing  tends  to  weaken  a  bridle  or  strap 
so  much  during  exposure  as  the  rusting  out  of  buckles  and 
the  pulling  through  of  their  tongues.  Both  are  sources  of 
endless  annoyance. 

The  ration,  as  established  for  the  U.  S.  Army,  is  composed 
of  twelve  ounces  of  pork  or  bacon,  or  one  pound  and  four 
ounces  of  salt  or  fresh  beef  ;  one  pound  and  two  ounces  of 
soft  bread  or  flour,  or  one  pound  of  hard  bread,  or  one  pound 
and  four  ounces  of  corn  meal.  To  every  one  hundred 


98  Mountain  Scouting. 

rations,  fifteen  pounds  of  beans  or  peas,  or  ten  pounds  of 
rice  or  hominy;  ten  pounds  of  green  coffee  or  eight  pounds 
of  roasted  (or  roasted  and  ground)  coffee,  or  one  pound  and 
eight  ounces  of  tea;  fifteen  pounds  of  sugar;  four  quarts  of 
vinegar;  one  pound  and  four  ounces  of  adamantine  or  star 
candles;  four  pounds  of  soap;  three  pounds  and  twelve 
ounces  of  salt;  four  ounces  of  pepper;  thirty  pounds  of  po- 
tatoes (when  practicable)  and  one  quart  of  molasses. 

Citric  Acid  may  be  easily  transported,  and  when  mixed 
with  sugar  and  water,  makes  a  very  refreshing  drink  and  an 
excellent  antiscorputic.  A  small  supply  should  always  ac- 
company the  rations. 

Beans,  peas,  salt  and  potatoes  (fresh)  are  to  be  purchased 
by  weight  sixty  pounds  to  the  bushel.  Desiccated  com- 
pressed vegetables  may  be  substituted  for  beans,  peasy  rice, 
hominy  or  fresh  potatoes  at  the  rate  of  one  ounce  to  the  ra- 
tion. 

One  ration,  consisting  of  ^  pork,  ^  salt  beef,  %  bacon; 
Y>2,  flour,  YZ  bread,  in  boxes;  beans  or  peas;  rice  or  hom- 
iny ;  24  roasted  and  ground  coffee,  ^  tea ;  sugar,  vin- 
egar, adamantine  candles,  soap,  salt,  pepper,  molasses  and 
potatoes,  weighs  3.0311  pounds  net. 

One  ration,  consisting  of  )^  pork,  ^  salt  beef,  ^  bacon  ; 
bread  in  boxes,  beans  or  peas  ;  rice  or  hominy  ;  ^  roasted 
and  ground  coffee,  ^  tea,  sugar,  vinegar,  adamantine  cand- 
les, soap,  salt,  pepper  and  molasses,  weighs  2.5436  pounds 
net. 

It  is  not  advisable  to  transport  pork  on  pack  mules,  as  it 
soon  becomes  dried  by  the  sun,  and  much  of  the  fat  is 
melted  out.  A  succulent  fifty  pound  pack,  after  a  few  weeks' 
transportation,  will  dwindle  away  to  a  hard  chunk  of  fif- 
teen or  twenty  pounds. 

The  number  of  rations  to  be  carried  will  depend  upon  the 
size  of  the  party,  the  extent  of  the  journey,  the  possibility  of 
procuring  rations,  and  the  amount  of  game  that  can  be  se- 


Equipage  and  Supplies. 


99 


cured  by  the  hunting  detachment.  It  is  a  golden  rule  to  set 
out  with  the  mules  lightly  loaded,  and  an  excellent  plan  to 
discreetly  cache  a  portion  of  the  supplies  when  there  is  a  cer- 
tainty of  at  least  a  part  of  the  command  retracing  the  'trail.' 
In  connection  with  packing  and  transportation,  it  will  be 
useful  to  remember  the  following  measurements  and  capa- 
cities: 

A  box  4  in.  by     4  in.  by  3.6  in.  will  hold  about  i  qt. 

"        5  in.  by     5  in.  by     5  in.  "       2  qts. 

"        8  in.  by  8.4  in.  by     8  in.  "       i  pk. 

"      24  in.  by   16  in.  by  28  in.  "       i  bbl. 

The  messing  outfit  will  be  noticed  in  the  chapter  'The 
Mess;'  but  make  sure  that  the  cooking  implements  and  table 
necessaries  are  so  selected  as  to  nest  compactly.  The  camp 
kettles  may  enclose  the  dishpans,  and  these  the  skillets  and 
smaller  articles.  It  is  best  with  a  view  to  packing  to  have 
the  skillets,  fryingpans,  etc.,  so  constructed  that  a  spoon 


may  be  applied  as  a  handle,  and  removed  when  not  in  use 
or  when  packed.     The  drawing  shows  the  idea. 

The  buckets  should  be  made  of  rubber     or  canvas,    and 


should  be  constructed  with  folding  frames,  as  shown  in  the 
drawing.  Such  buckets  will  sustain  great  pressure  without 
giving,  and  when  folded  for  transportation  will  occupy  an 
exceedingly  small  space. 


ico  Mountain  Scouting. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

MOUNTAIN  TRAVEL. 

A  good  mountaineer  is  usually  guided  by  the  same  instinct 
that  carries  the  bee  to  its  hive.  By  day  he  uses  the  sun  and 
the  prominent  landmarks  ;  while  in  his  night  marches,  the 
stars  may  serve  to  give  the  direction.  Polaris  and  Ursa  Ma- 
jor, or  the  Southern  Cross,  give  the  north  and  south  bear- 
ing, while  the  Zodiacal  stars  indicate  the  east  and  west 
points.  It  is  seldom  that  the  ordinary  traveler,  even  when 
provided  with  compass,  sextant  and  chronometer  and  after 
careful  practice  and  cultivation,  becomes  skilled  in  moun- 
tain craft. 

In  a  mountainous  country,  where  the  routes  of  possible 
travel  are  few,  a  guide  with  a  good  local  knowledge  is  very 
desirable  ;  for  the  compass  is  by  no  means  sure  when  in  the 
vicinity  of  granitic  rocks  (rich  in  hornblende  and  other  iron 
bearing  ores).  Unless  possessing  a  local  knowledge  of  the 
country,  guides  are  only  useful  when  water  and  camping  pla- 
ces are  scarce  and  must  be  hunted  and  when  messengers 
may  be  needed. 

Before  going  into  the  mountains,  if  possible,  a  map  should 
be  secured,  correctly  showing  the  large  streams,  their 
general  directions  and  important  tributaries, — and  the 
line  of  march  and  probable  location  of  the  camp  should 
be  noted  on  the  map  daily.  It  will  not  do  to  trust  too 
much  to  the  'bump  of  locality,'  but  every  'sign'  indicating 
direction  should  be  carefully  considered.  In  some  lati- 
tudes the  moss  grows  much  thicker  and  stronger  on  the 
north  side  of  the  firs  and  pines,  which  fact  may  enable  the 
traveler  to  direct  his  course  through  the  forest  in  the  ab- 
sence of  all  other  guides.  Again,  the  ripples  in  the  snow  on 
the  mountain  tops  often  run  in  fixed  directions,  in  conse- 
quence of  constant  winds,  and  these  may  serve  as  a  gu.ide. 


Mountain    Tuwl. 


101 


In  order  to  successfully  travel  the,  m,o,iintains,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  understand  their  complete  /m^kfe  , up' ;  und  •  :n  know 
how  to  skillfully  follow  the  divides.  When  the  divide  A  E  B 


separates  the  waters  of  two  streams  not  uniting  with  each 
other,  as  C  and  D  in  the  drawing,  it  is  known  as  a  principal 
divide,  and  always  affords  the  best  route  of  travel. 

The  sides  of  canyons  and  ravines  are  frequently  so  pre- 
cipitous that  it  is  neither  advisable  nor  possible  to  cross 
them  ;  and  although  it  is  sometimes  easy  traveling  along 
the  bottoms  (the  level  land  enclosed  between  the  sides,) 
when  not  too  narrow  and  rocky,  the  best  route  will,  consid- 
ing  all  things,  be  found  along  the  divides.  Such  a  route -is 
frequently  long  and  crooked,  but  it  is  a  ^  >od  one. 

Suppose  it  be  required  to  pass  from  the  stream  C  to  the 
stream  Z>,  parallel  to  it,  but  separated  from  it  by  very  high 
and  broken  mountains. 

To  accomplish  this  most  expeditiously,  follow  up  the 
stream  to  C,  where  we  will  suppose  a  tributary  of  the  stream 
puts  in.  Now  if  there  be  a  good  route,  apparently,  over  the 
divide  above  this  tributary,  turn  to  the  right  and  follow  it, 
until  the  principal  divide  is  reached  at  E,  The  route,  if 


IO2  AJoiint-iin  Scouting. 

practicable,  may  be  taken  aiowg  the  bottom,  should  water 
be  desicab-.e,  ac  far  as  necessary  and  then  the  divide  C E  may 
be  taken.  Having  reached  the  principal  divide,  pass  over  it 
and  descend  by  any  suitable  and  practical  divide  as  E  D, 
leading  from  the  principal  divide,  to  the  other  stream.  It 
will  be  found  that  all  the  divides  lead  to  the  principal  di- 
vide,'and  hence  there  will  be  no  doubt  as  to  finding  the 
principal  divide;  but  it  will  often  require  good  judgment  in 
selecting  the  most  practicable  divide  leading  to  it.  It  will  be 
still  more  difficult  to  select  the  practicable  divide  in  descend- 
ing, as  all  appear  more  or  less  practicable  from  the  summit. 
The  innumerable  cul  de  sacs,  met  within  descending,  can  on- 
ly be  avoided  by  exercising  great  caution.  In  every  case 
the  divide  selected  should  separate  tributary  ravines  of  two 
important  tributaries  of  the  stream.  It  is  seen  in  the  draw- 
ing how  these  ravines  frequently  overlap  each  other  and  ren- 
der the  route  very  sinuous. 

It  is  recommended  to  follow  game  trails,  when  discovered, 
in  passing  from  one  stream  to  another.  They  usually  fol- 
low the  most  direct  and  practicable  route  over  a  fair  divide. 
When  arriving  at  the  steep  edge  of  a  ridge,  and  where  dif- 
ficulty in  finding  a  good  trail  is  anticipated,  it  is  a  safe 
rule  to  descend  first,  on  foot,  and  seek  a  trail  for  the  com- 
mand or  train  as  you  climb  back  again.  It  is  much  easier 
to  make  this  selection  while  ascending  than  while  descend- 
ing ;  for  when  at  the  bottom  of  a  hill,  its  bluffs  and  preci- 
pices face  you,  so  that  they  may  be  readily  avoided,  but 
when  at  the  top  of  the  hill  these  parts  are  overlooked  and 
not  seen,  until  closely  approached. 

The  investigation  of  ravines  is  the  exact  reverse  of  that  of 
the  divides;  but  localities  are  much  more  readily  lost  when 
the  ravines  proceed  thence  in  various  directions.  On  cross- 
ing a  divide  and  coming  upon  a  system  of  ravines  leading 
to  a  different  principal  ravine,  the  traveler  should  make  very 
sure  of  his  course  and  frequently  take  the  bearings  of  the 
most  prominent  landmarks. 


Mountain   Travel.  103 

A  person  may  be  readily  lost  in  the  mountains,  and  it  is 
never  safe  to  stray  off  from  the  camp  or  command  when 
alone.  Should  necessity  demand  it,  however,  it  will  prove 
an  excellent  rule  to  take  along  the  rifle  and  a  good  supply 
of  ammunition  and  matches. 

Observation  goes  to  show  that  the  horse  and  other  ani- 
mals, when  running  on  an  open  ground,  will  gradually  turn 
their  courses  to  the  left.  The  same  is  true  of  man,  when 
lost  on  the  prairies  and  cut  off  from  all  guiding  marks  or 
objects — and  it  is  still  more  the  case,  when  he  is  lost  in  the 
mountains,  the  irregularities  of  the  route  of  travel  seeming 
to  confuse  his  ideas  of  direction  and  locality.  This  turning 
to  the  left  is  so  rapid  with  the  average  lost  man,  that  he  will 
frequently  travel  in  a  circle  and  will,  in  the  course  of  the 
day,  arrive  at  the  point  left  in  the  morning.  It  should  be 
remembered  that,  when  lost,  it  is  best  not  to  increase  the 
perplexity  of  the  matter  by  wandering  still  farther,  but  set 
to  work  to  find  the  way  back  to  known  localities.  Leave  a 
broad  trail  for  the  relieving  party  to  follow  and  make  a 
great  smoke,  if  possible. 

The  sense  of  desolation  attending  most  lost  persons  is  suf- 
ficiently overpowering  to  cause  them  to  lose  their  presence 
of  mind,  to  wander  widely  about  and  rapidly  exhaust  their 
vital  powers. 

Colonel  Dodge  relates  the  following  remarkable  account: 

"When  serving  in  Texas,  a  soldier  of  my  company  be- 
came lost  while  returning  to  the  post  from  a  small  village 
two  miles  off.  A  party  was  sent  out  to  search  for  him,  and 
on  the  second  or  third  day  came  upon  him  almost  naked 
in  a  little  thicket.  As  soon  as  he  discovered  the  party,  he 
bounded  off  like  a  deer  and  was  pursued.  After  an  exciting 
chase  he  climbed  a  tree,  from  which  he  was  taken  by  force, 
and  with  the  greatest  difficulty — struggling,  striking  and 
biting  like  a  wild  animal.  He  was  brought  back  to  the  post 
perfectly  wild  and  crazy  ;  confined,  watched  and  attended 


104  Mountain  Scouting. 

with  the  greatest  care  for  over  a  month  before  he  recovered 
his  mind.  He  was  an  excellent  man,  more  than  usually  in- 
telligent, but  I  doubt  if  he  ever  fully  recovered  from  the 
shock.  He  recollected  nothing  but  going  a  little  distance 
off  the  road  and  getting  turned  around  and  realizing  that 
he  was  lost." 

When  lost  beyond  all  hope,  when  there  are  reasons  to  be- 
lieve that  a  search  will  not  be  made,  and  when  it  is  possible 
to  keep  alive  for  a  few  days,  I  believe  it  a  good  plan  to 
make  for  the  nearest  large  water  course  and  follow  it  down 
by  shore  or  raft,  until  the  settlements  are  finally  reached. 
But,  before  proceeding,  to  this  final  course  be  sure  that  you 
have  well  endeavored  to  answer  the  following  questions, viz.: 

A.  What  is  the  least  distance    within  which  the  lost  trail 
lies? 

By  remaining  cool,  this  may  be  quite  accurately  deter- 
mined by  the  careful  traveler.  He  knows  how  long  he  has 
been  traveling  on  foot  or  on  horseback,  and  the  average 
rate  of  his  travel,  and  he  can  usually  make  a  fine  allowance 
for  loitering,  stoppages  and  remembered  zigzags.  The 
lost  man  may  always  console  himself  with  the  fact  that  he 
is  nearer  the  lost  trail  than  he  imagines. 

B.  What  is  the  general  direction  of  the  trail  ? 

The  traveler  should  at  all  times  keep  in  mind  the  gener- 
al bearing  of  prominent  landmarks,  and  the  general  courses 
of  important  streams  and  ridges.  During  sunshine,  the 
shadows  of  trees,  etc.,  will  give  east  and  west  points.  In 
tropical  countries,  Orion  and  Antares  give  excellent  east 
and  west  points,  and  are  easily  sighted.  An  almanac,  show- 
ing the  times  and  bearings  of  sun  rise,  sun  set,  moon  rise 
and  moon  set  for  various  latitudes,  is  invaluable  to  the 
mountain  traveler. 

C.  On  leaving  the  trail,  was  the    travel  to  the  right  or  to 
the  left  of  it  ? 

This    question    must    be  answered   from   memory  or  the 


Mountain   Travel.  105 

note  book,  and  it  is    very  important    that    the    traveler   be 
able  to  answer  it  with  proper  assurance. 


Suppose  the  traveler  is  at  i  when  he  decides  that  he  is 
lost,  and  suppose  that  the  trail  certainly  lies  within  the  dis- 
tance i — 7  ;  then  the  circle  7 — 3 — 9 — 5  cuts  the  trail  some- 
where. The  traveler  starting  from  i,  may  first  go  to  7,  and 
then,  in  the  extreme  case,  make  the  entire  circuit  7 — 3 — 9 — 
5 — 7,  or  travel  a  distance  7.28  times  i — 7  before  exhausting 
his  search.  Now,  suppose  that  both  questions  A  and  Bean 
be  answered  and  that  the  trail  lies  within  the  directions 
i — 15  and  i — 13;  then,  the  trail  somewhere  cuts  the  arc  15 — 
9 — 13,  or  possibly  the  arc  n — 7 — 17. 

Produce  7 — i — 9  until  it  cuts  the  tangents  to  the  circle 
7 — 3 — 9 — 5 — ,  which  are  perpendicular  to  i — 15  and  i — 13. 
Call  this  distance  x.  Now  this  line  must  cut  every  trail 
within  and  parallel  to  i — 15  or  i — 13  that  cuts  the  circle, 
and  it  is  furthermore  obvious  that  it  must  cut  every  trail 
that  is  within  and  parallel  to  an  intermediate  direction 
1—13  i—9 

Since  x  = = ;  when  15 — i — 13 

cos  13 — 1—9     cos  yz   15 — 1—13* 


io6 


Mountain  Scouting. 


=60°,  *  = 


=90 


i  —  9 

•cos  30' 
i  —  9 

r  = 

cos  45° 
i  —  9 


I20V,  X  = 


cos  60' 


nearly;    when  15 — i — 13 


(i — 9)  i^,  nearly;     when  15 — i — 13= 


(i — 9)  2;    when  15 — i — 13  =  140°,  A*= 


i  —9 


=  (i — 9)  3,  nearly;  etc. 


cos  7<DV 

Now,  if  the  traveler  is  unable  to  answer  question  C,  he 
must  be  prepared  to  travel  from  i  towards  9,  a  distance 
equal  to  x,  then  back  through  i  towards  7,  a  distance  of 
2x,  or  a  distance  of  $x  altogether.  If,  however,  he  can  an- 
swer C,  he  has  no  return  journey  to  fear  and  at  worst  has 
to  travel  towards  9  or  7,  a  distance  equal  to  x.  From  this, 
may  be  seen  the  great  advantage  in  being  able  to  answer 
questions  A,  B  and  C  conjointly,  and  how  very  important 
it  is  to  know  the  answer  to  question  B,  since  x  changes  so 
rapidly  with  the  angle  15-1-13. 

Before  sending  out  scouts  or  detachments,  certain  ele- 
mentary signals  should  be  agreed  upon.  For  instance,  let 


a  wave  with  one  hand  designate  '  hurry,'  'come  on/  etc.— 
let  both  arms  raised  designate  'yes,'  'all  right,'  etc. — let  both 
arms  lowered  designate  '  no/  '  wrong/  etc. — and  let  both 
arms  extended  latterly  and  horizontally  designate  '  halt/ 
'  go  back/  etc.  Such  a  precaution  will  frequently  do  away 


Mountain   Travel.  107 

with  the  necessity  of  messengers  making  difficult  and  dan- 
gerous journeys.  A  distant  scout  might  signal  by  walking 
or  riding  from  right  to  left  or  from  left  to  right,  etc. 

During  the  "  Sheep  Eater  "  Indian  campaign  in  the  Sal- 
mon river  mountains,  in  1879,  Colonel  Bernard,  of  the  cav- 
alry, came  to  the  conclusion  that  signal  rockets  were  inval- 
uable in  such  a  country,  where  the  commands  were  of  ne- 
cessity separated  by  rocky  and  almost  impassable  ridges, 
and  urgently  recommended  their  use.  The  idea  is  an  ex- 
cellent one;  for,  besides  their  value  as  signals,  they  terrify 
the  savages  and  produce  a  wholesome  effect  upon  their 
superstitious  natures.  I  believe  a  few  rockets,  kept  for 
emergencies  and  judiciously  sent  up,  might  frequently  avert 
the  intended  attacks  or  stampedes  of  Indians. 

I  have  found,  by  experiment,  that  it  is  a  splendid  plan, 
when  going  into  the  mountains,  or  over  very  rough  trails, 
and  there  is  a  probability  of  messengers  being  needed,  to 
collect  a  few  dogs  on  leaving  the  last  settlement.  They 
may  be  picked  up  or  purchased  for  almost  nothing,  and  the 
guard  may  lead  them  along  with  the  command  without 
any  great  trouble.  Whenever  it  is  necessary  to  send  back  a 
message,  advantage  may  be  taken  of  the  dog's  restlessness. 
Having  made  the  message  fast  to  his  neck,  let  him  go 
with  a  kick;  it  will  be  but  a  short  time  before  he  finds  his 
way  back  to  the  settlement,  having  served  as  messenger. 

In  order  that  the  pack  animals  may  keep  well  up  on  a  long 
mountain  journey,  continually  going  up  and  down  steep 
hills,  it  is  necessary  to  load  them  as  lightly  as  possible.  So 
far  as  is  practicable,  articles  of  food  should  be  selected  with 
a  view  to  easy  transportation,  when  a  rough  journey  is  an- 
ticipated. 

Chollet's  preserved  vegetables  are  excellent  on  the  score 
of  bulk  and  light  weight.  One  ration  weighs  less  than  an 
ounce,  and  a  cubic  foot  contains  about  600  rations. 

The  prepared  meat  biscuit  used  by  the  French  and  Prus- 


io8  Mountain  Scouting. 

sian  armies  is  a   very  portable  form  of  food,    and  of   great 
dietetic  value. 

Cold  flour,  made  by  pounding  parched  corn  to  the  con- 
sistency of  coarse  meal,  and  adding  a  little  sugar  and  cin- 
namon, is  another  portable  article  of  subsistence, and  is  muQh 
used  by  the  Indians  when  they  expect  to  make  long  journ- 
eys with  little  transportation. 

A  small  quantity  of  the  flour  is  mixed  with  water  and 
taken  when  the  traveler  feels  thirsty  and  hungry. 

All  these  prepared  articles  have  excellent  anti-scorbutic 
properties. 

The  prepared  'horsecake,'  originally  brought  into  use  by 
the  Germans,  would  be  excellent  to  take  into  the  moun- 
tains, on  pack  animals,  with  mounted  troops,  and  would 
certainly  favor  a  great  economy. 

The  loads  are  frequently  rendered  very  heavy,  in  conse- 
quence of  getting  under  water  while  crossing  the  moun- 
tain streams.  The  greatest  care  should  be  exercised  in  hunt- 
ing suitable  fords  for  the  loaded  animals.  Old  Indian  trails 
nnd  often  the  game  trails  lead  to  the  most  practicable  fords. 

The  wear  and  tear  of  mountain  traval  is  enormous.  From 
the  first,  the  most  exposed  parts  of  the  clothing  should  be 
protected,  and  too  great  pains  cannot  be  taken  to  properly 
protect  the  feet  and  limbs  of  the  animals. 

Chaparejos,  made  of  buffalo,  elk  or  bearskin,  are  invalu- 
ible  in  very  cold  climates  and  are  most  excellent  for  pre- 
serving the  trowsers,  when  exposed  to  rough  and  long  con- 
tinued wear.  They  may  be  easily  made,  while  on  the  jour- 
ney, by  utilizing  the  skins  of  the  animals  brought  in  by  the 
hunting  party. 

The  feet  and  lower  limbs  of  the  animals  need  the  most 
constant  care  and  attention,  subjected  as  they  are  to  rocks, 
crags,  bramble,  etc.  All  boots  should  be  well  made  and 
never  chafe  or  gall,  in  any  way,  the  animal  that  wears  them — 
a  horse  is  more  injured  by  wearing  poorly  and  improperly 
made  boots  than  by  his  interfering  habits. 


Mountain   Travel,  109 

The  drawing  shows  a  simple  but    excellent    combination 


i  i  I 


knee,  shin  "and  ankle  boot.  A  few  of  these  should  always 
be  taken  along,  as  they  are  simply  invaluable  when  follow- 
ing very  rough  mountain  trails.  Even  alight  stocking,  im- 
provised on  the  march,  is  good  for  strengthening  the  mus- 
cles, tendons,  cords,  etc.  If  practicable,  it  should  be  made 


of  shirred,  elastic  material,  and  should  fit  closely  around 
the  leg,  at  the  points  marked  i,  2,  and  3,  in  the  drawing. 

Such  a  stocking  very  effectually  prevents  sprains  or  other 
accidents  to  the  legs  of  the  horses,  and  is  very  good  for 
those  with  swollen  veins,  sprained  or  weak  joints,  etc. 

Where  the  animals  are  continually  going  up  and  down 
hill,  the  motion  of  the  cinch  will  occasion  galling  if  not 


lie  Mountain  Scouting. 

carefully  watched.      The  cinch  should  be  made  of  soft  hair 
and  corded  down  the  center;  the  edges  will  then  give  suffi- 


ciently to  prevent  rubbing,  when  the  cinch  is  drawn  very 
tight. 

Lieutenant  S.  C.  Robertson,  First  Cavalry,  who  was  with 
me  during  my  reconnaissance  of  the  Clearwater  and  Salmon 
rivers,  Idaho  Territory,  in  1880,  has  contrived  a  rawhide 
shoe,  which  appears  to  be  valuable,  inasmuch  as  it  may  be 
readily  constructed  while  in  the  field,  and  when  ordinary 
shoeing  is  impossible.  I  have  never  tested  Lieutenant  Rob- 
ertson's shoe,  to  my  own  satisfaction,  but  I  have  no  doubt 
as  to  its  being  excellent  in  some  respects. 

Speaking  of  the  shoe,  Lieutenant  Robertson  says:  "I  have 
experimented  this  summer  with  a  horse-shoe  which,  so  far 
as  I  know,  is  my  own  idea,  and  which  was  suggested  to  me 
by  the  sufferings  of  our  horses  over  the  rugged  country  of 
our  last  year's  scout.  It  is  made  of  rawhide — two  thick- 
nesses, subjected  while  'green'  to  pressure,  and  secured  to 
the  foot  by  T-shaped  nails,  with  the  heads  flat  and  broad 
enough  to  cover  the  whole  width  of  shoe.  In  dry  weather, 
it  works  well  and  I  am  convinced  that  such  a  shoe  (with, 
say,  a  thickness  of  felt  added  next  to  the  foot)  would  be  a 
boon  to  footsore  horses,  over  such  mountains  of  rock  as  we 
traveled  last  summer.  It  has  the  disadvantage  of  non  du- 
rability in  prolonged  wet  weather;  but,  its  lightness,  elasti- 
city, toughness  and  thorough  protection  of  the  foot,  for  a 
limited  period,  undoubtedly  make  it  both  adaptable  and 
beneficial  for  temporary  use  of  such  horses  traveling  over 
rocks  and  painful  trails." 


CHAPTER  VII. 

PACK  MULES  AND  PACKING. 


Pack  animals  travel  with  ease  through  sections  of  country 
which  are  impassable  for  wheeled  carriages  of  all  descrip- 
tions. Horses,  ponies,  mules,  oxen,  elephants,  camels,  goats 
and  dogs  are  more  or  less  used  as  pack  animals  in  different 
countries,  and  the  variety  of  packing  gear  is  very  great. 
The  nature  of  the  country  to  be  traversed  and  of  the  load  to 
be  transported  will  in  a  great  measure  determine  the  form 
and  adjustment  of  the  gear. 

The  mule  is  the  favorite  pack  animal  in  the  United  States, 
but  I  believe  the  ox  is  far  superior  and  would  be  in  great 
demand,  were  it  only  fashionable  to  use  him  as  a  pack  and 
saddle  animal.  Oxen  hold  out  much  better  than  mules  over 
long  marches,  are  much  cheaper,  are  less  liable  to  be  stam- 
peded by  Indians,  are  easily  caught  when  needed,  and  in 
case  of  emergency  may  be  used  for  beef. 

The  mule  is  the  offspring  of  the  male  ass  and  the  mare. 
As  in  other  hybrid  animals,  the  males  are  the  more  numer- 
ous. There  is  no  instance  on  record  of  offspring  produced 
by  two  mules.  The  hinny  is  far  inferior  to  the  mule  in 
size,  strength  and  beauty. 

Pack  mules  should  not  be  too  large  or  high  on  their  legs. 
The  Spanish-Mexican  mules,  for  endurance,  are  superior  to 
all  others.  These  mules  are  small,  but  can  stand  a  great 
amount  of  abuse  and  starvation  and  will  suffer  but  little 
from  the  effects  of  a  hard  drive.  Being  smaller  than  the 
American  mules,  they  can  fill  up  in  a  much  less  time,  and  it 


ii2  Mountain  Scouting. 

will  be  found  ohat  in  three  hours  on  thin  grass  they  will  fill  up 
and  recuperate  better  than  American  mules  on  the  same 
pasture  in  six  hours.  This,  I  believe,  is  the  secret  of  small 
mules  outlasting  the  large  ones  in  the  mountains  and  on 
the  prairies.  The  time  spent  in  camp  is  not  sufficiently 
long,  when  the  grass  is  scarce,  to  allow  a  large  one  to  find 
enough  to  eat.  The  small  mule  finds  sufficient  in  a  short 
while  and  has  some  time  left  for  rest  and  recuperation. 

Experience  shows,  moreover,  that  strength,  activity  and 
endurance  do  not  increase  in  the  ratio  of  the  size,  and  that 
the  smaller  of  two  mules  surpasses  in  these  qualities  ; 
white,  dappled  or  spotted  mules,  known  as  calico  mules,  are 
not  near  so  hardy  as  those  of  dark  and  uniform  colors  and 
should  be  avoided.  Mares  are  to  be  preferred  to  horse 
mules,  being  more  tractable  and  following  the  bell  mare 
(madrina)  better  on  the  trail.  A  white  or  grey  animal 
should  be  selected  for  the  madrina  if  possible.  Usually  "she 
is  an  old  steady  mare  with  a  little  bell  round  her  neck,  and 
wherever  she  goes,  the  mules,  like  good  children,  follow 
her.  If  several  large  troops  are  turned  into  one  field  to 
graze,  in  the  morning  the  muleteer  has  only  to  lead  the 
madrinas  a  little  apart,  and  tinkle  their  bells,  and,  although 
there  may  be  200  or  300  mules  together,  each  immediately 
knows  its  own  bell,  and  separates  itself  from  the  rest.  The 
affection  of  these  animals  for  their  madrina  saves  infinite 
trouble.  It  is  nearly  impossible  to  lose  an  old  mule  ;  for,  if 
detained  several  hours  by  force,  she  will,  by  the  power  of 
smell,  like  a  dog,  track  out  her  companions,  or  rather  the 
madrina  ;  for,  according  to  the  muleteer,  she  is  the  chief  ob- 
ject of  affection.  The  feeling,  however,  is  not  of  an  indi 
vidual  nature ;  for  I  believe  I  am  right  in  saying  that  any 
animal  with  a  bell  will  serve  as  madrina." 

When  in  the  vicinity  of  hostile  Indians  or  horse  thieves, 
the  mules  are  easily  secured  at  ni2fht  by  being  herded,  teth- 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing.  113 

erecl,  hobbled,  haltered  or  driven  into  some  enclosure.  The 
dangers  apprehended  and  the  nature  of  the  country  deter- 
mine the  manner.  When  hobbles  are  used,  the  fetlock 
straps  should  be  made  of  thick  leather,  the  inside  smooth 

and  soft,  and  the  sewn 
edges  uppermost,  when  on 
the  animal's  legs.  Messrs. 
Main  &  Winchester,  216 
Battery  street,  San  Fran- 
cisco, California,  make  a 
specialty  of  packing  gear, 
and  all  articles  pertaining 
to  field  outfits.  Their  illus- 
trated catalogue  will  be 
valuable  to  those  prepar- 
ing for  the  field.  When 
the  animal  is  tethered  and 
the  rope  is  long  enough  to  permit  walking  and  feeding  in  a 
large  circle,  it  should  be  provided  with  a  wooden  swivel, 
readily  made  as  represented  in  the  drawing,  in  order  to  pre- 
vent twisting  and  entanglement.  Mules 
are  dangerously  skillful  in  the  use  of  their 
heels,  and  one  cannot  be  over  careful,  at 
all  times,  in  guarding  against  the  results  of  this  skill. 

The  Indians  instinctively  fear  their  heels  and  will  seldom 
lend  a  hand  in  packing  them. 

Mules  work  best  when  between  three  and  six  3  ears 
old  and  are  from  twelve  to  thirteen  hands  high.  In 
fitting  out  a  train,  as  few  different  kinds  of  animals 
should  be  taken  as  possible,  or  they  will  run  in 
different  herds  and  require  much  more  attention;  and 
in  the  selection  of  mules,  care  should  be  taken  to  see 
that  the  dentition  of  the  upper  jaw  is  free  from  de 
formity.  Mules  are  often  overhung  or  parrot  beaked, — that 


Mountain  Scouting. 


is,  the  upper  row  of  front  teeth  projects  so  far  beyond  the 
lower  that  it  is  impossible  for  the  mule  to  bring  them  to- 
gether. This  defect  soon  occasions  a  loss  of  condition  and 
weakness,  as  such  mules  are  able  to  gather  but  little  food. 
Care  should  be  taken  that  the  tongue  is  also  perfect. 

Horses  and  ponies,  for  packing  purposes,  should  be  of 
cobby  and  short-legged  breed. 

Experience  and  practice  in  the  handling  of  rope  are  essen- 
tial in  lashing,  cross-lashing  and  interlacing,  so  as  to  make 
fast  in  proper  shape  the  hetereogeneous  objects  of  an  ordi- 
nary cargo.  In  this  connec- 
tion it  might  be  well  to  prac- 
tice making  the  common  and 
important  knots.  Referring 
to  the  diagram,  the  manner 
of  forming  them  is  readily 
understood. 

Figure  1,  shows  two  half 
hitches,  useful  for  making  a  rope  fast  to  a  spar,  but  should 
not  be  used  for  hois,ting  a   spar.     A   single   half  hitch   is 
formed  by  passing  the  end  of  a  rope  around  the  standing 
part  and  bringing  it  up  through  the  bight. 
Fig.  2,  is  a  clove  hitch  made  on  a  spar. 
Fig.  3,  is  a  clove  hitch  to  pass  over  the  end  of  a  spar.    It 
binds  with  excessive  force  and  by  means  of  it,  a  weight  may 
be  hung  to  a  smooth  vertical  pole.      When  used  in  lashing, 
the  end  should  be  twisted  rouhd  the  standing  part. 

Fig.  4,  is  a  reef  or  square  knot,  useful  for  securing  all 
lashings  where  the  ends  of  a  rope  meet.  To  undo  it,  take 
the  end  of  the  rope  and  its  standing  part,  and  pull  them  in 
opposite  directions. 

Fig.  5,  is  a  draw  knot,  for  small  rope,  same  use  as  reef 
knot,  but  the  ends  are  doubled  back  and  afford  greater  fa- 
cility in  untying  it. 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing..  115 

Fig.  6,  is  a  single  sheet  bend.  This  does  not  jam,  and  is 
useful  in  joining  two  ropes. 

Fig.  7,  is  a  fisherman's  bend,  for  fastening  ropes  to  rings, 
etc. 

Fig.  8.  is  a  timber  hitch,  useful  for  lifting  spars,  dragging 
material  from  place  to  place  and  hauling  carriages,  etc.,  out 
of  ditches,  when  drag  ropes  are  not  at  hand.  It  will  not 
give  as  long  as  the  strain  is  kept  up,  but  when  the  strain  is 
removed,  it  is  cast  loose  at  once. 

Fig.  9,  is  a  bowline.  It  is  difficult  to  undo  ;  with  it  the 
two  ends  of  a  rope  are  tied  together,  or  a  loop  made  at  the 
end  of  a  rope.  For  slip-nooses,  use  the  bowline  to  make 
the  draw  loop. 

Fig.  10,  is  a  running  bowline. 

Fig.  11,  is  a  slip  or  hangman's  knot. 

Fig.  12,  is  a  carrickbend,  useful  for  joining  two  ropes  and 
for  making  the  guys  for  the  head  of  a  spar. 

Fig.  13,  is  a  sheep  shank  knot,  and  is  used  to  shorten  a 
rope  temporarily  without  cutting  it  or  unfastening  the  ends. 

Figs.  14  and  15,  are  handy  barrel  slings. 

Figs.  16  and  17,  are  simple  forms  of  slip  knots,  destroyed 
by  freeing  the  loops  and  drawing  on  the  free  ends. 

To  make  a  short  splice,  unlay  the  strands  for  a  convenient 
distance,  take  an  end  in  each  hand,  place  them  one  within  the 
other  and  draw  them  close  together.  Hold  the 
end  of  one  rope  and  the  strands  which  come 
from  the  other,  in  the  left  hand — take  the  mid- 
dle strand,  pass  it  over  the  strand  next  to  it, 
under  the  second  and  out  between  the  second 
and  third,  and  haul  it  tight.  Pass  in  a  similar  manner  each 
of  the  six  strands,  first  those  of  one  end,  then  those  of  the 
other.  To  taper  the  splice,  untwist  each  strand,  divide,  the 
yarns,  pass  one-half  as  described  above  and  cut  off  the  other 
half. 


n6 


Mountain  Scouting. 


To  make  an  eye  splice,  unlay  the  end  of  a  rope  for  a  short 
distance,  lay  the  three  strands  upon  the  standing  part,  form- 
ing an  eye.  Put  the  first  end  through  the  strand  next  to  it, 
the  second  end  over  that  strund  and  through  the  second,  and 
the  remaining  end  through  the  third  strand  on  the  other 
side  of  the  rope.  The  ends  are  tapered  as  in  the  short 
splice,  by  dividing  the  strands  and  again  passing  them. 
Many  of  the  pack  saddles  in  use  at  this  time  are  mere  in 
strum  ents  of  torture  and  laceration. 

The  cross-tree  saddle  and  gear,  represented  in  the  draw 
ing,  is  used  to  a  great  extent  by  the  Indians  and  traders  in 

the  Northwest.  This 
description  of  saddle 
is  very  well  adapted 
for  smooth  roads  and 
evenly  formed  packs, 
but  for  scouting  trains 
or  the  professional 
packer,  where  objects 
of  every  imaginable 
shape  and  various 
weights  are  to  be 
transported,  nothing  has  yet  been  invented  so  suitable  as 
the  aparejo,  composed  entirely  of  hide. 

It  is  a  strong  leather  sack,  about  two  feet  wide  and  from 
55  to  60  inches  long,  according  to  the  girth  of  the  mule.  It 
is  used  as  a  pad  to  protect  the  mule's  back  while  packing. 
A  seam  running  from  the  front  to  the  rear  of  the  aparejo 
divides  it  into  two  equal  parts,  each  of  which  is  composed 
of  a  double  layer  of  hide,  with  sufficient  space  between 
to  introduce  a  suitable  stuffing  of  hay,  grass,  moss,  fibre, 
etc.  These  side  flaps,  when  fastened  together  at  the  top, 
form  a  ridge  within  which  the  back  bone  of  the  mule  rests 
free  from  friction  or  pressure.  On  the  inside  of  each  flap  is 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing.  117 

left  a  circular  hole  through  which  the  stuffing  material 
can  at  any  time  be  reached.  The  careful  packer  should 
keep  the  stuffing  evenly  distributed,  or  so  as  to  vary 
with  the  conformation  of  the  back  of  the  particular  mule, 
as  portions  of  it  are  constantly  shifting  and  working  up 
into  lumps,  in  consequence  of  the  travel.  To  set  up  the 

aparejo,  or  to  give  it  evennes  • 
and  stiffness,  small  ash,  rose  or 
willow  sprouts  from  \  to  J  of 
an  inch  in  diameter,  and  as 


•BBI 


I 


Jill 

mil! 


long  as  possible  without  spring- 


ing  (any  tough  and  elastic  wood 
will  answer),  are  placed  inside 
of  it  and  at  equal  distances 
apart — about  "2  inches.  On  the 
inside  cf  these  and  towards  the 
mule,  coarse  grass  or  hay  (such 
I  as  is  light  and  tough  and  will 

•HIHiHHHHHHIl  not  break   up)  is  placed  layer 

after  layer  until  the  sides  are 

;:s  full  as  possible.  The  corners  should  be  stuffed  as 
hard  as  possible,  by  means  of  a  sharp  stick.  Serious 
trouble  is  often  experienced  on  long  and  toilsome  marches, 
from  loss  of  flesh,  causing  the  aparejo  to  fit  badly  and 
cause  a  sore-back.  Great  care  must  be  taken  to  make  good 
all  deficiencies  in  the  stuffing,  and  when  the  aparejo  is  too 
large  to  be  adapted  to  a  thin  mule,  by  stuffing,  a  portion 
should  be  cut  out  of  the  centre.  Straw  pads  are  useful  for 
protecting  the  hips  and  withers,  when  placed  under  the 
cinches  of  those  animals  carrying  rough  loads.  When  the 
aparejo  is  placed  on  the  mule's  back,  it  is  covered  with  a 
piece  of  canvas  or  matting,  made  to  fit  it,  called  the  Ham 
mer  Cloth.  Two  pieces  of  hard  wood,  about  1  inch  thick,  2 
in.  wide,  round  on  the  outside  and  beveled  to  an  edge  at  the 


n8 


Mountain  Scouting. 


ends ,  are  placed  about   6  in.  from  the  ends  of  the  cloth. 

Leather  caps  are  stitched  over  the  ends  of  the  wood.  To 

secure  the 
h  a  m  m  e  r 
cloth,  apar- 
ejo  and  the 
blankets  be- 
neath it  to 
mules,a  wide 
girth  called 
a  cincha(usu- 
ally  called 
c  i  ii  c  h  )  is 
used.  It  is 
made  of  hide 
for  strong 
canvas,  about 
six  feet  long 
(a  little  too 
short  to  go 
around  the 
mule's  body 

over   the  aparejo),  from  15  to  20  inches  wide  and  so  folded 

as  to  bring  the  edges  and  stitching  in  the  centre.      A  semi 


circular  piece  of  leather,  provided  with  holes  or  a  ring,  is 
stitched  on  one  end,  and  two  loops  of  strong  leather  and  a 
slider  of  hard  wood  on  the  other.  The  cinch  is  tightened 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing. 


119 


by  drawing  the  two  ends  together,  by  means  of  what  is 
known  as  the  latigo  strap — made  of  strong  bridle  leather 
about  six  feet  long,  an  inch  and  one  half  wide  at  one  end 
and  tapering  to  one-half  inch  at  the  other.  When  the  strap 
is  sufficiently  drawn,  a  loop  is  formed  in  the  free  end  and 
the  bow  is  pulled  under  the  front  and  back  lashings  of  the 
strap.  To  relax  the  cinch  and  set  all  free,  it  is  only  ne- 
cessary to  pull  on  the  free  end  of  the  strap.  For  very  small 
animals  a  short  cinch  (one  end  furnished  with  a  ring  and  the 


other  with  a  stick,  bent  into  the  shape  of  a  hook),  attached 
to  a  rope  at  the  ring  may  be  used. 

Next  to  the  skin  of  the  animal  is  placed  a  piece  of  clean 
cloth,  or  an  ordinary  woolen  blanket  neatly  folded ;  over 
this  is  placed  the  saddle  cloth,  called  by  the  packers 
Corona.  This  is  made  of  woolen  cloth,  with  worked 
ornamental  borders.  It  consists  of  two  or  three  folds 
of  cloth  stitched  together.  The  letter  or  name  of  the 
mule  to  which  it  belongs  is  generally  stiched  upon  it  in 
colored  cloth.  In  taking  the  corona  off,  grasp  it  in  the 
centre,  front  and  back,  let  the  sides  come  together  and 
place  it  across  the  aparejo,  back  to  the  rear.  The  sad- 


I2O  Mountain  Scouting. 

die  blanket  proper  (an  ordinary  U.  8.  blanket)  goes  on  top 
of  the  corona,  and  may  be  used  as  bedding  in  camp.  The 
tendency  of  the  aparejo  to  work  forward  is  overcome  by  a 
wide  crupper  (the  dock  rest  being  of  soft  and  round  leather 

attached  to  its  out 
side     and    passing 
back  over  the  hips 
It  should  be     care- 
fully adjusted    and 
always  kept  clean. 
Knots  of  any  description  should  not  be  tied  in  the  straps 
or  ropes  of  the  packing  gear  with   a   view   to   shortening 
them.     It  is  proper  to  make  more  holes  if  buckles  are  used, 
or  to  cut  to  the  proper  length.     Knots 
and  galls  go   together.     The  sling-rope 
(of  hand-laid  manila  rope) should  be  about 
15  feet  long  and  one-half  or  three-quarters 
ef  an  inch  in  diameter.    .The  packs   are 
made   fast   and  retained  on   the   mule's 
back  by  means  of  a  cinch  and  lash  rope. 
The   cinch   is   made   of    strong  canvas, 
about  eleven  inches  wide  and  one  yard 
long,  doubled  so  that  the  edges  are  in  the 
middle.     Strong   pieces  of    leather  are 
firmly  stitched  on  both  ends  and  on  both 
sides,  with  the  canvas  cinch  between,  as 
shown  in   the   drawing.      A  three-inch 
iron  ring  is  made  fast  at  one  end,  and  a 
hook  of  hard  wood  at  the  other.    Natural 
shapes  are  usually  selected  for  the  hooks. 
The  lash  rope  is  of  1J  inch  hemp  rope  or  raw  hide,   about 
35  feet  long,  with  one  end  spliced  to  the  cinch  ring. 
The  following  are  evident  advantages  of  the  aparejo  : 
Its  shape  enables  all  loads  to  be  balanced.     One  hundred 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing. 


121 


pouccls  on  one  side  may  be  made  to  ride  with  50  Ibs.  on  the 
otiicr,  without  straining  the  mule.  It  presents  much  more 
surface  for  pressure  to  the  mule  than  any  other  form  of 
pack  saddle  does.  The  lower  corners  secure  the  lash  rope 
and  prevent  its  slipping  when  on  the  road.  By  removing 
the  hay  or  stuffing  from  the  sides,  a  sore  back  may  be  easily 
remedied,  and  by  properly  adjusting  the  filling,  the 
aparejo  may  be  made  to  perfectly  fit  a  badly  shaped  back. 

The  pack  cover  or  manta  should  be  about  5  feet  square 
and  made  of  water  proof  canvas. 

The  blind  or  "  tapajo,"  made  of  leather  with  strings  and 
loop,  should  be  invariably  used  while  packing  or  adjusting 
a  disarranged  pack.  When  not  on  the  mule's  head,  the 
blind  may  be  used  as  a  whip. 

Before  proceeding  to  the  packing  drill,  the  knot  formed 
by  the  lash  rope,  on  the  top  of  the  pack,  should  be  carefully 

studied.  A  knowledge  of  its  con- 
struction will  make  the  packing 
process  very  simple. 

It  requires  two  men  to  properly 
pack  a  mule.  No.  1  is  habitually 
on  the  near  or  left  side,  and  No.  2 
on  the  off  or  right  side  of  the 
mule.  To  teach  the  art  of  pack- 
ing, the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Prepare.     2.  To  PACK. 

At  this  command,  No.  2  places 

the  hackamore  upon  the  mule,  leads  him  on  the  off  side  of 
and  near  the  rigging,  places  the  blind  and  assumes  his  posi- 
tion on  the  off  side  of  the  mule.  No.  1,  assisted  by  No.  2, 
on  the  off  side,  places  and  carefully  adjusts  the  saddle 
blanket  and  corona.  (Two).  No.  1  seizes  the  aparejo,  the 
left-hand  near  the  centre  of  its  front,  the  right  hand  near 


122  Mountain  Scouting. 

the  off  and  rear  corner,  and  places  it  well  to  the  rear  on  the 
back  of  the  mule,  when  No.  2  immediately  adjusts  the  crup- 
per, and  assists  No.  1  in  moving  the  aparejo  as  far  forward 
as  possible.  (Three).  No.  1  passes  the  aparejo  cinch  to  the 
off  side,  till  the  slider  end  reaches  directly  under  the  mule, 
and  assisted  by  No.  2,  passes  the  latigo  strap  downwards 
over  the  slider  and  inwards  through  the  ring,  and  again 
over  the  slider.  While  No.  1  is  drawing  the  latigo  strap 
moderately  tight,  No.  2  reaches  over  the  mule  in  front  of 
the  aparejo,  seizes  its  front  corners  and  draws  them  upward 
and  forward,  placing  the  aparejo  squarely  over  the  mule. 
This  being  done  and  the  aparejo  set.  No.  1  places  his  left 
knee  against  the  aparejo,  and  seizes  the  latigo  strap  as  far 
down  as  possible,  the  left  hand  in  advance.  (Four).  The 
latigo  strap  is  drawn  until  the  cinch  is  sufficiently  tight; 
when,  No.  1  doubles  it  and  passes  it  through  the  loop  on 
the  cinch,  drawing  it  tight. 

No.  2  removes  the  blind,  and  ties  the  mule  at  or  near  his 
cargo. 

If  No.  1  is  not  sufficiently  strong,  No.  2  passes  around  to 
the  near  side,  faces  No.  1  and  assists  him  in  drawing  the 
latigo  strap. 

1.  Slinq.     2.  THE  PACK. 


At  this  command,  No.  2  unties  the  mule,  places  the  blind 
and  takes  his  position  near  the  cargo.  No.  1  seizes  the 
sling  rope,  doubles  it  and  throws  the  loop  well  over  on  the 
off  side.  (Two).  No.  2  quietly  raises  his  side  of  the  pack 
high  up  on  the  aparejo,  and  holding  it  there  with  his  left 
hand  passes,  with  his  right  hand,  the  loop  of  the  sling  rope 
over  the  cargo  on  his  side,  to  No.  1,  who  passes  the  ends  of 
the  sling  rope  through  the  loop,  drawing  them  tight.  (Three .) 
No.  1  quickly  places  his  side  of  the  pack  on  the  aparejo 
against  that  of  No.  2,  holds  it  there  with  his  left  hand,  and 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing.  123 

passes  one  end  of  the  sling  rope  to  No.  2,  who  passes  it 
under  a  branch  of  the  sling  rope  already  on  his  side,  and 
back  to  No.  1. 

No.  1,  resting  his  left  arm  against  the  pack,  quickly  brings 
the  ends  of  the  sling  rope  together  and  ties  them,  in  a 
square  knot,  after  drawing  tight.  (Four).  Nos.  1  and  2 
seize  the  pack  at  the  lower  and  inner  edges,  settle  it  to  the 
full  extent  of  the  sling  rope,  and  carefully  balance  it ;  No  2 
removing  the  blind,  and  gently  leading  the  mule  a  few  steps 
forward,  while  No.  1  observes  the  pack  from  the  rear.  No. 
1,  then  places  the  pack  cover,  and  is  assisted  by  No.  2  in 
adjusting  it.  When  the  mantas  are  not  in  use,  they  are 
folded  and  carried  on  the  aparejos  under  the  cinches. 

1.  Lash.     2.  THE  PACK. 

At  this  command,  No.  1  takes  the  lash  rope  and  holding  it 
coiled  in  his  right,  seizes  it  with  his  left  hand  near  the  cinch, 
and  throws  it  to  its  full  extent  to  the  right ;  whereupon 
he  passes  the  cinch,  hook  from  him,  under 
the  mule,  and  holding  it  steady,  he  places 
the  rope  lengthwise  on  the  centre  of  the 
pack  (fig.  1).  (Two.)  No.  1  now  moves  for- 
ward to  the  mule's  shoulder,  draws  the  lash 
rope  forwards  two-thirds  of  its  length,  seizes 
it  5  or  6  feetTrom  the  cinch,  find  passes  it  doubled  to  No.  2 
(fig.  ?,),  who  takes  the  double  in  his  right  hand,  and  the 
hook  of  the  cinch  in  Hs  left.  No.  2  then  moves  his  hands, 
until  he  feels  the  rope  tight,  when  he  passes 
the  rear  branch  of  the  rope  from  above  into 
the  hook  and  the  slack  back  to  No.  1,  who 
draws  it  tight  with  his  left  hand.  He  then 
passes  his  right  haud  under  his  left,  seizes 
the  rope  in  front  of  the  pack  and  passes  it  to 
the  rear  (fig.  3).  (Three.)  No.  1  passes  the  rope  in  his  left 


124  Mountain   Scouting. 

hand  under  the  standing  branch  from  tear  to  front,  pulls  it 
well  up  on  the  pack  (fig.  4)  and  forces  the 
bight  thus  formed  below  the  aparejo.  In  the 
meanwhile,  No.  2  grasps  the  end  of  the  rope, 
passes  it  under  the  front  standing  branch  on 
his  side  (from  front  to  rear  or  from  rear  to 
front),  pushes  it  to  the  top  of  the  pack  and 
throws  the  end  in  front  of  the  ^ack  on  the  side  of  No.  1  ; 
No.  2  then  seizes  the  front  standing  branch  with  both 
hands,  well  down,  and  places  his  left  knee 
against  the  aparejo.  No.  1  seizes  the  front 
branch  on  his  side,  placing  his  left  shoulder 
against  the  pack.  No.  2  pulls  while  No.  1 
takes  in  the  slack.  When  all  is  sufficiently 
tight, No,  1  says  "good,"  and  seeing  the  pack 
well  balanced  passes  to  the  rear  and  tightly  pulls  the  branch 
under  the  aparejo.  (Fig.  5).  (Four.)  No.  2  goes  to  the 
rear,  pulls  the  branch  on  his  right  and  passes  it  forward 
under  the  points  of  the  aparejo.  No.  1  moves  forward,  on 
his  own  side,  takes  the  end  of  the  rope,  tight- 
ens it,  passes  it  down  under  the  points  of  the 
aparejo,  back  to  the  centre  of  the  pack  and 
there  fastens  it  by  drawing  it  under  the  stand- 
ing branches  (fig.  6).  If  the  lash  rope  is  very 
long,  No.  1  passes  the  end  to  No.  2  who  makes 
it  fast  as  stated.  All  set,  No.  2,  removes  the  blind,  ties  up 
the  hackamore  strap  and  drives  off  the  mule. 

1.    Unsling.     2.  THE  PACK. 

At  this  command,  No.  2  loosens  the  end  of  the  lash  rope, 
goes  to  the  mule's  shoulder  and  pulls  out  the  branch  on  his 
side.  (Two.)  No.  1  slackens  the  rear  and  front  branches 
on  his  side  in  succession,passes  the  front  branch  under 
the  standing  branch  from  front  to  rear,  withdraws  it  and 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing.  125 

passes  the  slack  to  No.  2,  who  unhooks  it,  whereupon  Nos 
1  and  2  throw  the  lash  rope  to  the  rear.  (Three.)  No.  1 
unties  the  sling  rope  quickly.  (Four.)  Nos.  1  and  2  tako 
down  the  portions  of  the  pack  on  their  sides. 

The  aparejo   is  taken  off  in   the   inverse 
order  in  which  it  is  put  on. 

This  being  done,  No.  1  arranges  the  car- 
goes while  ^No.  2  collects  and  assorts  the  rig- 
ging, placing  the  aparejos  in  a  line,  resting 
on  the  lower  ends  of  the  pads 
The  drawing  shows  the  position  of  the    different  parts 
when  the  mule  is  properly  packed.     As  the  train  moves  out 

of  camp,each  mule  should 
be  carefully  noticed  as  he 
passes.  Eaising  the  hips 
and  twitching  the  mouth 
or  nose  indicates  galling r, 
and  should  lead  to  imme- 
diate examination.  The 
hackamores  should  fit 
very  loosely.  Nothing  is 
so  liable  to  irritate  a  mule 
and  give  him  "fits  of 
fury"  as  sore  ears.  If 
possible,  the  cargo  should  be  made  into  two  packages  of 
equal  weight  and  bulk,  of  about  100  or  125  pounds,  and  the 
highest  loads  should  be  the  bulkiest  and  most  valuable 
stores.  All  rattling  pans,  camp  kettles,  buckets,  etc.,  should 
be  closely  packed  in  sacks  and  securely  lashed  on  top  be- 
tween  the  side  packs.  If  carelessly  packed  and  allowed  tc 
rattle,  the  mules  will  frequently  become  alarmed  and  a* 
frequently  succeed  in  dropping  their  packs. 

Strong  panniers  with  lids  to  hinge  and  lock  are  useful  foi 


126  Mountain  Scuuting. 

transporting  ammunition,  food  for  the  day,  change  of  cloth 

ing  and  other  articles  for  immediate  use. 

Narrow  flat  battens  of  stout  wood  or  bundles  of  twigs 

will  be  found  handy  and  useful  for  placing  between  the  packs 

and  lash  ropes.  In  the  case  of  sacks  and  the  like,  were  it 
not  for  some  interposing  medium,  the  strained 
ropes  would  soon  cut  through  and  occasion  more 

r  r 

1/fflJr  or  less  mischief.  After  a  march  the  aparejos, 
with  the  latigos  loosened,  should  be  left  on  the  mules  for  an 
hour  or  so,  in  order  that  their  backs  may  cool  gradually. 

Packed  mules  should  not  be  permitted  to  lie  down,  as 
they  are  liable  to  strain  themselves  in  attempting  to  rise 
again.  Over  difficult  and  long  continued  journeys,  with  pas- 
tures seldom  good,  the  net  weight  of  the  packs  should  not 
exceed  the  half  of  those  readily  transported  over  a  level 
country,  furnishing  a  sufficiency  of  grain  and  camps  at  regu- 
lar intervals.  The  question  how  must  the  mule  be  loaded 
and  urged  in  order  to  obtain  the  maximum  work  or  useful 
effect,  is  an  important  one.  If  he  transports  a  light  weight, 
he  may  make  a  long  day's  journey;  if  he  transports  an  ex 
cessive  weight,  he  may  soon  come  to  a  stand-still,  and  in 
either  case  the  u  useful  effect  "  is  little  or  nothing. 

Let  D=the  distance  a  mule  could  travel  daily  if  unloaded. 

W— the  weight  under  which  he  could  not  travel  at  all. 

W1  —some  weight  less  than  W,  under  which  he  could 

travel  D1  miles  per  day.     Then,  there  obtains 

Wi  D2  =  W(D— D1)2. 

Now  the  work  or  "  useful  effect  "  will  be  a  maximum  when 
W1  D1  is  a  maximum,  or  when  W1  =  4-9  W,  and  D1  =  1-3  D, 
or  in  other  words,  the  mule  will  accomplish  the  most  work 
when  he  transports  4-9ths  of  the  load  under  which  he  would 
stagger,  and  he  will  travel  just  1-3  the  distance  he  could  if 
he  carried  no  load  at  all.  For  example  :  Suppose  a  mule 
jis  able  to  travel  20  miles  per  day  bearing  a  load  of  200  Ibs.. 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing. 


127 


and  45  miles  per  day,  when  he  carries  nothing;  then  from 
the  equation  W  '  D  2  =W  (D — D1)2 ,    we    find    W  ==  20oX20^5 

'     625 
=  648  Ibs.,  the  load  under  which  he  would  be  brought  to  a 

standstill;  and  from  W1  =  4-9  W,  and  D  J  =  1-3  D,  we  find 
the  best  load  to  be  288  Ibs.,  carried  15  miles  per  day. 

This  chapter  would  hardly  be  complete  without  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  Madigan  Field  Ammunition  Box  (adapted  also  for 
use  as  Medicine  or  Mess  Chest),  to  be  packed  in  pairs  on 
either  an  aparejo  or  a  pack  saddle.  This  box  meets  all  the 
jquirements  of  active  service  and  by  means  of  it,  tror  ps 
in  line  of  battle  or  skirmishing  may  be  quickly  supplied  and 
ire  not  obliged  to  lose  valuable  moments  of  time,  while  un- 
:king,  unscrewing  covers,  etc. 


The  drawing  shows  the  boxes  packed  and  the  manner  of 
using  them.  Their  construction  is  such  that  all  or  any  j>art 
of  the  contents  may  be  removed,  whenever  desired  for  im- 
mediate use,  without  unloading  the  'cargo,'  slacking  .the 
lash  rope,  or  even  halting  the  animal  carrying  them.  These 
are  certainly  important  advantages  in  case  of  a  surprise  or 
sudden  attack  upon  the  train,  or  the  unexpected  discovery 
of  the  enemy;  or,  if  used  for  medicine  or  subsistence  stores, 
in  case,  of  sudden  illness,  or  the  necessity  of  eating  a  meal 
under  circumstances  forbidding  a  halt.  Many  instances 
will  doubtless  recur  to  every  officer  of  experience  in  field  ser- 


128  Mountain  Scouting. 

vice,   where  disasters  have  resulted    from  not  having  been 
able  to  quickly  replenish  the  supply  of  ammunition. 

The  devices  by  which  this  box  is  made  available  for  sud- 
den emergencies,  are  essentially  three  in  number,  viz: 

FIRST,  and  most  important: — The  angle  castings  or  corner 
bands  in  the  center  of  each  side  of  the  top  of  the  box,  each 
of  which  has  a  diagonal  circular  opening,  or  socket,  for  the 
lash  rope. 

SECOND: — The  center  partition,  ife  inches  thick,  on  the 
top  of  which  is  screwed  a  center  strip,  2^2  inches  in  width, 
with  two  lids  hinged  thereto,  opening  from  the  ends. 

THIRD: — The  sub-division  of  the  interior  of  the  box,  by 
adjustable  partitions,  into  compartments,  adapted  in  num- 
ber and  arrangement,  to  the  nature  of  the  contents,  and 
shape  and  size  of  the  packages. 

These  compartments  prevent  the  shaking  or  damaging  of 
the  packages  by  the  motion  of  the  animal,  which  would  oc- 
cur with  an  ordinary  box  after  being  partially  emptied; 
and  permit  the  load  to  be  kept  practically  balanced  by  tak 
ing  out- of  each  box,  alternately,  all  or  part  of  the  contents 
of  one  or  more  compartments, — thus  obviating  any  neces- 
sity for  unloading,  or  touching  a  rope  during  the  march 
other  than  the  usual  adjustment  of  the  lash  rope.  By  fill 
ing  only  a  portion  of  the  compartments,  when  the  packages 
are  unusually  heavy,  or  when  the  animal  is  not  in  good 
condition,  the  weight  of  the  load  may  be  adapted  to  the 
circumstances  of  the  case,  without  danger  of  rattling,  shak- 
ing or  breaking  the  packages;  for  hard  bread  or  other 
stores  of  light  weight,  the  boxes  may  be  made  larger,  if 
desired;  or  if  necessary,  four  boxes  of  the  usual  size  can  be 
packed  on  one  animal. 

No  special  fittings  or  attachments,  to  the  ordinary  aparejo 
or  pack-saddle,  are  required;  the  boxes  are  complete  in 
themselves  and  in  case  of  emergency  they  may  be  packed 
with  very  little  in  the  way  of  outfit — a  few  old  sacks  filled 


Pack  Mules  and  Packing.  129 

with  hay  or  straw,  a  couple  of  cinches  and  a  piece  of  rope 
will  answer. 

The  ammunition  boxes  now  supplied  by  the  Ordnance  De- 
partment are  very  unsuitable  for  'packing;'  two  being  too 
light  for  an  economical  load,  while  three  are  awkward  to  han- 
dle, very  difficult  to  lash  so  as  to  be  kept  in  place  on  an 
aparejo  or  pack-saddle,  and  are  liable  to  chafe  and  strain 
the  animal's  back. 

Mr.  Madigan  has  lately  invented  a  Tripod  and  Packing 
Box  for  the  Gatling  Gun  and  an  Improi'ed  Pack-saddle  for 
Transporting  the  Hotchkiss  Gun,  both  of  which  are  highly 
endorsed  by  officers  serving  in  New  Mexico  and  other 
mountainous  countries. 


13°  Mountain  Scouting. 


V  CHAPTER  VIII. 

jf 

MARCHING. 


A  GOOD  commander  will  so  conduct  the  march  as  to  pre- 
sent his  men  in  fighting  order  at  any  moment.  With  this 
in  view,  it  will  be  necessary  to  observe  the  following  points: 

1.  All  things  to  be  arranged  in  the  column  of  march  in 
the  same  order  in  which  they  are  likely  to  be  required. 

2.  The  cheerfulness  and  efficiency  of  the  men  to  be  se- 
cured,  carefully  considering   the    proper   indulgences,  the 
weather,  the  physical  features  of  the  country  and    import- 
ant hygienic  principles. 

3.  The  animals  to  be  herded,  loaded,  driven  and  guarded 
with  the  greatest  care. 

When  distant  from  the  enemy,  or  when  in  broken  or 
dusty  country,  certain  considerations  of  the  first  order  may 
very  properly  give  way  to  ease  and  comfort,  but,  as  a  gen- 
eral rule,  the  transportation  (kept  well  closed  up)  should 
follow  closely  in  rear  of  the  mam  command. 

A  few  mounted  men  should  constitute  the  advance  guard 
while  marching  through  the  hostile  country.  They  should 
keep  a  vigilant  lookout  in  all  directions  and  carefully  recon- 
noitre every  place  where  the  enemy  might  lie  in  ambush. 

When  marching  without  a  guide  who  knows  the  country, 
and  when  the  requisites  for  a  camp  are  scarce,  an  addi- 
tional armed  party  should  be  sent  in  advance  to  hunt  the 
camps.  They  should  make  a  careful  search  on  both  sides  of 
the  trail  and  be  sufficiently  far  advanced  to  return  to  the 
command,  in  case  of  failure  to  locate  a  suitable  camp 


Marching.  131 

within  the  distance  of  a  reasonable  day's  march.  Thirty- 
five  miles  might  be  considered  the  limit  of  search.  It  is 
safe  to  assume  that  a  camp  with  the  necessary  requisites, 
(wood, water  and  grass),  after  a  march  of  thirty-five  miles,  is 
many  times  better  in  the  long  run  than  a  camp  without  wa- 
ter and  grass  even  after  a  small  march  of  ten  or  fifteen  miles. 

Numerous  circumstances  of  the  march  will  determine  the 
strength  of  the  rear  guard.  It  should,  at  all  times,  be  kept 
close  to  the  transportation,  for  its  protection  incase  of  sur- 
prise. 

The  question  of  equipment  is  an  important  one,  when  an 
engagement  may  be  expected  at  any  moment. 

The  difficult  problem  of  drawing  the  proper  line  between 
the  number  of  articles  that  should  be  in  hand,  when  the  en- 
gagement ensues,  and  the  weight  that  should  be  transported 
on  the  person  has  received  much  attention  of  late.  The  ex- 
cellent campaign  equipment,  devised  by  J.  E.  Bloom,  Esq., 
late  of  the  Artillery,  is  the  nearest  approach  to  perfection, 
as  yet.  By  this  device,  the  center  of  gravity  of  the  soldier 
remains  nearly  normal,  and  the  strain  falls  upon  those  por- 
tions of  the  body  which  can  best  bear  them. 

It  seems  that  the  principal  objection  to  the  'roll'  as  worn 
during  the  late  war,  was  that  the  weight  fell  upon  one  side 
of  the  body,  thus  heating  it,  etc.  In  Mr.  Bloom's  system 
of  equipment  this  objection  is  entirely  overcome,  and  the 
soldier  is  enabled  to  transport  the  following  with  great  fa- 
cility:— One  hundred  cartridges,  (cal.  45),  one  blanket,  one 
shelter  tent,  one  overcoat,  one  pair  pants,  one  pair  drawers, 
one  undershirt,  one  woolen  shirt,  one  pair  socks,  one  pair 
shoes,  towel,  soap,  etc.,  in  addition  to  his  rifle. 

The  equipment  consists  in  a  system  of  supporting  straps, 
by  means  of  which  the  weight  to  be  carried  is  directly  trans- 
ferred to  and  supported  equally  by  the  shoulders,  without 
producing  any  horizontal  pressure  upon  the  chest.  This.ob- 


132 


Mountain  Scouting. 


ject  is  accomplished  by  means  of  a  yoke,  composed  of  two 
leather  straps  A  A,  passing  over  the  shoulders  and  joined  by 
the  same  rivets  at  their  ends — front  and  rear,  (opposite  to 
the  extremity  of  the  sternum  bone)  both  to  plates  or  stirrups 


B  B,  and  also  to  a  double  blanket  strap  C  C,  for  securing 
the  blankets  and  articles  rolled  therein.  The  blanket  roll  is 
adjusted  so  as  to  fully  clear,  by  an  inch,  the  shoulder  over 
whfch  it  passes,  being  thus  suspended  from  a  central  point 


Marching.  133 

front  and  rear,  upon  a  line  passing  through  the  center  of 
gravity  of  the  body — thus  causing  such  a  disposition  of 
these  articles  as  not  to  disturb  the  equilibrium  of  the  body. 

The  weight  of  the  cartridge  belt,  of  any  variety,  is  sup- 
ported from  stirrups,  both  at  front  and  back,  by  means  of 
hooks,  or  hook-plates  I  I.  which  are  connected  with  the  belt 
through  the  adjustable  straps  and  snap-hooks  J  J.  The  ha- 
versack, canteen,  gamebags,  etc.,  are  likewise  suspended 
"from  side  slots  in  the  stirrups  by  means  of  straps  M  M.  The 
blanket  roll,  when  firmly  made  and  adjusted,  exerts  more 
than  sufficient  outward  thrust  to  counteract  all  inward  strains, 
(which  would  otherwise  fall  upon  the  chest,)  due  to  the 
weight  of  the  'roll,  ammunition  belt,  etc.  This  should  be 
passed  over  the  left  shoulder,  when  the  soldier  is  right 
handed  or  fires  from  the  right  shoulder,  and  vice  versa. 

The  following  advantages  of  such  an  equipment  are  ap- 
parent; 

1.  Lightness  and  simplicity;  and,  being  practically  in  one 
piece,  there  are  no  parts  to  be  lost  by  the  most  careless. 

2.  Facility  and  quickness  of  slinging  and  unslinging. 

3.  It  does  not  interfere  with  the  action  of   the  soldier,  or 
the  natural  equilibrium  of  his  body. 

4.  It  does  not  heat  the  soldier  ;  but  allows    him  to  sleep 
with  all  accoutrements  upon  the  person — the  upper  part  of 
the  'roll'  forming  a  pillow  for  the  head. 

The  European  soldier,  on  going  into  action,  is  allowed  the 
following  ammunition: — France,  92;  Germany,  try;  Russia, 
120;  England,  100;  Austria,  119.  The  equipment  described 
will  enable  him  to  carry  100  rounds,  in  addition  to  his  kit, 
etc.,  with  ease  and  safety. 

The  cheerfulness  and  efficiency  of  the  men  will  depend 
very  much  upon  their  being  properly  supplied  and  having 
a  sufficiency  of  time  in  which  to  cook  and  look  after  their 
comfort. 

Sufficient  has    already  been    said  regarding  tne    clothing 


134  Mountain  Scouting. 

and  foot  gear.  The  drawing  shows  a  form  of  boot  very 
suitable  for  long  marches  over  rough  and  broken  ground, and 
up  and  down  hill,  should  it  be  impracticable  to  wear  single 
soled  and  laced  shoes  with  leggings.  The  leg  proper  is  at- 


tached to  the  lower  part,  about  the  instep,  by  means  of 
some  strong  and  elastic  material.  With  this  description  of 
boot  a  long  march  may  be  made  over  rough  and  rocky 
ground  without  wearying  or  injuring  the  foot. 

With  an  easy  fitting  shoe  or  boot,  a  march  over  the  most 
rugged  mountain,  where  the  mind  is  kept  busy  with  a  con- 
stant change  of  scenery  and  the  muscles  rested  by  a  variety 
of  action,  is  far  easier  than  the  same  march  over  a  level 
plain,  where  there  is  little  or  no  stimulant  to  greater  exer- 
tion. 

Even  with  the  most  careful  management  and  preparation 
for  the  march,  it  will  not  do  to  expect  too  much  the  first 
few  days,  as  it  requires  some  little  time  for  persons  and 


Marching.  135 

things  to  settle  into  the  new  condition  of  matters.  Suffi- 
cient allowance  must  be  made  for  the  reluctant  co-opera- 
tion of  individuals,  inasmuch  as  they  have  a  much  less  in- 
terest in  the  success  of  the  expedition  than  the  command- 
ing officer.  It  is  a  frequent  question  with  them,  why  should 
we  tax  our  energies  and  risk  our  lives  in  an  enterprise  for  which 
we  receive  so  little  remuneration  and  about  which  we  are  indiffer- 
ent? This  is  most  frequently  the  case  with  recruits,  and  it 
is  a  good  rule  to  march  all  such  near  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn, as  they  experience  less  fatigue  than  when  following 
in  rear,  and  are  more  inclined  to  exertion,  knowing  that 
they  are  watched  by  older  men,  and  that  they  will  be  sup- 
ported by  them  in  the  moments  of  danger. 

When  long  journeys  are  to  be  made,  the  daily  marches 
should  be  short:  for,  if  too  long,  rapid  or  ill-regulated, 
sickness  is  sure  to  result. 

Brief  halts  should  also  be  made,  their  frequency  depend- 
ing upon  the  condition  of  the  '  trail '  and  weather.  It  is  a 
fair  rule  to  march  three  miles  (one  hour)  and  then  rest  ten 
minutes.  Places  having  a  free  circulation  of  air,  well 
shaded  and  near  running  water  should  be  selected  for  halts, 
when  possible.  Considering  all  things,  it  is  best  to  start 
on  the  march  with  the  early  dawn,  '  noon  '  a  few  hours  dur- 
ing the  heat  of  the  day  (near  grass  and  water),  and  con- 
tinue the  march  in  the  afternoon.  In  this  manner  twenty 
miles  per  day  would  be  but  a  fair  average  march  over  the 
mountains.  The  march  on  exceedingly  hot  and  rainy  days 
should  be  completed  before  noon  when  possible. 

It  should  be  made  an  invariable  rule  to  serve  the  coffee 
before  marching,  without  regard  to  the  hour. 

The  frequent  use  of  water  on  the  march  is  a  matter  of 
habit;  some  drink  at  every  spring  or  stream  and  as  often  as 
twenty-five  or  thirty  times  in  a  day,  while  others  will  be 
satisfied  with  two  drinkings  during  the  same  time.  Thirst 
may  be  prevented,  to  some  extent,  by  drinking  a  large  quan- 


136  Mountain  Scouting. 

tity  of  water  before  breakfast,  or  by  chewing  a  green  leaf 
or  twig,  when  thirsty.  Water  from  stagnant  pools  should 
be  purified  before  using,  or  fevers  and  dysenteries  will  fol- 
low. When  drinking  from  a  muddy  pool  or  stream,  place 
the  shirt  sleeve  or  handkerchief  over  the  mouth  ancj  thus 
avoid  the  particles  of  dirt.  When  marching  through  poor- 
ly watered  sections  of  country,  I  have  found  it  an  excellent 
plan  to  fill  the  canteen,  before  leaving  camp,  with  a  mixture 
of  water  and  unsweetened  tea  or  coffee.  This  when  taken 
cold  on  the  march,  allays  the  thirst  and  is  an  excellent  bev- 
erage. 

There  is  nothing  more  hurtful  to  a  command  than  to  be 
compelled  to  make  long  or  forced  marches  while  fasting. 
To  prevent  such,  a  lunch  should  be  taken  when  possible. 


The  drawing  shows  a  handy  air-tight  and  elastic  lunch- 
pouch.  It  may  be  attached  to  the  belt  or  carried  in  the 
pocket,  and  will  preserve  a  small  quantity  of  food  in  good 
condition.  When  not  in  use,  it  may  be  so  folded  as  to  oc- 
cupy a  very  limited  space,  and  may  be  made  to  serve  a 
number  of  useful  purposes  while  in  camp. 

I  would  recommend  that  the  monotony  of  travel  be  re- 
lieved by  what  might  be  termed  'noted  days,' — having  an 
extra  good  meal,  a  larger  issue  of  sugar,  tobacco,  etc.,  than 
usual,  and  a  shorter  march  if  expedient.  Sucn  anticipated 
rewards  for  extra  services,  especially  with  Indian  scouts,  ac- 
complish much  good. 


Marching.  137 

The  formation  of  all  cliques,  whether  on  the  march  or  in 
the  camp,  should  be  prohibited;  but,  anything  in  reason 
should  be  done  to  promote  the  merriment  of  all. 

When  the  animals  have  been  recently  taken  from  grain, 
it  is  necessary  to  make  very  short  and  easy  drives  for  the 
first  few  days  ;  and  sufficient  time  should  be  allowed  for 
drinking,  at  suitable  periods,  while  on  the  march.  When 
making  night  marches  over  an  unwatered  section  of  coun 
try,  if  there  be  any  dew  upon  the  grass,  the  stock  should 
be  allowed  to  halt  and  graze  every  hour. 

Alkaline  springs  are  of  frequent  occurrence  in  mountain 
valleys,  and  may  be  detected  by  the  yellow  color  of  the 
grass  growing  around  them.  The  animals  should  not  be 
allowed  to  graze  near  them  or  drink  the  water,  which  is  ex- 
ceedingly poisonous. 

It  will  seldom  injure  the  animals  to  vary  their  hours  of 
rest  and  labor  ;  and  when  the  day  bids  fair  to  being  very 
warm,  it  is  often  well  to  start  them  on  the  march  hungry, 
make  an  early  drive  and  go  into  camp  before  the  heat  of 
the  day. 

During  the  first  days  of  the  march,  it  can  be  ascertained 
what  animals  are  wild  and  likely  to  lead  off  the  herd 
or  cause  other  mischief  ;  all  such  should  be  carefully  led, 
the  others  being  permitted  to  run  loose,  in  order  that  they 
may  pick  up  grass  along  the  'trail'  while  moving.  The 
stock  should  not  travel  faster  than  at  a  walk,  nor  be  taken 
off  for  hunting  purposes,  unless  necessary. 

In  going  up  or  down  rugged  mountains,  all  packs  should 
be  firmly  lashed,  in  order  that  the  animals  may  better  sup- 
port their  burdens.  On  first  starting  out  they  will  appear 
to  be  hardly  able  to  move  under  the  loads,  but  soon  the 
packs  will  settle,  the  lashings  loosen  and  they  will  exper- 
ience no  trouble.  The  packers  should  be  vigilant  and  see 
that  the  packs  do  not  work  loose  and  that  the  animals  do 
not  scatter  along  the  trail.  The  train  should  not  be  stopped 


138 


Mountain  Scouting. 


to  adjust  a  cargo — only  the  mule  in  question  should  be 
halted,  the  others  being  compelled  to  move  on.  Theapare- 
jos  should  not  be  removed  while  on  the  march,  nor  while 
'nooning/  for  less  than  an  hour. 

There  is  much  truth  in  the  saying  that  the  best  packers 
are  those  who  make  the  least  use  of  the  whip  and  the  most 
use  of  their  tongues. 

The    Mexican  or  California    saddles  are  extensively  used 


Ma  re  king.  \  3  9 

throughout  the  Western  country;  and,  in  proportion  to  their 
excessive  cost,  are  considered  by  the  traders  and  Indians 
far  superior  to  any  other  saddles  manufactured.  They  are 
usually  furnished  with  wool-lined  bastos,  llama  skin  anque- 
ras,  sudaderos,  tapaderos  and  stirrup  leathers  handsome- 
ly cut-stamped.  When  made  of  good  material,  in  addition 
to  giving  perfect  satisfaction,  they  will  last  a  century  and 
then  command  a  fair  price. 

These  are  usually  accompanied  by  'Cantanas'  of  goat,  seal 
or  llama  skin,  which  are  invaluable  when  traveling  with- 
out pack  animals  or  wagons. 


These  are  frequently  so  constructed  as  to  admit  of  being 
taken  off  the  saddle  and  borne  on  the  person. 

There  is  some  diversity  of  opinion  as  to  the  best  mode  of 
slinging  the  rifle  while  on  horseback. 

With  a  short  rifle  or  carbine  there  is  no  better  way  than 
to  suspend  it  over  the  left  shoulder,  by  means  of  a  broad 
strap  made  fast  to  the  piece  near  the  guard,  the  muzzle  pas- 
sing through  a  loop  attached  to  the  stirrup  strap. 


140  Mountain  Scouting. 

A  very  handy  way  of  carrying  the  rifle,  especially  a  long 
one,  is  to  allow  it  to  rest  horizontally  against  the  pommel 
of  the  saddle,  in  front  of  the  body  and  above  the  legs.  It 
may  be  steadied  by  passing  it  through  a  loop  of  wide  leath- 
er, slipped  over  the  pommel,  and  by  an  occasional  appli- 
ance of  the  hand.  The  rifle,  if  loaded,  should  be  invariably 
carried  at  a  half  cock  ;  but,  indeed  it  would  be  far  better  to 
transport  it  unloaded,  unless  a  sudden  attack  or  surprise 
might  be  expected. 

I  think  it  much  better  to  carry  the  revolver  at  the  side 
than  to  piace  it  in  a  holster  attached  to  the  saddle,  as  in 
the  latter  case  it  is  often  useless,  when  dismounted. 

It  is  quite  important  to  frequently  take  the  bearing,  when 
facing  towards  the  starting  point,  as  this  will  materially 
aid,  should  the  return  march  be  made  over  a  different  route. 

It  will  be  surprising  to  ascertain  how  few  persons  are  ca- 
pable of  retracing  their  steps  without  a  guide  or  compass, 
for  any  very  great  distance.  Men  of  noted  intelligence  and 
soldierly  qualities,  but  without  a  cultivation  of  the  sense  of 
locality,  have  been  known  to  wander  about  in  a  circle  for 
several  days,  being  within  500  yards  of  the  'trail'  or  object- 
ive point  all  the  while,  yet  absolutely  lost. 

Before  starting  on  the  march  a  strong  lariat,  not  less  than 
fifteen  feet  in  length,  should  be  secured.  The  best  are  made 
of  rawhide  plaited.  When  coiled  and  provided  with  snap 
pers  they  may  be  made  fast  to  the  front  of  the  saddle,  and 
carried  without  any  interference.  They  may  be  used  for 
lash  ropes  and  in  innumerable  emergencies  arising  during 
the  march. 


Forced  Marches.  141 


CHAPTER  IX.  % 

FORCED    MARCHES. 

FORCED  marches,  both  offensive  and  defensive,  are  frequent 
ly  necessary  ;  and,  in  either  case,  the  important  considerations 
are  to  travel  rapidly  without   encumbrance  and  to   have  at 
hand  all  things  necessary  for  the  comfort  and  safety  of  the 
command. 

The  matter  of  proper  equipment  for  the  forced  march  is 
frequently  a  difficult  one,  when  the  element  time  is  an  uncer- 
tain factor,  and  the  character  of  the  country  to  be  traveled 
over  is  unknown.  Assuming  that,  in  case  of  necessity,  the 
country  will  afford  the  necessary  supplies,  the  question  6f 
most  proper  equipment  may  be  easily  disposed  of  in  particu- 
lar cases.  Whether  the  troops  are  mounted  or  not,  the  equi- 
page should  be  selected  so  as  to  avoid  all  strains  and  unequal 
pressures ;  and,  with  a  constant  view  to  comfort  and  conveni- 
ence, the  useful  points  should  be  most  numerous  and  the 
weight  in  toto  a  minimum. 

Of  course,  the  time  will  never  come  when  regular  troops 
will  scout  or  campaign  without  tents  ;  but  there  is  no  doubt 
as  to  the  bivouac,  a  temporary  make-shift,  being  far  prefer- 
able to  tenting  in  a  dangerous  or  rugged  mountainous  coun- 
try. Bivouacking  is  not  only  healthier,  in  consequence  of  the 
soldier  inhaling  purer  air,  but  he  is  enabled  to  better  see  and 
hear,  and  does  not  indicate  to  sneaking  hostiles  the  exact 
spot  where  he  is  lying  and  enable  them  to  move  accordingly. 

A  mound  of  sand  or  earth,  covered  by  a  cloth  or  blanket, 
will  make  an  excellent  pillow  ;  whilst  a  blanket  judiciously 
pitched  over  a  little  turned-up  earth  or  accumulation  of  twigs, 


142  Mountain  Scouting., 

leaves  or  grass,  serving  as  a  comfortable  bed,  will  give  a  shel- 
ter surprisingly  complete  so  far  as  protection  from  cold  winds 
or  drifting  rains  is  concerned. 


This  plan  of  flying  camps  could  be  very  advantageously 
carried  out  by  transporting  extra  combination  blankets,  so 
made  as  to  admit  of  being  worn  as  aprons  when  moving 
through  wet  bushes  or  during  rainy  weather,  and  to  be  packed 
when  not  in  use,  singly  or  in  great  numbers  (as  horse 
blankets)  upon  any  loose  stock  that  may  accompany  the  com- 
mand. The  blankets  will  prove  invaluable  for  many  pur- 
poses, after  the  march  is  completed,  even  if  it  is  not  desirable 
to  adjust  them  as  shelters.  The  Indians  of  the  Northwest, 
when  traveling  rapidly,  invariably  transport  their  extra 
blankets  on  the  lead-horses,  and  make  such  uses  of  them  as 
the  nature  of  the  weather  necessitates. 

When  without  cover  of  any  description,  a  shelter  may  be 
frequently  made  by  selecting  several  small  trees  or  bushes, 
cutting  away  the  lower  branches  and  drawing  together  and 
interlacing  the  upper  ones.  Others,  if  needed,  may  be  added 
— loose  grass  and  twigs  being  thrown  over  all. 

A  still  more  substantial  shelter  may  be  made,  if  the  material 
is  at  hand,  by  sinking  two  forked  uprights,  placing  a  horizon- 
tal pole  across  them,  inclining  a  number  of  shorter  poles  and 
closely  interlacing  small  twigs,  grasses  or  reeds.  ' 

A  very  simple  shelter  may  be  formed  by  placing  several 
poles  in  a  semi-circle,  and  binding  the  small  ends  together 
with  a  rope  or  thong  and  covering  this  frame  with  canvas, 


Forced   Marches. 


'43 


blankets,  hides  or  brush.  It  is  preferable  to  the  foregoing, 
having  its  sides  covered. 

The  time  has  now  come  when  our  camp  equipage  needs  re- 
construction. As  a  help  in  this  direction,  the  author's  POR- 
TABLE COMBINATION  SHELTER,  STORM  AND  COMMON  TENT  has 

been  perfected,  and  criticism  has  been  invited  from  various 
sources  at  home  and  abroad.  Many  prominent  officers  of  the 
army  and  the  National  Guard  have  expressed  their  approba- 
tion of  the  same,  and  thus  far  not  an  adverse  criticism  has 
been  received. 

The  tent  consists  of  a  peculiarly  shaped  sheet  of  light 
canvas  or  other  suitable  material,  having  a  strong  cord  and 
flaps  (several  inches  wide)  about  its  edges  and  furnished  with 
hooks  and  rings  or  tapes  at  suitable  intervals.  The  shape  of 


the  tent  is  described  as  follows :  A  B  D  C  is  a  rectangle; 
B  F  =  y2  F  D;  A  E  =  %  E  C;  B  F  D  and  A  E  C  are  right 
angles.  For  regular  troops  C  D  =  6  feet,  and  for  the  officer's 
tent  C  D  =  7  feet. 

The  shape  of  the  canvas  is  such  as  to  permit  its  being 
secured  about  the  kit  so  as  to  thoroughly  protect  it — the 
triangular  end  flaps  being  folded  over  before  rolling;  also, 


144 


Mountain    Scouting. 


when  folded  over  from  both  sides  along  lines  parallel  to  A  C 
and  B  D,  and  at  distances  from  them  a  little  less  than 
one-fourth  of  C  D,  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  drawing, 
to  form  an  excellent  bed  covering  for  a  single  sleeper.  When 
spread  upon  the  ground,  the  blankets  are  placed  upon  the 
central  portion  of  the  rectangle  A  B  D  C.  The  canvas  is 


in  this  manner,  a  double  layer  of  canvas  covers  all  of 
the  sleeper  (his  feet  resting  along  the  line  A  B)  except  his 
head,  which  appears  at  the  triangular  opening  D  H  C. 

When  used  as  a  shelter  tent,  the  edges  E  C,  C  D  and  D  F, 
rest  upon  the  ground.  When  pitched  in  this  manner,  the 


tent  covers  a  maximum  available  space  for  a  minimum  can- 
vas, with  the  following  advantages: 

i  st.   Quickly,  easily  and  securely  pitched. 

2d.  The  tent  is  composed  of  but  one  piece  of  canvas — the  allow- 
ance of  one  man. 

3d.  Three  of  its  faces  are  covered,  two  of  which  may  be 
raised  for  the  purposes  of  ventilation. 

4th.  By  attaching  a  blanket,  extra  piece  of  canvas  or  a  second 
tent  along  the  upper  edge,  the  fourth  face  may  be  closed  ;  or,  by 
varying  its  inclination,  more  or  less  shade  may  be  secured. 


Forced  Marches. 


Two  of  these  tents  may  be  so  combined  as  to  form  a  tent 
having  a  laige  base  and  a  small  altitude,  that  will  withstand 
a  wind  storm  ( a  component  less  than  one-half  of  the  force  of 


the  wind  tending  to  overturn  it).  In  consequence  of  the 
gradually  sloping  walls,  there  is  much  available  space  for  the 
purposes  of  shelter  and  sleeping.  By  subjecting  the  canvas 
to  the  Neptunite  process,  it  will  shed  the  water,  during  a  rain 
storm,  when  pitched  in  this  manner,  and  will  not  become 
heavy  by  wetting.  If  concealment  be  desirable,  this  form  of 
tent  is  particularly  valuable. 

The  drawing  shows  how  two  shelters  may  be  combined  so 
as  to  form  the  common  or  *  A  '  tent.  Here  the  canvas  is 
reversed.  The  edge  C  D  is  at  the  ridge,  and  the  edges  E  A, 


A  B  and  B  F  rest  upon  the  ground. 

The  poles  used  for  the  shelters  are  joined  two  and  two,  and 
form  the  long  poles  required  for  the  common  tent.  This 
form  of  tent  is  particularly  desirable  during  rain  storms,  and 
is  well  suited  for  officers  and  others,  living  two  in  a  tent,  who 
are  liable  to  become  separated  at  any  time.  It  moreover  fur- 
nishes a  covering  for  the  kit  of  each,  and  the  individual  will 
at  all  times  have  his  proper  allowance  of  canvas  with  his  own 
bedding,  or  in  case  of  forced  marches,  etc.,  he  may  carry  it 
on  his  person  or  behind  the  saddle. 


146  Mountain   Scouting. 

The  poles  are  made  of  strong  and  light  wood,  with  plain  fer- 
rule joints  and  projecting  screws,  which  serve  to  strengthen 
the  joints  and  hold  the  corners  of  the  canvas  in  place,  being 
run  through  a  worked  hole  or  ring  arranged  for  the  purpose. 


The  shelter  tent  may  be  neatly  pitched,  without  poles, 
whenever  it  is  possible  to  suspend  the  ridge  rope  (formed  by 
uniting  the  guy-ropes)  between  trees  or  their  branches,  piles 
of  stores,  saddles,  aparajoes,  rocks,  etc.;  or,  it  may  be  pitched 
against  a  fence,  fallen  tree,  etc.  When  without  poles  or  any 
facilities  on  the  open  prairie,  either  the  carbine  or  ramrod 
will  make  a  good  substitute. 

The  following  is  an  extract  from  the  proceedings  of  a  Board 
of  Officers,  convened  at  West  Point,  N.  Y.,  per  Special  Orders 
No.  123,  Headquarters  Department  of  West  Point,  to  examine 
and  report  upon  the  merits  of  this  tent : 

DIMENSIONS    OF    OFFICER'S    TENT    PITCHED. 

First — as  a  shelter  tent.     Base  7  feet  square;  3^2  feet  high. 

Second — as  a  storm  tent,  combining  two  shelter  tents,  omit- 
ting the  poles  of  one.  Base  7  feet  by  14  feet  ;  3^ 
feet  high. 

Third — as  a  common  or  *  A'  tent.  Base  7  feet  square;  7  feet 
2  inches  high.  Weight,  including  poles,  3  Ibs.  2  ozs. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  advantages  of  the  tent  : 

1.  Capable  of  sub-division. 

2.  Maximum  available  space  for  minimum  canvas. 

3.  Same  poles  for  each  form  of  tent. 

4.  The  tent  is  expeditiously  pitched. 

5.  As  a  shelter  tent  it  is  far  more  secure  and   roomy  than 
the  one  now  used. 

6.  Three  faces  of  the  tent  are  covered,  and  the  fourth 
may  be  covered  by  a  blanket  or  odd  piece  of  canvas. 

7.  No  ridge  pole  is  required. 

8.  The  only  ropes  required   may  be  used   to  tie    up   the 
bundle. 

9.  It  is  a  superior  wrapper  for  the  bundle. 


Forced    Marches.  147 


10.  When  not  pitched  it  serves,  on  account  of  its  peculiar 
form,  as  an  excellent  bed  covering. 

11.  It  is  the  only  practicable  storm  tent,  and  to  this  point 
the  Board  particularly  invite  attention. 

12.  It  forms  a  roomy  and  convenient  'A'   or  common  tent, 
and  as  it  can  be  opened  at  both  ends,  it  can  be  rendered  more 
comfortable  in  warm  weather  than  the  old  tent. 

13.  Thirty-four    (34)    tents    (officer's)    or   forty  (40)   tents 
(men's),    with    poles   in   suitably   constructed   bags,    form   a 
handy  pack  for  a  mule.     The  common  tent  is  here  referred 
to. 

14.  If  transportation  is  abandoned,  the  tent  is  easily  borne 
on  the  person. 

15.  It  is  readily  adapted  to  a  wind  or  rain  storm. 

1 6.  The  shelter  tents  are   easily  put  together  to  form  a  se- 
cure storm  or  common  tent. 

In  conclusion,  the  Board  is  of  the  opinion  that  if  "  Far- 
row's Portable  Combination  Shelter,  Storm  and  Common 
Tent"  is  adopted,  it  will  prove  a  valuable  addition  to  the 
camp  equipage  now  issued.  *  *  *  * 

(Signed)         C.  T.  ALEXANDER, 

MAJOR  AND  SURGEON,  PRESIDENT. 
(Signed)     EZRA  B.  FULLER, 

IST  LIEUT.,  SEVENTH  CAVALRY, 
(Signed)     E.  J.  McCLERNAND, 

TST  LIEUT.,  2d  CAVALRY,  RECORDER. 

By  furnishing  a  light  and  useful  canvas,  like  the  one  above 
noticed,  in  connection  with  the  system  of  '  campaign  equip- 
ment' described  in  the  last  chapter,  the  soldier  will  be  pos- 
sessed of  a  field  equipment,  formed  upon  scientific  principles 
and  capable  of  practical  use  in  every  way  satisfactory.  The 
'  rolls'  admit  of  being  packed  handily  on  pack  mules,  twenty 
on  a  mule.  Before  going  into  an  engagement  or  becoming 
detached  from  the  train,  the  mules  may  be  readily  unpacked 
and  the  men  shoulder  their  'rolls.'  Ordinarily  the  'roll' 
should  contain  the  shelter  tent  and  one  blanket  only  ;  the 
other  articles  (one  blanket  and  change  of  clothing)  may  be 
put  in  at  the  discretion  of  the  commanding  officer. 


i-,8  Mountain  Scouting. 

The  following  advantages  of  such  an  equipment  are  evi- 
dent : 

1.  Each  of  the  '  rolls  '  contains   sufficient  to   make  a   com- 
plete shelter  tent,  a   warm   bed,   and   to   afford   each  man   a 
change  of  clothes. 

2.  The    weight    is    comparatively    little,    being    only    ten 
pounds. 

3.  The  weight  is   actually  uniformly  distributed   over  the 
body,  and  the  shape  and  bulk  of  the  combination  are  »uch  as 
to  permit  its  being  worn  without  inconveniencing  the   soldier. 

4.  In  the  first  moments  of  the  skirmish,  it  furnishes  a  ready 
cover  (by  slipping  it  to  the  front   and   over  the   head),  which 
will  protect  the  soldier  to  some  extent  until  the   trowel  bayo- 
net has  been  employed.     Two  or  three  '  rolls'  placed  together 
will  afford  an  excellent  cover  for  two  or  three  men. 

When  not  engaged  in  forced  marches,  and  when  not  com- 
pelled to  leave  the  means  of  transportation,  the  men  should 
bear  only  their  rifles,  ammunition,  intrenching  tools  and,  at 
times,  canteens.  The  haversack  and  contents  are  useless  and 
burdensome.  It  is  not  needed  during  an  ordinary  march, 
and  is  certainly  in  the  way  about  the  time  of  an  engagement. 
A  few  pieces  of  hard  bread  placed  in  the  hip  pocket  of  the 
soldier  do  not  incommode  him  and  are  always  attainable  ; 
whereas,  the  haversack  is  often  lost  and  oftener  abandoned 
before  the  soldier  has  had  an  opportunity  to  appease  his 
hunger. 

In  the  engagement  of  the  troops  under  Captain  Evan 
Miles,  near  Umatilla  agency,  Oregon,  July  13,  1878,  eighty- 
nine  of  the  men  wore  haversacks,  thirty-one  of  whicn  were 
lost  and  abandoned  during  the  fight,  and  were  missing  on 
arrival  into  camp  the  same  evening.  In  my  opinion,  there  is 
no  necessity  for  a  haversack  at  any  time. 

As  forced  marches  are  frequently  made  at  night,  a  suitable 
contrivance  for  giving  light,  when  it  is  difficult  to  follow  the 


Forced  Marches. 


trail,  is  very  desirable.     The  Ferguson  Patent  Lamps  are  excel- 
lent for  all  outdoor  work. 


FRONT.  BACK. 

The  drawing  shows  a  combination  head  or  staff  jack,  belt, 
dash,  camp  or  hunting  lamp  and  dark  lantern,  which  I  con- 
sider invaluable  for  night  travel  and  camping  purposes.  Its 
weight  is  one  pound,  its  dimensions  &%,  3^6  and  2^  inches. 
Its  parts  are  regulated  from  the  outside,  and  it  is  constructed 
so  as  to  burn  sperm,  lard,  signal  or  other  mixed  oils,  without 
a  chimney. 

The  flame  cannot  be  extinguished  by  wind,  rain  or  jolting, 
and  is  reliable  in  any  weather.  The  cap  or  cover  is  used  for 
obscuring  the  light  when  necessary,  also  for  protecting  the 
glass  face  in  transportation,  and  may  be  taken  off,  if  desired, 
by  simply  drawing  out  the  hinge  pin. 

It  has  folding  handles  at  the  back  and  a  metal  loop,  by 
which  it  may  be  hung  in  any  desired  position.  By  passing  a 
strap  or  cord  through  an  opening  at  the  back,  just  above  the 
handles,  it  may  be  attached  to  the  waist.  It  is  very  useful 
about  a  camp,  for  the  purposes  of  tent  lights  and  for  starting 
the  camp  fires  in  rainy  weather;  or,  for  night  travel  and  hunt- 
ing. There  is  almost  no  end  to  the  uses  to  which  it  may  be 
applied  in  the  course  of  an  extensive  journey.  The  light  is 


15°  Mountain  Scouting. 

sufficiently  strong  to  enable  a  person  to  see  at  least  eight  rods 
ahead,  and  is  reflected  250  feet  or  more. 


By  means  of  a  socket  attachment,  the  lamp  maybe  adjusted 
to  a  stick  or  pole  and  properly  placed  for  reading  and  writing 
at  night.  A  person  using  this  lamp  is  enabled  to  see  very 
clearly  in  three  or  four  feet  of  water,  by  adjusting  a  reflector 
to  the  face  of  the  lamp,  so  as  to  catch  the  rays  of  light  and 
reflect  them  downward. 

The  head  attachment  is  made  to  fit  perfectly  any  kind  or 
size  of  hat,  and  so  adjusted  as  to  throw  the  light  full  on  the 
object  viewed.  In  night  firing,  it  brings  the  light  very  close 
to  the  rifle. 

The  dash  attachment  not  only  holds  the  lamp  in  an  upright 
position  on  a  straight  or  curved  dash;  but  the  lamp  may  be 
attached  to  either  the  right  or  left  side,  or  to  the  top  of  the 
dash,  by  simply  reversing  the  arm. 

The  bracket  attachment  may  be  used  for  attaching  the  lamp 
to  a  wooden  dash  or  pillar,  and  is  adjustable  to  either  an  up- 
right or  horizontal  position,  and  may  be  used  either  right  or 
left  hand. 

Frequently,  in  consequence  of  the  loss  of  pack  animals  and 
when  it  is  necessary  to  reduce  the  loads  in  view  of  forced  and 
rapid  marches,  articles  must  be  left  behind.  They  should  be 
hid  away  or  '  cached,'  with  the  expectation  of  again  taking 
them  up.  The  articles  are  frequently  '  cached  '  in  caves,  in 
rocks,  or  in  the  earth;  sometimes,  in  the  tops  of  trees  with 
thick  boughs,  so  that  they  cannot  be  seen  from  below.  A 


Forced  Marches.  151 


spruce  tree  will  give  excellent  cover  to  anything  placed  in  its 
branches.  Care  should  be  taken  to  remove  all  tracks  or  signs 
that  would  lead  to  the  '  caches,'  so  as  to  evade  the  keen 
scrutiny  of  hostiles,  and  make  them  safe  from  animals  that 
might  destroy  them.  A  small  '  cache '  may  be  made,  in 
safety,  by  bending  down  a  young  tree,  tying  the  bundle  to  the 
top  and  allowing  it  to  spring  up  again. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  'caches'  should  be  made  at  a  dis- 
tance from  all  trails  and  points  where  hostiles  or  others  are 
likely  to  pass,  and  should  be  secured  by  rocks  too  heavy  for 
any  animal  to  remove.  The  direction  and  distance  of  the 
'  cache  '  from  some  prominent  mark,  such  as  a  rock,  tree  or 
the  place  of  the  fire  (which  will  exist  for  years)  should  be  re- 
corded by  the  commanding  officer. 

Indians  are  very  shrewd  in  finding  whatever  is  left  at  or 
near  a  former  camp  or  trail,  and  it  is  seldom  that  the  inex- 
perienced succeed  in  hiding  anything  away  from  them.  A 
ruse  frequently  resorted  to  in  order  to-  cover  up  all  sign  of 
the  'cache,'  is  to  pitch  a  tent  over  it  and  occupy  the  tent 
until  all  signs  are  effaced.  By  making  a  fire  or  picketing  the 
horses  over  it,  the  same  purpose  is  attained. 

It  is  a  very  good  plan  to  make  two  'caches,'  one  contain- 
ing a  few  things  of  little  value  and  concealed  with  little  care, 
the  other  containing  the  articles  of  value  and  made  .with  all 
possible  care. 

After  the  first  has  been  discovered,  all  further  search  in 
nine  cases  out  of  ten  will  be  abandoned. 

One  of  the  best  ruses,  in  this  connection,  that  I  ever  prac- 
ticed, was  to  make  the  '  cache '  look  like  a  grave,  placing  a 
stone  or  head-board  appropriately  marked.  The  ruse  is  gen- 
erally successful  with  hostiles  and  is  particularly  sure  with 
renegade  white  men. 

When  making  '  caches,'  it  should  be  remembered  that  a 
heavy  rain  will  cause  the  ground  lately  disturbed  to  sink. 


152  '    Mountain  Scouting. 


CHAPTER   X. 

CROSSING    RIVERS. 

THE  principal  delays  and  difficulties  encountered  by  a 
marching  column  in  a  mountainous  country  attend  the 
crossing  of  numerous  streams  and  rivers.  The  make-up  of 
the  column,  and  the  nature  of  the  stream  and  its  approaches 
will,  in  general,  decide  the  most  proper  mode  of  crossing. 

Dismounted  men  may  often  save  time  and  labor  by  leap- 
ing over  deep  and  narrow  streams  or  ravines,  although  it 
may  be  necessary  to  drive  the  stock  many  miles  up  or  down 
stream  before  finding  a  suitable  crossing. 

If  a  pole  eight  or  ten  feet  long  can  be  secured,  by  a  union 
of  leaping  and  vaulting  a  wonderfully  great  distance  may 
be  passed  over. 

The  planting  of  the  pole  and  the  spring 
should  take  place  at  the  same  instant,  in 
order  that  the  swing  may  be  perfect  and  the 
upper  and  lower  members  act  in  unison.  If 
the  left  hand  is  below,  the  leaper  should 
spring  with  the  left  foot,  and  vice  versa. 
During  the  swing  upward  the  leaper  should 
turn  his  body,  so  that  when  he  begins  the 
descent  his  face  shall  be  directed  to  the  place  where  the 
leap  was  begun.  The  descent  must  take  place  upon  the 
balls  of  the  toes,  and  with  a  sinking  of  the  knees. 


Crossing  Rivers. 


'S3 


The  leap  may  be  made  longer  by  forcing  the 
body  up  very  high,  by  pressure  of  the  hands, 
(one  of  which  is  on  or  near  the  end  of  the  pole) 
so  that  the  leaper  can  swing  over  the  top  of  the 
pole  and  allow  it  to  pass  between  the  legs  while 
descending. 

To  transport  the  packs  over  such  a  deep  and 
narrow  stream  or  ravine,  find,  if  possible,  a  tall, 
overhanging  tree,  unite  the  lariats  or  lash  ropes  and  pass 
the  rope  over  the  fork  of  a  high  and  projecting  branch. 

One  end  of  the  rope,  after  passing  over  the  branch,  is 
made  fast  to  a  limb  or  rock  near  the  ground,  while  the 
packs  are  attached  to  the  other  end  and  swung  across,  being 
guided  by  ropes  fastened  to  the  swing  rope  and  held  by 
men  on  both  sides. 

After  the  swing  rope  has  been  once  adjusted,  it  may  be 
used  for  the  purpose  of  swinging  the  men  across. 

A  fallen  tree  or  beam,  across  a 
stream  or  ravine,  will  often  afford  a 
good  footway  without  an  expendi- 
ture of  labor. 

After  a  little  practice,  the  men 
will  be  enabled  to  travel  the  beam  or  even  a  suspended  rope 
with  much  ease  and  rapidity.  The  surest  positions  are,  while 
traveling,  in  the  rest  sideways  (keeping  the  body  in  an  up- 
right position),  and  riding  over  the  beam  sitting  astride 
(forward,  sideward  or  backward). 

In  case  of  giddiness,  it  is  well  to  lean  forward,  clasp  the 
beam  with  the  arms  and  move  along  in  a  lying  position. 

The  suspended  rope  may  be  easily  traveled  in  the  balance 
rest,  crossways  and  sideward,  or  forward  and  backward 
hanging  by  the  hands  and  legs,  the  latter  either  locked  or 
moving  in  unison  with  the  hands. 

When  the  stream  is  too  wide  to  be  spanned  by  a  single 
tree,  a  good  footway  may  be  secured  by  felling  several  trees, 


154  Mountain  Scouting. 

judiciously  selected  on  each  bank.  The  tops  of  the  trees 
should  point  well  up  stream.  Thus,  the  trees  b  and  c,  se- 
lected so  as  to  cover  the  most  sluggish  portions  of  the  cur- 
rent, have  their  tops  closely  interlacing  up  stream,  in  con- 
sequence of  the  current  at  d. 


The  additional  trees  like  a,  are  selected  so  as  to  strengthen 
the  work,  being  made  fast  to  the  banks  further  up  stream. 
In  this  manner,  the  foundation  for  a  temporary  bridge  over 
a  wide  and  deep  stream  may  be  quickly  and  readily  made. 

The  quickest  and  most  convenient  mode  of  crossing  such 
rivers  as  will  permit  it,  is  to  ford  them;  and  the  selection  of 
the  safest  place  for  fording  is  a  matter  of  some  practical 
importance.  The  depth  of  the  ford  should  not  exceed 
three  feet  for  infantry,  nor  four  feet  for  cavalry,  and  its 
bottom  should  be  firm  and  even.  For  a  small  party,  one  of 
hard  sand  or  gravel  is  the  safest ;  but  a  sandy  bottom  is 
very  bad  for  a  large  number  of  men  or  animals,  as  the  sand 
is  stirred  up  and  carried  away  by  the  current  and  thus  ren- 
ders the  ford  impracticable  for  the  hindmost. 

In  hunting  a  suitable  ford,  follow  the  windings  up  stream 
rather  than  down,  where  tributaries  are  continually  putting 
in  and  increasing  the  volume  of  water.  As  a  rule,  a  stream 
presents  few  fordable  places  in  the  winding  portions  of  its 
course,  except  in  the  case  of  double  bends.  It  usually  runs 
deep  along  hollow  curves  and  beneath  steep  and  overhang- 


Crossing  Rivers.  155 


ing  banks,  while  all  projecting  points  (except  jutting  rocks) 
have  shoals  extending  from  them,  with  frequent  return  cur- 
rents on  the  upper  side.  A  road  or  '  trail '  starting  from 
each  of  the  opposite  banks,  will  generally  indicate  the  ex- 
istence of  a  ford  ;  but  a  '  trail,'  on  one  side  only,  often  in- 
dicates merely  a  watering  place  of  animals. 

The  best  ford  seldom  leads  directly  across  a  stream,  but 
must  be  selected  at  a  point  where  the  width  of  the  stream 
is  greater  than  usual  with  the  point  of  egress  some  distance 
down  stream,  in  order  that  those  crossing  may  secure  the 
advantage  of  the  current.  In  certain  cases,  however,  owing 
to  the  formation  of  the  river  banks,  it  is  necessary  to  ford 
obliquely  up  the  stream.  This  is  always  attended  with 
much  labor  and  difficulty,  and  frequently  in  the  struggle 
with  the  current  the  footings  of  men  and  animals  are  lost. 
In  such  cases,  it  will  accomplish  much  if  mounted  men  are 
placed  at  suitable  points,  to  urge  forward  with  whips  any 
animals  that  do  not  work  properly.  To  insure  reaching 
the  proper  point  of  egress,  some  of  the  animals  will  need 
frequent  assistance  by  means  of  attached  lariat  ropes. 
When  the  river  is  deep  and  rapid,  in  consequence  of  the 
body's  buoyancy  diminishing  its  power  to  resist  the  action 
of  the  current,  it  might  be  well  to  place  a  heavy  rock  in  the 
arms  before  entering  the  ford. 

When  the  different  arms  cross  a  ford  separately,  the  in- 
fantry should  precede  the  cavalry  and  artillery;  otherwise 
they  would  destroy  the  bottom  and  render  the  crossing  for 
the  infantry  difficult  or  impossible.  While  fording,  it  is 
important  to  direct  the  eyes  to  some  fixed  point  upon  the 
shore  and  not  look  at  the  water,  and  particularly  when  the 
water-course  is  broad  or  the  current  rapid. 

It  is  imprudent  to  trust  too  much  to  fords  in  brooks  and 
rivers  in  mountainous  countries  where  they  are  subject  to 
sudden  variations. 

When  the  snow  begins  to  melt  in  the  spring,  the  moun- 


T  56  Mountain  Scouting. 

tain  streams  rise  rapidly,  and  on  sandy  bottoms  the  torrents 
of  water  are  continually  cutting  new  channels  many  feet  in 
depth.  Where  there  is  a  bar  in  the  morning,  there  may  be 
ten  feet  of  water  at  noon  and  a  bar  again  at  night. 

The  currents  set  in  all  directions  relative  to  the  course 
of  the  stream,  and  cut  innumerable  channels  with  very 
steep  sides.  It  is  extremely  dangerous  to  attempt  the 
crossing  of  such  streams — one  moment  stepping  in  water  a 
few  inches  deep  ;  the  next,  being  in  swimming  water  and 
struggling  for  a  footing  on  the  bar  but  a  short  distance 
beyond. 

Many  of  the  Western  streams  flow  over  large  beds  of 
quicksand  and  must  be  approached  and  crossed  with  the 
greatest  caution.  There  are  several  varieties  of  quicksand: 
the  less  dangerous  classes  appear  to  have  no  bottom,  there 
being  an  absence  of  everything  except  sand  and  water — 
while  the  more  dangerous  are  those  which  catch  and  tena- 
ciously hold  the  victim,  allowing  him  to  slowly  sink  out  of 
sight  and  cutting  him  off  from  everything  except  external 
assistance.  These  sands,  however,  generally  have  a  firm 
surface  and  will  give  sufficient  time  for  warning  to  any  one 
on  the  alert.  On  arrival  upon  the  bank  of  such  a  river,  the 
best  track  for  the  ford  should  be  carefully  selected  by  men 
on  foot.  The  footmen,  if  any,  should  cross  before  the  ani- 
mals, thus  making  the  ford  more  secure  by  packing  the 
sand.  The  stock  should  be  watered  before  entering  upon 
the  ford,  and  under  no  circumstances  permitted  to  stop 
in  the  stream. 

Most  animals,  and  particularly  mules,  on  feeling  their  feet 
sink  in  the  sand,  become  alarmed  with  fear,  loose  all  control 
of  their  power,  and  sooner  or  later  lie  down  and  make  no 
effort  to  get  on  their  feet  again. 

Beaver  dams  are  generally  found  in  muddy  places,  and 
it  is  a  good  rule  to  be  on  the  lookout  for  mire  in  their  vi- 
cinity. 


Crossing  Rivers.  157 


Unfordable  streams  may  be  readily  crossed  by  means  of 
flying  bridges  or  rafts,  when  there  is  sufficient  current  and 
when  ropes  and  timber  are  handy. 

The  flying  bridge  or  raft  may  be  successfully  navigated 
by  attaching  it  to  a  swinging  cable  made  fast  up  stream;  or, 
by  making  it  fast  to  a  traveler  running  on  a  cable  stretched 
across  the  stream.  In  the  first  case,  the  lower  end  of  the 
cable  should  terminate  in  a  bridle.  On  leaving  the  shore, 
the  end  of  the  bridle  farthest  from  it  is  gathered  in,  while 
the  other  one  is  slackened,  and  the  raft  shoots  across  the 
stream.  To  re-cross,  the  end  of  the  bridle  farthest  from 
the  shore  is  hauled  in  and  the  other  again  slackened. 

The  same  may  be  effected  by  means  of  rudders,  the  cable 


being  made  fast  to  the  raft  about  one-third  of  its  length 
from  the  bow,  while  it  is  kept  headed  obliquely  up  stream. 
The  principle  of  action  in  this  case  is  the  same  as  that  of 
a  kite  in  the  air. 

In  the  second  case,  the  cable  stretched  across  the  stream 
must  be  carefully  secured  when  the  current  is  great.  The 
maximum  pull  of  the  raft  will  be  S  V2,  in  which  S  is  the 
area  of  the  immersed  side  of  the  raft  in  square  feet,  and  V 
the  velocity  of  the  current  in  feet  per  second.  To  insure 
proper  progress,  the  velocity  of  the  current  should  not  be 
less  than  two  miles  per  hour. 

Referring  to  the  following  drawing,  the  component  of 
the  force  of  the  current  which  tends  to  force  the  raft  di- 
rectly across  the  stream  may  be  readily  traced. 

If  the  raft  is  kept  on  the  course  M  N,  and  the  current  is 
running  in  the  direction  A  X,  it  is  plainly  seen  how  such  a 


158  Mountain  Scouting. 

force,  A  B,  is  divided  into  two  components,  A  C  and  A  D, 
acting  parallel  and  perpendicularly  to  M  N. 


£-'B 


CM 

-X       A 


The  component  A  D  is  again  sub-divided  into  two  com- 
ponents, A  E  and  A  F,  acting  parallel  and  perpendicularly 
to  A  X. 

D  E  =  A  F  is  the  component  of  the  power  of  the  current 
tending  to  force  the  raft  across  the  stream. 

To  produce  the  best  effect,  the  side  of  the  raft  should  be 
kept  at  an  angle  of  55°  with  the  direction  of  the  current,  or 
BAC  =  55°. 

The  cable  may  be  taken  across  the  stream  by  a  swimmer, 
or  by  means  of  a  lobstick — made  by  splitting  a  stick,  in- 
serting a  rock  or  pebble  and  lashing  the  stick  with  twine. 
A  small  line  is  first  made  fast  to  the  cable,  the  end  of  which 
is  sent  across;  whereupon,  the  end  of  the  cable  is  drawn 
over.  Under  certain  circumstances,  the  small  line  may  be 
sent  over  by  means  of  an  arrow,  rocket  or  kite. 

The  mountain  streams,  during  the  seasons  of  high  water, 
remain  above  the  fording  stage  for  several  weeks,  and  often 
render  it  necessary,  when  time  is  an  important  element,  to 
cross  them  by  swimming  or  ferrying  rudely  constructed 
boats  or  rafts. 

Timber  rafts  may  be  quickly  constructed  in  a  wooded 
country.  The  size  and  description  of  the  timber  must  de- 
termine the  number  of  layers  there  should  be.*  The  tim- 

*  The  cubic  contents,  in  feet,  of  round  timber  =  Z  (G2X. 07958),  in 
which  L  =  length  of  the  log  in  feet,  and  G  is  the  mean  between  the  girths 
at  both  ends  in  feet. 

The  floating  power  of  any  log  may  be  readily  calculated  when  the 
specific  gravity  of  the  wood  is  known. 


Crossing  Rivers.  159 

ber  for  rafts  should  be  floated,  if  possible,  to  the  place  re- 
quired and  put  together  in  the  water. 

The  Indians  use  '  bull-boats '  for  crossing  deep  rivers. 
The  frame-work  is  made  of  willows,  cotton-woods,  or  any 
small  trees  that  grow  along  the  banks  of  the  streams,  firmly 
lashed  into  the  shape  of  half  an  egg.  The  frame  is  covered 
with  a  green  or  soaked  hide  and  left  to  dry.  Several  hides 
may  be  sewn  together  so  as  to  cover  quite  a  large  frame.  A 
boat  constructed  of  three  hides  will  transport  1,000  pounds 
with  perfect  safety.  The  Indians  of  the  Northwest  often 


use  dug-out  canoes  and  logs  lashed  together ;  also  canoes 
made  of  bundles  of  reeds  and  cedar  bark,  with  projecting 
prows,  very  much  resembling  some  of  the  iron-clad  rams. 

Colonel  R.  C.  Buchanan,  of  our  service,  invented  a  por- 
table boat,  made  in  sections,  which  was  used  to  good  advan- 
tage in  several  expeditions  in  Oregon  and  Washington  Ter- 
ritory. A  single  boat,  with  all  its  appurtenances,  capable 
of  sustaining  ten  men,  could  be  easily  packed  on  a  single 
mule. 

Frequently  the  supplies,  in  part,  are  transported  in  casks; 
if  so,  it  is  a  simple  matter  to  construct  a  cask  raft,  which 
will  do  remarkably  good  service.  If  the  number  of  gallons 
that  a  cask  will  hold  is  known,  its  buoyancy  may  be  easily 
ascertained  by  multiplying  that  number  by  ten  (the  num- 
ber of  pounds  weight  in  a  gallon  of  water).  Casks  are  so 
useful  for  packing  puposes,  so  easily  and  safely  transported, 
and  form  such  admirable  rafts,  it  is  difficult  to  conceive, 
where  transport  is  a  serious  matter,  of  a  more  economical 
preparation  for  crossing  unknown  rivers  on  wild  expedi- 


160  Mountain  Scouting. 

tions.  The  larger  the  casks  (consistently  with  ease  of  pack- 
ing) the  better,  as  the  weight  will  be  smaller  in  proportion 
to  the  buoyancy. 

To  make  the  raft,  the  casks  are  placed  in  a  row,  side  by 
side,  with  the  bungs  up  ;  two  rails  or  saplings  called  gun- 


nels are  laid  along  them  about  four  inches  from  each  end. 
Slings  of  strong  rope  are  passed  under  the  casks,  from  end 
to  end  of  the  gunnels.  The  ends  of  the  sling  should  be 
made  fast  to  the  gunnel,  by  means  of  the  bowline  and  fish- 
erman's bend.  Between  the  casks  there  are  brace  lashings, 
as  shown  in  the  drawing.  In  the  absence  of  sufficient  rope 
the  gunnels  must  be  nailed  or  spiked  to  the  casks;  but  the 
use  of  nails  or  spikes  in  rafts  or  floating  bridges  is  to  be 
avoided  when  possible,  as  they  admit  of  insufficient  play. 

To  determine  the  number  of  casks  required  to  construct 
a  raft  that  will  support  N  pounds,  find  the  solid  contents  of 
one  cask  in  cubic  inches  and  multiply  it  by  the  specific  grav- 
ity of  water.  From  the  product  subtract  the  weight  of  the 
cask,  the  remainder  will  be  the  weight  it  will  support  with- 
out sinking.  Take  a  sufficient  number  of  casks  to  bring 
this  weight  up  to  N  pounds. 

In  emergencies,  the  tents  and  paulins,  when  securely  lashed 
over  suitable  frames  of  boxes,  aparejos,  etc.,  will  form  very 
good  ferrying  rafts. 

See  Appendix  for  the  analysis  of  Rowing. 

When  there  is  no  time  or  material  for  building  a  raft, 
the  supplies  should  be  wrapped  as  nearly  water-tight  as 
possible  in  the  canvas  and  rubber  blankets  of  the  command. 
and  towed  across  by  the  swimmers. 


Crossing  Rivers.  161 

By  resting  the  body  on  a  log  of  light  wood,  if  obtainable, 
it  will  be  well  supported  and  the  crossing  rendered  much 
easier.  If  the  part  of  a  tree  near  the  roots  be  selected,  the 
stumps  of  the  roots  will  form  pegs  on  which  to  hang  the 
clothes,  supplies,  etc. 

All  soldiers  should  know  how  to  swim,  in  order  to  be  ef- 
fective and  perform  various  important  services.  A  com- 
mand consisting  of  troops  who  cannot  swim,  may  be  re- 
tarded by  an  insignificant  stream,  if  not  completely  para- 
lyzed in  its  operations.  The  emergencies  requiring  a 
knowledge  of  the  art  are  of  daily  occurrence.  Time  and 
again  have  insignificant  streams  swollen  into  plunging  tor- 
rents, without  any  warning  whatever.  Numerous  lives  have 
been  lost  by  the  sudden  appearance  of  sweeping  streams  of 
water,  where  a  few  moments  before  nothing  but  dry  earth 
could  be  found.  Whole  commands  have  been  carried  away 
by  sudden  raises  during  the  night,  although  the  camps 
were  made  upon  the  banks  many  feet  above  the  usual 
water-level. 

The  following  extract  from  the  report  of  a  commanding 
officer,  who  experienced  such  a  washing  out,  although  en- 
camped where,  the  day  before,  there  was  no  sign  of  water, 
will  serve  to  illustrate  : 

"  The  only  thing  that  prevented  total  destruction  was  the 
fact  that  my  camp  was  surrounded  by  a  belt  of  timber  on 
three  sides,  and  as  the  men  were  carried  off  by  the  current, 
they  were  enabled  to  save  themselves  by  catching  the  limbs 
of  trees.  When  day  broke,  it  showed  almost  all  the  men  of 
my  company  on  the  tops  of  the  trees,  without  any  covering 
except  remnants  of  underclothes,  and  beneath  them  the  tor- 
rent still  raging.  After  the  lapse  of  a  few  hours,  the  water 
began  to  fall,  and  a  few  men  who  could  swim  got  to  the 
hills.  Afterward  the  others,  myself  among  the  number, 
were  got  off  with  life  lines  and  various  other  means.  Up 
to  this  time  nothing  was  to  be  seen  of  what  had  been  my 


162  Mountain  Scouting. 

camp,  except  the  top  of  an  army  wagon,  which  had  stuck  to 
a  log  on  the  ground,  and  on  this  wagon  were  collected 
eleven  men,  who  were  thus  saved  from  a  watery  grave.  Six 
men  of  my  company  were  drowned  and  twenty-six  horses 
lost." 

A  complete  SYSTEM  OF  LAND-TAUGHT  SWIMMING,  originally 
prepared  by  the  author  for  the  instruction  of  the  Cadets  at 
the  United  States  Military  Academy,  is  inserted  in  the  Ap- 
pendix. 

Great  care  must  be  exercised  when  swimming  the  stock. 
Suitable  points  of  ingress  and  egress  (the  latter  at  least  a 
distance  equal  to  the  width  of  the  stream  below  the  former, 
if  possible)  are  first  selected. 

At  the  point  of  ingress,  the  bed  of  the  stream  must  be 
firm,  or  else  made  so  by  throwing  in  brush,  timber  or  rocks, 
in  order  to  prevent  bogging  or  miring.  The -point  of  egress 
must  furnish  a  point  of  support  upon  which  the  animal  can 
place  his  hind  feet,  just  before  springing  upon  the  bank. 

If  the  soldier  can  swim,  he  should  drive  his  horse  into  the 
water,  seize  his  tail  and  guide  him  to  the  point  of  egress — 
splashing  water  in  his  face,  should  the  animal  endeavor  to 
turn  his  head  or  change  his  course.  If  the  soldier  cannot 
swim,  he  should  make  himself  fast  to  the  saddle,  lay  hold 
upon  the  mane,  ride  into  the  river  and  give  his  horse  a  loose 
rein. 

The  plan  of  having  each  horseman  carry  a  footman  mount- 
ed behind  will  often  prove  successful.  It  was  in  this  manner 
that  the  Necker  was  crossed  by  Marshals  Turenne  and  Gra- 
mont  in  1645. 

When  there  is  danger  of  the  horses  drowning,  should  they 
land  beyond  the  point  of  egress,  the  following  plan,  pro- 
vided the  current  is  not  too  strong,  should  be  adopted  : 

Let  a  few  of  the  swimmers  cross  the  river,  taking  with 
them  one  end  of  a  rope  (made  by  uniting  the  lariats  or  lash 
ropes),  the  other  end  being  retained  at  the  point  of  ingress 


Crossing  Rivers.  163 

and  made  fast  to  the  neck  of  a  quiet  and  easy  swimming 
horse. 

The  horses  are  then  brought  up  in  succession,  and  each 
made  fast  to  the  tail  of  the  horse  preceding,  by  means  of 
lariats,  until  they  are  all  tied  together. 

When  all  is  ready,  the  first  horse  is  carefully  led  into  the 
water  (followed  by  the  others)  and  started  on  a  line  for  the 
point  of  egress — the  men  on  the  opposite  shore  pulling  in 
the  rope  and  helping  him  to  stem  the  current.  As  soon  as 
this  horse  strikes  bottom,  by  pulling  those  behind  him,  he 
assists  them  in  landing.  The  men  who  cannot  swim  at  all 
should  be  tied  upon  the  best  swimming  horses  and  sent  over. 

When  the  current  is  not  very  strong,  I  believe  it  is  safer 
and  more  satisfactory  to  swim  along  with  the  horse,  on  the 
down  stream  side,  and  only  very  poor  swimmers  should  re- 
main in  the  saddle,  as  the  animal  is  very  apt  to  lose  his  equi- 
librium and  roll  over. 

Mules  are  splendid  swimmers,  unless  by  accident  they  get 
water  in  their  ears.  When  this  happens  they  cease  to  move 
and  drop  their  ears,  and  unless  gotten  out  of  the  water  at 
once  will  drown.  They  should  be  permitted  to  enter  the 
water  slowly  and  without  crowding,  or  they  will  probably 
submerge  their  heads.  If  the&?//  mare  be  first  taken  across, 
the  mules  will  follow  without  much  urging. 

When  the  animals  are  tied  together,  as  above  described,, 
great  care  must  be  taken  to  keep  them  all  straight  on  the 
course  across  the  stream,  or  a  serious  accident  may  result. 
If  some  swing  out  of  the  course  an  entanglement  may  sooner 
or  later  follow,  or  the  animals  may  rapidly  travel  down 
stream,  swimming  round  and  round  in  circles.  When  such 
happens,  good  swimmers  must  hasten  to  the  rescue  and  cut 
the  ropes  at  close  intervals. 


164  Mountain  Scouting. 


CHAPTER  XL 

THE  CAMP. 


A  locality  well  sheltered  and  secured,  and  affording  fuel, 
grass  and  fresh  water,  should  be  selected  for  the  camp. 

If  it  is  expected  to  remain  in  the  camp  for  any  great 
length  of  time,  its  sanitary  condition  must  be  carefully  ob- 
served. All  ponds,  swamps,  lands  recently  stripped  of  their 
timber,  and  muddy  rivers  must  be  kept  at  a  distance.  In  a 
malarious  district,  it  is  well  to  habitually  sleep  between  two 
fires. 

The  flood  level  of  the  nearest  water  should  also  be  care- 
fully noticed — weeds  and  stray  bits  of  drift-wood  washed 
into  the  branches  of  adjacent  trees  or  bushes  will  serve  as 
a  guide.  Many  streams  are  subject  to  sudden  and  terrific- 
rises,  and  frequently  without  any  apparent  cause. 

When  camping  for  the  night  on  a  fordable  stream,  with 
the  indention  of  crossing,  make  it  an  invariable  rule  to  cross 
it  before  going  into  camp.  A  sudden  rise  or  appearance  of 
the  enemy  might  seriously  interfere  with  the  crossing  next 
morning. 

Wind  storms  are  a  common  annoyance  in  the  camp. 
When  there  is  time  to  prepare  for  their  coming,  the  tent 
pegs  should  be  secured  and  sufficient  guy-ropes  attached  to 
the  tent.  If  the  soil  is  loose  and  sandy,  rocks  or  other  hard 
material  should  be  placed  under  the  tent  poles  to  prevent 
their  working  into  the  soil,  and  leaving  the  tent  slack  and 
unsteady — the  pegs  should  also  be  inclined  toward  the  tent 


The  Camp.  165 

and  driven  in  the  direction  of  the  prolongation  of  the  tent 
cords  (if  they  are  inclined  from  the  tent,  they  will  soon  be 
jerked  loose).  When  the  pegs  will  not  hold  at  all,  fasten  the 
tent  cords  to  brush  or  rocks  buried  in  the  soil. 

A  few  trees  add  very  much  to  the  comfort  of  a  camp,  and 
when  they  are  so   situated    as  to  permit    the  guy  or  ridge 


ropes  to  be  made  fast  to  them  or  their  branches,  the  wind 
storm  need  not  be  dreaded. 

So  far  as  may  be  prudent,  the  camp  should  be  protected 
by  bluffs  and  thickets,  and  the  backs  of  the  tents  should  be 
placed  towards  the  wind.  It  is  not  wise  to  camp  beneath 
certain  trees,  whose  branches  are  liable  to  suddenly  fall  off. 

In  a  hostile  country,  the  security  of  the  command  will 
depend  very  much  upon  the  judicious  selection  of  a 
camp  as  regards  its  capability  of  defense.  If  on  the  bank 
of  a  stream,  a  concave  bend,  where  the  water  isMeep,  should 
be  selected.  In  such  a  position  the  defending  party  can 
cross  his  fire  in  case  of  an  attack  from  the  other  bank,  or 
can  herd  the  stock  in  the  concavity  of  the  bend  in  order  to 
avoid  a  stampede.  When  the  camp  is  remote  from  a  stream 
or  river,  a  portion  of  it  should  rest  on  the  highest  hill  or 
bluff  within  range.  As  a  rule,  the  tents  should  be  pitched  on 
that  side  of  the  camp  most  exposed  to  attack.  When  the 
packs  and  aparejos  are  removed,  in  camp,  they  should  be 
arranged  so  as  to  form  a  fortification  in  case  of  need. 


1 66  Mountain  Scouting. 

Skunks  and  rattlesnakes  frequently  visit  camp. 

The  skunk,  when  hungry,  is  quite  fearless  and  will  not 
hesitate  to  enter  a  tent  in  search  of  food,  or  to  attempt  to 
devour  the  face  or  hand  of  a  sleeping  person.  Instances  are 
not  rare  in  which  their  bites  have  resulted  in  a  most  fatal 
and  horrible  hydrophobia. 

At  first  frost,  rattlesnakes  commence  a  pilgrimaged/2  masse, 
across  rivers  and  lakes,  up  and  down  mountains,  to  their 
winter  rendezvous  (some  inapproachable  cavern)  where  hun- 
dreds assemble  and  remain  in  the  torpid  state  during  the 
winter.  The  male  and  female  go  out  in  company  upon 
their  summer's  peregrinations.  The  two  are  never  found 
together,  but  are  within  hearing  of  each  other's  rattle  and 
display  a  wonderful  instinct  in  tracking  each  other.  The 
Indians  take  advantage  of  this  and  ingeniously  trap  them, 
before  they  reach  their  blankets.  Having  prepared  an  old 
log  by  removing  its  central  portion,  so  as  to  leave  an  open- 


ing sufficiently  large  to  permit  the  snake  to  crawl  through, 
but  not  to  turn  around  after  having  once  entered,  the  dead 
snake  is  dragged  along  -the  ground  up  to  the  log  and  then 
through  it.  •  The  further  end  of  the  log  is  then  closed  by 
means  of  nails  or  wooden  pegs.  It  is  not  long  before  the 
companion  snake  trails  the  dead  snake,  and  enters  the  log; 
where,  being  unable  to  crawl  through,  turn  around  or  back 
out  (in  consequence  of  the  backward  inclination  of  his 
scales),  he  is  retained  in  a  helpless  condition  for  any  length 
of  time.  The  snake  usually  strikes  after  the  warning  of  the 
rattle — a  peculiarly  hollow  death-like  sound — from  an  ele- 
vation of  about  one-third  his  length,  after  coiling  up  the 


The  Camp.  167 

body.       He   is  very   susceptible   of  cold  and,  at  night,  will 


crawl  into  a  tent  or  shanty  and  coil  up  near  the  fire  or  in 
the  bedding. 

As  a  usual  thing,  venomous  snakes  congregate  close  to 
the  water.  If  holes  are  discovered  in  the  ground,  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  beds,  it  will  be  well  to  stamp  the  earth  and 
rocks  into  them,  as  they  are  frequently  the  burrows  of  va- 
rious reptiles. 

When  hostile  Indians  are  supposed  to  be  about,  the  place 
selected  for  camp  should  be  carefully  examined  on  all  sides, 
in  order  to  discover  any  tracks  or  Indian  signs,  before  re- 
moving the  packs  or  unsaddling.  It  is  a  favorite  trick  of 
the  Indians  to  stampede  the  animals  upon  first  arrival  in 
camp,  when  the  attention  of  every  one  is  preoccupied  and 
more  or  less  confusion  reigns.  They  seldom  attempt  a 
stampede  at  night,  preferring  the  day-light  for  such  work, 
and  invariably  select  the  early  dawn  of  day  or  some  mo- 
ment when  the  command  is  in  a  probable  state  of  confusion. 

A  stampede  is  one  of  the  most  dreaded  disasters  that  can 
happen.  Frequently,  the  animals  are  not  only  widely  scat- 
tered, but  irretrievably  lost;  and  much  damage  follows  the 
rush  of  the  infuriated  herd  through  the  camp,  frequently 
trampling  the  men  and  tents,  and  killing  themselves  by  com- 
ing in  contact  with  trees  and  projecting  rocks. 


1 68  Mountain  Scouting. 

When  attempting  a  stampede,  a  few  Indians  will  some- 
times steal  into  camp,  go  to  the  bell  mare,  remove  the  bell, 
place  it  on  one  of  their  fleetest  animals  and  ride  out  of 
camp  (before  noticed)  followed  by  the  entire  herd.  Again, 
they  sneakingly  approach  as  near  the  herd  as  possible,  and 
dash  into  it,  with  their  horses  at  full  speed,  at  the  same  time 
terrifying  them  by  the  most  hideous  yells,  and  succeed  in 
driving  off  the  stock  before  any  effectual  resistance  can  be 
made.  It  is  often  effected  by  starting  an  Indian  pony  into 
the  herd  or  camp,  with  a  buffalo  robe  dangling  at  his  heels. 
The  alarm  is  soon  communicated  to  all  the  animals.  When 
the  herd  is  once  started,  it  is  pushed  forward  as  rapidly  as 
possible  for  a  few  days,  so  as  to  make  distance  between  it 
and  the  pursuing  party,  while  many  Indians  pass  to  the 
rear  to  offer  resistance  to  the  pursuers,  if  close  at  hand. 

Horses,  and  especially  mules,  that  have  been  once  stam- 
peded, cannot  be  trusted  beyond  the  control  of  the  herders. 
They  will,  at  very  unreasonable  moments,  stampede  in  the 
most  frantic  manner  without  any  apparent  good  reason. 
Even  the  passage  of  a  deer,  wolf,  strange  horse  or  herder 
among  them  will  cause  them  to  take  alarm  and  scatter  all 
over  the  country.  The  herders  cannot  be  too  diligent;  they 
should  at  all  times  be  ready  for  any  emergency,  and  whe 
the  animals  take  fright  they  should  hasten  with  the  b« 
mare  in  advance  of  them  and  gradually  turn  them  in  i\^ 
direction  of  camp. 

The  stock  should  not  be  tied  up  to  a  picket  line  unless  an 
attack  is  anticipated;  for,  when  unable  to  forage  at  night, 
they  soon  become  weak  and  unserviceable.  They  should 
be  so  herded  during  the  day  time,  as  to  leave  a  sufficiency 
of  good  grass  near  the  camp  for  night  grazing.  When  how- 
ever, it  becomes  necessary  to  picket  the  animals,  they  should 
be  placed  upon  the  best  grass  and  their  places  changed 
every  two  hours.  The  picket  rope  should  not  be  less  than 
10  or  12  yards  long,  and  should  not  be  made  fast  to  a  tree, 


The  Camp.  169 

or  it  will  twist  and  wind  about  it,  as  the  animal  feeds  around 
it.  The  rope  should  be  so  attached  to  the  animal's  neck  as 
not  to  slip  and  choke  him.  For  wild  horses,  the  ordinary 
hobble  (page  1 13)  is  more  satisfactory.  The  side  hobble  (made 
by  buckling  a  strap  around  the  fore  and  hind  leg,  on  the 
same  side)  affords  a  still  more  effective  anchorage,  as  the 
animal  can  not  well  move  faster  than  at  a  walk. 

Immediately  upon  going  into  camp,  pickets  should  be 
posted  in  strong  positions,  and  sufficiently  close  to  the  camp, 
to  give  timely  alarm  in  case  of  the  enemy's  approach.  The 
picket  should  be  posted,  during  daylight,  on  some  eminence 
near  the  camp,  where  he  can  keep  a  lookout  in  all  directions. 
During  the  night,  he  should  be  posted  several  hundred  yards 
farther  in  advance  of  the  point  subject  to  attack  and  on 
low  ground,  in  order  that  he  may  be  screened  from  observa- 
tion, and  at  the  same  time  see  to  the  best  advantage,  as  low 
objects  will  then  appear  high  and  stand  in  bold  relief  against 
the  sky; — moreover,  in  timber,  it  is  easy  to  see  a  great  dis- 
tance between  the  trunks  of  the  trees,  while  their  tops  and 
branches  hide  all  objects  beyond.  If  the  picket  diseovers 
the  enemy  and  is  not  seen  himself,  he  should  quickly  with- 
draw and  report  the  facts  in  order  that  no  time  be  lost  in 
preparing  for  action.  But,  if  the  picket  is  discovered  by  the 
enemy,  he  should  first  discharge  his  piece  and  then  retreat. 
To  save  time  and  avoid  all  false  alarms,  a  well  defined  sys- 
tem of  night  and  day  signals  should  be  devised  before  go- 
ing into  the  Indian  country,  and  thoroughly  understood  by 
every  picket.  In  this  way,  they  could  very  readily  commu- 
nicate their  discoveries  to  the  camp. 

In  consequence  of  his  very  acute  senses  of  hearing  and 
smelling,  a  mule  will  discover  the  approach  of  any  one, 
much  sooner  than  a  man.  I  consider  it  a  good  plan,  in  many 
cases,  to  send  a  mule  out  with  each  picket,  having  taken  the 
precaution  to  prevent  his  braying;  he  will  not  only  act  as  a 
good  sentinel,  but  will  serve  to  carry  the  picket  into  camp 
with  the  alarm. 


170  Mountain  Scouting. 

On  a  very  dark  night,  it  might  be  a  good  plan  to  set  an 
alarm  gun  (for  ways  of  setting  it,  see  page  210.)  Even  the 
click  of  the  hammer  might  serve  to  call  attention. 

A  spot  should  be  selected  for  the  stock  at  night,  close  to 
which  there  are  no  unguarded  clumps  of  brush  or  thickets, 
as  the  Indians  often  take  advantage  of  such  cover  to  shoot 
or  steal  the  animals,  before  their  presence  can  be  observed. 

So  far  as  is  practicable,  the  fires  should  be  placed  to  the 
leeward  of  the  camp  and  grazing  ground,  to  avoid  accidents 
and  the  frequent  attempts  of  Indians  to  set  fire  to  the  grass, 
in  the  vicinity  of  a  camp,  when  it  is  too  strong  to  be  attack- 
ed. The  fires  should  be  so  placed  with  respect  to  the  tents 


that  the  smoke  may  be  carried  away  by  the  wind  and  cause 
no  discomfort.  It  will  not  do  to  be  fastidious  in  making 
the  camp  fire.  It  should  be  so  constructed  as  not  to  smoke 
in  the  face  or  tent,  not  to  be  seen  from  the  distance,  to  be 
quickly  extinguished,  to  admit  of  many  gathering  around 
it,  and  at  the  same  time  economize  fuel.  An  Indian  builds 
a  small  fire  and  sits  near  it  when  warming  his  body;  a  white 
man  usually  builds  a  large  fire  and  can  not  get  near  it.  As 
a  rule,  if  warmth  is  desired,  see  that  the  fire  is  kept  close  to 
the  ground;  if  light  is  wanted,  elevate  it  i^  or  2  feet  above 
the  ground.  To  cause  large  logs  to  burn  brightly,  air 
should  reach  them  on  all  sides. 


The  Camp.  171 

In  wet  weather,  sufficient  dry  fuel  to  start  a  fire  may  be 
found,  in  most  cases,  under  logs,  rocks  or  leaning  trees. 
When  no  dry  place  can  be  found,  the  fire  should  be  started 
in  a  pan  or  kettle  and  then  transferred  to  the  ground. 

Fuel  is  scarce  in  many  localities  and  particularly  at  the 
lower  ends  of  canyons,  where  the  bottoms  widen  out  and 
where  there  is  but  little  protection  from  the  wind.  'Sage- 
brush' and  ' 'Grease-wood1  are  frequent  substitutes.  ' 'Buffa- 
lo chips,'  when  dry,  burn  well  and  are  easily  lighted.  ''Sea 
weed?  makes  a  very  hot,  but  not  a  cheerful  fire.  An  excel- 
lent substitute  for  fire-wood  is  'bones,'  even  those  of  an  ani- 
mal freshly  killed.  The  bones  of  cooked  meat  give  a  fire  of 
great  intensity,  with  a  flame  depending  on  the  fat  in  them, 
and  an  odor  no  worse  than  that  of  charred  meat. 

Every  precaution  should  be  taken  against  setting  the 
grass  on  fire,  and  places  sufficiently  large  for  the  fires  should 
be  cleared  away.  When  the  grass  is  dry,  it  will  burn  like 
tinder;  and  if  the  wind  be  blowing,  the  flame  will  rapidly 
spread  and  sweep  every  thing  before  it.  It  is  a  frequent 
misfortune  to  have  the  supplies  and  equipage  destroyed  in 
this  manner,  besides  stampeding  the  animals,  destroying 
their  food  and  announcing  the  position  of  the  camp  to  any 
enemy  on  the  alert  for  smoke,  etc.  If  by  accident,  the  fire 
starts,  the  men  should  lose  no  time  in  fighting  it  with 
brush  or  blankets  (wet  if  possible)  and  throwing  sand  upon 
it,  if  at  hand.  It  is  often  necessary  to  start  counter  fires 
and  burn  around  supplies  and  other  places  in  order  to  save 
them  from  the  flames.  The  fires  are  extremely  dangerous 
in  canyons  and  other  places  where  vegetation  is  abundant 
and  the  grass  very  high. 

Good  grass  is  one  of  the  most  necessary  elements  of  the 
camp.  All  graminivorous  animals,  except  the  elk  and  deer, 
prefer  the  'buffalo  and  'bunch  grass'  to  that  of  the  lowland. 
*  Buffalo  grass'  is  very  short,  but  nutritious — it  becomes 
thoroughly  cured  during  the  summer  and  is  a  favorite  in 


1 7  2  Mountain  Scouting. 

all  seasons.  ' Gramma  grass,  found  upon  the  mountain 
sides,  and  growing  to  the  height  of  one  or  two  feet,  is  an  ex- 
cellent variety  of  ' Buffalo  grass.' 

By  scraping  a  hollow  in  the  ground,  about  where  the 
hip  bones  would  otherwise  press,  and  covering  with  several 
thicknesses  of  this  grass,  a  most  luxurious  bed  may  be 
formed.  If  time  will  permit  the  construction  of  a  frame, 
lashed  with  thongs,  ropes  or  raw  hides,  as  shown  in  the 


drawing,  and  it  is  well  covered  with  grass,  the  perfection 
of  camp  beds  will  have  been  attained.  The  grass  secured 
for  the  bed,  will  serve  as  an  extra  meal  for  the  horse,  while 
preparing  to  move  the  camp. 

The  stock  will  willingly  eat  the  bark  and  branches  of 
cotton-wood  trees,  when  the  snow  is  too  deep  to  get  at  grass. 

Water  is  generally  found  in  abundance  in  most  moun- 
tainous districts  either  in  the  beds  of  streams,  in  springs 
or  in  openings  in  the  rocks.  In  sandy  countries,  the  beds 
of  the  apparently  dried  up  water-courses  should  be  care- 
fully explored  for  water  near  their  sources.  Water  is  fre- 
quently found  under  stones  in  the  deepest  parts  of  the  bed. 
Tracts  of  low  land,  on  which  green  grass,  reeds,  water- 
plants,  cotton-wood  or  willow  trees  are  found,  should  be 
carefully  examined.  In  the  partly  dried  up  water-courses, 
the  most  water  will  be  found  at  the  points  where  the  tribu- 
taries put  into  the  main  water-course.  In  a  country  where 
deer  and  fowl  abound,  water  may  be  generally  located  by 
observing  the  points  to  -which  the  trails  seem  to  converge 
and  toward  which  the  wild  fowl  direct  their  movements 
just  before  evening. 


The  Camp. 


173 


Horses,  mules  and  dogs  exhibit  a  wonderful  instinct  in 
finding  pools  of  water  where  it  would  scarcely  be  expected 
to  exist. 

Trees  and  water  generally  go  together  in  sections  of 
country  where  timber  is  very  scarce. 

Water  may  be  secured  in  large  quantities  during  a  rain 
shower,  by  catching  the  drippings  of  the  tents,  and  by  sus- 
pending pieces  of  canvas  and  blankets  by  the  corners  and 
placing  small  weights  on  their  centers.  It  may  also  be  col- 
lected by  dragging  the  blankets  over  grass,  wet  with  dew, 
and  then  wringing  out  the  water  that  has  accumulated. 
This  should  be  resorted  to  only  in  cases  of  necessity;  and 
as  a  rule,  the  stock  should  not  graze  on  grass  covered  with 
dew. 

It  is  not  well  to  drink  water  that  is  putrid  or  charged 
with  salts,  as  they  do  not  quench  the  thirst,  but  increase  it 
and  produce  fevers  and  dysenteries; — in  such  localities,  the 
best  remedy  is  to  bathe  in  the  water. 

The  tents  usually  used  in  field  service  or  hasty  marches 
are  the  shelter  tents  already  described  and  the  'A'  or  com- 


mon  tents.  The  drawing  shows  the  ordinary  'A*  tent  com- 
posed of  a  single  piece  of  canvas,  which  in  consequence  of 
its  weight  is  not  so  well  suited  for  light  travel  as  the  au- 
thor's combination  'A'  tent  described  on  page  145. 

I  have  received  from   Gilbert  Thompson,  Esq.,  the  designs 
of  a  tent  that  offers  many  advantages  over  the  heavy  tents 


174 


Mountain  Scouting. 


that  are,  at  present,  used.  With  a  weight  of  24  pounds  of 
canvas  (10  oz.  duck),  it  covers  over  100  square  feet  of 
ground,  and  is  so  constructed  that  one  man  may  easily  put 
it  up  and  take  it  down.  It  affords  ample  accommodation 


for  6  men  (within  the  space  1245),  with  end  spaces  (165  and 
234)  sufficiently  large  to  receive  a  small  stove  and  valuable 
boxes.  It  is  without  annoying  guy-ropes,  and  possesses 
many  advantages  of  ventilation,  when  any  of  the  sides  B, 
A,  or  &  are  raised;  and  may  be  so  pitched  as  to  expose  one 
of  the  angular  faces  6  R,  or  3  R*  to  the  wind.  Another 
great  advantage  over  the  'A'  tent  is  that  it  affords  a  greater 
available  space,  for  the  same  weight  of  canvas. 

The  ground  plan  and  the  dimensions,  also  a  perspective 
view  of  the  tent  when  pitched,  are  shown  in  the  drawing. 

The  tent,  and  especially  during  the  summer  months,  is 
not  the  most  important  article  of  equipage.  It  is  seldom 
that  injury  results  from  simple  wetting,  if  the  body  is  free- 
ly exposed  to  the  open  air. 

It  is  absurd  to  take  chairs  and  tables  in  the  field — a  'dig 
out'  in  the  tent  will  serve  to  make  a  table  and  seats,  the  feet 
and  legs  of  the  person  being  placed  in  the  trench. 


The  Camp.  175 

If  possible,  a  level  spot  snould  be  selected  for  the  tent  or 
bed,  and  when  the  wind  is  high,  it  should  not  be  placed 
near  a  single  tree,  as  this  is  apt  to  create  a  violent  eddy. 
This  may  be  frequently  observed  in  a  corn-field  after  a  wind 
storm,  the  stalks  being  knocked  down  in  circles  around 
isolated  trees,  while  elsewhere  they  remain  standing. 

Sleeping  in  hollows  and  slight  canyons  during  quiet  wea- 
ther is  not  wholesome,  as  cold  air  pours  down  into  these 
from  the  higher  ground.  Horses  are  frequently  noticed  to 
draw  up  to  the  surrounding  plain,  where  the  frosts  are  less 
severely  felt  as  the  night  sets  in.  If  compelled  to  sleep  on 
the  snow,  it  should  be  piled  upon  each  side,  and  if  possible 
the  face  and  ears  should  be  smeared  with  oil  or  grease. 

Remembering  that  the  favorite  times  for  an  Indian  at- 
tack are  at  sunrise  or  sunset,  or  when  coming  out  of  or 
going  into  camp,  it  appears  most  proper  to  have  reveille 
about  4  A.  M.,  so  as  to  have  the  column  in  motion  by  the 
dawn  of  day. 

There  is  nothing  more  annoying  about  the  time  of  break- 
ing camp  than  the  difficulty  experienced  in  bridling  wild 
stock,  or  the  delay  occasioned  by  the  loss  of  such  animals 
as  are  prone  to  stray  off  from  camp.  A  good  way  to  catch 
a  refractory  animal  is  to  have  two  men  stretch  a  long  rope 
about  the  height  of  his  neck,  and  while  other  men  drive 
•the  animal  against  it,  let  one  of  them,  with  the  rope,  run 
round  behind  the  animal,  and  quickly  make  a  turn  about 
his  neck.  In  turning  the  wild  stock  out  to  graze,  it  is  a 
good  plan  to  leave  the  lariat  ropes  upon  them,  the  ends 
trailing  on  the  ground. 

If  time  be  an  object,  it  will  be  better  to  leave  lost  mules 
behind  (when  their  services  can  be  spared),  for  they  will, 
in  consequence  of  their  very  acute  power  of  smell,  trail  the 
stock  and  follow  to  camp.  A  bell  mare  of  quiet  and  regular 
habits  is  indispensable  in  the  camp — serving  to  keep  the 
herd  together  and  close  in  hand. 


176  Mountain  Scouting. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

THE  MESS. 

GOOD  powder  is  no  more  a  munition  of  war  than  good 
food. 

One  of  the  principal  elements  of  success  in  cooking  is 
the  proper  provision  of  the  few  most  indispensable  articles 
of  kitchen  and  table  furniture.  For  every  six  persons,  there 
should  be  supplied  one  camp-kettle  (the  kettles  being  of 
such  sizes  as  to  admit  of  packing  one  within  the  other,  and 
the  smallest  one  large  enough  for  making  soup  or  coffee); 
a  heavy  tin  coffee-pot ;  ten  tin  cups,  with  revolving  handles  ; 
ten  strong  tin  plates  ;  one  wrought-iron  frying-pan  ;  one 
wrought-iron  bake-oven  ;  one  heavy  tin  mess-pan  ;  one 
strong  water  bucket  (wooden  buckets  to  be  avoided);  one 
extra  small  camp-kettle ;  ten  knives,  forks  and  spoons,  with 
iron  handles.  One  spade,  axe,  hatchet  and  chopping-knife 
should  accompany  each  mess  kit. 

The  mess  boxes  must  be  prepared  with  a  view  to  their 
being  transported  on  pack  mules,  if  necessary  ;  and  when 
taken  two  together,  should  form  a  handy  pack.  The  boxes 
may  be  readily  constructed  so  as  to  form  convenient  tables, 
when  the  lids  are  thrown  open. 

Matches  should  never  be  transported  in  the  mess  boxes, 
unless  they  are  placed  in  tin  boxes  or  tightly-corked  bottles. 

The  frying-pan  is  the  most  invaluable  of  all  cooking 
utensils.  It  may  be  made  to  serve  a  host  of  purposes — 
fish  and  game  may  be  cooked  in  it,  stews  prepared,  flapjacks 
made,  coffee  roasted,  etc.  The  handle  should  be  detach- 
able, or  have  a  '  parasol  joint '  made  close  to  the  pan,  so 
that  it  may  be  folded  across  it. 

I  consider  a  handy  camp  stove  a  great  luxury  in  the  field, 


The  Mess. 


177 


and  I  know  of  no  good  objections  urged  against  them, 
whether  the  party  be  large  or  small.  Dunklee's  Camping 
Stoves  are  excellent  in  every  respect. 

The  drawing  shows  a  very  desirable   stove   for  officers' 
mess,  cooking  for  two  or  four  persons. 


When  packed  for  transportation,  all  the  apparatus  is 
inside.  The  total  weight  is  22  pounds. 

The  '  CENTURION  '—Field  Stove,  Baker  and  Mess  Kit 
complete — invented  by  Captain  Clifford,  of  the  Infantry,  is 
well  recommended  by  all  who  have  used  it.  It  is  30  X  20  X  13 
when  packed  for  transportation,  and  will  cook  and  bake 
for  100  persons. 

Below  is  represented  an  excellent  stove  for  a  detachment 
of  ten  or  twelve  men. 


Dimensions,  Packed, 
12X 12X21 


178  Mountain  Scouting. 

While  very  durable,  and  especially  adapted  to  camp- 
ing purposes,  its  weight  is  only  35  pounds,  and  its  dimen- 
sions are  such  as  to  permit  it  to  be  enclosed  in  an  ordinary 
hard-bread  box. 

The  ware  is  so  constructed  that  it  nests  and  packs  in 
the  oven,  which  has  a  capacity  sufficient  for  roasting  20 
pounds  of  beef.  The  oven  packs  inside  the  stove,  and 
leaves  sufficient  room  for  packing  the  plates,  knives,  forks, 
spoons  and  drinking  cups.  This  stove  boils,  bakes  or 
broils;  and  when  fuel  is  scarce,  its  excellence  is  very  appar- 
ent, as  it  requires  so  little.  In  cold  weather,  it  may  be 
placed  inside  the  tent,  where  it  is  a  great  luxury  and  saves 
much  trouble. 

When  without  a  stove,  and  it  is  necessary  to  cook  for  a 
large  party,  using  but  little  fuel,  prepare  a  narrow  trench, 
with  one  end  open  to  the  wind,  building  a  small  chimney 
arrangement  at  the  other.  After  making  the  fire  in  the 
trench,  place  the  pots  and  kettles  in  a  row  over  it. 

There  is  a  great  deal  of  art  in  kindling  a  spark  into  a 
flame,  and  it  should  be  remembered  that  "  small  sticks  kindle 
a  flame  but  large  ones  put  it  out."  The  surest  plan,  when 
starting  a  fire,  is  to  place  three  logs  with 
their  ends  crossing  each  other,  so  that 
each  may  support  the  combustion  of  the 
others.  As  the  ends  burn  away,  the  logs 
should  be  pushed  closer  together. 

The  fire  may  be  frequently  encouraged 

by  introducing  the  saltpeter  existing  in   great   quantities 
in  the  ashes  of  many  plants,  such  as  dill,  sunflower,  etc. 

To  insure  success  in  cooking,  accurate  measurement, 
proper  mixing  and  preciseness  in  the  preparation  of  in- 
gredients are  very  important. 

The  following  are  approximate  weights  and  measures  : 

Three  teaspoonfuls  __ -  =  One  tablespoonful. 

Four  tablespoonfuls —  One  wine  glass. 


The  Mess.  179 

Two  wine  glasses =  One  gill. 

Two  gills ==  One  cup. 

Two  cupfuls =  One  pint. 

One  quart  sifted  flour =  One  pound. 

One  quart  powdered  sugar =  One  pound,  seven  ozs. 

One  quart  granulated  sugar =  One  pound,  nine  ozs. 

Seven  tablespoonfuls  of  same One-half  pint. 

One  pint  closely  packed  butter.  =  One  pound 

One  tablespoonful  salt =  One  ounce. 

Ten  eggs    =  One  pound. 

The  drawing  shows  a  convenient  form  of  scales  for  the 


use  of  cooks.  These  scales  may  be  readily  transported  in 
the  pocket, -and  will  do  away  with  all  guessing  at  propor- 
tions, the  practice  of  so  many  indifferent  cooks. 

Those  desiring  a  more  complete  chapter  on  this  subject 
are  referred  to  the  "  Manual  for  Army  Cooks,"  from  which 
much  of  what  follows  is  taken  : 

METHODS    OF    COOKING. 

Roasting  is  that  process  by  which  a  substance  is  acted 
upon  by  the  heat  of  a  fire,  without  interposition  of  uten- 
sils, and  generally  in  the  open  air. 

Baking  is  that  process  by  which  a  substance  is  acted 
upon  by  heat  in  an  oven.  The  temperature  of  the  oven  is 
usually  about  400°  Fah. 

Stewing  is  that  process  of  cooking  by  which  the  sub- 
stance to  be  cooked  is  placed  in  a  small  portion  of  fluid 
and  cooked  slowly  by  simmering. 

To  simmer  is  to  boil  slowly,  and  is  accomplished  by  re- 
moving the  liquid  so  far  from  the  fire  as  to  keep  it  up  to  a 
very  slow-boiling  point. 


i8o  Mountain  Scouting. 

At  high  altitudes  the  boiling  point  is  so  low  that  it  is 
difficult  to  cook  vegetables,  with  pure  water,  at  all. 

Rapid  boiling  should  be  carefully  avoided,  as  no  addi- 
tional heat  is  developed  by  it  and  much  of  the  aroma  of  the 
immersed  body  is  lost.  On  boiling  such  articles  as  beans 
and  pease,  it  is  very  desirable  to  use  soft  water. 

Broiling  is  that  process  by  which  the  substance  to  be 
cooked  is  acted  upon  by  the  direct  heat  of  the  fire,  with 
only  the  interposition  of  a  gridiron  or  some  similar  appa- 
ratus. The  fire  should  be  clear  and  free  from  smoke. 

It  is  much  better  to  broil  before  a  fire  than  over  it,  as  in 
the  former  process  the  juices  of  the  meat  can  be  caught  in 
a  dripping-pan,  and  used  as  a  dressing. 

The  article  should  be  turned  frequently,  so  as  to  have 
both  sides  cooked  alike. 

Frying  is  that  process  by  which  the  article  to  be  cooked 
is  immersed  in  hot  fat. 

Fat  raised  to  400°  Fah.,  is  sufficiently  hot  for  frying  pur- 
poses ;  and  such  is  the  case  when  small  jets  of  smoke  are 
observed  to  issue  from  the  top  of  the  fat. 

Sauteing  is  that  process  of  frying  by  which  a  substance 
is  cooked  in  a  frying-pan  or  skillet,  with  just  sufficient 
grease  to  cover  the  bottom  of  the  pan.  The  grease  should 
be  frying  hot  for  the  purpose.  Salt  and  pepper  should 
always  be  used  sparingly  until  after  the  food  is  prepared. 

SOUP. 

The  principal  nourishment  of  meat  soup  comes  from  the 
raw  meat.  Failure  in  making  soup  is  generally  owing  to 
rapid  boiling  and  neglecting  to  skim  the  pot.  The  pot 
should  be  kept  covered  while  the  soup  is  cooking,  except 
when  it  is  necessary  to  skim  and  add  the  necessary  ingre- 
dients. If  cooked  meat  is  to  be  used,  it  should  be  added 
after  the  soup  has  cooked  nearly  an  hour. 

When  vegetables  are  used,  they  should  be  added  about 
one  hour  and  a  half  before  it  is  cooked  or  only  in  time  to 
become  thoroughly  done. 


The  Mess.  181 

Potatoes  are  an  exception  ;  they  should  be  put  in  one- 
half  hour  before  the  soup  is  cooked. 

-Beef,  Elk  or  Deer  Soup  :  Time,  three  hours. 

Fifteen  pounds  of  meat  cut  into  small  pieces  ;  about  two 
cans  of  vegetables  or  three  pounds  of  fresh  vegetables ; 
six  tablespoonfuls  of  salt  and  one-third  as  much  sugar  ;  one 
pound  of  rice  ;  two  pounds  of  hard  bread  ;  two  and  one-half 
gallons  of  water.  Let  it  simmer  gently  and  remove  the 
fat. 

In  all  soups,  the  vegetables  may  be  varied  according 
to  season  and  opportunity,  using  onions,  potatoes,  carrots, 
turnips,  parsnips,  cabbage,  green  or  canned  corn,  fresh  or 
canned  tomatoes,  celery  or  celery  seed,  cauliflowers,  okra, 
rice,  pumpkins,  squash,  green  pease,  string  beans,  &c. 

Tomato  Soup :  Time,  one  hour. 

Three  pints  of  cold  water  ;  three  pounds  of  fresh  or 
canned  tomatoes  ;  one  onion,  chopped  fine  ;  one  large 
spoonful  of  sifted  flour ;  a  piece  of  butter  the  size  of  an 
egg  ;  pepper  and  salt. 

Prepare  the  tomatoes  and  mix  the  flour  and  butter  into 
a  smooth  paste.-  Place  these  together  with  the  onion  and  a 
teaspoonful  of  salt  into  a  kettle  with  the  water,  and  stir 
frequently  to  dissolve  the  tomatoes  and  to  prevent  them 
from  scorching.  One  pint  of  boiled  milk,  if  procurable, 
will  benefit  the  soup  very  much. 

Rice  Soup  :  Time,  six  hours. 

Four  pounds  of  fresh  lean  beef;  two  pounds  of  soup- 
bone  ;  one  gallon  of  cold  water  ;  one  onion,  sliced  ;  three- 
quarters  of  a  pound  of  rice  ;  pepper  and  salt. 

Put  the  meat  and  bones  into  a  pot  with  water,  one  table- 
spoonful  of  salt  and  the  sliced  onion,  and  cook.  Three- 
quarters  of  an  hour  before  the  soup  is  cooked  strain  it 
through  a  colander,  return  it  with  the  good  meat  to  the 
pot.  Stir  the  rice  into  the  strained  soup  thirty  minutes 


1 82  Mountain  Scouting. 

before  it  is  cooked ;  stir  frequently  to  prevent  it  from 
scorching  or  sticking  to  the  bottom  of  the  kettle. 

Bean  Soup  :  Time,  three  hours. 

Two  quarts  of  beans  ;  one  pound  of  salt  pork  ;  six  quarts 
of  cold  water  ;  one  teaspoonful  of  bicarbonate  of  soda  ;  pep- 
per. 

Pick  over  the  beans,  wash  and  soak  them  over  night  in 
cold  water,  and  cut  the  pork  into  thin  slices.  Place  the 
beans,  with  the  allowance  of  cold  water  and  bicarbonate  of 
soda,  into  the  kettle,  cover  it,  heat  gradually  and  boil  for 
thirty  minutes  ;  remove  the  scum  as  it  rises.  Turn  off  the 
water  and  replenish  with  six  quarts  of  fresh  boiling  water. 
Cover  again  and  boil  gently  for  one  and  a  half  hours,  stir- 
ring the  beans  frequently;  then  put  in  the  sliced  pork.  As 
soon  as  the  beans  become  tender  and  crack,  take  out  the 
pork  and  mash  the  beans  into  a  paste.  Remove  the  skins  of 
the  beans,  replace  the  pork  into  the  kettle  and  complete  the 
boiling. 

This  soup  is  much  richer  when  a  half  pound  of  lean  beef, 
for  every  quart  of  water,  is  added.  If  bicarbonate  of  soda 
is  not  used,  it  will  require  a  much  longer  time  to  make 
the  soup.  Frequent  stirring  is  necessary  to  prevent  burn- 
ing. 

Venison  Broth  :  Time,  four  hours. 

Five  pounds  of  lean  venison  ;  one  and  one-fourth  gallons 
of  cold  water  ;  two  onions,  sliced  ;  one  full  cup  of  rice ; 
pepper  and  salt. 

Cut  the  venison  into  small  slices  and  put  them  into  the 
kettle  with  the  water  and  salt.  Put  in  the  onions  one  hour 
before  the  soup  is  cooked,  and  the  rice  thirty  minutes  later. 
Fresh  or  canned  tomatoes  may  be  added  to  great  advan- 
tage, and  frequent  stirring  is  necessary  to  prevent  scorch- 
ing or  sticking  to  the  bottom  of  the  kettle. 

FISH. 

Fresh    fish  are  best   as    soon  as    taken  from  the  water. 


The  Mess.  183 

They  should  not  be  soaked  unless  they  have  been  frozen 
or  have  inhabited  muddy  streams. 

Boiled  Fish  :  A  fish,  or  part  of  a  fish,  weighing  less  than 
three  pounds  (except  rock-fish)  is  too  small  for  boiling. 
The  time  required  for  boiling  depends  upon  the  size  and 
variety.  Salmon  requires  about  25  minutes,  while  six  min- 
utes per  pound  is  sufficient  for  most  kinds.  As  a  rule, 
fish  with  white  flesh  require  less  time  for  boiling  than 
fish  with  dark  flesh.  Care  must  be  taken  that  the  fish  is 
neither  underdone,  boiled  too  much  nor  allowed  to  remain 
in  the  water  after  it  is  cooked.  The  fish  is  done  when  the 
meat  separates  easily  from  the  back  bone.  Place  the  fish 
into  enough  boiling  water  to  cover  it  about  an  inch,  with 
two  tablespoonfuls  of  salt  and  four  tablespoonfuls  of  vin- 
egar to  a  piece  of  fish  of  about  five  pounds  weight,  and 
cause  it  to  boil  steadily  until  done, 

Fried  Fish  :  Large  fish  should  be  cut  up  before  frying. 
Wipe  the  fish  dry,  rub  it  over  with  sifted  flour,  or  sprinkle 
it  with  grated  bread  crumbs  or  rolled  crackers.  Put  into  a 
frying  pan  enough  lard  to  well  cover  the  fish.  As  soon  as 
this  is  hot  put  in  the  fish,  fry  briskly  until  a  clear  golden 
brown  appears.  Then  turn  and  fry  the  other  side  to  the 
same  color.  Just  as  the  fish  is  turning  brown,  sprinkle  it 
lightly  with  pepper  and  salt. 

Baked  Fish  :  Baked  fish  should  be  sufficiently  large  to 
admit  of  being  stuffed,  and  will  require  from  thirty  to  fifty 
minutes  to  bake. 

Prepare  a  stuffing  of  bread  crumbs,  with  sufficient 
butter,  lard  or  beef  dripping  to  make  the  mixture  moist, 
and  season  with  pepper  and  salt  ;  also,  a  little  thyme  or 
sage,  if  obtainable.  Scorching  is  prevented  by  placing  a 
well-greased  paper  over  the  fish. 

Baked  fish  are  excellent  when  eaten  cold. 

Fish  Chowder  :  One-half  pound  of  salt  pork;  four  onions; 
six  potatoes;  three  pounds  of  fish;  one-half  pound  of  hard- 
bread. 


184  Mountain  Scouting.  « 

Cleanse  and  cut  the  pork  into  thin  slices,  also  slice  the 
onions.  Put  the  pork  and  onions  together  into  a  pot  and 
fry  them  brown;  then  season  lightly  with  salt  and  plenty 
of  pepper.  Slice  the  potatoes  and  lay  them  in  cold  water 
until  wanted.  Wash  the  fish,  cut  it  into  small  pieces  and 
soak  the  hard-bread  in  water  until  tender.  When  the  pork 
and  onions  have  browned  and  been  seasoned,  add  a  layer  of 
fish;  on  the  fish  a  layer  of  potatoes;  on  the  potatoes  a  layer 
of  crackers,  and  repeat  the  process  until  the  kettle  is  nearly 
full.  Set  it  over  a  gentle  fire,  let  it  heat  gradually,  and 
simmer  until  done. 

Fish  Sauce  :  One  pint  of  boiling  water;  two  tablespoon- 
fulsof  butter;  same  amount  of  sifted  flour;  pepper  and  salt. 
Mix  the  butter  and  flour  into  a  smooth  paste,  in  a  sauce- 
pan on  the  fire,  and  pour  over  the  boiling  water,  stirring 
it  in  well.  The  addition  of  a  little  vinegar  will  impart  an 
acid  taste. 

MEAT. 

Good  fresh  beef  presents  the  following  characteristics  : 
The  lean,  when  freshly  cut,  is  of  a  bright  red  color,  easily 
compressed  and  elastic,  the  grain  fine  and  interspersed 
with  fat,  of  a  yellowish  white  color.  The  suet  should  be 
firm  and  perfectly  white.  In  good  mutton  the  fat  is  white 
also. 

All  frozen  meats,  game  and  fish  should  be  put  into 
cold  water  to  thaw  before  they  are  cooked.  Meat  should 
not  be  placed  in  contact  with  ice,  nor  wrapped  in  anything 
that  may  impart  a  flavor.  It  becomes  more  tender  and 
digestive  by  keeping  it  a  while. 

Baked  Beef :  Time,  from  fifteen  to  twenty  minutes  to 
the  pound,  depending  on  the  oven,  the  quality  of  the 
meat,  size  and  shape  of  the  joint  and  the  time  it  has  been 
killed  ;  freshly-killed  meat  requires  a  longer  time  to  cook. 

Cleanse  the  meat;  place  it  in  the  pan  with  the  fat  side  up; 
put  the  pan  into  a  hot  oven,  and  when  the  heat  has  started 


The  Mess. 


enough  of  the  oil  of  the  fat,  commence  to  baste,  which 
should  be  performed  quickly  and  frequently,  closing  the 
oven  door  as  soon  as  basting  is  done.  When  nearly  done, 
sprinkle  with  salt  and  pepper. 

If  the  beef  is  not  sufficiently  fat  and  juicy  to  furnish 
materials  for  basting,  a  tablespoonful  or  more  of  gravy 
or  beef  dripping  should  be  put  into  the  pan  ;  the  practice 
of  putting  water  into  the  pan  to  baste  with  is  improper. 

Broiled  Beefsteak,  Venison  and  Porksteak  :  A  steak  should 
not  be  less  than  three-quarters  of  an  inch  nor  more  than 
an  inch  and  a-quarter  thick.  If  beating  is  necessary, 
beat  on  both  sides,  but  not  enough  to  tear  the  beef  and 
allow  the  juices  to  escape. 

Prepare  a  bed  of  live  coals  (wood  coals  are  the  best)  ; 
wipe  the  gridiron  clean  and  put  it  over  the  bed  of  coals  ; 
as  soon  as  heated,  put  the  steak  on  it  and  broil  ;  turn 
once  or  twice.  If  the  fire  smokes  or  blazes  from  the 
dripping  fat,  withdraw  the  gridiron  for  a  moment.  It 
should  cook  in  fifteen  minutes.  After  it  is  dished,  season 
with  pepper  and  salt. 

The  frying-pan  serves  splendidly  as  a  broiler.  The 
Indians  use  their  fish-spears  (something  like  shown  in  the 
drawing)  for  gridirons.  They  also  frequently  plant  them 


in   the    ground,  near    the    fire,  and   insert  their  spits  in  the 
hollow  handles. 

Boiled  Beef  or  Venison  :  Time,  fifteen  minutes  to  the  pound, 
or  longer,  depending  upon  the  shape  and  quality  of  the 
piece. 


1 86  Mountain  Scouting. 

Cleanse  the  meat.  Put  it  into  a  kettle  of  boiling  water, 
rather  more  than  enough  to  cover  it.  Cover  and  bring 
the  kettle  to  a  boil  quickly,  and  let  it  boil  for  ten  or  fif- 
teen minutes  ;  then  let  it  simmer  until  the  meat  is  cooked. 
Remove  the  scum  as  it  rises.  While  boiling,  turn  the  beef 
several  times.  If  the  water  needs  replenishing,  use  boil- 
ing water.  A  short  time  before  the  meat  is  done,  put  into 
the  kettle  one  teaspoonful  of  salt  for  every  five  pounds  of 
meat. 

Put  carrots  and  turnips  (quartered)  in  the  kettle,  one 
and  a  half  hours  and  potatoes  twenty  or  thirty  minutes, 
before  the  meat  is  cooked. 

Fresh  Beef,  Elk  or  Deer  Stew :  Time,  from  two  to  three 
hours. 

Cut  ten  pounds  of  meat  into  small  strips.  Put  into  a 
large  mess-pan  with  four  tablespoonfuls  of  salt,  half,  as 
much  sugar,  a  little  pepper  and  about  three  pounds  of  po- 
tatoes and  onions,  or  any  other  vegetables  procurable. 
Keep  on  the  fire  and  stir  until  a  thick  gravy  is  formed,  ad- 
ding a  little  flour  and  about  three  and  one-half  gallons 
of  water.  Let  it  simmer  until  the  meat  is  tender. 

Venison  requires  about  2^  hours;  beef,  about  2f  hours; 
and  elk,  about  3  hours. 

Beef,  Pork,  Elk  or  Venison  Pie :  Fresh  meat,  potatoes, 
onions,  tomatoes,  pieces  of  butter  or  meat  dripping  the  size 
of  a  hazel  nut ;  pepper  and  salt  on  every  layer. 

Cut  the  meat  into  two-inch  pieces,  removing  the  bone 
and  any  superabundance  of  fat.  Cut  the  potatoes  into 
slices  a  quarter  of  an  inch  thick,  rinse  in  cold  water  and 
parboil  them.  Chop  the  onions  fine.  Slice  the  tomatoes. 
Roll  the  pieces  of  butter  in  sifted  flour.  Put  the  pieces 
of  meat  and  bone  into  a  kettle  of  cold  water,  just  enough  to 
cover  the  meat.  Cover  closely;  remove  the  scum  as  it 
rises.  Let  it  simmer  steadily  until  half  done.  Remove 
it  from  the  fire.  Take  up  the  meat  and  strain  the  gravy; 


ta 

E 


The  Mess.  187 

keep  both  warm.  Line  a  mess-pan  with  a  paste,  first  greas- 
ing the  sides  and  bottom.  Put  in  a  layer  of  the  semi- 
stewed  meat,  on  the  meat  a  layer  of  chopped  onion,  on  the 
onion  a  layer  of  sliced  tomato,  on  the  tomato  a  half 
dozen  or  more  pieces  of  floured  butter,  on  these  a  layer  of 
potato,  on  the  potato  a  layer  of  meat,  and  so  on  in  succes- 
sive layers. 

Pour  over  the  strained  gravy,  put  on  the  top  crust,  place 
in  the  oven  and  bake  from  one  to  one  and  one-half  hour3 
with  a  moderate  heat. 

Fried  Liver :  Liver  to  be  good  should  be  fresh;  uniform 
n  appearance  on  the  surface  ;  firm  ;  of  a  bright  red  color 
hen  cut,  and  free  from  nodules.     It  must   be  thoroughly 
one  to  be  palatable. 

Cut  the  liver  into  slices  a  quarter  of  an  inch  thick,   and 
k  it  one  hour  in  cold,  salt  water  ;  rinse  well   with  warm 
•ater,  and  dip  each  slice  into   flour  seasoned  with  pepper 
nd  salt ;  put  into  a  frying  pan  enough  meat  dripping,  or 
con  fat,  to  just  cover  the  bottom  of  the  pan  when  melted; 
while  this  is  hot,  put  in  the  liver  and  fry  a  deep  brown;  turn 
nd  fry  the  other  side  the  same  color ;  then  dish,   pouring 
e  grease  remaining  in  the  pan  over  the  liver. 
Beef,  Elk  or  Venison  Hash  :  The  meats  may  be  used  singly 
r  together.     Four  pounds  of  meat  (without  bone) ;  two 
ions  ;  two  pounds  of  boiled  potato ;  the  meat  cut  into 
alf-inch  pieces  ;  the  onion  parboiled  and  minced  ;  the  po- 
tato chopped  into  very  small  pieces.     Mix  all  together  and 
ason  with  pepper  and  salt.     Put  the  mixture  into  a  kettle  ; 
tir    into   it   about  a    quart    of  gravy,    meat    dripping,  or 
ater.     Stir  well   together  and    cover ;    let   it   simmer  for 
thirty  minutes,  or  until  the  meat  is  quite  tender,  frequently 
stirring  it.     When  the  hash  is  done  pour  it  into  a  dish  over 
toasted  or  fried  hard-bread. 

Baked  Pork  and  Beans :  Time,  from  six  to  eight  hours. 
Two  quarts  of  beans  ;  three   pounds  of  salt  pork  ;    one 
teaspoonful  of  bicarbonate  of  soda. 


1 88  Mountain  Scouting. 

Prepare  the  beans  and  soak  them  over  night  in  cold  water; 
soft  water  is  preferable.  Parboil  the  pork  and  cut  it  into 
thin  slices.  Drain  the  soaked  beans  ;  put  them  into  a  kettle 
with  enough  fresh  cold  water  to  cover  them  ;  put  in  the 
bicarbonate  of  soda.  Cover;  boil  for  fifteen  or  twenty 
minutes  ;  remove  the  scum  as  it  rises;  pour  off  the  water; 
replace  with  boiling  water  ;  cover  ;  boil  steadily  until  ten- 
der ;  drain  and  season  with  pepper.  Put  one-half  of  the 
b  cans  in  a  deep  mess-pan  ;  lay  over  them  the  sliced  pork, 
then  cover  the  pork  with  the  other  half  of  the  beans.  Pour 
over  from  a  half-pint  to  a  pint  of  boiling  water ;  put  the 
pan  into  the  oven  and  bake  with  a  uniform  heat.  Every 
hour  add  a  little  boiling  water. 

When  cooked,  the  beans  should   be  comparatively  dry. 

GAME. 

The  viscera  should  be  taken  out  as  soon  as  the  game  is 
killed.  If  the  meat  is  not  to  be  cooked  at  once  hang  it  up 
in  a  cool  dry  place.  Birds  should  be  kept  in  their  feathers 
and  animals  in  their  skins. 

Bear  and  buffalo  meats  are  better  baked  than  cooked  in 
any  other  way.  Prepare,  cook,  and  serve  bear  and  buffalo 
meats  like  fresh  pork  or  fresh  beef. 

At  least  twelve  hours  should  elapse  between  the  time  of 
killing  and  cooking  birds  ;  but  they  should  be  drawn  as 
soon  as  possible.  If  the  bird  is  young,  the  lower  part  of 
its  legs  are  soft,  and  the  lower  mandible  will  not  sustain 
its  weight. 

VEGETABLES. 

If  possible,  summer  vegetables  should  be  cooked  on  the 
same  day  they  are  gathered. 

Boiled  Potatoes  :   Time,  twenty  to  thirty  minutes. 

Wash  the  potatoes  ;  cut  off  a  piece  of  the  skin  at  the 
eyed  end  ;  put  them  into  a  kettle  of  boiling  salt  water, 
enough  to  cover  them  ;  cover  :  boil  steadily  until  a  fork 


The  Mess.  189 

will  easily  pierce  the  largest.  If  cooked  too  much  they 
become  watery.  As  a  rule,  the  smaller  the  eye  the  better 
the  potato. 

Peeling  them  before  boiling  is  wasteful,  and  should 
only  be  resorted  to  late  in  the  spring,  when  the  potatoes 
have  commenced  to  sprout. 

They  should  be  of  a  uniform  size,  that  they  may  be 
cooked  in  the  same  time.  If  they  are  of  unequal  size,  cut 
the  large  ones. 

Baked  Potatoes  :  Time,  thirty  minutes. 

Prepare  the  potatoes  and  cut  off  a  piece  of  the  skin 
at  the  eyed  end,  and  put  them  into  the  oven  without  their 
touching  one  another.  Turn  them  frequently  and  bake  in 
a  uniform  heat. 

They  should  be  peeled  if  baked  with  meat ;  or,  if 
boiled  in  their  skins,  they  may  be  peeled  and  placed  in 
the  baking  pan  with  the  meat  about  half  an  hour  before  it 
is  done.  Potatoes  roasted  or  baked  in  their  skins,  in  hot 
ashes,  are  excellent. 

Fried  Potatoes :  Prepare  the  potatoes  and  slice  them  into 
thin  pieces.  Put  into  a  frying-pan  fat  or  meat  dripping 
to  just  cover  the  bottom  of  the  pan  when  melted.  When 
this  becomes  hot  put  in  the  potatoes  and  season  with  pep- 
per and  salt.  Fry  gently,  stirring  them  frequently,  and 
until  they  become  light  brown. 

Fried  Onions  :  Peel,  slice  and  fry  the  onions  brown  in  hot 
butter,  beef  dripping  or  lard  ;  season  with  pepper  and  salt. 
Stir  them  constantly  to  avoid  burning. 

Boiled  Onions :  Peel  the  onions  (as  uniform  in  size  as 
possible)  and  lay  them  in  cold  salt  water  for  fifteen 
minutes;  put  them  into  a  kettle  of  boiling  salt  water; 
cover  and  boil  gently  ;  when  cooked  so  that  a  straw  can 
pierce  them,  drain  and  season  with  butter,  pepper  and  salt. 
The  strength  of  the  onions  may  be  reduced  by  boiling 
them  in  two  or  more  waters. 


190  Mountain  Scouting. 

Fried  Parsnips  :  Boil  the  parsnips  until  tender;  scrape 
off  the  skin  and  cut  them  lengthwise  into  slices  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  thick ;  dip  each  slice  into  flour  ;  put  into  a  fry- 
ing-pan enough  lard  or  meat  dripping  to  just  cover  the 
bottom  of  the  pan  when  melted  ;  when  this  becomes  hot 
put  in  the  parsnips,  fry  brown,  turn  and  fry  the  other  side 
the  same  color ;  when  cooked,  drain  off  the  grease  and 
season  with  pepper. 

Stewed  Parsnips :  Boil  and  cut  the  parsnips  into  thin 
slices  ;  put  them  into  a  kettle,  with  enough  liquor  from 
boiled  fresh  meat  to  about  half  cover  them  ;  season  with 
pepper,  salt  and  grated  nutmeg.  Cover  and  stew  gently  for 
fifteen  minutes,  stirring  frequently. 

Boiled  Cabbage :  If  the  cabbage  is  large,  quarter  it  ;  if 
small,  cut  it  into  halves  ;  remove  the  outer  and  all  bad 
leaves  ;  examine  carefully  for  insects  ;  wash,  and  lay  it  in 
cold  water  for  half  an  hour. 

Put  it  into  a  kettle  of  boiling  salt  water,  and  cover. 
When  cooked  (so  that  the  stalk  is  tender),  drain  off  the 
water  and  season  with  butter,  pepper  and  salt. 

The  odor  from  boiling  cabbage  may  be  lessened  by  put- 
ting pieces  of  charcoal  into  the  kettle. 

Stewed  Tomatoes:  Peel  (by  scalding)  and  cut  up  the 
tomatoes,  rejecting  the  unripe  and  hard  portions  ;  put  them 
into  a  kettle,  season  with  butter,  pepper  and  salt,  and,  if 
the  tomatoes  are  very  acid,  a  little  sugar.  Cover,  and 
stew  gently  for  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  frequently  stir- 
ring. The  stew  can  be  thickened  with  hard-bread  crumbs. 
Minced  onion  cooked  with  the  tomatoes  improves  the  flavor 
of  the  stew.  A  mixture  of  equal  quantities  of  tomatoes 
and  young  corn,  cut  from  the  cobb,  may  be  cooked  as 
above. 

Fried  Mushrooms :  Select  mushrooms  of  uniform  size ; 
peel  them  and  cut  off  the  lower  part  of  the  stem.  Heat  in 
a  frying-pan  enough  butter  to  thinly  cover  the  bottom  ; 


Tht  Mess.  191 

put   in    the    mushrooms    and    fry   both    sides  to   a  golden 
brown. 

Edible  mushrooms  are  found  in  open  sunny  fields  and 
elevated  ground  where  the  air  is  fresh.  They  spring  up 
after  low-lying  fogs,  heavy  dews,  or  rains.  They  first 
appear  very  small  and  of  a  round  form  on  a  little  stalk ;  the 
upper  part  and  stalk  being  white.  As  the  size  increases, 
the  under  part  gradually  opens  and  assumes  a  delicate 
salmon  color,  which  in  the  course  of  a  day  changes  to  a 
dark  brown,  The  odor  is  agreeable,  flesh  solid  and  brittle 
and  skin  easily  peeled.  The  spores  are  white  and  usually 
of  an  oval  shape. 

Boiled  Rice  :  Time,  thirty  minutes. 

One  pound  of  rice  ;  one  gallon  of  boiling  water  ;  four 
teaspoonfuls  of  salt.  Wash -and  drain  the  rice  and  place 
it  into  the  kettle  of  boiling  water,  adding  the  salt.  Cover 
and  boil  steadily  for  fifteen  minutes,  then  thoroughly  drain 
off  the  water.  Place  the  rice  (in  the  covered  kettle)  into  a 
larger  kettle  of  boiling  water  and  steam  it  for  ten  minutes; 
and,  finally,  uncover  the  rice  and  steam  a  few  minutes 
longer.  Rice  is  frequently  spoiled  in  boiling,  by  being  re- 
duced to  a  watery  mass, 

Rice  Pudding :  One  quart  of  clean  rice  ;  six  quarts  of 
sweet  milk  (or  an  equivalent  of  condensed  milk);  one 
pound  sugar;  two  teaspoonfuls  salt ;  enough  grated  nut- 
meg and  ground  cinnamon  to  flavor. 

Cover  the  rice  with  a  portion  of  the  milk  and  let  it  soak 
two  hours  ;  then  add  the  remainder  of  the  milk,  and  stir 
into  this  the  sugar,  salt,  and  spices. 

Put  into  a  well-greased  dish-pan  and  bake  two  and  a 
half  hours  in  a  slow  oven.  Serve  either  hot  or  cold. 

Frequently,  owing  to  a  scarcity  of  water  and  forage,  the 
camp  will  be  made  near  a  dwelling  house  or  ranch,  when 


192  Mountain  Scouting. 

advantage  may  be  taken   of   stoves,  fireplaces  and  all  con- 
veniences for  cooking. 

If  it  is  suspected  that  the  enemy  is  in  the  neighborhood, 
prompt  and  proper  attention  must  be  given  to  the  fortifica- 
tions, and  every  precaution  taken  to  make  the  place  as 
strong  as  possible,  in  case  of  a  sudden  attack.  Often,  in  the 


absence  of  rock  and  timber,  strong  mud  or  clay  fortifica- 
tions may  be  quickly  thrown  up,  so  as  to  form  a  safe  point 
of  retreat  in  case  of  danger. 

COFFEE. 

Coffee  should  be  quickly  and  evenly  roasted  to  a  light 
brown  color.  A  few  burned  grains  will  impart  a  disagree- 
able flavor  to  it  when  made.  Only  a  sufficiency  for  four 
or  five  days  should  be  roasted  at  one  time,  and  it  should 
never  be  ground  until  required  for  use. 

The  following  is  an  excellent  method  of  making  coffee 
both  in  barracks  and  in  the  field.  It  is  the  favorite  receipt 
at  Delmonico's  : 

Heat  the  grounds  hot  in  a  mess-pan,  one  tablespoonful  to 
each  person  and  one  for  the  pot  or  kettle  ;  then  pour  on 
boiling  water,  one  cupful  for  each  spoonful  of  coffee.  Cover 
tight  and  stand  where  it  will  keep  hot,  but  not  boil,  for  15  or 
20  minutes.  Then  strain  into  the  cups.  The  coffee  should 


The  Mess.  193 

never  be  boiled.     "Coffee  boiled  is  coffee  spoiled  "  should 
be  remembered. 

TEA. 

The  making  of  tea  should  be  so  timed  that  it  may  be 
served  as  soon  as  drawn,  and  the  water  used  should  be 
fresh  from  the  well  or  spring.  Bring  the  water  to  a  boil  as 
soon  as  possible  ;  fill  the  heated  pot  or  kettle  with  boiling 
water,  put  into  it  one  teaspoonful  of  tea  for  every  cup  of 
tea  that  is  to  be  drawn,  and  set  the  covered  kettle  on  the 
stove  or  near  the  fire  to  draw,  but  not  to  boil.  It  should 
not  draw  long  enough  to  dissolve  the  tannin,  which  gives 
the  tea  an  astringent  taste.  The  time  for  drawing  varies 
with  the  different  teas,  and  is  about  as  follows  :  Green  tea, 
five  minutes ;  Oolong  tea,  eight  minutes  ;  English  break- 
fast, fifteen  minutes. 

CHOCOLATE. 

Six  tablespoonfuls  of  scraped  or  grated  chocolate  to  each 
pint  of  water;  add  as  much  milk  (if  procurable)  as  water, 
and  sweeten  to  taste.  Put  on  the  water  and  bring  it  to 
a  boil  ;  rub  the  chocolate  smooth  in  a  little  cold  water,  and 
stir  into  the  boiling  water.  Boil  twent  minutes  ;  add 
the  milk  and  boil  ten  minutes  more,  stirring  frequently. 
Sweeten  upon  the  fire  or  in  the  cups. 

Numerous  fancy  and  palatable  dishes  may  be  prepared, 
from  the  simple  articles  of  the  army  ration,  by  the  careful 
and  skillful  cook. 


Mountain  Scouting 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

LIVING    OFF    THE    COUNTRY. 

IT  is  frequently  the  case  that  supplies  are  taken  by  the 
enemy,  destroyed  by  fire,  lost  in  transportation  or  while 
crossing  rivers  and  streams;  and  under  such  possible  con- 
tingencies, with  a  view  to  securing  food,  it  might  be  well 
to  understand  the  habits  of  the  birds  and  animals  found  in 
the  country,  about  the  line  of  march,  and  the  properties  of 
its  various  wild  productions.  Many  varieties  of  wild  ber- 
ries and  innumerable  roots  (such  as  camas,  resembling  the 
sweet  potato  in  taste  and  nutritive  properties)  are  found  in 
nearly  all  localities  and  constitute  excellent  articles  of  food. 
Even  the  most  barren  trails  will  yield  abundantly  when 
properly  laid  under  contribution. 

Tobacco  may  be   replaced  by  either  the  sumach  leaf  or 

.red-willow   (shongsasha)  bark,   found   along  the   mountain 

streams.     The  bark  is   roasted  and   pulverized,  when  it  is 

found  to  possess  most  of  the  narcotic  properties  of  tobacco. 

Equal  portions  of  tobacco  and  yellow  willow  bark,  when 
mixed,  will  afford  a  double  quantity  of  excellent  smoking 
.  material. 

Coffee  may  be  very  satisfactorilv  replaced  by  a  decoc- 
'  tion  of  horse  mint;  and  a  little  gun  powder,  sprinkled  on  the 
slightly  burnt  meat,  will  impart  the  taste  of  a  rich  salt  and 
pepper  seasoning. 

Whenever  it  is  prudent,  hunting  parties,  consisting  of 
.three  or  four  men,  should  be  sent  out  daily.  They  will  not 


Living  Off  the  Country.  195 

only  supply  the  camp  with  a  variety  of  game,  but  will  at 
the  same  time  perform  the  valuable  duties  of  scouts  and 
flankers.  In  order  that  they  may  be  successful,  they  must 
carefully  note  the  habits  of  the  different  game  and  the 
points  to  be  observed  in  hunting  it.  I  will  here  submit  a 
few  notes  on  the  game  most  frequently  met  with  in  the. 
Northwest. 

Among  the  animals  of  the  genus  cervus,  the  elks  are  the 
largest  and  most  sought  after  by  the  Indians  and  hunters. 
Their  flesh  resembles  beef,  though 
less  highly  flavored,  and  the  skin 
is  variously  used  in  articles  of  cloth- 
ing, etc.  The  average  weight  is 
about  500  pounds.  Their  habits 
vary  with  the  locality  and  season  \ 
of  the  year.  They  usually  travel 
at  night  and  in  single  file,  leaving 
a  well-defined  trail,  and  seldom  re- 
main longer  than  one  day  in  any  particular  neighborhood. 
Unless  shot  in  the  proper  place  (through  the  shoulder 
blades  a  few  inches  beneath  the  withers),  they  will  con- 
tinue to  run  for  many  miles,  and  their  speed  in  flight  is  so 
great  (unless  forced  to  break  the  trot)  that  they  mock  the  • 
chase.  When  passing  through  timber  the  antlers  are 
thrown  back  on  each  side  of  the  body.  If  permitted  to 
trot,  they  will  advance  twenty  miles  or  more  without  tir- 
ing or  stopping.  They  possess  the  faculty  of  doubling 
and  hiding  with  great  facility,  and  their  senses  are  so  keen 
in  apprehension,  that  great  caution  is  necessary  in  order  to 
approach  them. 

Elk  or   other  fresh   meat   may   be  cured  or   'jerked'  by; 
cutting  it  into  very  thin  strips  and  drying  it  in  the  sun ;  or, , 
by  placing  the  strips  on  a  frame-work  of  poles  and  running 
a  slow  fire  beneath  it.     Salt  should  not  be  used;  it  is  only 
necessary  to  keep  the  meat  dry  to  avoid  putrifaction. 


196 


Mountain  Scouting. 


There  are  four  species  of  deer;  the  common  American, 
the  red,  the  black-tailed  and  the  long-tailed  deer.  Like 
those  in  the  Eastern  States,  they  are  of  a  mild,  innocent, 
timid  aspect;  beautifully  formed,  with  slender  and  nervous 


limbs;  but,  the  flesh  is  more  lean  and  less  inviting,  in  con- 
sequence of  their  having  less  opportunity  for  browsing 
upon  shrubbery  of  the  sacchariferous  kinds. 

They  generally  use  their  noses  in  the  direction  of  the 
wind,  and  their  eyes  in  the  opposite  one,  and  can  only  be 
approached  across  the  wind. 

The  proper  time  to  stalk  them  is  early  in  the  morning  or 
just  before  dark,  when  they  are  feeding  and  less  on  the 
alert.  '  Salt  licks,'  or  saline  incrustations,  have  great  at- 
tractions for  them,  and  they  will  frequently  travel  long  dis- 
tances at  night  in  order  to  visit  them.  The  slightest  move- 
ment of  an  object  will  attract  their'attention,  and  they  usu- 
ally show  alarm  by  throwing  up  the  head  and  suddenly 
jerking  the  tail. 


Living  Off  the  Country.  197 

Should  a  fawn  be  discovered,  it  is  a  sure  sign  that  there 
is  a  doe  secreted  within  calling  distance,  and  she  may  be 
captured  if  sufficient  caution  be  exercised.  The  Indians 
produce  a  noise  by  means  of  the  mouth,  very  much  like 
the  bleating  of  a  young  fawn,  and  thus  call  the  doe 
within  range. 

Red  deer  are  found  in  all  latitudes.  They  are  not  migra- 
tory, but  remain  throughout  the  year  near  their  chosen 
haunts,  generally  the  cover  of  the  thick  clumps  of  willows, 
or  cotton-woods.  They  are  most  abundant  about  the 
head-waters  of  the  Salmon  and  Clearwater  rivers.  During 
the  summer  they  live  on  the  mountain  grass,  but  descend 
into  the  warm  valleys  in  winter,  when  they  are  easily  taken. 
They  have  less  vitality  than  the  other  large  animals,  but 
are  seldom  dropped  unless  the  back  be  broken. 

Black-tailed  deer  are  slightly  larger,  but  much  darker  than 
the  red  deer.  The  tail  for  about  three  inches  is  tipped 
with  short,  black  hair.  They  are  extremely  fleet  and  use 
all  four  legs  at  once  in  making  the  spring.  They  are  sel- 
dom seen  away  from  the  mountains,  except  in  August  and 
September,  when  they  make  excursions  of  many  hundreds 
of  miles.  They  seem  to  possess  much  curiosity  :  for  a  few 
moments  they  will  bound  off  with  great  celerity,  then  stop 
and  investigate  the  cause  of  alarm.  This  is  the  moment 
for  the  hunter  to  fire.  They  prefer  the  dense  cover  of  pine 
or  cedar  thickets,  and  generally  hide  in  cations  where  they 
can  observe  all  going  on  lower  down,  and  get  timely  notice 
of  anything  approaching  from  above.  They  feed  during 
the  night  and  in  the  early  morning,  and  are  very  similar  to 
the  elk  in  all  their  habits.  They  are  very  tenacious  of  life 
and  will  generally  run  off  after  being  shot. 

The  long-tailed  deer  are  found  very  high  up  in  the  Rocky 
Mountains,  and  are  distinguished  by  their  very  long  tails — 
their  bodies  are  also  much  longer  than  those  of  the  other 
species.  They  are  exceedingly  scarry  and  must  be  most 


198  Mountain  Scouting. 

cautiously  approached.  Their  flesh  is  very  tender  and  of 
a  most  pleasant  flavor.  The  sharpness  of  the  hoof  and  the 
precision  with  which  it  is  used  render  it  a  very  dangerous 
weapon. 

Antelopes  are  found  on  nearly  all  the  elevated  prairies, 
but  they  seldom  go  into  the  timbered  sections.  During 
the  winter  they  penetrate  the  mountain  valleys  wherever 
they  can  find  good  shelter  and  pasturage. 

The  prong-horn  (horns  curvated  at 
the  ends)  is  the  species  found  in  West- 
ern North  America.  They  are  gen- 
erally red  and  average  about  fifty 
pounds  when  dressed.  The  meat  is 
sweeter  and  more  tender  than  that  of 
deer. 

Curiosity  is  their  besetting  fault.  A 
handkerchief  fastened  to  the  ram-rod, 
planted  in  the  ground,  will  so  attract  them  that  they  will 
approach  it  until  within  easy  range  of  the  hunter  secreted 
in  the  grass  or  hills  near  by. 

They  have  exceedingly  acute  senses  of  hearing  and 
vision,  but  seldom  associate  sound  and  danger.  By  firing 
so  that  the  bullet  will  knock  up  the  earth  in  front  of  them, 
they  will  generally  retreat  from  that  point  toward  the  firer. 
They  possess  the  faculty  of  finding  water  in  desert  local- 
ities. 

In  September  and  October  they  move  in  large  herds, 
following  and  imitating  their  leader  in  all  his  motions. 

They  possess  great  courage  and  vitality,  and  unless  prop- 
erty hit,  will  carry  off  several  bullets. 

Their  tracks  are  much  shorter  than  those  of  the  deer,  are 
sharp  at  the  toes  and  broad  and  round  at  the  heels. 

The  buffaloes,  of  the  bovine  genus,  are  the  largest  and 
most  important,  for  food  and  covering,  of  any  of  the  ani- 
mals of  the  North  American  prairies  and  mountains.  They 


Living  Off  the  Country.  199 

are  generally  about  the  size  of  our 
domestic  neat  cattle,  with  a  long, 
shaggy,  woolly  hair  covering  their 
head,  neck  and  shoulders,  which 
gives  them  the  formidable  appear- 
ance of  a  lion,  when  at  a  distance. 
They  are  cloven-footed,  chew  the 
cud,  and  select  the  same  kind  of  food  as  our  horned 
cattle.  Their  flesh  is  much  superior  to  beef,  in  flavor, 
and  is  remarkably  easy  of  digestion.  When  running,  they 
lean  alternately  from  one  side  to  the  other  and  carry 
their  heads  very  low  ;  and  although  clumsy  in  appearance, 
they  will  run  for  a  long  time  without  slackening  their 
speed,  up  and  down  very  steep  hills.  Their  legs  and  feet 
are  small  and  trim,  the  forelegs  being  covered  with  the 
long  hair  of  the  shoulders  as  low  down  as  the  knee. 

When  feeding  they  scatter  over  a  large  space,  but  when 
fleeing  from  danger,  they  collect  into  herds,  composed  pro- 
miscuously of  bulls  and  cows;  and  having  once  laid  their 
course  are  not  easily  diverted  from  it.  They  possess  the 
faculty  of  selecting  the  best  route  over  the  roughest 
country. 

The  limits  of  their  range  are  becoming  more  and  more 
circumscribed;  and,  if  they  continue  to  diminish  as  hereto- 
fore, they  will  soon  become  extinct.  They  are  frequently 
taken  by  still-hunting,  but  oftener  by  pursuing  them  on 
horseback,  when  the  former  is  impracticable. 

Their  power  of  scent  is  great,  and  they  perceive  the 
hunter  at  a  great  distance,  when  he  is  on  the  windward  side. 
They  do  not  become  alarmed  at  the  report  of  the  rifle; 
and,  so  long  as  the  hunter  is  not  seen  or  scented,  they  will 
stand  and  gaze  about  while  those  near  by  are  being  shot 
down. 

To  produce  the  best  effect,  the  shot  should  be  delivered 


soo  Mountain  Scouting. 

about  the  center  of  the  body  and  eight  or  nine  inches  be- 
hind the  fore-shoulder. 

The  tongue,  hump  and  marrow-bones  are  the  most  de- 
sirable parts  of  the  buffalo.  The  tongue  is  best  taken  out 
by  severing  the  skin  between  the  prongs  of  the  lower  jaw- 
bone, and  drawing  it  through  the  orifice.  The  hump  is 
removed  by  skinning  down  on  each  side  of  the  shoulders 
and  cutting  loose  the  meat. 

The  movements  of  the  immense  herds  regulate  the  loca- 
tion of  many  Plain's  Indians;  and  constituting,  as  they  do, 
their  commissariat,  frequently  govern  their  ability  for  war. 

The  Indians  and  trappers  of  the  Northwest  prepare  a 
food  known  as  ' pemmican '  as  follows  :  The  buffalo  flesh 
is  cut  into  convenient  flat  steaks  or  slices,  and  hung  in  the 
sun  or  over  a  slow  fire  until  dry.  The  dried  meat  is  ground 
between  two  rocks  until  very  fine,  and  is  then  pressed  into 
a  bag  made  of  hide.  This  is  securely  stitched  and  the  pem- 
mican allowed  to  cool  and  harden.  When  required  for  use, 
it  is  cut  from  the  hard  mass  and  either  eaten  cold,  or  is 
mixed  with  flour  forming  a  porridge  called  *  robiboo.' 

A  smaller  species  than  the  Plains  buffalo  is  said  to  in- 
habit the  Rocky  Mountains  in  various  localities.  I  am  in- 
clined to  think  it  an  error,  however,  and  that  the  mountain 
buffaloes  are  really  visitors  from  the  Plains,  appearing 
smaller  because  generally  seen  at  a  great  distance,  occupy- 
ing as  they  do  the  very  precipitous  and  inaccessible  sides  of 
the  mountains. 

Antelopes  are  always  found  in  the  vicinity  of  a  buffalo 
herd. 

There  are  four  varieties  of  bears — the  grizzly,  cinnamon, 
brown  and  black. 

All  the  bear  family,  in  their  habits,  are  quite  alike — 
hybernating  in  winter,  possessing  little  or  no  courage  unless 
cornered,  having  a  keen  sense  of  smell  and  at  times  exhibit- 
ing great  intelligence. 


Living  Off  the  Country.  201 

So  far  as  physical  strength  goes,  the  grizzly  has  no  equal, 
and  frequently  weighs  six  or  eight  hundred  pounds.  He 
depends  more  upon  his  strength  than  speed  for  taking  his 
prey,  and  generally  lurks  in  willows  or.  thickets,  so  as  to 
suddenly  seize  upon  any  animal  passing  near  him.  He 
apparently  eats  very  little  (mostly  ants,  insects,  roots  and 
wild  fruits),  but  keeps  quite  fat.  The  shades  of  color  vary 
from  light  gray  to  dark  brown;  and  the  hair  is  finer,  longer 
and  more  abundant  than  that  of  any  other  species. 

The  cinnamon  bear  resembles  the  grizzly  in  all  respects 
except  size,  but  is  not  a  variety  of  the  latter  as  is  frequently 
supposed. 

The  brown  bear  is  more  solitary  in  his  habits,  less  ferocious, 
and  is  but  little  esteemed  either  for  food  or  for  his  skin. 

The  black  bear  possesses  a  very  valu- 
able pure  black,  well-coated  skin.  He 
lives  more  upon  vegetable  food  and 
furnishes  from  200  to  300  pounds  of 
very  excellent  meat.  If  cornered,  he 
will  make  a  good  fight;  but  if  pursued, 
he  will  run  with  great  speed  and  will  head  for  the  nearest 
tree,  rocks,  or  jungle.  It  is  seldom,  indeed,  that  he  does 
not  get  the  wind  of  the  hunter  in  time  to  make  off. 

The  cougar  (California  lion)  is  very  shy  and  only  prowls 
at  night.  When  hungry  he  will  approach  the  camp,  and  is 
best  secured  by  means  of  the  spring  gun.  When  pursued^ 
he  soon  becomes  tired  and  either  ascends  a  leaning  tree  or 
takes  refuge  in  the  branches  of  fallen  trees;  and,  unless  shot 
through  the  brain,  will  endanger  the  life  of  the  approaching 
hunter. 

Brown  wolverines  are  inhabitants  of  the  Salmon  River 
mountains  and  differ  in  several  particulars  from  those  of 
other  localities.  They  are,  when  full  grown,  about  two  feet  in 
length,  with  comparatively  small  bodies.  They  have  short 
legs  and  necks  and  very  small  eyes  and  ears.  They  live  in 


2O2  Mountain  Scouting. 

caves  and  under  rocks,  and  are  seldom  bagged,  being  ex- 
tremely far-scented  and  always  remaining  near  their  hiding 
places.  They  are  easily  captured,  however,  when  overtaken, 
and  furnish  good  meat  and  a  skin  covered  with  fine  fur  more 
than  an  inch  long. 

Mountain  sheep,  very  much  resembling  the  chamois  of 
Europe  in  their  habits,  are  found  on  the  most  inaccessible 
peaks  and  plateaux  of  the  Rocky  Mountains.  They  climb 
over  steep  and  rugged  cliffs  and  skim  the  almost  vertical 
si  opes  and  fearful  precipices  of  smooth  granite  with  won- 
derful daring  and  swiftness.  Frequently  they  leap  from 
great  heights,  landing  on  their  horns,  probably  in  conse- 
quence of  their  great  weight. 

Their  feet  are  very  soft  and  spongy  and  enable  them  to 
cling  to  projections  so  as  to  ease  up  during  a  descent. 

Although  gregarious,  they  seldom  exceed  six  or  eight  in 
one  flock.  They  seem  to  be  a  combination  of  animals — the 
body  is  that  of  the  deer,  but  much  larger  ;  while  the  head  is 
that  of  the  domestic  sheep,  except  the  horns,  which  vary 
from  fifteen  to  twenty  inches  in  circumference  at  their  junc- 
ture with  the  head. 

The  least  unusual  noise  or  appearance  fills  them  with 
dread  alarm,  and  they  will  most  curiously  disappear  with- 
out leaving  any  sign  or  passing  again  in  view.  The  Sheep- 
Eater  Indians,  captured  by  my  command  in  1879,  near  tne 
Middle  Fork  of  the  Salmon  River,  in  Idaho,  are  so  called 
from  the  fact  that  they  subsist  principally  upon  the  flesh  of 
mountain  sheep,  and  make  their  articles  of  clothing  of  their 
skins,  which  are  covered  with  a  peculiar  hair  resembling 
wool,  which  serves  to  keep  the  body  very  warm  in  the  win- 
ter. These  Indians  would  usually  capture  them  by  sur- 
rounding the  mountain  on  which  they  were  grazing  or 
reposing  and  cautiously  closing  in  upon  them.  Their  flesh 
is  fat  and  delicious,  when  in  best  season,  during  the  months 
of  September  and  October. 


Living  Off  the  Country. 


203 


Their  heads  and  horns  frequently  weigh  as  much  as 
seventy  pounds. 

The  Indians  say  that  mountain  sheep  and  deer  (especially 
black  tailed  deer)  are  never  found  together,  and  that  when- 
ever the  deer  suddenly  come  down  to  the  river  bottoms  it  is 
a  sure  sign  that  the  sheep  are  on  the  mountains,  and  they 
hunt  them  accordingly. 

There  are  five  different  species  of  wolves  in  the  Western 
mountains. 

The  common  gray  wolf  has  the  appearance  and  habits  of 
those  found  in  the  East. 

The  blue  wolf  is  rarely  seen,  is  very  sneaky  and  roguish  in 
his  disposition,  and  usually  prowls  at 
night.  He  is  very  angular,  has  long 
hair,  freely  interspersed  with  white,  and 
always  has  the  appearance  of  being 
nearly  starved.  He  is  the  most  cow- 
ardly of  all  the  species. 

The   white   wolf  resembles    the    blue 

wolf  in  everything  except  color.    They  are  very  seldom  seen. 
Many  of  the  mountain  Indians  regard  the  capture  of  a 
white  wolf  as  the  grandest  accomplishment  of  the  chase,  and 
hold  their  skins  in  very  high  estimation. 

The  black  wolf  is  larger  than  any  of  the  other  species  and 


204  Mountain  Scouting. 

more  noble  in  his  appearance.  He  is  the  strongest  of  the 
wolf  kind,  is  very  daring  and  will  not  run  unless  the  odds 
are  very  much  against  him.  He  resembles  the  fox  very 
much  in  general  appearance,  but  is  several  times  larger. 

The  coyote  is  scarcely  larger  than  the  fox  and  is  very  uni- 
form in  size,  color  and  habits.  Like  the  other  species,  he  is 
always  prowling  and  cowardly.  His  hair  is  of  a  dull  red- 
dish gray,  very  long  and  blended  with  brown  fur  at  the 
roots.  He  exhibits  a  great  deal  of  curiosity;  and,  when  it  is 
safe  to  do  so,  will  follow  parties  or  caravans,  like  a  dog. 

They  frequently  congregate  about  the  camp  at  night  and 
howl  fearfully,  and  will  often  cause  annoyance  by  skulking 
into  camp  and  seizing  articles  of  supplies.  They  are 
usually  found  where  all  other  game  is  scarce,  and  are  only 
good  for  food  in  the  total  absence  of  all  other  varieties. 

The  fox  is  found  in  three  different  kinds  :  the  red,  gray 
and  silver.  They  do  not  differ  from  those  found  east  of 
the  mountains.  The  skin  of  the  silver  fox  ranks  high  among 
the  furs  of  commerce. 

Martins  are  found  in  the  woody  mountains  of  the  Salmon, 
but  are  more  abundant  and  of  better  quality  farther  north. 

Of  the  feline  kind,  there  are  the  panther,  the  wild  cat  and 
the  lynx. 

The  panther  is  much  like  the  cougar,  but  smaller.  He  is 
an  excellent  climber,  very  ferocious,  but  never  makes  fight 
with  man. 

The  wildcat  is  widely  diffused  throughout  the  mountains, 
and  a  species  known  as  the  'long  tail'  are  much  larger  than 
the  Eastern  specimens.  They  are  of  a  dull  reddish  color, 
run  rapidly  and  possess  much  endurance.  They  live  in 
rocks,  hollow  trees  and  dense  thickets,  and  feed  principally 
upon  birds  and  prairie  dogs. 

Lynx  are  very  abundant  in  the  lower  wooded  mountains, 
but  seldom  come  under  observation. 

The  beaver  (castor  Americanus),  a  variety  of  the  Euro- 


Living  Off  the  Country.  205 

pean  species,  is  abundantly  found 
throughout  the  mountain  streams; 
and,  besides  its  valuable  fur,  it 
furnishes  the  hunter  an  excellent 
flesh  for  food.  I  never  saw  any 
evidence  of  the  truth  of  the  as- 
sertion that  while  the  flesh  of  the  hind  parts  is  like  fish  in 
smell  and  taste,  its  fore  parts  are  of  the  quality  of  land 
animals. 

They  are  of  very  social  habits,  and  may  be  frequently 
taken  when  about  their  villages ;  but  they  are  generally  on 
the  alert  and  require  the  hunter  to  approach  with  great 
caution. 

The  land  otter  is  also  found  along  the  mountain  streams 
and  furnishes  a  very  good  skin  and  food.  It  varies  in  color 
from  a  light  to  a  dark  brown ;  and,  in  formation,  is  adapted 
to  both  land  and  water.  It  is  generally  taken  while  sliding 
down  steep  snow  drifts  or  grassy  banks,  an  amusement  for 
which  it  manifests  a  great  love. 

The  badger,  marmot,  mink  and  musk-rat  are  found  in  nearly 
every  Western  locality  and  do  not  differ  materially  from  those 
on  the  eastern  part  of  the  continent. 
*  The  woodchuck  (Arctomys  monax)  is 
the  most  numerous  of  all  burrowing 
species,  and  in  the  absence  of  other 
food,  makes  a  very  tempting  dish. 
The  prairie-dog  (Arctomys,  ludovicianus)  is  a  smaller 
species  of  marmot  found  on  all  the  prairies  west  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi. They  are  cautious,  provident  and  phlegmatic — 
are  very  fond  of  society  and  seem  to  have  regular  hours  for 
visiting. 

They  burrow  in  dry  and  arid  ground,  digging  their  holes 
in  close  vicinity,  and  live  on  grass,  roots  and  other  vegetable 
substances 

In  their  villages,  which  often  extend  over  miles,  they 
live  like  law-abiding  citizens. 


206 


Mountain  Scouting. 


Their  sentinels  are  regularly  posted  and  are  quick  to  g  /e 
the  alarm  upon  the  approach  of  any  unknown  or  dangerous 
object. 

Being  susceptible  of  .atmospheric  influences,  they  will 
-serve  as  excellent  barometers.  Just  before  a  storm  they 
are  very  demonstrative,  and  rush  up  to  one  another  and 
from  burrow  to  burrow  as  though  they  were  exchanging 
thoughts. 

Their  flesh  is  very  good  as  food,  and  nearly  all  the  carniv- 
ora  in  their  neighborhoods  prey  upon  them.  The  rattle- 
snake and  burrowing  owl  are  their  frequent,  but  I  believe 
unwelcome,  guests. 

They  are  so  called,  not  from  their  appearance,  but  from 
their  barking,  which  is  like  that  of  a  small  dog. 

There  are  two  varieties  of  squirrels  found  west  of  the 
Rocky  Mountains  that  I  have  never  heard  described.  One 
is  a  handsome  gray,  about  one-third  larger  than  those  found 
in  the  East;  while  the  other  is  a  beautiful  variety  of  striped 
.squirrel,  about  one-half  as  large. 

The  inoffensive  hare  and  rabbit  are  found  in  three  varie- 
ties. 

The  common  hare  has  the  same  characteristics  as  in  other 
regions. 

The  jack  rabbit  strictly  belongs  to  the  Plains,  but  is  always 


;^; 


Living  off  the  Country. 


207 


found  in  the  sage-brush  bottoms  throughout  the  moun- 
tains. It  runs  with  great  ease  and  swiftness,  and  its 
motions  are  an  alternate  running  and  leaping  at  almost 
incredible  distances.  Its  flesh,  when  used  for  food,  is 
rather  tender  and  of  a  pleasant  flavor. 

The  rock  rabbit  is  very  small,  being  only  five  or  six  inches 
long  and  has  pointed  ears.  They  live  in  the  rocks  and  sel- 
dom go  very  far  from  their  holes.  The  Indians  consider 
their  flesh  a  great  luxury. 

The  largest  part  of  the  feathered   race  of  the  West  are 
migratory.     Among  these  are  several  spe- 
cies of  grouse  (including  the  ruffed  grouse, . 
improperly  called  partridge  and  pheasant), . 
several  varieties  of  eagles  and  hawks  and 
the  common  Eastern  quail. 
The  gray  or  sage  grouse,  the  pinnated  or  prairie  grouse,  the 
willow  or  sharp-tailed  grouse  and  the  mountain  or  blue  grouse 
are  all  more  or  less  abundant  in  the  mountains,  although, 
they  properly  belong  in  lower  altitudes. 

Near  the  head-waters  of  the  Salmon,. 
I  have  noticed  a  species  of  quail,  much 
smaller  than  the  ortyx  virginianus^ 
lighter  colored  and  better  spotted, 
and  having  a  beautifully  striped  neck. 
Its  habits  are  gregarious  and  it  is 
remarkably  tame. 

As  the   Autumn  advances,    the  variety  and    number    of 

geese,  cranes,  swans  and   ducks 
multiply. 

Nearly  all  the  year  round,  a 
peculiar  variety  of  wild  goose, 
possessing  many  of  the  features 
and  characteristics  of  the  sand- 
hill crane,  is  found  about  the 


208 


Mountain  Scouting. 


most  elevated  mountain  lakes.  The  Indians  associate  their 
presence  with  deer,  and  will  travel  many  miles  when  hunt- 
ing deer  in  order  to  take  in  such  lakes  as  are  known  to  be 
patronized  by  these  birds. 

The  loon  (colymbus  glacialis),  or  northern  diver,  is  very 
plentiful  about  the  Columbia  river 
and  its  tributaries,  and  is  occasionally 
found  at  the  extreme  head-waters  near 
the  summit  of  the  Rockies. 

It  is  seldom  seeti,  but  frequently 
utters  its  horrible  cries,  which  once 
heard  are  never  forgotten.  Many  of 
the  mountain  Indians  regard  its  cry 
as  an  indication  of  the  presence  of  the 
evil  spirit,  and  are  exceedingly  restless  while  in  its  vi- 
cinity. 

Spring,  with  its  rising  vegetation,  brings  its  many  genera 
and  still  more  numerous  species  of  feathered  tribes,  which 
remain  for  different  periods  of  time,  so  that  the  skillful 
huntsman  may  always  be  repaid  with  a  variety  of  ornitho- 
logical treasures. 

The  curlew  (scolopax  borealis)  is  found  very  abundant  and 
in  a  wild   state  on  the  high  grounds 
(probably  nesting),  many  hundreds  of 
miles  from  the  sea-shore,  where  it  be- 
longs.   It  requires  very  hard  hitting  to 
kill  it,  and  the  hunter  must  possess 
skill  and  patience.     Its  plaintive  cry 
is  well  expressed  in  its  name. 
When  one  is  wounded,  it  will  attract  all  of  its  companions, 
within  sight  or  hearing,  to  the  spot. 

Vast  numbers  of  locusts,  grasshoppers  and  crickets  are 
continually  passing  over  the  mountains;  and,  in  the  absence 
of  other  food,  are  greedily  eaten  by  the  savages. 


Living  Off  the  Coimtry.  209 

Crickets,  something  on  the  order  of  genus  gryllus,  but  about 
one-half  size  larger,  make  a  favorite 
dish  on  occasions  of  ceremony.  The 
Indians  lay  in  large  stores,  merely 
srnoke-dried,  which  they  afterward 
serve  up  with  roots  and  underground  productions. 

It  will  be  well  to  observe,  at  all  times  while  hunting,  the 
following  suggestions : 

\st.  Advance  across  or  against  the  wind. 

2d.  Keep  out  of  sight  while  approaching  the  game  that  has  been 
located. 

$d.  Cautiously  approach  the  top  of  every  ridge,  so  as  to  be  able 
to  see  any  game,  before  exposing  the  body  to  view. 

4t/i.  Never  fire  when  seized  with  the  ' 'buck  fever •,'  but  wait 
until  perfectly  cool;  and  then  take  a  rest  for  the  rifle,  if  possible. 

$th.  Underestimate  rather  than  overestimate  the  distance  of  the 
game,  and  thus  secure  the  advantage  of  ricochet  shots. 

6th.  Reload  immediately  after  firing;  and  should  the  wounded 
game  run  off,  hunt  in  some  other  direction  than  that  taken  by  it. 

1th.  Never  hunt  alone,  unless  within  sight  or  hearing  of  the 
camp. 

%th.  While  preparing  the  game,  should  there  be  no  tree  or 
brush  to  which  to  make  the  horse  fast,  either  hobble  him  or  tie 
him  to  the  animal's  horns  or  body. 

qth.  When  game  falls  in  deep  water,  take  a  long,  light  string 
and  tie  a  stick  on  the  end  of  it ;  throw  the  stick  beyond  the  floating 
game  and  gradually  draw  it  in. 

The  Remington  combination  (40-50)  breech-loading  rifle 
and  shot-gun  is  excellent  for  hunting  purposes,  and  a  single 
one  judiciously  handled  will  furnish  a  large  command  a 
good  daily  allowance  of  game  in  great  variety.  A  few  shot- 
guns should  accompany  every  command  in  the  field. 

The  hunters  should  be  selected  with  a  view  to  the  par- 
ticular game  sought  after,  as  they  seldom  have  the  same 
success  with  all  game.  I  seldom  miss  an  elk,  deer,  or  bear; 


2IO 


Mountain  Scouting. 

As  a  rule,  good  target  shots 


but  could  never  hit  a  coyote, 
are  poor  hunters. 

When  game  is  abundant  and  its  habits  are  well  under- 
stood, it  may  be  readily  secured  without  any  great  exertion 
by  means  of  spring  guns. 

O 


The  drawings  show  two  simple  modes  of 
setting  the  guns.  When  the  game  passes 
along  the  trail  in  front  of  the  muzzle  and  comes 
in  contact  with  the  cord  (<r),  acting  on  the  trig- 
ger, the  gun  is  discharged.  The  gun  and  cord 
are  so  placed  that  the  load  may  be  discharged 
into  the  most  vital  parts  of  the  game. 

When  setting  a  gun  trap,  warn  the  camp, 
make  sure  the  gun  is  cocked  the  last  thing, 
and  never  cross  in  front  of  it. 

A  bow  and  arrow  trap  may  be  successfully 
used  when  it  is  desirable  to  save  ammunition 
or  avoid  the  noise  of  the  discharge.  A  large 
and  strong  bow,  charged  with  a  number  of 
arrows,  is  set  with  a  line  stretched  across  the 
trail  of  the  animals,  so  that  a  set  of  trigger 
sticks  may  be  acted  upon  when  the  game  comes 
in  contact  with  the  line. 

Nearly  all  the  mountain  streams  contain  an 
abundance  of  excellent  fish  ;  among  others,  many  varieties 
of  trout  and  salmon. 


Living  Off  the  Country. 


211 


A  magnificent  and  interesting  species,  known  as  the  red 
fish,  inhabit  the  waters  of  the  Payette  and  Wallowa  Lakes. 

The  salmon  is  by  far  the  most  numerous  and  valuable 
fish  found  west  of  the  mountains,  and  is  of  excellent  flavor. 
There  are  many  different  species,  but  all  are  endowed  with 
great  muscular  power,  which  enables  them  to  press  their 
way  upward  beyond  falls  and  rapids  into  the  small  branches 
of  the  rivers,  near  their  very  sources.  They  are  found  in  the 
head-waters  of  the  Salmon  as  late  as  October  and  November, 
when  they  perish.  The  Indians  boil  their  salmon  in  birch 
bark,  by  the  aid  of  hot  stones,  when  they  have  no  kettles. 

The  rudest  substitutes  for  braided  silk  lines  and  split  bamboo 
or  lance-wood  rods  will  serve  to  capture  the  handsomest 
specimens  of  the  mountain  beauties. 

Any  anomalous-looking  contrivance  of  feathers  or  colored 
fur,  resembling  flies  of  the  rudest  type,  are  often  as  effective 
as  the  most  carefully  prepared  baits.* 

When  fishing  unknown  waters,  it  is  generally  well  to  use 
such  baits  as  may  be  secured  about  their  immediate  shores. 
Grasshoppers,  locusts,  beetles,  mantis,  grubs,  and  many 
specimens  of  larvae  found  in  decayed  logs  may  be  readily 
secured. 

The  drawing  shows  the  manner  of  properlv  baiting,  so  as 


to  cause  the  exposed  parts  of  the  hook  to  appear  as  a  part 
of  the  fly  or  bait. 


212  Mountain  Scouting. 

Salmon  roe  or  hard-bread  dust  cast  into  the  'water  and 
permitted  to  sink  gradually  will  attract  the  fish  in  great 
numbers. 

A  good  substitute  for  a  fish  hook  may  be  made  by  scrap- 
ing a  strip  of  whale  bone,  or  tough  wood,  round 
and  fine,  and  binding  on  another  finely  pointed 
piece,  at  an  acute  angle  (a) ;  or,  an  ordinary  sail 
needle  may  be  made  to  serve  as  a  hook  by  making 
it  fast  to  the  line  as  shown(^).  Even  a  horse-shoe 
nail  may  be  converted  into  a  hook. 

Very  good  lines  may  be  made  from  most  any  of  the  vege- 
table fibres  obtained  by  soaking  the  stems  of  plants  and  the 
inner  barks  of  trees  ;  also,  from  the  hair  of  animals,  particu- 
larly that  of  horses. 

To  cook  fish  without  cooking  utensils  : 

Dig  a  hole  in  the  ground  sufficiently  large  to  contain  the 
fish  ;  build  a  fire  in  it  and  let  it  burn.  Remove  the  coals, 
leaving  the  hot  ashes  at  the  bottom,  and  put  a  thick  layer 
of  green  grass  over  them  ;  place  the  fish  on  top  of  this  and 
cover  with  more  gracs  ;  then  rake  back  the  coals  and  loose 
earth  and  continue  a  small  fire  on  top.  At  the  end  of  40  or 
50  minutes  the  fish  will  be  nicely  cooked,  retaining  all  the 
juice  ;  and  the  skin  will  peel  off,  leaving  the  flesh  perfectly 
clean  and  free  from  ashes. 


Indian  Character.  213 


CHAPTER   XIV. 

INDIAN    CHARACTER. 

IN  studying  the  Indian's  character,  we  will  find  much  to 
incite  admiration,  while  many  of  his  traits  and  customs 
can  only  serve  to  shock  and  disgust.  While  he  is  of  a  much 
higher  standard  than  those  who  live  near  him  would  have 
us  believe,  he  nevertheless  falls  short  of  the  popular  Eastern 
idea  of  his  goodness  and  greatness. 

Two  centuries  ago,  the  number  of  Indians  in  the  United 
States  exceeded  2,000,000  ;  to-day  they  fall  short  of  300,000, 
being  distributed  as  follows  : 

In  California,  Oregon  and  Washington  Territory 50,000 

In  Arizona  and  New  Mexico -  50,000 

In  Utah,  Nevada  and  Colorado 35,000 

In  Idaho,  Dakotah,  Wyoming  and  Montana 70,000 

In  Indian  Territory  (partly  civilized) 70,000 

The  numerous  wandering  tribes 25,000 

The  record  of  every  tribe  tells  the  same  story — a  constant 
and  rapid  decrease,  the  result  of  wars,  intemperance  and 
contagious  diseases. 

There  are  about  50  tribes  in  Oregon,  Idaho  and  Wash- 
ington Territory,  all  speaking  a  strange  patois,  known  as 
'Chinook  Jargon,'  the  same  word  frequently  appearing  as 
a  noun  or  verb,  according  to  the  context.  Some  of  these 
tribes  are  at  constant  war  with  each  other,  and  make  fre- 
quent invasions  for  the  purpose  of  stealing  stock  and  taking 
prisoners,  and  it  is  seldom  that  they  return  from  an  un- 
successful foray. 

The  various  tribes  have  different  customs  and  propensi- 
ties, each  having  its  particular  style  of  dress  and  dances, 


214  Mountain  Scouting. 

and  its  own  manner  of  constructing  camps,  lodges  and  fires. 

The  men  of  each  tribe  are  divided  into  '  the  old  men  who 
stay  at  home  with  the  squaws'  and  ' the  young  men  who  go  to 
war'  The  latter  are  known  as  warriors  and  braves.  A  brave 
becomes  a  warrior  as  soon  as  he  has  met  the  enemy  and  has 
taken  a  scalp,  and  until  this  is  the  case  he  cannot  take  a  seat 
in  council.  The  greater  the  number  of  scalps  taken,  the 
greater  the  honor  due,  and  hence  the  great  number  of  in- 
discriminate massacres. 

All  the  tribes  have  their  own  traditions  and  fables,  many 
of  which  resemble  those  of  ^Esop. 

It  is  singular  that  the  word  "&sop"  in  Comanche^  means 
'to  lie.' 

According  to  the  traditions  of  some  tribes,  their  ancestors 
came  from  a  distant  country  in  the  West,  where  they  ex- 
pect to  go  after  death.  The  beliefs  and  traditions  of  many 
strongly  resemble  those  of  the  old  Testament,  feasts  being 
observed  and  sacrifices  frequently  made.  In  most  of  their 
traditions  animals  speak  and  act,  and  men  are  changed 
into  animals  and  vice  versa. 

The  following  is  the  tradition  of  the  Nez  Perce  Indians, 
as  related,  by  Chief  Joseph,  and  may  be  regarded  as  a  fair 
sample: 

Thousands  of  years  ago  there  existed  an  animal  of  im- 
mense size,  way  off  to  the  southwest  of  the  country  now 
occupied  by  the  Nez  Perces.  It  was  the  largest  of  all  the 
animal  creation,  and  was  known  as  the  lllls-wau-tsih'  This 
animal's  greatest  propensity  was  the  devouring  of  every 
living  thing  he  came  across.  His  voraciousness  was  so 
great  that  lizards  and  reptiles  of  all  kinds  and  sizes,  bears, 
wolves,  and  animals  of  every  description,  at  one  gulp,  would 
disappear  in  the  depths  of  his  capacious  maw.  At  the  same 
time  existed  the  Coyote,  or  "  Little  Wolf,"  noted  for  his 
cunning,  and  recognized  as  the  chief  among  and  by  the 
other  animals,  thty  looking  upon  him  as  destined,  at  some 
future  time,  to  work  out  for  them  a  great  deliverance. 


Indian  Character.  215 

Little  Wolf  had  heard  of  the  '  Ills-wau-tsih'  and  his 
slaughter,  and  determined  to  put  a  stop  to  it.  To  this  end 
he  girded  on  his  armor,  which  consisted  of  two  ropes  made 
of  wild  hemp,  a  quiver  made  of  bear  skin,  some  tinder,  and 
knives  of  flint — all  of  which  he  concealed  nnder  his  fore-leg, 
and,  being  fully  equipped,  he  started  out  on  his  perilous 
mission. 

After  traveling  for  many  days,  and  over  a  great  stretch 
of  country,  Little  Wolf  descried  the  '  Ills-wau-tsih  '  in  the 
distance,  and  immediately  prepared  for  the  conflict. 
Taking  the  two  ropes,  which  were  miles  in  length,  he  fas- 
tened them  to  a  cord  of  sinew,  which  was  about  his  body 
and  made  their  other  ends  fast  to  two  trees,  a  long  distance 
from  each  other. 

By  this  time  the  '  Ills-wau-tsih  '  was  within  hearing  of 
Little  Wolf,  when  he  howls  out,  "  Come  on,  old  '  Ills-wau- 
tsih,'  and  prepare  to  die,  for  I  am  going  to  slay  you  !"  The 
latter  came,  and  the  battle  raged  with  considerable  violence 
for  some  time.  Little  Wolf  made  some  very  good  strokes 
now  and  then,  but  was  finally  compelled  to  abandon  an  ac- 
tive offensive  fight  and  resort  to  cunning  and  operate 
on  the  defensive.  The  *  Ills-wau-tsih '  had,  however, 
swallowed  Little  Wolf,  having  him  part  way  down 
when  the  ropes  and  sinew  girth  prevented  his  going 
down  entirely.  The  old  fellow  stamped  about  and  howled 
fearfully,  and  declared,  "I  will  swallow  Little  Wolf." 
Taking  a  long  breath,  he  made  a  huge  effort — the  girth  was 
broken  and  down  went  poor  Little  Wolf. 

After  resting  a  short  time,  he  made  a  tour  of  the  belly  of 
the  monster,  and  found  all  kinds  of  animals  and  reptiles 
therein,  which  had  been  carrying  on  a  kind  of  inteinal  war 
among  themselves.  Feeling  somewhat  hungry,  Little  Wolf 
takes  one  of  his  knives  and  cuts  a  piece  of  fat  from  the 
heart  of  the  beast,  and  warming  it  with  ignited  tinder,  de- 
vours it ;  at  the  same  time  counseling  obedience  among  the 
other  inhabitants,  and  promising  a  speedy  deliverance  from 


216  Mountain  Scouting. 

their  prison.  He  then  cooks  a  meal  for  his  fellow  prison- 
ers and  taking  a  piece  of  fat  from  the  heart  of  the  beast 
and  rubbing  their  wounds  and  sores,  says,  "  You  are  my  sub- 
jects, and  it  is  now  time  to  get  out  of  here.  In  taking  the 
fat  from  around  the  heart,  I  have  struck  him  a  death 
blow."  Proceeding  with  his  work,  he  caused  him  to  howl 
tremendously.  He  writhed  and  kicked  and  tried  to  throw 
up  his  *  supper/  but  could  not  dislodge  Little  Wolf,  who 
did  not  propose  to  leave  until  his  mission  was  accom- 
plished. The  old  fellow  declared  he  would  eject  him,  but, 
failing  in  the  attempt,  rolled  over  and  'gave  up  the  ghost.' 
Little  Wolf  then  walked  out  and  took  the  meat  from  the 
bones  and  had  a  right  Hearty  meal.  The  bones  were  scat- 
tered to  the  uttermost  parts  of  the  earth,  and  an  allotment 
of  land  was  made  to  each  of  the  delivered  ones,  which  they 
were  to  take  as  their  country;  while  it  was  promised  that  a 
race  of  people  would  spring  up  from  the  bones  of  the  beast 
in  all  respects  like  unto  them. 

"  But,"  said  the  Fox,  "  you  have  reserved  nothing  for 
yourself."  Little  Wolf  called  for  water,  his  paws  yet  drip- 
ping with  the  blood  of  the  beast.  Then  dipping  them  in 
the  water  he  scattered  the  blood  and  water  all  over  the 
country  occupied  by  the  Nes  Perces,  saying,  "  From  this 
shall  spring  a  people  to  inhabit  this  land  with  me." 

Little  Wolf  was  then  transformed  into  a  chief  and  a  tribe 
sprang  up  around  him. 

The  Nez  Perces  claim  that  what  they  lack  in  stature  they 
more  than  make  up  in  cunning  and  intelligence,  taking 
after  their  illustrious  progenitor,  kittle  Wolf.  It  seems  re- 
markable that  such  an  intelligent  people  should  continue 
to  nourish  this  tradition. 

There  is  a  Medicine  Man,  in  each  tribe,  who  conducts  the 
exercises  on  every  occasion  of  'making  medicine,'  and 
frequently  performs  the  duties  of  priest,  surgeon  and  phy- 
sician. 


Indian  Character. 


217 


Most  tribes  recognize  two  Gods,  a  good  one  and  a 
bad  one,  and  it  is  a  solemn  occasion  when  they  '  make 
medicine/  to  determine  which  is  with  them  at  any  partic- 
ular time. 

The  surgery  of  the  'Medicine  Men'  is  quite  deficient. 
When  the  wound  is  external,  they  rely  principally  upon 
charms  and  incantations.  When  the  sickness  is  internal,  it 
is  beyond  their  comprehension,  and  the  remedy  is  the 
''sweat  bath'  or  '  counter  irritant.''  In  the  latter  case,  when 


the  pain  is  internal,  the  first  act  of  the  '  Medicine  Man ' 
is  to  apply  a  red  hot  iron  to  the  back  ;  and  as  soon  as  the 
pain  is  transferred  to  the  latter  wound,  he  proceeds  to 
treat  it.  Sickness  is  frequently  attributed  to  evil  spirits, 
and  horrible  wounds  are  inflicted  upon  the  sick  in  order  to 
dislodge  them. 


2i8  Mountain  Scouting. 

They  are  possessed  of  almost  innumerable  superstitions. 

They  believe  that  all  Indians,  except  those  who  are 
scalped,  will  go  to  the  *  Happy  Hunting  Ground '  after 
death,  and  thus  it  is  that  they  will  risk  many  lives  to  pre- 
vent the  body  of  any  one  of  their  number  from  falling 
into  the  hands  of  an  enemy. 

They  entertain  similar  ideas  in  connecticn  with  '  hang- 
ing,' and  would  rather  suffer  a  death  of  torture  than  sub- 
mit to  it. 

Upon  reaching  the  *  Happy  Hunting  Ground,'  they  be-' 
lieve  that  they  will  need  everything  required  in  this  life, 
and  such  articles  as  they  cannot  make  themselves  must  be 
buried  with  them.  Their  favorite  horses  are  killed  at  the 
graves,  and  every  endeavor  is  made  to  give  the  dead  a  com- 
plete outfit  in  the  'Happy  Hunting  Ground/  Indians  will 
go  hungry  and  do  without  game  rather  than  disturb  a  rifle 
placed  on  a  grave  near  by. 

The  superstition  that  if  killed  in  the  dark,  they  will  be 
blind  in  the  next  world,  is  very  generally  entertained,  and 
thus  it  is  that  Indians  will  seldom  or  never  make  a  night 
attack. 

Upon  going  into  camp,  after  taking  scalps,  they  will  in- 
variably fire  a  few  volleys  over  them,  believing  that  such 
demonstration  will  frighten  off  the  spirits  of  those  scalped. 

When  they  claim  a  lineal  descent  from  bears,  wolves,  etc., 
they  generally  select  such  an  animal  as  their  totem,  and 
never  kill  or  eat  it;  but,  on  the  contrary,  regard  it  as  their 
protector  and  address  it  in  prayer. 

When  calamities  are  threatening,  as  an  atonement  to 
propitiate  the  great  spirit,  they  will  sacrifice  their  dogs  or 
ponies  and  will  even  give  away  their  children. 

Indians  have  no  family  names.  Generally,  the  warriors 
give  themselves  names  expressive  of  some  well  known  suc- 
cesses, or  of  the  characteristics  and  appearances  of  certain 
animals.  The  others  take  names  suggestive  of  certain 


Indian  Character. 


219 


shortcomings  or  accomplishments,  or  those  of  white  men 
with  whom  they  come  in  contact.  The  women  are  usually 
named  after  their  personal  charms  or  defects  ; — all  are 
prone  to  change  their  names  frequently. 

Cousins  are  generally  called  brothers  and  sisters,  and 
aunts  are  called  mothers. 

The  boy  becomes  a  man  at  15,  and  goes  out  in  search  of 
fame,  perfectly  satisfied  with  his  condition,  even  when  hun- 
gry and  poorly  clad.  From  childhood,  he  is  taught  to  re- 
gard killing  and  scalping  as  the  highest  of  virtues,  and 
daily  hears  the  warriors  recite  their  deeds  of  pillage  and 
murder  as  most  precious  things. 

The  clothing  of  the  men  usually  consists  of  blankets, 
*  breech-clouts '  and  moccasins  ;  while  the  women  wear 
sleeveless  and  rudely  made  buckskin  gowns.  The  men,  and 
especially  the  warriors,  often  wear  immense  earrings. 
Their  ideas  of  adornment  are  such  as  to  render  them,  when 
in  full  dress  and  properly  marked  with  paint  and  grease, 
hideous  monstrosities  rather  than  objects  of  attraction. 

A  blow  is  the  greatest  injury  that  can  be  inflicted  upon 
an  Indian,  and  only  blood  can  make  the  ample  reparation. 
His  thirst  for  revenge  is  forever  cherished,  and  he  finds  a 
special  delight  in  the  most  hellish  and  ingenious  tortures. 

When  a  tribe  wishes  to  go  to  war,  messengers  are  sent  to 
numerous  other  tribes  asking  for  warriors  for  the  expedi- 


tion.  The  council  pipe  (sacred  and  public  property)  goes 
with  the  mission.  The  whole  subject  is  thoroughly  dis- 
cussed in  council,  and  such  tribes  as  grant  the  request, 
accept  the  pipe  and  smoke. 


22O  Mountain  Scouting. 

I 
When  an  accepting   chief   wishes    to    organize  his  war 

party,  he  mounts  his  horse,  both  in  full  war  paint,  raises  a 
pole  to  which  is  attached  a  bunch  of  feathers  and  a  small 
red  blanket  and  rides  about  the  village  singing  the  war 
song.  Those  wishing  to  go,  mount  their  ponies  and  follow 
the  chief.  This  is  continued  several  days,  until  there  is  a 
sufficiency  of  volunteers  for  the  work. 

During  the  absence  of  the  war  parties,  the  people  at 
home  become  very  anxious,  and  all  the  conversation  is  cen- 
tered on  the  absent  party  and  its  probable  time  of  return. 
When  it  is  announced  that  the  warriors  are  returning  vic- 
torious, there  is  a  great  excitement  throughout  the  village. 
The  women  chant  songs  of  victory,  while  the  old  men  nar- 
rate the  deeds  of  their  forefathers  and  themselves  to  excite 
the  emulation  of  the  young.  The  *  Medicine  Men  '  gallop 
through  the  camp  beating  their  drums  and  shouting 
encouragement,  while  the  warriors  painted  black,  with 
their  horses  in  full  war  paint,  perform  the  scalp  dance. 

If  the  expedition  turns  out  to  be  a  failure  and  some  of 
the  party  are  killed,  the  relatives  of  the  killed  cut  off  their 
own  hair  and  the  tails  and  manes  of  the  favorite  horses  of 
the  deceased,  and  cry  without  cessation  for  days,  weeks, 
and  even  months.  When  any  are  slain  in  battle,  it  is  the 
important  duty  of  those  left  to  retaliate  by  killing  some  of 
the  slayer's  tribe,  regardless  of  age  or  sex. 

Among  themselves,  murder  is  punished  by.  a  friend  or 
relative  of  the  deceased  killing  the  murderer.  They  make 
no  distinction  between  murder  and  justifiable  homicide, 
and  seldom  make  allowance  for  accidental  killing.  All 
other  crimes  have  their  prices  fixed  in  ponies. 

A  murder  is  not  considered  satisfactory,  by  any  means 
unless  the  perpetrator  is  enabled  to  sound  the  '  war- 
whoop '  and  'scalp'  his  victim.  The  war-whoop  —  a 
shrill,  piercing  note  on  the  highest  key  of  the  voice,  with 
a  rapid  vibration,  made  by  striking  the  hand  or  fingers 


Indian  Character.  221 

• 

against  the  lips — is  sounded  just  as  the  final  dash  is  made 

or  as  the  weapon  is  raised  for  the  deed.  Scalping  is  ac- 
complished by  grasping  the  hair  above  the  top  of  the  head, 
raising  it  with  the  skin  to  which  it  is  attached,  and  quickly 
cutting  the  latter  loose.  Scalping  alone  is  not  fatal. 

Many  tribes  seem  to  fear  and  respect  those  who  commit 
suicide,  and  will  leave  their  arms  and  clothing  untouched. 

The  Indian's  idea  of  excellence  centers  on  war  and  the 
chase,  and  most  of  his  time  is  devoted  to  breeding  horses, 
making  weapons,  saddles,  bridles,  lariats  and  necessary 
things.  They  are  in  the  saddle  from  infancy  to  old  age, 
and  excellency  of  equitatipn  is  the  principal  feature  of 
their  education.  Many  have  no  fixed  homes,  but  are  con- 
tinually in  the  saddle,  moving  about  with  the  game  and 
the  seasons. 

Their  wealth  consists  principally  in  ponies,  and  these 
constitute  the  medium  of  exchange  in  all  transactions.  The 
Indian  and  his  pony  live  together,  and  there  seems  to  be 
a  mutual  affection,  although  the  master  is  unmercifully 
cruel.  He  will  ride  his  horse  up  and  down  hill  until  he 
falls,  then  force  him  up  and  ride  again,  and  when  he  falls 
to  rise  no  more,  will  complacently  sit  upon  him.  He  can 
ride  any  horse  twice  as  far  as  a  white  man  or  Mexican,  and 
can  sit  gracefully  on  horseback  when  he  is  so  drunk  that 
he  cannot  stand  up. 

An  Indian  always  mounts  on  or  dismounts  from  the  right 
side.  When  mounted,  his  seat  and  carriage  are  particularly 
ungraceful,  with  his  stirrups  very  short  and  his  heels  never 
ceasing  to  drum  on  his  horse's  ribs  with  a  nervous  but 
uniform  motion.  He  scarcely  moves  his  head  or  body  and, 
when  most  watchful  and  inquisitive,  appears  utterly  indif- 
ferent and  phlegmatic. 

He  carries  his  rifle  across  the  pommel,  holds  the  reins  in 
his  left  hand,  while  in  the  right  he  carries  a  short  stick,  to 
which  is  attached  a  thong  of  raw  hide,  a  light  blow  of 


222  Mountain  Scouting. 

which  marks  every  step  of  his  pony.  With*  his  horse  at 
full  speed,  he  will  perform  the  most  incredible  feats  of 
horsemanship. 

The  ponies  enable  the  savages  to  transport  their  families 
and  villages  wherever  their  nomadic  instincts  may  prompt, 
and  the  same  food  which  subsists  the  countless  herds  of 
buffaloes  answers  well  their  purposes. 

Indians  are  much  more  susceptible  to  cold  than  white 
men  ;  this,  together  with  the  fact  that  in  winter  the  ponies 
are  too  weak  and  poor  to  carry  them,  renders  them  at 
such  time  noticeably  helpless. 

It  is  an  interesting  sight  to  observe  an  Indian  family 
moving.  While  preparing  for  the  move  the  men  saunter 
about,  apparently  evincing  no  interest  in  the  matter,  and 
the  overburdened  women  hasten  to  and  fro,  take  down 
the  lodge-poles,  wrap  the  bundles,  load  the  ponies,  and 
finally  take  their  places  upon  the  most  dilapidated  and  in- 
significant specimens.  The  small  children  are  packed  in 
sacks  and  hung  upon  the  saddles.  Two  poles  are  attached 
to  the  shoulders  of  a  pony,  one  end  of  each  dragging  upon 
the  ground.  Frequently  the  poles  are  grouped  together 


and  dragged,  and  are  so  arranged  as  to  transport  a  hetero- 
geneous mass  of  plunder,  the  sick  and  helpless. 


Indian  Character.  223 

The  number  and  utility  of  the  Indian  dogs  are  astonish- 
ing ;  as  pack  animals,  they  are  called  into  frequent  requisi- 
tion. One  will  moodily  jog  along,  carrying  a  frying-pan 
on  one  side  and  a  howling  child  on  the  other,  while  an- 
other sulks  along  with  her  whining  puppies  and  a  quarter 
of  deer  on  her  back 

"  The  Indian  dog  has  erect,  triangular-shaped  ears,  a  sharp 
muzzle,  coarse  hair,  a  bushy  tail  and  a  wiry  frame.  He 
never  looks  you  in  the  face,  nor  wags  his  tail  in  an  honest 
manner,  but  sneaks  away  and  eyes  you  askance.  Being 
half  wolf,  he  is  an  arrant  robber  and  expert  thief,  endowed 
with  a  very  keen  nose  and  great  endurance. 

Time  and  space  are  not  considered  by  the  Indians,  and 
wherever  they  pitch  their  lodges  there  is  their  home.  In 
the  arrangement  of  their  villages,  the  lodge  of  the  chief  is 
placed  in  the  center  and  those  of  the  warriors  around  it, 
according  to  rank.  The  entrances  to  the  lodges  always 
face  the  rising  sun.  The  number  in  a  lodge  varies  from 
six  to  fifteen  persons  and  half  as  many  dogs.  Two  fight- 
ing men  for  each  lodge  or  teepee  is  a  fair  average.  The 
leading  events  and  achievements  of  their  lives  are  recorded 
on  their  lodges  by  a  rude  system  of  hieroglyphics. 

Should  the  bad  God  visit  them,  in  the  form  of  the  small- 
pox, cholera,  etc.,  they  will  desert  their  village,  and  nothing 
can  induce  them  to  return  to  the  place.  The  frame-work 
of  the  lodges,  left  standing  for  years  after,  will  furnish  the 
historical  account  of  the  unfortunate  tribe  that  once  camped 
there. 

At  home  or  abroad  the  domestic  drudgery  falls  on  the 
women,  the  men  having  their  full  share  of  labor  in  the 
chase  and  war. 

The  men  are  usually  tall  and  well  proportioned,  while 
the  women  are  of  low  stature  and  frequently  bent  with  the 
enormous  weight  of  their  burdens. 

While  the  warriors  have  boasting  spirits  with  little  or  no 
moral  restraint  imposed  upon  them,  and  a  fiendish  thirst 


224  Mountain  Scouting. 

for  blood;  the  women  will  frequently  show  devotion  and 
tenderness,  and  discourage  all  cruel  and  warlike  exploits. 
The  sooner  the  boys  throw  off  the  restraint  of  their  parents 
and  openly  rebel  against  the  fathers,  the  better  the  indica- 
tion that  they  will  become  great  warriors. 

In  their  villages  they  give  much  thought  to  amusement. 
Racing  is  a  frequent  pastime — whole  tribes  will  wager 
against  tribes,  in  the  midst  of  great  excitement.  ,  Story- 
telling is  quite  an  art  with  them,  the  stories  usually  per- 
petuating some  actual  achievement  and  inspiring  tribal 
pride.  They  frequently  exaggerate  and  tell  of  impossible 
things  with  an  air  of  earnest  simplicity. 

Gambling  is  their  greatest  vice.  They  are  at  it  day  and 
night,  and  soon  become  great  cheats  and  shrewd  players. 
The  stakes  are  frequently  high,  even  wives  and  children. 

They  manifest  a  strong  desire  for  whisky  and  will  bar- 
ter anything  in  their  possession  for  it. 

With  few  exceptions,  they  are  inveterate  beggars.  Their 
main  endeavor  is  to  get  a  great  deal  for  little  or  next 
to  nothing,  and  frequently  they  display  much  ingenuity 
in  making  a  single  article  serve  numerous  ends.  For  in- 
stance, in  making  a  tomahawk,  the  handle  is  formed  of 


young  ash,  the  pith  of  which  is  easily  burned  out  with  a 
heated  wire ;  which,  after  the  necessary  ornamentation, 
forms  a  most  satisfactory  pipe. 

The  food  of  Indians  varies  with  the  location,  and  well  do 
they  fulfill  the  declaration,  "  Every  creature  of  God  is  good, 
and  nothing  to  be  refused"  there  being  but  a  few  animals  re- 
jected in  consequence  of  their  superstition. 

When  food  is  plentiful  they  are  choice  in  their  selection  ; 
but  when  hungry,  they  will  eat  anything, — even  snakes  and 
carrion  birds. 


Indian   Character.  225 

Dogs  are  not  only  articles  of  diet  in  emergencies,  but  on 
occasions  of  ceremony  will  form  the  favorite  roasts  of  the 
savage  gourmands. 

Indians  have  no  regular  times  for  their  meals,  but  eat 
whenever  hungry,  if  they  have  food.  The  men,  women 
and  children  seldom  eat  together.  They  never  refuse  to 
share  their  food  with  hungry  visitors,  and  have  contempt 
for  anyone  who  eats  alone  or  saves  anything  for  the  mor- 
row. 

Skewers  of  green  sticks,  serve  for  cooking  purposes,  while 
their  roasting  is  done  by  embalming  the  meat  in  a  coating 
of  clay  or  mud. 

Very  few  Indians  are  cannibals,  and  these  eat  their  ene- 
mies only  in  order  to  justify  their  savage  revenge. 

Among  the  Indians,  marriage  is  simple  and  has  no  re- 
sponsibility except  that  inspired  by  terror.  Ponies  are  given 
to  the  bride's  father,  who  gives  other  presents  in  return. 
Captured  squaws  are  always  sold  in  marriage.  The  women 
are  permitted  to  marry  when  12  years  of  age  or  older — 
the  men  whenever  they  are  able  to  support  their  wives. 

There  is   no  visible   love-making,  and  love  in  man  is   fre- 
quently regarded  as  the  greatest  of  weaknesses.    The  great 
desire  of  the  faithful  wife  is  to  do  all  the  work  and  have  her 
husband  do  nothing. 

Polygamy  is  common  among  them,  and  the  women  fre- 
quently elope.  When  this  is  the  case,  the  injured  husband 
is  always  paid  a  few  ponies. 

The  favorite  burying  place  of  many  Indians  is  in  a  tree. 
The  selection  of  the  tree,  when  a  chief  or  noted  warrior 
dies,  is  an  occasion  of  great  ceremony.  The  tree  must  be 
sound,  in  a  well  sheltered  locality  and  out  of  the  way  of 
animals.  If  practicable,  the  body  is  left  in  a  sitting  pos- 
ture, with  everything  likely  to  be  needed  in  the  *  Happy 
Hunting  Ground  '  placed  within  easy  reach.  All  scalps, 
taken  by  the  dead  man,  are  hung  about  the  body. 


226 


Mountain  Scouting. 


Fierce  yells  and  whoops,  half  nasal  and  guttural  sounds, 
patting  the  feet,  unseemly  contortions  of  the  body  and  ex- 
aggerated performances  in  imaginary  struggles  with  the  bad 
God,  are  the  fitting  ceremonies  of  the  occasion. 

After  the  burial,  no  farther  attention  is  paid  to  the  body 
or  the  grave. 


In  many  tribes,  upon  the  death  of  a  mother,  the  infant  is 
also  interred,  rather  than  suffer  its  incumbrance  in  the  vil- 
lage. I  have  recently  read  the  following  account  ; — 
The  mother  suddenly  died;  whereupon,  the  infant  child  was 
placed  in  the  arms  of  its  dead  mother,  wrapped  in  a  buffalo 
robe  and  placed  in  the  tree  selected  for  the  grave.  Its  cries 
were  heard  for  several  days,  then  grew  fainter  and  were 
finally  hushed  in  the  embrace  of  death,  with  the  cold  wind 
sounding  its  requiem  and  hungry  wolves  howling  round 
about — a  fitting  dirge  for  so  sad  a  fate. 

A  thorough  understanding  of  Indian  nature  is  essential 
in  order  to  elicit  from  him  any  valuable  information. 
Above  all  things  he  must  not  be  hurried.  When  he  be- 
comes overburdened  with  a  succession  of  ideas  and  his 
train  of  thought  is  disturbed,  he  will  invariably  lie  in  order 
to  free  himself  of  the  confusion. 


Indian   Character.  227 

He  must  be  permitted  to  minutely  and  tedious  y  tell  his 
story — how  many  ' suns'  he  traveled,  how  long  he  waited 
when  the  '  sun  was  so ' — whether  he  traveled  this  or  that 
'way -hut'  (trail),  where  he  had  his  '  muck-a-muck '  (food), 
how  he  crossed  the  '  hyas-chuck  '  (river),  etc.  When  possi- 
ble, let  him  trace  the  map  on  the  ground.  It  is  frequently 
necessary  to  put  the  questions  in  an  indirect  manner,  in 
order  to  avoid  his  usual  reply,  'wake  cum-tux  (don't  know). 

In  dealing  with  Indians,  it  will  be  well  to  observe  the  fol- 
lowing:— 

Do  not  trouble  about  dignity;  humor  them  as  you  would 
children  ;  and  be  patient,  neither  displaying  temper  nor 
noticing  insults. 

Never  promise  nor  threaten  to  do  a  thing  without  doing  it. 

They  are  safe  neighbors  while  you  assume  a  bold  and 
self-confident  bearing.  Symptoms  of  timidity  or  indecis- 
ion convert  them  into  insidious  and  dangerous  enemies. 

Never  appear  to  be  afraid  of  anything;  they  soon  notice 
fear  or  weakness,  and  as  soon  lose  all  respect.  They  resort 
to  all  kinds  of  tricks  in  order  to  test  bravery. 

Endeavor  to  accomplish  every  thing  by  presents  and  per- 
suasion, never  by  force.  For  conciliatory  purposes,  make 
the  presents  to  the  head  people  and  always  take  their 
wants  into  consideration. 

Give  them  food  whenever  they  desire  it,  if  it  can  be  spared. 

An  Indian  is  seldom  satisfied  with  the  bargain  agreed 
upon,  and  it  will  be  well  to  strike  it  low,  with  a  view  to- 
raising  afterward. 

You  can  frequently  trust  to  the  honor  of  Indians,  but 
seldom  to  their  honesty. 

Nothing  pleases  them  more  than  to  have  those  among 
them  follow  their  customs. 


228  Mountain  Scouting 


CHAPTER  XV 

THE    TRAIL,    SIGNS    AND    SIGNALS. 

THE  difficult  art  of  trailing  or  tracking  is  of  great  import- 
ance in  Indian  warfare. 

While  it  is  impossible  for  most  white  men  to  acquire  this 
faculty,  the  constant  exercise  of  the  bump  of  locality  through 
successive  generations  and  the  thorough  investigation  of 
every  '  sign/  have  rendered  all  savages  sure  guides  over 
boundless  prairies  and  through  pathless  forests. 

A  '  trail '  is  made  up  of  various  'signs'  or  evidences 
that  something  has  been  present.  All  marks  left  on  the 
ground,  rocks,  grass,  trees  or  brush — the  form,  size,  stride 
and  directions  of  footprints  and  the  firmness  of  impres- 
sion, should  be  carefully  noted.  It  should  be  made  an  in- 
variable rule,  when  halting  or  camping,  to  make  a  recon- 
naissance of  the  ground  in  the  neighborhood,  with  a  view  to 
ascertaining  if  any  living  thing  is  near  or  has  lately  passed. 

The  footprints  of  animals,  their  gait  and  direction, 
whether  slowly  walking  (as  in  the  act  of  feeding)  or  run- 
ning (as  when  frightened),  are  all  significant  '  signs.' 

Much  valuable  information  may  be  obtained  by  carefully 
observing  'signs';  but  to  follow  a  trail  successfully,  one 
must  not  only  possess  a  thorough  understanding  of  all 
'signs,'  but  also  a  knowledge  of  the  character  and  habits 
of  the  thing  trailed,  the  general  features  of  the  country 
round  about,  and  the  powers  of  the  eye  and  ear  must  be 
cultivated  to  a  great  degree  of  acuteness. 


The   Trail,  Signs  and  Signals.  229 

The  Indian  well  knows  that  the  '  trail '  is  his  principal 
weakness,  and  is  never  at  a  loss  to  resort  to  some  ruse  tc 
complicate  it,  such  as  traveling  over  rocks  and  along  the 
channels,  of  streams,  etc.  He  seldom  thinks  of  danger 
ahead,  but  always  keeps  a  proper  rear  guard  in  position, 
and  strongly  fortifies  his  camp  toward  the  rear. 

When  closely  pursued,  a  party  of  Indians  will  scatter  and 
travel  singly  or  in  small  detachments;  and  usually  when  the 
pursuers  follow  a  single  detachment,  it  will  travel  over  the 
roughest  and  almost  impracticable  country,  and  make  a  de- 
tour of  many  miles. 

When  the  *  trail '  is  leading  toward  some  pass,  saddle  or 
low  ridge  or  well  defined  landmark  and  suddenly  becomes 
indistinct,  it  is  generally  safe  not  to  expend  time  in  hunting 
it;  but  to  push  rapidly  on  to  the  pass,  etc.,  where  the  '  trail ' 
will  in  all  probability  be  found  again.  Before  scattering,  a 
point  for  concentrating  is  generally  agreed  upon. 

When  traveling  over  an  unknown  country,  the  Indian  is 
guided  by  his  nomadic  instinct  and  the  information  re- 
ceived from  those  who  have  visited  the  section  before.  This 
fund  of  knowledge  is  very  great.  One  of  my  Indian  scouts 
(Chuck)  in  1880,  became  quite  noted  for  the  accuracy  with 
which  he  could  designate  suitable  camps  and  various  phys- 
ical features  of  the  country,  relying  entirely  upon  the  in- 
formation received  from  his  father,  who  hunted  in  the  same 
localities  many  years  ago. 

Traveling  Indians  usually  set  up  mounds  of  stones  to  in- 
dicate the  route  and  various  other  items  of  information,  to 
those  who  may  follow.  In  a  timbered  country,  where  the 
*  trail '  is  frequently  covered  with  snow,  the  stones  are 
placed  in  the  forks  and  branches  of  the  trees;  or,  the  trees 
are  blazed  so  that  the  notches  face  the  traveler  and  at  least 
two  of  them  may  be  in  sight  at  once. 

The  Indian  seldom  refers  to  the  sun,  moon  or  stars  foi 
his  direction  when  traveling  ;  but  places  his  confidence  ii 


230  Mountain  Scouting, 

something  nearer  at  hand,  which  he  believes  to  remain  in 
the  same  place  and  which  he  thoroughly  comprehends. 

The  trailer  should  not  allow  anything  deviating  from  the 
common  i.  rder  of  things  to  escape  a  rigid  investigation.  A 
close  scrutiny  will  generally  reveal  both  the  plan  and  pur- 
pose of  every  active  living  creature.  While  keenly  alive  to 
all  sounds,  he  should  be  able  to  unmistakably  recognize  the 
most  ordinary,  such  as  the  croaking  of  frogs,  the  barking 
of  coyotes,  the  hooting  of  owls,  the  cry  of  panthers  or  wolv- 
erines, the  screaming  of  hawks  and  eagles  the  creaking  of 
limbs,  etc. 

When  trailing  Indians,  it  is  often  important  to  know  the 
especial  customs  of  the  various  tribes.  With  this  knowl- 
edge, the  examination  of  the  deserted  camps,  halting  and 
resting  places  will  invariably  reveal  the  identity  of  the 
tribe  once  there  ;  the  fashion  of  fire-making,  the  style,  cut 
and  finish  of  the  moccasin,  the  form  of  lodge,  etc.,  are  all 
unmistakable  evidences. 

This  information  is  very  useful  when  hostile  and  friendly 
Indians  occupy  the  same  country,  and  it  is  necessary  to  be 
able  to  distinguish  between  their  trails. 

Various  circumstances  connected  with  the  '  trail '  will 
afford  important  imformation. 

Indians,  when  walking,  point  the  toes  inward,  whether 
in  moccasins  or  other  gear.  Many  white  men,  in  the  Indian 
country,  wear  moccasins,  but  they  leave  a  track  with  the 
toes  turned  outward.  The  various  patterns  of  boots  and 
shoes  leave  their  distinctive  tracks,  and  the  particular  way 
in  which  a  boot  or  shoe  has  been  pegged  or  repaired  will 
enable  an  astute  trailer  to  follow  its  print  among  hundreds 
of  others.  A  careful  notice  of  the  form  and  depth  of  the 
impressions  will  generally  indicate  whether  the  person  car- 
ried a  burden  or  not ;  whether  traveling  at  will  or  in 
haste  ;  whether  sober  or  intoxicated. 

The  age  of  the  track  may  be  determined  in  various  ways. 


The  Trail,  Signs  and  Signals.  231 

If  rain  has  fallen,  it  may  be  seen  whether  the  tracks  were 
made  before,  during  or  after  it,  by  carefully  noticing  the 
grass,  etc.,  trodden  down,  and  observing  whether  or  not 
sand  or  anything  adheres  to  it.  The  morning  or  evening 
dew  updn  the  'trail'  will  also  furnish  a  test  of  time. 

The  position  of  the  grass,  the  sand,  dust  etc.,  drifted 
from  or  upon  the  track  will  serve  to  determine  its  age 
relative  to  the  blowing  of  the  wind,  or  its  sudden  change  of 
direction. 

Should  there  be  several  tracks,  and  the  time  when  one 
was  made  be  known,  the  ages  of  the  others  may  be  deter- 
mined by  noticing  where  they  cross  and  observing  which 
overlies  the  others. 

When  the  '  trail '  becomes  lost  in  an  unfavorable  locality,  it 
is  best  not  to  consume  time  in  hunting  it,  but  to  proceed  in 
the  probable  direction  until  a  favorable  ground  is  found, 
and  then  hunt  it. 

In  a  grassy  locality,  or  on  plains  of  coarse  sand  or  shin- 
gle, the  '  trail '  is  seldom  visible  at  short  distance,  but  may 
be  noticed  by  looking  out  well  ahead. 

In  a  rocky  country,  or  where  the  ground  is  very  hard, 
when  it  is  desirable  to  ascertain  the  track  of  a  prowling 
enemy  or  animal,  the  Indians  usually  sprinkle  sand  (if  ob- 
tainable) over  the  trails  in  suitable  places.  This  is  an  old 
trick,  for  it  is  said  in  the  Apocrypha  that  the  prophet 
Daniel  did  this  when  he  wished  to  ascertain  who  it  was  that 
nightly  consumed  the  meat  which  was  placed  before  the 
idol  of  Bel. 

While  encamped  near  the  Payette  river,  in  a  point  of 
rocks,  it  was  observed  that  night-prowling  animals  visited 
my  camp,  much  to  the  annoyance  of  the  men,  and  at  the 
expense  of  unguarded  supplies.  One  of  the  Indians  se- 
cured a  quantity  of  sand  from  the  river  bottom,  dried  it, 
and  judiciously  placed  it  around  the  camp.  The  unmis- 
takable tracks  of  a  bear,  two  coyotes,  a  weasel  and  several 
skunks  were  observed  the  next  morning. 


232  Mountain  Scouting. 

Frequently,  when  the  ground  is  very  hard  or  rocky,  a 
close  examination  will  reveal  'sign,'  in  the  shape  of  stones 
or  pebbles  turned  so  as  to  lie  with  that  side  up,  which  has 
formerly  rested  on  the  ground.  In  such  places,  flakes  of 
foam,  fragments  dropped  from  the  animal's  mouth,  or 
minute  blood  specks  (when  trailing  the  wounded)  are  great 
helps.  A  bare-footed  person,  when  passing  over  hard  rocks, 
will  leave  a  *  sign,'  in  the  shape  of  fine  dust  caked  by 
perspiration. 

If  there  be  marks  of  lodge  poles  upon  an  Indian  trail, 
they  may  be  regarded  as  a  peaceful  indication,  and  showing 
that  the  Indians  passed  with  their  families,  lodge  material 
and  effects  :  if  there  be  no  such  traces  on  the  trail,  it  is  an 
equally  good  sign  that  a  war  or  hunting  party  passed,  as 
they  always  leave  such  impedimenta  in  a  place  of  safety. 

It  might  be  desirable  to  ascertain  whether  or  not  some 
members  of  an  escaping  party  of  Indians  are  women  :  this 
may  be  frequently  determined  by  following  the  trail 
until  a  place  is  found  where  they  have  stopped  to  rest  and 
smoke.  The  men  sit  cross-legged,  and  when  sitting  down 
cross  their  feet  (locked  closely  together)  and  slowly  lower 
their  bodies  to  the  sitting  posture.  The  women  sit  with 
both  feet  and  lower  legs  turned  under,  either  to  the  right 
or  left. 

Horse  or  pony  tracks  may  be  followed  over  any  ( trail'; 
but  it  is  often  difficult  to  follow  them  over  rocks  or  very 
hard  ground.  When  they  pass  over  grass  without  trodding 
it  down,  the  *  trail'  is  shown  by  the  grass  assuming  a  differ- 
ent shade  of  color  from  that  about  it. 

The  appearance  of  horse  or  pon}^  tracks  is  very  different 
at  a  walk,  trot  and  gallop.  The  Indian  pony  is  seldom  or 


The   Trail,  Signs  and  Signals.  233 

never  shod,  and  the  distance  between  his  tracks  (walking)  is 
about  2  feet  and  10  inches.  The  track  may  be  readily  dis- 
tinguished from  that  of  the  American  horse  (larger  and 
generally  shod),  or  that  of  the  mule  (about  the  same  size, 
but  narrower  and  more  angular). 

When  the  pony  trots,  the  tracks  are  from   6£  to  7^  feet 


6_'j2.,_T 0.7/2.  FT. 

apart,  the  impressions  less  distinct  and  more  irregular. 
In  the  gallop,  they  are  from  8  to  9  feet  apart,  and  unless 


8   TO    9..FT. 


the  ground  is  very  hard,  there  are  no  distinct  impressions, 
but  a  mere  disturbance  of  the  earth. 

A  careful  study  of  the  impression  left  on  the  ground  will 
serve  to  determine  the  pace  at  which  the  animal  was  mov- 
ing. A  walking  or  feeding  horse  should  leave  a  well  marked 
track,  and  a  sudden  scattering  of  earth,  sand  or  gravel 
would  indicate  fright  and  an  increased  pace. 

A  knowledge  of  the  movements  of  the  pony,  will  fre- 
quently give  valuable  information  regarding  the  rider — 
whether  he  is  moving  leisurely  and  is  subject  to  surprise, 
or  whether  he  has  discovered  his  pursuers  and  is  moving 
rapidly  on  in  order  to  avoid  a  conflict. 

To  determine  whether  the  horses  have  riders  or  are  run- 
ning loose,  follow  the  trail  until  ordure  is  found  :  when 
scattered  along  the  '  trail,'  it  is  a  sure  sign  that  the  animal 
was  ridden  and  not  permitted  to  stop.  An  equally  good 
test,  is  to  follow  the  '  trail '  into  a  woods  and  observe 


234  Mountain  Scouting. 

• 

whether  or  not  it  lies  under  any  branches  of  the  trees  too 
low  to  permit  the  easy  passage  of  a  mounted  man  beneath 
them. 

An  Indian  rider  always  mounts  on  and  dismounts  from 
the  right  side,  and  by  noticing  the  places  where  the  mounts 
and  dismounts  are  made,  it  may  be  ascertained  whether  the 
rider  is  an  Indian  or  a  white  man. 

The  moisture  where  the  earth  is  removed  and  the  drop- 
pings along  the  '  trail '  are  good  indications  of  the  age  of 
the  tracks.  Where  water  has  been  crossed,  the  ground  will, 
for  some  distance  beyond,  be  wet,  and  show  where  drops  of 
water  have  fallen  from  the  animal's  body  or  legs  or  where 
it  has  been  splashed  while  in  the  act  of  crossing. 

Tracks  on  snow  may  be  followed  with  great  rapidity,  but 
it  is  frequently  difficult  to  distinguish  between  those  left 
by  different  animals. 

The  mode  of  shoeing,  any  defects  in  the  hoofs  or  shoes, 
and  whether  shod  all  around,  on  the  fore  feet  only,  or  not 
at  all,  should  be  carefully  noted,  as  such  items  are  sure  to 
furnish  valuable  information  at  some  time  or  another. 

Much  may  be  learned  of  the  Indian's  condition  by  care- 
fully observing  the  nature  of  his  *  trail '  and  camping 
places.  Should  abandoned  property  or  comparatively 
valueless  articles  be  left  along  the  '  trail,'  and  should 
there  be  indications  of  disorder  generally,  it  is  evident 
that  he  has  experienced  demoralization. 

To  show  to  what  skill  a  trailer  may  attain  by  constant 
and  careful  practice,  I  will  briefly  mention  a  few  of  the  ex- 
ploits of  my  chief  of  Umatilla  scouts — Shaplish. 

Being  once  in  rapid  pursuit  of  a  few  Indians  who  had 
murdered  the  owner  of  a  ranch,  on  the  south  fork  of  the 
Salmon,  in  Idaho,  and  having  followed  them  about  forty 
miles,  apparently  gaining  all  the  while,  Shaplish  suddenly 
informed  me,  "  No  catch  him — hiyu  run — no  sun  /",  meaning 
that  we  were  discovered,  and  that  the  Indians  were  travel- 


The   Trail,  Signs  and  Signals.  235 

ing  at  night.  He  pointed  out  to  me  where  they  had  gone 
under  low  branches  of  trees,  which  might  have  been  readily 
avoided,  and  also  where  they  had  crossed  rocks  and  ravines 
at  bad  places,  when  good  crossings  might  have  been  se- 
lected very  close  by,  if  there  had  been  sufficient  light  for 
the  purpose  of  picking  the  trail. 

Onre,  while  hunting  on  the  upper  Clearwater  river  and 
ignorant  of  the  location  of  the  renegade  Bannock  Indians, 
Shaplish  became  very  much  exercised,  fearing  that  a  hostile 
war  party  might  find  his  '  trail'  and  attack  in  the  rear. 
After  a  brief  consultation  with  the  other  members  of  his 
party,  he  dismounted,  cut  open  his  shoes;  and,  putting 
them  on  with  the  heels  foremost,  walked,  thus  equipped, 
in  the  rear  of  all,  a  distance  of  eight  or  ten  miles.  The 
ruse  was  a  perfect  success,  for  that  very  day  a  hunting  party 
came  close  in  rear  ;  but,  seeing  the  track  of  what  they  sup- 
posed a  single  man  going  away  from  the  party,  they  put 
their  ponies  about  and  at  full  speed  started  off,  hoping  to 
overtake  him,  preferring  to  make  a  sure  success  of  captur- 
ing one  rather  than  risk  an  attack  upon  the  entire  party. 

Wishing  to  scout  in  two  directions,  I  once  sent  out  two 
detachments  of  ten  men  each. 

They  started  from  camp  together,  followed  the  same 
'  trail '  for  about  2\  miles,  and  then  separated — one  party 
going  to  the  right,  the  other  to  the  left.  Having  occasion 
to  communicate  with  the  commander  of  one  detachment,  I 
started  Shaplish  after  him.  It  was  plain  sailing  until  he 
came  to  the  diverging  '  trails.'  For  a  while  he  was  puzzled 
to  tell  which  detachment  had  gone  to  the  right. 

He  soon  selected  the -tracks  on  each  'trail'  made  by  the 
men  in  advance  (presumably  those  of  the  commanders); 
and,  with  a  positive  assurance,  informed  me  that  the  route 
on  the  left  had  been  taken  by  the  party  wanted. 

When  I  asked  his  reason  for  so  thinking,  he  showed  me 
that-  the  distance  between  the  impressions  on  the  left 


236  Mountain  Scouting. 

1  trail '  was  wide,  and  the  deepest  parts  of  the  tracks  were 
formed  by  the  toes — all  of  which  denoted  the  elasticity  of 
youth,  for  which  the  man  in  question  was  much  noted,  in 
comparison  with  the  commander  of  the  other  detachment. 

Shaplish  followed  his  selected  *  trail '  about  ten  miles, 
when  his  figuring  proved  correct. 

Many  other  instances  might  be  cited  to  show  to  what 
perfection  the  art  of  trailing  may  be  carried. 

By  closely  observing  the  movements  and  actions  of  an- 
imals a  great  deal  of  valuable  information  may  be  obtained. 
Should  wild  ducks  be  observed  to  swim  down  stream  toward 
you,  it  is  a  sure  sign  that  some  form  of  man  is  approaching 
and  has  already  been  observed  by  the  ducks. 

If  there  be  a  mule  with  the  party,  it  will  be  well  worth 
the  while  to  carefully  watch  his  actions.  If  he  stubbornly 
seeks  a  certain  direction,  with  his  head  high  and  ears 
thrown  forward,  and  seems  much  engaged,  something  is 
surely  approaching  ;  it  may  only  be  a  bear  or  some  smaller 
animal,  but  it  will  be  well  to  be  on  the  alert  until  the  cause 
of  the  trouble  is  known. 

All  the  Indians  understand  the  sign  language,  consisting 
of  some  words  of  French  and  Spanish  extraction,  a  few 
English  words,  such  as  '  how '  (how  do)  and  '  by '  (good- 
bye), and  a  complete  pantomimic  vocabulary. 

It  is  a  custom  with  most  Indians  to  run  their  ponies  when 
approaching  either  friends  or  enemies,  and  unless  their 
status  is  known  they  should  be  halted  in  due  time.  This 
is  done  by  raising  the  right  hand  back,  to  the  rear,  and 
waving  it  forward  and  backward. 

'  Who  are  you  ?  '  is  signalled  by  waving  the  right  hand  to 
the  right  and  left  several  times  in  quick  succession;  '  We  are 
friends,'  by  raising  both  hands  and  grasping  the  left  with  the 
right,  as  in  shaking  hands  ;  '  We  are  enemies?  by  closing  the 
right  hand  and  placing  it  against  the  forehead,  or  by  waving 
a  blanket  (usually  red)  in  the  air.  To  say  by  signs  'that 


The   Trail,    Signs  and  Signals.  237 

after  a  certain  journey  a  good  u.mp  will  be  found,  and  that  game 
may  be  found  along  the  road'  first  indicate  the  course  of  the 
sim,  from  its  rising  to  the  point  at  which  it  will  appear  on 
reaching  the  camp;  then  straddle  one  finger  of  the  left 
hand  with  two  fingers  of  the  right,  trotting  them  in  imita- 
tion of  the  motions  of  pony  and  rider  ;  then  act  as  though 
halting,  dismounting  and  firing;  then  remount  and  proceed 
on  the  way  ;  finally  stop,  bow  the  head,  rest  it  on  the  hand 
and  close  the  eyes  in  imitation  of  sleep. 

To  intimate  that  'such  a  one  is  dead?  place  one  hand  over 
the  other  and  then  quickly  slip  it  beneath  (gone  under)  ; 
that  ''such  ones  are  husband  and  wife  J  point  to  each  and  place 
the  forefingers  in  contact  throughout  (meaning  one)  ;  that 
'  such  ones  are  brothers  and  sisters}  point  to  each  and  place 
two  fingers  in  the  mouth  (meaning  nourished  at  the  same 
breast)  ;  that  '  such  ones  are  good  friends,'  point  them  out  and 
fold  the  arms  over  the  breast,  etc. 

The  various  tribes  are  indicated  by  making  the  represen- 
tation of  some  totem  peculiar  to  each. 

The  Comanches,  or  '  Snakes,'  by  a  gliding  motion,  like  a 
crawling  snake. 

The  Crows,  by  imitating  the  flapping  of  wings 

The  Sioux,  or  *  Cut-throats,'  by  drawing  the  hand  across 
the  throat. 

The  Kiowas,  or  *  Prairie  Men,'  by  imitating  the  drinking 
of  water. 

The  Pawnees,  or  *  Wolves,'  by  placing  the  hands  at  the 
sides  of  the  head,  like  the  ears  of  a  wolf. 

The  Arapahocs,  or  '  Smellers,'  by  laying  hold  of  the  nose. 

The  Utes,  or  '  Dwellers  Among  the  Mountain  Tops,'  by 
pointing  upward. 

The  Cheyennes,  or  'Cut  Arms,'  by  drawing  the  hand 
across  the  arm,  etc. 

The  Indians  have  a  system  of  signaling  by  means  of 
smokes  during  the  day,  and  fires  at  night.  The  color 


238  Mountain  Scouting. 

(light  or  heavy),  the  volume  (thin  or  dense),  and  the  vary- 
ing brilliancy  of  flame,  are  all  significant  signals.  Every 
tribe  jealously  guards  the  secrets  of  its  code  of  signals. 

Smokes  may  be  raised  several  hundred  feet  in  a  vertical 
column  by  making  a  fire  without  much  blaze  and  piling  on 
green  boughs,  grass  and  weeds.  By  confining  the  smoke 
and  permitting  it  to  escape  at  intervals,  puffs  may  be  sent 
up  at  will. 

Owing  to  the  very  clear  mountain  air,  the  elevated 
*  buttes '  and  mountain  ridges  may  be  seen  at  a  great  dis- 
tance, and  may  serve  the  purpose  of  signal  stations. 

The  Indian  alphabet  is  very  similar  to  ours,  being  made 
up  of  long  and  short  lines.  By  spreading  a  blanket  over 
the  column  of  smoke  and  quickly  displacing  it,  the  length 
or  shortness  of  the  columns,  as  well  as  their  frequency,  may 
be  regulated. 

This  system  of  telegraphing,  so  successfully  pursued  by 
the  Indians  when  separated  and  preparing  for  a  flight  or 
defense,  might  be  used  to  good  advantage  by  co-operating 
columns  of  troops,  the  commanding  officers  having  previ- 
ously fixed  upon  some  simple  system  of  signals,  such  as  the 
combination  of  the  numbers  of  smokes  and  the  intervals  (in 
time)  between  them. 


Skirmishing*  239 


CHAPTER   XVI. 

SKIRMISHING. 

STRATEGY  loses  its  advantages  against  an  enemy  who 
accepts  few  or  none  of  the  conventionalities  of  civilized  war- 
fare. The  Indian  is  present  one  day  and  when  next  heard 
from  is  marauding  in  another  state  or  territory;  and  oft- 
ener  still,  when  supposed  to  be  many  miles  distant,  he  is 
in  ambush  almost  within  range.  He  is  like  the  flea,  e  put 
your  finger  on  him  and  he  is  not  there.'  Living  off  the 
country,  without  impediments  of  any  description,  and  with 
no  lines  of  retreat  to  cover,  he  is  enabled  to  withhold  him- 
self from  combat,  unless  he  finds  himself  very  superior  in 
number  and  position. 

That  portion  of  our  little  army  scattered  over  the  vast 
Western  Frontier  is  unable  to  strike  such  an  enemy  an  of- 
fensive blow,  and  the  prudence  and  efficiency  of  our  com- 
manding officers  are  frequently  taxed  to  the  extreme,  when 
endeavoring  to  preserve  the  morale  of  the  troops  by  acting 
even  on  the  defensive. 

While  success  is  sure  and  good  fortune  is  with  the  Indian, 
foremost  in  the  attack  is  the  post  of  fame;  but  when  he  fails 
in  battle,  or  when  fortune  turns  against  him,  rather  than 
pay  the  forfeit  of  indiscretion  he  will  abandon  an  attack  or 
pursuit,  and  trust  to  the  speed  of  his  pony  for  escape;  or,  as 
a  last  resort,  will  abandon  his  horse  and  baggage  and  take 
to  the  rocks  or  timber  on  foot.  Promptest  action  is  then 
the  only  safeguard  against  his  escape. 


240  Mcuntain  Scouting. 

He  exhibits  marvelous  abilities  in  horsemanship.  When 
fighting  upon  an  open  prairie  he  will  frequently  cast  him- 
self on  the  opposite  side  of  his  pony,  until  a  foot  on  the 
back  and  a  face  under  the  neck  of  the  pony  are  all  that  can 
be  seen,  and  will  fire  with  great  accuracy  either  above  or 
under  him  while  at  full  speed.  Any  obstacle  to  the  pony  is 
a  serious  obstacle  to  the  warrior. 

When  advancing  to  the  attack,  he  invariably  annoys  the 
flanks;  and  when  on  the  most  unfavorable  ground  will  man- 
age in  some  manner  to  perform  a  flank  movement,  seeming 
to  thoroughly  understand  the  moral  effect  consequent  on 
having  the  flanks  even  slightly  pressed. 

He  is  very  quick  to  secure  the  nearest  commanding  cov- 
ered position,  and  in  a  lesser  time  will  have  made  himself 
well  acquainted  with  the  ground — its  contour,  its  relief,  its 
peculiarities  of  slope  and  its  successive  rises.  Having  the 
heights,  he  well  understands  the  necessity  of  taking  posi- 
tion very  near  the  military  crest;  and,  by  placing  himself 
close  to  the  ground,  will,  while  unobserved,  watch  every 
movement  of  the  enemy,  and  at  the  most  opportune  mo- 
ment will  open  a  deadly  fire. 

The  drawing  shows  how  the  defender  (who,  while  stand- 


ing near  the  military  crest,  uncovers  only  his  shoulders  and 


Skirmishing.  241 

observes  the  whole  body  of  the  assailant  as  he  climbs  the 
ascent)  will,  on  receding  from  the  crest,  place  himself  be- 
low the  prolongation  of  the  slope  and  lose  sight  of  his 
climbing  adversary.  At  the  same  time,  he  will  receive  the 
enemy's  grazing  fire  as  the  latter  ascends  to  the  crest. 

It  is  an  excellent  rule  "  to  make  haste  slowly  "  in  surpris- 
ing or  attacking  Indians.  A  stampeded  Indian  cannot 
fight,  but  it  is  next  to  impossible  to  surprise  or  stampede 
him.  When  he  makes  a  stand  and  has  not  the  advantages 
of  position  and  number,  it  is  only  in  order  that  he  may 
practice  his  favorite  ruse  de  guerre, — displaying  a  feeble, 
venturesome  force  in  the  expectation  of  tempting  pursuit; 
and,  after  having  drawn  the  pursuers  well  away  from 
the  main  force,  surrounding  and  destroying  them  with  over- 
whelming numbers,  previously  concealed  in  ambush. 

Whenever  he  is  surprised,  his  first  impulse  is  to  run,  but 
he  never  fails  to  take  his  arms  with  him  and  make  for  the 
nearest  cover, — timber,  rocks  or  holes  in  the  ground.  When 
once  repulsed,  a  quick  and  vigorous  pursuit  will  lead  to 
success. 

When  pursued,  he  evinces  a  reckless  desire  to  save  him- 
self, without  consideration  of  friends  or  property,  and 
every  instinct  but  that  of  fear  seems  lost.  Frequently, 
when  flight  is  impeded,  old  men  are  abandoned  and  the 
mothers  will  even  abandon  their  infants. 

While  pursued,  they  adopt  various  measures  to  mislead 
those  following,  frequently  breaking  into  as  many  detach- 
ments as  there  are  lodges  in  the  tribe,  each  party  taking  a 
different  direction,  having  fixed  upon  the  general  direction 
and  the  place  of  reuniting. 

At  no  time  are  Indians  so  helpless  to  make  resistance  as 
while  moving  their  families  and  camps.  At  the  first  alarm, 
the  squaws  and  old  men  will  desert  their  charges  and  the 
whole  movement  terminate  in  a  very  disorderly  stampede. 

When  following  fleeing  Indians,  trusty  scouts  should  re- 


242  Mountain  Scouting. 

connoitre  the  trail  some  distance  in  advance,  and  carefully 
examine  all  rocks,  woods  and  undulations  of  the  ground. 
Every  precaution  should  be  taken  to  avoid  being  surprised 
by  the  Indian  rearguard,  usually  concealed  from  view,  but 
watching,  with  a  keen  vigilance,  the  most  favorable  oppor- 
tunity to  strike  the  pursuers  a  telling  blow. 

Above  all  things,  a  surprise  is  to  be  avoided;  for  experi- 
ence shows  that  soldiers  once  surprised  or  stampeded  by 
Indians  are  no  longer  suitable  for  work  in  the  Indian 
country. 

When  the  trail  is  very  *  warm  '  and  the  country  is  un- 
known, the  best  and  safest  plan  is  to  make  night  marches 
and  daybreak  surprises.  The  Indian  is  least  prepared  to 
resist  an  attack  made  during  that  uncertain  period  between 
darkness  and  daylight.  * 

When  endeavoring  to  make  a  surprise,  and  near  the 
enemy,  every  effort  must  be  made  to  avoid  all  noise.  All 
communicating  should  be  done  by  means  of  signals;  and 
should  a  sentinel  or  picket  be  discovered,  he  must,  if  pos- 
r,ible,  be  captured  or  shot. 

If  the  surprise  should  prove  a  failure,  a  careful  retreat 
must  be  made  to  the  nearest  cover  ;  it  is  a  fatal  mistake  to 
run  away,  as  the  Indians  are  thereby  emboldened,  and  the 
running  men  are  easily  stampeded  and  caused  to  lose  their 
presence  of  mind. 

An  untenable  position  is  best  abandoned  during  the 
night,  as  the  Indian  is,  through  superstition,  very  timid  in 
darkness. 

The  commanding  officer,  in  a  hostile  country,  should 
always  notice  the  good  positions,  and  should  he  be  surprised 
or  repulsed  when  there  are  none  in  sight,  he  might  frequent- 
ly retreat  to  that  last  seen,  with  all  well  in  hand. 

In  the  absence  of  rocks,  timber  and  high  ground,  even 
the  slightest  irregularities  in  the  ground  will  often  afford 
good  cover.  As  a  last  resort,  the  mules  and  horses  may 


Skirmishing. 


243 


be  thrown  to  the  ground,  with  their  legs  tied  together,  or 
may  be  shot  and  used  as  a  breastwork  when  there  is  but 
little  time  for  preparation.  An  Indian  dislikes,  above  all 
things,  to  attack  a  foe  holding  a  defensive  position  of  any 
kind,  and  is  very  cautious,  and  even  cowardly,  in  his 
advances. 

While  of  a  very  inferior  order  as  regards  discipline,  and 
the  courage  that  necessarily  goes  with  it,  he  is  at  the 
same  time  very  superior  to  all  his  foes  in  cunning  and 
patience. 

When  the  ground  is  undulating,  rocky  or  woody,  it  is 
easy  to  avoid  the  enemy's  sight  and  fire  ;  but,  when  it  is 
bare  and  level,  the  art  of  constructing  cover  is  of  first  im- 
portance. The  history  of  all  battles  of  late  years  has 
shown  the  expediency  of  making  use  of  natural  shelter  or 
constructing  field  intrenchments.  Not  only  is  such  arti- 
ficial shelter  necessary  in  action,  but  it  is  frequently  inval- 
uable for  the  purpose  of  concealing  the  troops  before  the 
fire  has  opened. 


IN  THE  OPEN. 


244 


Mountain  Scouting. 


All  soldiers,  and  especially  recruits,  should  be  frequently 
exercised  in  throwing  up  shelter-pits  and  shelter-trendies,  on 
grounds  of  variable  contours,  and  where  there  is  no  natural 
cover. 

A  very  slight  parapet  of  newly  excavated  earth  is  suffi- 
cient to  protect  men  from  the  effects  of  rifle  balls.  Ex- 
periment shows  that  the  penetration  of  the  ball  (service 
rifle)  at  a  range  of  10  yards  is  20  inches,  and  only  10 
inches  at  200  yards. 

After  a  little  practice,  each  soldier  will  ascertain  the  form 
of  pit  that  best  suits  and  protects  him.  The  depth  need 


e — id — - 


SHELTER-PIT   FOB   SKIRMISHERS. 


Skirmishing*  245 

not  be  uniform,  but  should  be  at  least  ten  inches  where  the 
body  rests,  and  six  inches  elsewhere.  With  a  view  to  less- 
ening the  effect  of  the  enemy's  fire,  the  soldier  should  lie 
down  well  under  and  behind  the  cover. 

The  diagram  shows  the  dimensions  of  pit  and  parapet 
that  seem  most  desirable  in  practice. 

The  soldier  should  never  be  separated  from  an  intrench- 
ing tool  of  some  description.  Many  are  the  instances 
recorded  where  it  was  impossible  to  forward  the  intrench- 
ing tools  to  the  front  until  after  the  exigency  for  their  use 
had  passed,  and  the  men  were  compelled  to  use  tin  plates, 
tin  cans,  fragments  of  canteens,  knives,  sticks,  etc.,  in  order 
to  get  temporary  shelter  from  the  enemy's  most  galling 
fire. 

I  am  an  advocate  of  Colonel  Rice's  trowel  bayonet, 
after  several  practical  tests  of  its  merits.  It  has  already 
been  noticed  on  page  95.  There  is  no  doubt  as  to  its  ex- 
cellence.* General  Miles  indorses  its  usefulness  as  follows  : 

/  am  fully  satisfied  that  its  utility  and  value  are  as  well  estab- 
lished as  that  of  any  article  carried  by  the  soldier;  that  it  would 
increase  the  efficiency  of  any  army  /  and  that  it  should  be  univer- 
sally adopted  by  the  entire  army.  If  the  opinion  of  ^officers  com- 


*The  author's  " Combination  Knife-trowel  and  Tent-peg"  is  no  improvement  on 
Colonel  Rice's  bayonet,  so  far  as  the  trowel  is  concerned,  but  it  handily  combines 
the  intrenching  tool  and  a  great  many  other  necessary  articles  for  field  equipment. 
'  The  scabbard  (one  edge  sharp)  is  of  the  same  shape  and  size  as  the  blade  of 
the  trowel  bayonet.  A  knife  (rasp,  saw  or  any  other  article  required  by  the  par- 
ticular man  who  uses  it),  enters  the  scabbard  and  is  retained  in  position  by  means 
of  a  small  but  strong  spring.  The  back  edge  of  the  scabbard  is  prepared  so  as  to 
form  a  convenient  wrench,  screw-driver,  shell-extractor,  etc.  ;  while  to  the  upper 
and  outer  edge  is  attached  a  small  neck  and  ring,  so  as  to  convert  it  into  a  suitable 
tent-peg  or  picket-pin,  when  driven  into  the  ground.  While  on  the  march  the 
scabbard,  with  knife  encased,  is  hooked  to  the  belt  and  worn  at  the  side.  For  in- 
trenching and  chopping  purposes,  the  whole  is  unhooked  and  used.  To  use  the 
knife  it  is  simply  drawn  from  the  scabbard  ;  and  after  arrival  into  camp,  the  scab- 
bard (with  or  without  the  knife)  is  driven  into  the  ground  wherever  needed. 

Each  soldier  might  be  provided  with  a  knife-trowel,  to  be  worn  on  the  body; 
and  each  cavalry-man,  packer,  etc.,  might  have  attached  to  his  saddle  an  addi- 
tional trowel,  containing  a  rasp,  saw,  etc. 


246 


Mountain  Scouting. 


manding   troops  in  the  field  is  considered  of  value,  /  believe  that 
opinion  is  decidedly  in  favor  of  its  adoption. 

The  drawing  shows  the  manner  of  forming.s'/W/Vv  -trenches. 


Having  arrived  on  the  line  (not  necessarily  straight,  but 
determined  by  the  features  of  the  ground,  so  as  to  secure 
all  natural  cover),  the  men  either  stack  or  ground  arms,  and 
begin  to  throw  the  earth  to  the  front  (using  both  hands  if 
necessary)  so  as  to  form  a  parapet  from  16  to  20  inches 
high.  All  available  turf,  logs  or  rocks  should  be  used  as  a 
revetment  to  the  interior  slope  of  the  parapet. 

The  main  object  of  these  trenches  is  to  afford  cover  from 
the  fire  of  the  enemy  until  the  proper  moment  for  advancing 
against  him. 

When  the  trench  has  been  made  2  feet  wide  and  15  inches 


ONE   RANK   KNEELING   IN   TRENCH,   AND   FILE-CLOSERS   LYING   DOWN   IN    REAK. 

deep,  it  will  afford  excellent  cover  for  one  rank  kneeling  in 
it,  and  file-closers  lying  down  in  rear.  If  the  trench  be 
made  4^  feet  wide,  it  will  afford  cover  for  two  ranks  kneel- 
ing inside  of  it  ;  if  it  be  7  feet  wide,  it  will  allow  the  men  to 
lie  down  in  it. 

The  greatest  prudence  must  be  observed  when  charging 
Indians,  as  it  is  their  favorite  ruse  to  scatter  before  the  pur- 
suers, and  then  close  again  in  bands  and  attack  the  rear  and 


Skirmishing.  247 

flanks  of  the  charge,  well  scattered  while  pursuing  indi- 
viduals. It  is  very  seldom  that  they  either  make  or  meet  a 
charge. 

When  they  scatter  it  is  a  good  plan  (if  the  ground  be 
suitable)  to  push  in  between  their  detachments,  and  while 
guarding  one  side,  make  a  vigorous  attack  on  the  other. 

A  small  command  should  be  kept  together,  and  never 
divided  into  detachments  if  it  can  be  avoided. 

The  force  and  proximity  of  Indians  cannot  be  determined 
by  usual  appearances.  Frequently,  when  there  is  no  visible 
'sign,'  the  entire  war  party  may  be  waiting  in  ambush,  a 
few  hundred  yards  distant  ;  or,  while  many  miles  away, 
they  may  convey  the  impression  that  they  are  near  and  on 
the  alert,  by  erecting  and  leaving  piles  of  rock,  etc.,  on  the 
surrounding  hills,  which  at  a  distance  appear  like  sentinels. 

A  great  deal  has  been  said  about  the  superior  arms  pos- 
sessed by  the  Indians.  In  fact,  their  arms  are  vastly  in- 
ferior to  the  rifle  now  in  the  hands  of  the  infantry  arm  of 
our  service,  except  that  they  are  more  accurately  sighted 
and  easily  triggered.  The  skillful  attainments  of  the  In- 
dians, however,  do  give  them  a  vast  superiority  in  using 
them. 

Three-fourths  of  the  regular  troops,  armed  with  breech- 
loaders (and  especially  repeating  rifles)  are  found  •  to 
possess  the  inexcusable  fault  of  firing  too  soon. 

While  the  fall  of  a  few  men  will  drive  an  Indian  party  in 
retreat,  the  harmless  whizzing  of  bullets  will  only  cause 
them  to  take  confidence. 

The  Indian  never  fires  with  great  rapidity,  but  more  than 
makes  it  good  by  his  increased  accuracy  of  fire. 

Most  Indians  are  skilled  in  archery  and  frequently  use 
the  bow,  when  they  wish  to  save  their  ammunition.  The 
smaller  Indian  boys  are  always  armed  with  bows  and  ar- 
rows. The  bows  are  made  of  very  tough  and  elastic  wood, 
from  3  to  4  feet  long,  and  strengthened  with  sinews 


248  Mountain  Scouting. 

wrapped  .around  them.  The  arrows  are  usually  made  of 
wild  cherry,  about  18  or  20  inches  long,  and  have  flint  or 
iron  points  at  one  end  and  guiding  crow  or  turkey  feathers 
at  the  other. 

Most  Indians  regard  as  profound  secrets  the  modes  by 
which  the  flints  are  broken  into  the  desired  shapes  and  how 
their  arrows  are  poisoned. 

It  is  an  excellent  maxim  in  Indian  warfare  to  do  that  which 
the  Indian  neither  expects  nor  desires  you  to  do. 

Sudden  dashes  into  the  Indian  country,  in  the  midst  of 
hardship  and  suffering,  are  always  successful. 

When  the  grass  is  covered  by  snow,  or  when  it  loses  its 
nutritious  properties,  the  Indian  pony  becomes  too  weak 
to  travel,  and  in  consequence,  the  Indian  is  obliged  to  sus- 
pend all  warlike  operations.  Then  is  the  time  to  strike  the 
blow,  and  the  commander  who  is  able  to  effect  a  perfect  co- 
operation of  his  different  columns,  in  spite  of  cold  winds, 
rain  or  snow,  is  surely  a  good  Indian  fighter. 

When  snow  is  on  the  ground,  the  Indians  will  generally 
locate  themselves  on  some  point  of  a  stream  where  the 
cotton-wood  trees  are  in  abundance.  In  the  absence  of  better 
forage,  their  ponies  subsist  on  the  young  bark  of  the  cotton- 
wood  ;  in  fact,  when  the  bark  is  fresh,  the  stock  will  fre- 
quently select  it  in  preference  to  hay  or  grain. 

When  hunting  Indians  without  any  '  sign  '  whatever,  I 
believe  it  is  a  good  plan  to  proceed  in  the  direction  of  some 
locality  where  the  cotton-wood  is  known  to  be  abundant. 


APPENDIX. 


1.    SWIMMING   EXERCISES. 


2.    ROWING 


3.    CHINOOK  JARGON. 


SWIMMING    EXERCISES, 


i.  Swimming,  as  a  useful  and  gymnastic  exercise,  is  worthy  of 
\he  careful  attention  of  all. 

Constant  practice  in  the  different  modes  of  using  the  body  and 
limbs,  will  give  the  swimmer  great  confidence,  and  develop  all  the 
muscles.  It  is  worthy  of  remark  that  fear  alone  never  prevents  a 
man  swimming,  but  is  often  an  obstacle  to  the  learning. 

i.  The  practice  should  usually  take  place  in  the  bathing  hall 
(and  invariably  when  raining),  but  may  from  time  to  time  be 
transferred  to  running  waters,  if  practicable,  when  various  feats  in 
sportive  swimming  may  be  practiced. 

As  far  as  possible,  the  swimmer  should  make  sure  of  the 
bottom,  which  is  best  when  of  gravel  or  small  stones,  and  free 
from  mud,  holes,  snags  or  weeds.  When  bathing  in  the  hall, 
the  instructor  will  enforce  all  the  bathing  regulations,  regarding 
the  use  of  apparatus,  the  allotment  of  space,  etc. 

3.  Suitable  hours  (preferably  in  the  morning  before  breakfast) 
during  the  months  of  June,  July  and  August,  will  be  appointed 
for  the  bathing  parades.  Coryza  is  frequently  the  consequence 
of  evening  bathing,  when  the  hair  is  not  perfectly  dry  before 
sleeping. 

In  all  practice,  when  exposed  to  the  heat  of  the  sun,  the  head 
should  be  kept  cool  by  wetting  the  hair,  or  in  case  of  its  thinness, 
by  applying  a  frequently  wetted  handkerchief 

Practice  should  never  take  place  before  digestion  is  finished,  nor 
when  the  body  is  in  a  perspiration.  Those  of  plethoric  tempera- 
ment should  bathe  at  such  times  only  as  the  surgeon  directs. 

A.  The  bathing  cosunne  should  consist  of  short  drawers 
and  canvas  slippers;  but  the  sections  should  be  occasionally  re- 


4  SWIMMING     EXERCISES. 

quired    to   swim  in  jackets    and  trowsers,     or    in    the   regular 
riding  clothes. 

5.  On  entering  the  water,  the  head  should  be  wetted  either  by 
plunging  head  foremost,  or  by  pouring  water  on   it,  in   order  to 
prevent  the  blood  from  accumulating  in  it,  causing  headache. 

The  learner  should  then  advance  on  a  clear,  gradually  shelving 
bottom,  until  the  water  reaches  his  breast,  turn  towards  the  place 
of  entrance,  draw  in  a  full  breath,  close  the  lips  and  rest  upon  the 
water,  suffering  it  to  rise  to  his  chin. 

This  is  repeated,  gradually  immersing  more  and  more  of  the 
head. 

6.  The  swimmer  should  be  taught  from  the  first  to  dispense 
with  all  aids  in  floating — corks,  bladders  and  lifting  machines  are 
to  be  avoided.     When  necessary,   instructing  as  to  attitude  and 
action,  the  instructor  may  place  one  hand,   as  a  support,  under 
the  learner.      When  the  human  body  is  immersed,  one-eleventh 
of  its  weight  remains  above  the  surface  in  fresh  water,  and  about 
one-tenth  in  salt  water. 

If  the  swimmer  places  himself  upon  the  back  and  throws  the. 
head  well  back,  so  that  the  face  is  turned  upwards,  the  water  will 
not  come  over  the  mouth,  although  the  face  rises  and  sinks  one 
inch  at  every  inspiration  and  expiration. 

The  learner  must  satisfy  himself  as  to  the  truth  of  this  and  learn, 
by  practice,  to  confide  in  the  power  of  the  water  to  support  him. 

The  ignorant  unfortunately  stretch  out  the  arms  to  seize  any- 
thing or  nothing,  and  thus  keep  the  head  under  the  water,  inas- 
much as  the  head  and  arms  greatly  exceed  one-tenth  of  the  weight 
of  the  body. 

7.  After  the  learner  has  assured  himself  that  he  can  float  and 
has    overcome  his    natural     fear     of    the  water,    to   become  a 
graceful  and  powerful  swimmer,  it  is  only  necessary  for  him  to 
be  drilled  in  the  correct1  attitude  of  the  body  and   movements  of 
the  limbs.      It  is  proposed  that  these  principles  be  taught  and  ac- 
quired out  of  the  water. 

Attitude. 

8.  No  matter  how  perfect  the  learner  may  become  in  the  ac- 


SWIMMING     EXERCISES. 


tion,  if  he  neglects  to  attain  the  right  attitude,  he 
will  never  be  a  good  swimmer,  Swimming  be- 
comes easy  and  delightful  when  the  proper 
attention  is  given  to  the  position  of  the  head  and 
breast  and  the  posture  of  the  body.  The  head 
should  be  thrown  back,  the  chin  elevated  (lips 
closed),  the  breast  set  well  forward,  and  the  back 
hollowed  and  kept  steady.  It  is  important  to  guard 
against  any  action  in  the  back.  Many  persons  are  addicted  to 
raising  the  back  when  drawing  in  the  legs,  and  of  necessity  swim 
with  the  feet  too  near  the  surface  of  the  water. 

Action  of  the  hands  and  arms. 

9.  In  the  proper  position  of  the  hands,  the-  fingers 
must  be  kept  close  together,  the  thumbs  by  the  edge 
of  the  fore  fingers,  and  that  the  fingers  may  properly 
adhere,  the  hands  should  be   made  a   little  concave 
on   the  inside.     Care   must  be  taken  not  to   hollow 
the  hands  sufficiently  to  very  much  diminish  their  size; 
if  so,  they  lose  some  of  their  power  in  the  water.     The 
hands  thus  formed  are  placed  before  the  breast,  the  wrist 
touching  it  and  the  fingers  pointing  forward,  prepara- 
tory to  a  stroke. 

10.  The  elevations  of  the  hands  must  be  taught  next. 
The  first  elevation  is   formed   by   raising   the    fingers 
higher  than  the  thick  part  of  the   hand  by    3    or   \ 

inches.     The  second  by  raising  the  outer  edge  of  the 
hand  (little-finger  side)  2  or  3  inches  higher  than  the  inner  edge. 
,  This  elevation  is  slightly  increased  as  the  outer  stroke 

is  performed. 

The  first  part  of  the  stroke  is  made  by  projecting 
the  hands  forward  to  their  utmost  extent,  carefully  em- 
ploying the  first  elevation,  in  order  to  produce  buoy- 
ancy. Care  must  be  taken  in  this  part  of  the  stroke 
that  the  fingers  do  not  break  the  surface  of  the 
water. 


SWIMMIXi  I      KX  KRCISES. 

ii.  In  the  outer  stroke,  the  second  elevation  must 
be  employed,  the  first  elevation  being  avoided,  and 
the  hands  allowed  to  decline. 

In  the  second  elevation  the  hands  must  descend 
until  they  are  as  low  as  the  hips. 

12.  Care  must  be  taken  that  the  hands  fall  to  the 
level  of  the  hips  at  a  considerable  distance  from  them 
both  laterally  and  anteriorly. 

The  bearing  of  the  hands  in  the  water,  and  their  peculiar  pow- 
er is  owing  to  thtir  proper  position. 

The  stroke  being  made,  the  hands  are  raised  to 
the  breast  by  a  turn  of  the  wrist,  causing  them  to 
hang  down,  while  the  arms  raise  them  up. 

The  action  of  the  arms  throughout  should  be 
gentle  and  easy. 

These  directions  should  be  accurately  reduced 
to  practice  and  the  learner  should  exercise  one  arm  at  a  time, 
until  each  is  accustomed  to  the  action. 

Action  of  the  feet  and  legs. 

13.  Inasmuch  as  the  legs  are  larger  and  stronger 
than  the  arms,  the  greater  part  of  the  power  in  swim- 
ming is  derived  from  them.  In  practicing  their  ac- 
tion, one  hand  may  rest  on  the  top  of  a  chair,  while 
the  opposite  leg  is  exercised.  When  each  arm  and 
leg  is  separately  accustomed  to  the  action,  the 
arm  and  leg  of  the  same  side  may  be  exercised 
together. 

The  first  action  of  the  legs  is  to  draw  them  in  as  high  as  possi- 
ble, the  knees  inclining  inward,  and  by  a  turn  of  the  ankle,  the 
soles  of  the  feet  inclining  outward. 

14.  The  feet  are  now  to  be  thrown  out  to  the  full  extent  of  the 
legs,  and  as  widely  from  each  other  as  possible. 


SWIMMINC;      EXERCISES. 


It  is  evident  that  in  drawing  in  the  legs  there 
was  a  loss  of  power,  while  in  throwing  them 
out  there  was  a  gain  of  power  equal  to  that 
loss,  and  hence  no  advantage  has  been  de- 
rived. 

A  gain  of  power  must  be  sought  by  bringing 
down  the  legs  briskly,   until  they  come  close 
together. 

15.  The  legs  and  arms  should  perform  their  action  alternately  : 
the  arms  descending  while  the   legs  are    rising,    and  vice  versa. 

Thus  the  body  is  kept  in  one  continued  pro- 
gressive motion,  and  the  action  of  leg  and  arm 
unceasingly  interchanged.  The  instructor  may 
at  first  allow  the  legs  and  arms  to  move  together, 
and  gradually  proceed  to  the  alternate  movement 
of  the  limbs. 

1 6.  The  proper  position  of  the  nands,  their  elevations  and  the 
correct  modes  of  striking  both  with  the  arms  and  legs,  must  be 

practiced  until  performed  with  ease  and  accuracy. 
Strict  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  simultaneous 
movements  of  hands  and  feet.  For  instance,  re- 
member when  bringing  down  the  left  foot,  to  raise 
the  left  hand,  by  a  turn  of  the  wrist  causing  it  to 
hang  down,  while  the  arm  raises  it. 

Attitude  and  Action  in  the  Water. 

1 7.  The  requirements  of  paragraph  8  must  be 'observed  through- 
out when  in  the  water.      Having  acquired  the  correct  attitude, 

the  limbs  should  be  exercised  calmly  and 
without  hurry  and  trepidation.  A  long  and 
steady  stroke  sends  the  body  well  forward 
in  the  water  and  is  not  very  tiresome.  A 
learner  who  could  swim  100  yards  by  long 
and  steady  strokes,  and  without  any  great  fatigue,  would  labor 
hard  to  accomplish  2  5  yards  by  quick  strokes.  It  is  an  excellen  t 


8  SWIMMING     EXERCISES. 

plan,  at  first,  to  execute  all  the  motions  of  the  hands  and  feet  in 
a  steady  common  time. 

The  learner  should  bear  in  mind  that  it  is  the  function  of  the 
hands  to  support  the  head  above  the  water  rather  than  to  propel 
the  body  through  it ;  and  to  get  the  full  benefit  of  the  stroke 
when  the  feet  are  kicked  out  in  the  rear,  the  hands,  when  at  full 
stretch  in  front,  should  not  be  parted  immediately,  but  a  delay  of 
at  least  one  second  should  be  allowed  in  order  that  the  head  may 
approach  the  point  where  the  hands  part.  By  thus  dwelling  on 
each  stroke  and  keeping  good  time,  the  swimmer  will  advance 
about  ten  times  as  far  each  stroke,  as  when  he  parts  his  hands 
quickly  and  makes  rapid  strokes. 

The  breath  should  be  drawn  in  at  the  moment  when  the  body 
is  elevated  by  the  hands  descending  towards  the  hips,  otherwise 
the  mouth  will  probably  become  filled  with  water.  The  breath 
should  be  expired  while  the  body  is  sent  forward  by  the  action  of 
the  legs.  The  head  is  the  principal  regulator  of  the  movements 
in  water  ;  its  slightest  inclination  to  either  side  operates  on  the 
body,  and,  if  not  corrected,  throws  the  body  into  a  horizontal 
posture.  Any  disturbance  of  equilibrium  may  be  restored  by  a 
cautious  movement  of  the  head  alone.  The  use  of  the  legs  and 
arms  for  balancing  the  body  in  the  water,  should  be  frequently 
practiced. 

Treading  Water. 

1 8.  Here  the  position  is  upright,  and  progression  is  obtained  by 
the  action  of  the  legs  alone.  The  arms  should  be  folded  below 
the  breast  or  pressed  against  the  hips,  and  the  legs  are  employed  as 
in  front  swimming,  except  as  to  time  and 
space.  They  should  perform  their  action  in 
half  the  usual  time  ;  because,  acting  perpen- 
dicularly, each  stroke  would  otherwise  raise 
the  swimmer  too  much  out  of  the  water,  and 
he  would  sink  too  low  in  the  interval  between 
the  strokes,  were  they  not  quickly  to  follow 
each  other.  The  space  of  their  action  should  also  be  about  two- 


I 


SWIMMING     EXERCISES.  9 

thirds  of  the  usual  space,   preserving  the  upper  (stronger)  and 
omitting  the  lower  part  of  the  stroke. 

There  is  another  mode  of  treading  water,  in  which  the  thighs 
are  separated,  and  the  legs  slightly  bent,  as  in  a  half-sittting  pos- 
ture ;  here  the  legs  are  contracted  alternately,  and  while  one  re- 
mains contracted,  the  other,  less  so,  describes  a  circle.  This 
method  of  swimming  is  particularly  adapted  to  relieving  drown- 
ing persons. 

Swimming  on  the  Back. 

1 9.  When  swimming  on  the  back,  the  body  should  rest  at  full 
length  and  not  assume  a  sitting  posture.     Though  little  calcula- 
ted for  progression,  this  is  the  easiest  of  all 

.  methods,  because,  much  of  the  head  and 
neck  being  immersed,  there  is  little  or  no 
power  of  action  required  for  support.  The  proper  position  is  at- 
tained and  preserved  by  lying  down  gently  upon  the  water,  the 
body  extended  ;  the  head  kept  in  a  true  line  with  it,  so  that  the 
back  part  of  the  head  may  be  immersed  ;  the  hands  laid  on  the 
thighs,  and  care  taken  that  the  knees  do  not  rise  out  of  the  water  ; . 
the  head  and  breast  being  unagitated  by  the  action  of  the  legs. 

20.  -After  learning  to  swim  on  the  back  without  using  the 

hands,  the  instructor  should  show  how  they 
(working  inwards)  may  assist  the  feet  in 
propelling  the  body  forward.  While  em- 
ploying the  legs  as  in  front  swimming,  care  being  taken  that  the 
knees  do  not  rise  out  of  the  water,  the  arms  may  be  used  in  va- 
rious ways,  describing  large  or  small  circles. 

21.  In  performing  what  is  called  "winging,"  the  arms  are  ex- 
tended until  in  line  with  each  other ;  they  are  then  struck  down 
to  the  thighs,  with  the  palms  turned  in  that  direction,  the  thumbs 

inclined  downward  to  increase   the   buoyancy; 
~ tne  Pa^ms  are  tnen  moved   edgeways  and  the 
arms  elevated  as  before.      The  legs  throughout 
make  one  stroke  as  the  arms  come  down  and  an- 
other as  they  rise. 

22.  "Finning"  differs  from  winging  in  making  the  stroke  of 


10  SWIMMING     EXERCISES. 

the  arms  much  shorter  and  in  the  same  time  as  the  stroke  of  the 
legs.  The  turn  of  the  hands  is  the  same  in  both  methods.  The 
act  of  passing  from  front  to  back  swimming,  or 
the  reverse,  must  be  performed  immediately 
after  throwing  out  the  feet.  To  turn  from  the 
front  to  back,  the  legs  are  raised  forward  and 
the  head  thrown  backward,  until  the  body  approaches  an  upright 
position.  To  turn  from  the  back  to  breast,  the  legs  are  dropped 
and  the  body  thrown  forward  on  the  breast. 

23.  Many  advocate  an  upright  position  in  both  front  and  back 
swimming,   because  of  its  conformity  to  the  accustomed  move- 
ment of  the  limbs,  the  freedom  it  gives  to  the 
hands  and  arms,  vision  all  around,  and  a  much 
greater  facility  of  breathing.      The  speed,  accord- 
ing to  this  method,  is  no  doubt  diminished,  but  the 
mode  of  advancing  conforming  so  closely  to  what 
is  habitual  on  shore,  the  swimmer  is  better  enabled 

to  effect  a  continued  exercise  of  it,  while  husbanding  the  strength 
and  rendering  the  power  of  recruiting  it  easy. 

Floating. 

24.  Floating  is  a  transition  from  swimming  on  the  back.     To 
perform  it,  stretch  out  the  arms  as  far  as  possible  beyond  the  head, 

while  the  legs  are  gently  exercising,  being  careful 
that  they  do  not  rise  above  the  surface  ;  immerse 
the  crown  of  the  head  rather  deeply  and  elevate 
the  chin  above  the  forehead  ;  inflate  the  chest 
while  taking  this  position  ;  cease  the  action  of  the 
legs  and  place  the  feet  together.  The  hands  may  be  crossed  upon 
the  breast,  or  may  be  placed  a  foot  or  more  asunder,  equi-distant 
from  the  head,  to  preserve  an  equipoise  and  prevent  rolling  over. 
By  observing  these  directions,  the  swimmer  will  be  able  to  float, 
rising  a  little  with  every  inspiration,  and  falling  with  every  expir- 
ation. Should  the  feet  descend,  the  loins  may  be  hollowed,  or 
the  hands  raised  a  little  out  of  the  water,  to  counterbalance  the 
feet,  the  breast  being  the  centre  of  buoyancy. 


SWIMMING     EXERCISES.  1 1 

Side  Swimming. 

25.  Side  swimming  is  well  suited  for  passing  over  a  short  dis- 
tance with  rapidity.      It  presents  to  the  water  a  smaller  surface  than 

front  swimming,  but  is  much  more  fatiguing. 

The  body  may  be  turned  either  upon  the  right 

or  left  side,  and  the  feet  perform  their  usual 

motions. 

When  on  the  left  side,  the  swimmer  should  strike  forward  with 
the  left  hand,  and  sideways  with  the  right  (back  to  the  front  in- 
stead of  upward).  The  thumb  side  of  the  hand  downward  serves 
as  an  oar.  When  swimming  on  either  side,  the  lower  arm 
stretches  itself  out  quickly,  while  the  feet  are  striking  ;  and  the 
upper  arm  strikes  while  the  feet  are  impelling,  the  hand  beginning 
its  stroke  on  a  level  with  the  head.  While  this  hand  is  again 
brought  forward  and  the  feet  contracted,  the  lower  hand  is  drawn 
towards  the  breast,  rather  to  sustain  than  to  impel.  When  chang- 
ing from  one  side  to  the  other,  both  attitude  and  action  are 

reversed. 

Quadruped  Swimming. 

26.  The  human  limbs  are  not  formed  so  as  to  act  advantage- 
ously in  this  method,  and  hence  very  little  progress  can  be  made. 

The  method  is  very  good  for  a  change  in 
~  swimming  a  long  distance.  Each  hand  and 
foot  is  used  alternately.  The  hands  are  drawn 
toward  the  chin  in  a  compressed  form,  expanded  and  hollowed 
with  the  fingers  close  together.  As  they  strike  the  water  the  feet 
are  drawn,  towards  the  stomach  and  then  sent  backward  with  a 
kick.  The  head  should  be  set  back  and  the  breast  forward. 
Overhand  Swimming. 

27.  This  method  is  practiced  by  the  Indians  and  overcomes 
several  grave  objections  found  in  the  old  method,  such  as  the  ex- 
posure of  a  large  resisting  surface  to  the 

^  water,  and  the  establishment  of  dead 
points,  when  neither  of  the  extremities 
are  moving.  The  overhand  movement  corresponds  exactly  with 
the  amble  of  the  horse. 


12  SWIMMING     EXERCISES. 

The  body  is  thrown  more  or  less  on  its  side  at  each  stroke,  and 
caused  to  twist  and  roll  in  the  direction  of  its  length,  thus  greatly 
reducing  the  friction  experienced  in  forward  motion.  By  the 
overhand  movement,  the  swimmer  is  enabled  to  throw  himselt 
forward  on  the  water,  and  to  move  his  legs  and  arms  in  a  plane 
nearly  vertical  (instead  of  horizontal),  thereby  increasing  the 
1  ength  of  the  effective  stroke,  both  of  the  legs  and  arms,  to  nearly 
half  an  ellipse.  The  advancing  of  the  right  and  left  sides  of  the 
body  alternately,  in  a  right  line,  contributes  very  much  to  con- 
tinuity of  motion.  The  method,  although  the  most  expeditious 
known,  is  fatiguing  and  can  only  be  indulged  in  for  short  dis- 
tances. 

Plunging. 

28.   Theptunge  may  be  made  either  with  the  feet  or  the  head 
foremost.      In  the  leap,  the  legs  should  be  kept  together,  and  the 

arms  close.  When  the  plunge 
\sm?idLQ  feet  foremost,  they  should 
be  kept  together,  and  the  body 
inclined  backwards.  With  the 
head  foremost,  there  are  various  methods.  In  the  deep  plunge, 
the  swimmer  has  his  arms  outstretched,  knees  bent  and  body 
leant  forwards  until  the  head  descends  nearly  to  the  feet,  when 
the  knees  and  spine  are  extended  (Fig.  i).  On  rising  to  the 
surface,  the  mouth  must  not  be  opened  before  repelling  the  water. 
In  the  flat  plunge,  made  only  from  a  small  height,  the  swimmer 
.should  fling  himself  forwards  in  order  to  extend  the  line  of  the 
plunge  as  much  as  possible  under  the  surface  of  the  water.  Upon 
.touching  it,  he  should  keep  his  head  up,  back  hollow,  and  hands 
.stretched  forward,  flat  and  inclined  upward  (Fig.  2). 

Diving. 

29.   The  swimmer  should  prepare  for  diving,  by  taking  a  full 
and  slow  inspiration.     The  attitude  for  diving  is  the  reverse  of 


SWIMMING     EXERCISES. 


that  for  swimming;  instead  of 
holding  back  the  head,  setting 
forward  the  breast,  etc. ,  the  head 
should  be  bent  forward,  so  that 
the  chin  may  rest  upon  the  breast; 
the  back  should  be  made  round, 
and  the  legs  thrown  out  with 
great  vigor ;  and  the  arms  and 
hands,  instead  of  being  struck  forward,  must  move  rather  back- 
ward, coming  out  lower,  and  passing  more  behind  (Fig.  i). 
The  eyes  should  be  kept  open,  if  the  water  is  clear,  to  enable  the 
diver  to  ascertain  its  depth,  and  observe  whatever  lies  at  the  bottom. 
To  move  forward,  he  must  raise  the  head  and  slightly  straighten 
the  back  (Fig.  2).  If  the  diver  approaches  too  near  the  surface 
of  the  water,  he  must  press  the  palms  upwards. 

To  ascend,  the  hands  should  be  struck  out  high  and  brought 
briskly   down,   the  chin  held  up  and  the  back  made  concave 

(Fig.  3). 

Feats  in  Swimming. 

30.   When  the  sections  are  well  practiced  in  the  usual  modes 
of  swimming  the  instructor  should  teach  one-arm  swimming.     Here 

the  instructor  will  see 
that  the  swimmers  are 
more  erect  in  the  water 
and  hold  their  heads 
further  backwards  than 
usual.  The  arm,  at  its 
full  extent,  must  be 
struck  out  across  the 
body  and  brought  down 
before  and  the  breast  be 
kept  inflated.  This  mode  of  swimming  should  be  practiced  to  qualify 
for  conveying  anything  out  of  the  water,  as  well  as  for  lending  assist- 
ance in  case  of  distress.  It  is  readily  seen  how,  by  means  of  one-arm 
swimming  or  treading  water,  a  person  may  transport  his  clothing 


SWIMMING     EXERCISES. 


above  water,  or  when  under  a  blind,  might  sketch  the  position  of 
the  enemy's  guns. 

31.  The  sections  should  also  be  practiced  in  carrying  weights 

while  swimming. — 
The  practice  should 
continue  until  each 
member  may  be  able 
to  readily  swim  with 
his  rifle  and  ammu- 
nition. The  drawing 

shows  a  manner  of  attaching  the  rifle  by  means  of  a  spring  in  the 
crown  of  the  helmet  or  hat,  so  that  a  man  swimming  high  may 
transport  it  in  a  dry  condition.  Only  expert  swimmers  can  per- 
form this  feat. 

32.  Frequent  practice  should  also  take  place  in  connection  with 

the  swimming  of  stock. 
After  fairly  starting  the 
animal,  the  swimmer 
will  seize  him  by  the 
tail  and  allow  him  to 
tow  him.  If  the  ani- 
mal turns  his  head  or 
endeavors  to  change 
his  course,  the  swim- 
mer should  prevent  it 
by  splashing  water  in 
his  face  with  the  right  or  left  hand,  as  the  case  may  be. 

33.  If  the  current  is  not  very  strong,  it  will  be  found  much 

more  satisfactory  to 
swim  along  with  the 
horse,  on  the  down 
stream  side,  holding 
on  by  the  halter  strap, 
the  mane  or  stirrup 
leather.  It  is  not  a 
good  plan  to  remain 


SWIMMING     EXERCISES.  1 5 

in  the  saddle,  as  the  animal  is  very  apt  to  lose  his  equilibrum 
and  roll  over.  This  is  invariably  the  case  with  the  ordinary 
mule,  and  moreover  should  a  drop  of  water,  by  accident,  go 
into  his  ear,  his  main  endeavor  seems  to  be  to  sink  himself. 

Treatment  of  the  apparently  drowned. 

34.  In  assisting  drowning  persons,  great  care  should  be  taken  to 
avoid  being  caught  hold  of  by  them.  They  should  be  approach- 
ed from  behind,  and  should  be  kept  distant  from  the  swimmer 
by  the  intervention  of  any  thing  at  hand,  and  as  a  last  resort  by 
means  of  their  own  hair.  If  possible,  they  should  be  kept  on 
their  backs,  and  should  they  attempt  to  seize  the  swimmer,  must 
be  cast  loose  at  once. 

Two  swimmers  treading  water  may  assist  a  drowning  person, 
by  seizing  him,  one  under  each  arm,  and  carrying  him  along 
with  his  limbs  motionless. 

The  following  directions  for  the  restoration  of  the  apparently 
dead  from  drowning,  are  in  substance  those  practiced  by  the 
Royal  National  Life-Boat  Institution. 

a.  Send  immediately  for  medical  assistance,  blankets  and  dry 
clothing,  and  proceed  to  treat  the  Patient  instantly  in  the  open 
air,  with  the  face  downward,  whether  on  shore  or  afloat ;  expose 
the  face,  neck,  and  chest  to  the  air,  and  remove  all  tight  clothing 
from  the  neck  and  chest. 

The  points  to  be  aimed  at  are — first,  the  restoration  of  breath- 
ing ;  and  secondly,  after  breathing  is  restored,  the  promotion  of 
warmth  and  circulation. 

The  efforts  to  restore  breathing  must  be  commenced  immediate- 
ly and  energetically,  and  persevered  in  for  one  or  two  hours,  if 
necessary.  Efforts  to  promote  warmth  and  circulation,  beyond  re- 
moving the  wet  clothes  and  drying  the  skin,  must  not  be  made 
until  the  first  appearance  of  natural  breathing  ;  for  if  circulation 
of  the  blood  be  induced  before  breathing  has  recommenced,  the 
restoration  to  life  will  be  endangered. 

To  Restore  Breathing. 
b.  To  CLEAR  THE  THROAT. — Place  the  patient  on  the  floor  or 


1 6  SWIMMING     EXERCISES. 

ground  with  the  face  downwards,  and  one  of  the  arms  under  the 
forehead,  in  which  position  all  fluids  will  more  readily  escape  by 
the  mouth,  and  the  tongue  itself  will  fall  forward,  leaving  the  en- 
trance into  the  windpipe  free.  Assist  this  operation  by  wiping 
and  cleaning  the  mouth. 

If  there  be  only  slight  breathing,  no  breathing,  or  if  the  breath- 
ing fail,  then — 

To  EXCITE  BREATHING.  — Instantly  turn  the  patient  on  the  side, 
supporting  the  head,  and  excite  the  nostrils  with  snuff,  hartshorn 
or  smelling  salts,  or  tickle  the  throat  with  a  feather,  &c. ,  if  at 
hand.  Rub  the  chest  and  face  warm,  and '  dash  cold  water  and 
hot  water  alternately,  on  them.  If  there  be  no  success  instantly 
endeavor — 

To  IMITATE  BREATHING. — Replace  the  patient  on  the  face,  rais- 
ing and  supporting  the  chest  well,  on  a  folded  coat  or  other  article 
of  dress. 

Turn  the  body  very  gently  on  the  side  and  a  little  beyond,  and 
then  briskly  on  the  face,  back  again,  repeating  these  measures 
cautiously,  efficiently,  and  perseveringly,  about  15  times  in  the 
minute,  or  once  every  four  or  five  seconds,  occasionally  varying  the 
side. 

[By  placing  the  patient  on  the  chest,  the  weight  of  the  body 
forces  the  air  out ;  when  turned  on  the  side,  this  pressure  is  re- 
moved, and  air  enters  the  chest.  ] 

On  each  occasion  that  the  body  is  replaced  on  the  face,  make 
uniform  but  efficient  pressure  with  brisk  movement,  on  the  back 
between  and  below  the  shoulder-blades  or  bones  on  each  side,  re- 
moving the  pressure  immediately  before  turning  the  body  on  the 
side. 

During  the  whole  of  the  operations  let  one  person  attend  solely 
to  the  movements  of  the  head  and  'of  the  arm  placed  under  it. 

[The  first  measure  increases  the  expiration — the  second  com- 
mences inspiration.] 

The  result  is  respiration  or  natural  breathing  ; — and,  if  not  too 
late,  Life. 

Whilst  the  above  operations  are  being  proceeded  with,  dry  the 


SWIMMING     EXERCISES.  1 7 

hands  and  feet,  and  as  soon  as  dry  clothing  or  blankets  can  be 
procured,  strip  the  body,  and  cover  or  gradually  reclothe  it,  but 
taking  care  not  to  interfere  with  the  efforts  to  restore  breathing. 
These  efforts  will  generally  prove  successful  in  less  than  five  min- 
utes ;  if  not,  proceed  as  follows  : 

c.  To  IMMITATE  THE  MOVEMENTS  OF  BREATHING.  — Stand  at  the 
patient's  head,  grasp  the  arms  just  above  the  elbows,  and  draw 
the  arms  gently  and  steadily  upwards  above  the  head,  and  keep 
them  stretched  upwards  for  two  seconds.      (By  this  means  air  is 
drawn  into  the  lungs. )     Then  turn  down  the  patient's  arms,  and 
press  them  gently  and  firmly  for  two  seconds  against  the  sides  of 
the  chest.      (By  this  means  air  is  pressed  out  of  the  lungs. ) 

Repeat  these  measures  alternately,  deliberately,  and  persever- 
ingly,  about  fifteen  times  in  a  minute,  until  a  spontaneous  effort 
to  respire  is  perceived,  immediately  upon  which  cease  to  imitate 
the  movements  of  breathing,  and  proceed  to  induce  circulation 
and  warmth. 

d.  To  PROMOTE  WARMTH  AND  CIRCULATION. — Commence  rub- 
bing the  limbs  upwards,  with  firm  grasping  pressure  and  energy, 
using  handkerchiefs,  flannels,  &c.      [By  this  measure  the  blood  is 
propelled  along  the  veins  towards  the  heart.  ] 

The  friction  must  be  continued  under  the  blanket  or  over  the 
dry  clothing. 

Promote  the  warmth  of  the  body  by  the  application  of  hot 
flannels,  bottles  of  hot  water,  heated  bricks,  &c. ,  to  the  pit  of  the 
stomach,  the  arm-pits,  and  to  the  soles  of  the  feet. 

If  the  patient  has  been  carried  to  a  house  after  respiration  has 
been  restored,  be  careful  to  let  the  air  play  freely  about  the  room. 

On  the  restoration  of  life,  a  teaspoonful  of  warm  water  should 
be  given  ;  and  then,  if  the  power  of  swallowing  has  returned, 
small  quantities  of  wine,  warm  brandy  and  water,  or  coffee 
should  be  administered.  The  patient  should  be  kept  in  bed, 
and  a  disposition  to  sleep  encouraged.  This  treatment  should  be 
persevered  in  for  some  hours  until  recovery  is  made.  The  fol- 
lowing cautions  are  necessary  :  * 


1 8  SWIMMING  EXERCISES. 

Prevent  unnecessary  crowding  of  persons  round  the  body, 
especially  if  in  an  apartment. 

Avoid  rough  usage,  and  do  not  allow  the  body  to  remain 
on  the  back  unless  the  tongue  is  secured. 

Under  no  circumstances  hold  the  body  up  by  the  feet. 

On  no  account  place  in  a  warm  bath,  unless  under  medical 
direction,  and  even  then  it  should  be  employed  as  a  momen- 
tary excitant. 

Treatment  of  the  apparently  dead  from  intense  cold. 

35.  Rub  the  body  with  snow,  ice,  or  cold  water.  Restore 
warmth  gradually  ;  and  after  some  time,  if  necessary,  em- 
ploy the  means  recommended  for  the  drowned.  In  these 
accidents  it  is  very  dangerous  to  apply  heat  too  early. 

In  order  to  restore  the  natural  warmth  of  the  body,  move 
a  heated  warming  pan  over  the  back  and  spine,  and  rub  the 
body  briskly  with  the  hands. 

To  restore  breathing,  place  the  pipe  of  a  common  bellows 
(when  procurable)  into  one  nostril,  carefully  closing  the 
other  and  the  mouth  ;  at  the  same  time  push  gently  down- 
wards and  backwards  the  upper  part  of  the  windpipe,  so 
as  to  allow  a  freer  admission  of  air  ;  blow  the  bellows 
gently  to  inflate  the  lungs,  until  the  breast  be  slightly 
raised  ;  the  mouth  and  nostrils  should  then  be  set  free, 
and  a  moderate  pressure  with  the  hand  brought  to  bear 
upon  the  chest.  Repeat  this  process  until  life  appears. 

Any  of  the  following  may  be  useful  helps  : 

1.  The  application  of  sal-volatile  or  hartshorn  to  the  nos- 
trils. 

2.  The  early  employment  of  electricity  by  a  skillful  per- 
son. 

3.  The  injection  of  half  a  pint  of  warm  brandy  and  water, 
or  wine  and  water,  into  the  stomach. 


Rowing. 


ROWING. 

Nearly  all  the  mountain  streams  and  rivers  of  importance 
have  too  much  depth  and  current  to  permit  either  poling  or 
paddling,  and  the  inexperienced  are  frequently  called  upon 
to  use  the  sculls.  An  observance  of  the  following  remarks 
maj  prove  useful: 

THE    SEAT. 

The  rower  should  sit  '  amidships  '  on  the  seat  of  the  boat, 
in  order  to  prevent  heeling  to  either  side  and  the  conse- 
quent loss  of  his  labor.  He  should  sit  without  constraint, 
with  his  legs  sufficiently  extended  to  permit  a  slight  sinking 
of  the  knees,  as  he  rows. 

BEGINNING    OF    THE    PULL. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  pull,  the  rower  should  bend  his 
body  until  his  head  is  directly  over  his  knees,  and  carry  his 
arms  as  far  aft  as  possible,  in  order  that 
the  blades  of  the  sculls  may  be  thrown 
far  forward  (without  jamming  in  the  row- 
locks). If  a  long  distance  is  to  be  rowed, 

_    _  ^==_ it    is  less   fatiguing    to    keep   the   back 

straight.  As  soon  as  the  blades  of  the 
sculls  have  been  carried  as  far  forward  as  convenient,  the 
rower  should  quickly  dip  them  into  the  water  and  pull 
towards  him,  bending  the  arms  and  body  simultaneously. 
Care  must  be  taken  not  to  dip  the  sculls  too  deep,  especially 
in  calm  weather. 


2O  Rowing. 

MIDDLE    OF    THE    PULL. 

In  the  middle  of  the  pull,  the  blades  should  be  covered 
by  the  water,  and  the  position  of  the  rower  should  be  that 
represented.  In  pulling  a  pair  of  sculls,  it 
is  frequently  difficult  to  keep  the  hands  clear 
of  each  other,  and  the  inexperienced  suffer 
more  from  their  knocking  and  rubbing 
against  each  other  than  from  the  friction  of 
the  handles  of  the  sculls  in  the  hands.  This 
is  generally  the  case  when  the  sculls  are  too  long,  and  may 
be  obviated  by  the  rower  seating  himself  in  the  center  of 
the  thwart,  with  the  feet  close  together  against  the  center 
of  the  stretcher,  and  moving  his  body  three  or  four  inches 
to  the  right.  This  will  throw  the  right  shoulder  slightly 
forward  and  consequently  the  right  hand,  thus  permitting 
the  hands  to  work  clear  of  each  other.  As  the  right  hand 
is  generally  stronger  than  the  left  it  will  go  above. 

END   OF    THE   PULL. 

The  pull  must  be  continued  until  the  body  is  thrown  well 
back,  and  the  elbows  approach  the  tops  of  the  hips.  Care 
must  be  taken  that  the  hands  are  not 
brought  too  near  the  chest,  as  such  would 
occasion  a  loss  of  power.  There  is  also 
danger  of  throwing  the  body  too  far  back. 
It  should  rest  in  such  a  position  that  it  may 
quickly  and  easily  return  to  the  first  position 
in  time  for  the  next  stroke. 

To  feather  the  sculls,  sink  the  elbows,  bend  the  wrists 
upward  and  turn  up  the  backs  of  the  hands  toward  the 
fore-arms  just  as  the  sculls  are  delivering  the  water. 

RETURN  OF  THE   SCULLS. 

The  hands  should  remain  turned  up  until  the  sculls  are 


Rowing. 


21 


returned  to  the  water.  Throughout  the  return  of  the 
sculls,  the  tips  should  be  two  or  three  inches 
above  the  surface  of  the  water.  In  rough 
weather  they  should  be  sufficiently  high  to 
clear  it.  In  the  middle  of  the  return,  one  of 
the  hands  is  very  likely  to  go  higher  than 
the  other. 
The  head  should  be  moveable  throughout,  but  generally 

turned  toward  the  shore  when  pulling  against  the  tide  or 

current. 

TO  TURN. 

Back  water  with  the  scull  on  the  side  to  which  you  wish 
to  turn,  by  putting  it  into  the  water  (filling  towards  the 
body)  and  pushing  against  it ;  and  at  the  same  time  make 
a  lively  pull  with  the  other  skull,  repeating  it,  if  necessary, 
until  the  boat  is  properly  headed. 


22  Jargon  Vocabulary. 


CHINOOK  JARGON. 

The  number  of  words  constituting  the  JARGON  proper 
does  not  exceed  six  hundred,  and  many  of  these  are  already 
obsolete  or  confined  to  certain  limited  localities.  Not 
more  than  two  hundred  words  of  the  CHINOOK  language 
proper  are  used  in  the  jargon,  the  balance  coming  from  the 
Cree,  Chehalis,  Yakima,  Klickitat  and  various  other  Indian 
languages. 

In  the  Chinook  jargon,  the  same  word  is  frequently  used 
as  a  noun,  verb,  etc.,  and  generally  has  different  meanings, 
according  to  the  context;  as,  lo-lo  (meaning  whole,  to  earn, 
earnings,  to  carry  and  to  conquer).  Besides  the  words 
purely  Indian,  there  are  many  derived  from  the  Canadian 
French,  and  the  following  English  words  of  easy  pronun- 
ciation :  Comb,  haul,  hook,  house,  lazy,  man,  musket,  nose,  sail, 
salt,  ship,  shoes,  shot,  sick,  skin,  smoke,  soap,  spoon,  stick,  stone, 
Sunday,  tea  and  wind. 

The  following  are  very  common  expressions  :  Ab-ba,  well 
then  ;  Al-ah,  expressing  surprise  ;  Au-ah,  expressing  pain  ; 
Kweesh,  an  obstinate  refusal. 

The  Chinook  jargon  is  thoroughly  understood  by  all  In- 
dians of  the  Northwest,  and  it  is  believed  that  a  study  of 
the  following  vocabulary  will  enable  any  one  to  converse 
with  any  of  the  tribes.  A  great  deal  will  depend  upon  the 
expression  and  gestures  of  the  speaker,  and  experience 
only  can  teach  him  to  intelligently  say  the  imst,  while 
using  the  fewest  words. 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 

JARGON   VOCABULARY. 

ENGLISH— CHINOOK. 


Above,  sah-a-le. 

Absolve,  mam-ook  stoh. 

Acorns,  kah-na-way. 

Across,  in-a-ti. 

Afraid,  kwash. 

After,  kim-tah. 

Again  (also,  more),  weght. 

Ague,  cole-sick. 

Ah  !  (admiration)  wan. 

Ah  (in  pain),  a-nah. 

Alike,  cock  qua. 

All,  kon-away. 

Almost,  wake-siah. 

Alms    (to    give),    mam-ook 

kla-how-i-am. 
Alone,  copet-ict. 
Although,  kegh-ti-chie. 
Always,  kwa-ne-sum. 
American,  Boston  man. 
Amusement,  hee-hee. 


And  (then,  besides,  or)  pee. 

Angel,  ta-man-a-wis. 

Angry,  sollux. 

Another,  hul-o-ima. 

Apple,  le  pome. 

Apron,  ki-see. 

Arbutus,  lahb. 

Arm,  le  mah. 

Arrive  at,  ko. 

Arrow,  kah-li-tan. 

As,  kock-wa. 

As  if,  kah-kwa  spose. 

Ascend,  clat-a-wa  sah-a-le. 

Ash  Tree,  is-ick-stick. 

Ask  (to),  wa-wa. 

At,  ko-pa. 

Aunt,  kwalh. 

Autumn,  ten-as  cole  ilia-he. 

Awl,  shoes  keep-wot. 

Axe,  la  hash. 


Back,  kimp-ta. 

Bad,  me-sa-chie. 

Bad  odor,  humm. 

Bad  Spirit,  ma-sa-chi  taman- 

a-wis. 

Bag,  le-sak. 
Ball,  col-li-ton. 
Bargain,  ma-kook. 
Bark,  stick-skin. 
Barrel,  ta-mo-litsh. 
Basket,  6-pe-kwan. 
Be  still,  cul-tas  mit-lite. 
Beads,  ka-mo-suck. 


Bear  (to),  chet-woot. 
Bear,  its-hoot. 
Beard,  cha-pootch-us. 
Beat  (to),  kok-shet. 
Beaver,  ee-naa. 
Because,  keh-wa. 
Become  (to),  cha-ko 
Before,  e-lip. 
Behind,  kim-ta. 
Bell,  tin-tin. 
Belly,  ya-kwah-tin. 
Below,  kee-kwil-lie. 
Belt,  la  san-jel. 


Jurgon  Vocabulary. 


Berries,  o-lil-lie. 

Best,  e-lip  klosh. 

Beyond,  ten-as  si-ah. 

Big,  hy-as. 

Bird,  kal-lak-a-la. 

Biscuit,  la  bis-ke. 

Bitter,  klihl. 

Black,  klale. 

Blackberries,  klik-a-muks. 

Blanket,  pa-see-sie. 

Blind,  ha-lo  see-a-host. 

Blood,  pil-pil. 

Blow,  puk-puk. 

Blow  out,  mam-ook-poh. 

Blue  (light  shade),  spo-oh. 

Blue  (dark  shade),  klale. 

Blunder  (to),  tsee-pie. 

Board,  la  plash. 

Bob-tailed,  sis-ki-you. 

Boil  (to),  lip-lip. 

Bone,  stone. 

Boots,  stick  shoes. 

Bore  a   hole  (to),   mam-ook 

thla  whop. 

Borrow  (to),  a-yah-whul. 
Both,  kon-a-moxt. 
Bottle,  la-boo-ti. 
Bow  (of  a  boat),  nose. 
Bow  (to  shoot   with),    stick 

musket. 

Bow,  o-pitl-kegh. 
Bowl,  oos-kan. 
Box,  la  ca-sett. 


Boy,  ten-as  man. 

Bracelet,  klik-wal-lie. 

Brass,  pel  chick-a-min. 

Brave,  skoo-kum  turn-turn. 

Bread,  pia  sa-pa-lil  (san-de- 
lia). 

Break,  kok-shet. 

Breast,  to-toosh'. 

Bridle,  la  bleed. 

Bright,  te-wagh. 

Bring  (to),  rmirn-ook  cha-co. 

Broad,  kluk-ulh'. 

Broken,  cha-cluck. 

Brother,  kap-ho,  if  older  than 
the  speaker  ;  ow,  if  young- 
er. 

Brother-in-law,  ek-keh. 

Brook,  ten-as  chuck. 

Broom,  bloom. 

Bucket,  ta-mo-litsh. 

Buffalo,  moos-moos. 

Bullet,  le  bal,  or  ke-li-li-tan. 

Bundle,  kow. 

Burn  (to),  mam-ook  pia. 

Biscuit,  la-bisque. 

But,  pee. 

Butter,  to-toosh-la-klees'. 

Button,  chil-chil. 

Buttons,  tsil-tsil. 

Buy  (to),  mah-kook. 

By,  co-pa. 

By-and-By,  win-a-pie. 


Cabbage,  cabbage. 
Call  (to),  wa  wa. 
Calf,  ten-as  moos-moos. 
Calm  (a),  ha-lo  wind. 
Candle,  la  shan-del. 
Canoe,  ca-mm. 
Cap,  se-ah-pult. 


Capsize,  kil-a-pie. 
Carrot,  la-ca-lat. 
Carry  (to),  lo-lo. 
Cart,  tsik-a-tsik. 
Cascade,  tum-wa-ter. 
Cask,  ta-mo-litch. 
Cat,  puss-puss. 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


Cataract,  turn  wa-ter. 

Cattle,  moos-moos. 

Cedar,  la  med-cine  stick. 

Cellar,  ket-wil-la. 

Certainly,  na-wit-ka. 

Chain,  chick-a-min  lope. 

Chair,  la  shase. 

Change  (to),  huy-huy. 

Cheat  (to),la-lah. 

Chicken,  la  pool. 

Chief,  ty-ee. 

Child,  ten-as  man. 

Chilly,  ten-as  cole. 

Chimney,  la-shum-ma-na. 

Circle,  que-u-que-u. 

Clams,  6-na  (emet-oks). 

Clear,  klah. 

Clock,  hy-as  watch. 

Cloth,  sail. 

Cloth  (dark),  its-hoot 

Clouds,  smoek. 

Coat,  ca-po. 

Coffee,  kau-py. 

Cold,  cole. 

Color,  'tsum. 

Come  on,  hy-ak. 

Come  (to),  cha-co. 

Come    here,  cha-co  yockwa 

(ne-whah). 
Command  (to),  wa-wa. 


Conceal,  ipsoot. 

Conjuring,  ta-ma-na-wis. 

Conquer  (to),  lo-lo. 

Cook,    mam-ook    muck-a- 
muck. 

Cool  (to),  mam-ook  cole. 

Copper,  pil  chick-a-min. 

Cord,  ten-as  lo-pe. 

Corn,  ye-salth. 

Corral,  kul-lagh. 

Cotton  goods,  sail. 

Cough,  hoh-hoh. 

Count  (to),  mam-ook  kwun- 
nun. 

Cow,    clooch-man,    moos- 
moos. 

Country,  il-la-he. 

Coyote,  tal-a-pus. 

Crab-apple,  pow-itsh. 

Cranberry,  so-le-mie. 

Crazy,  pelton. 

Cream-colored,  la  clem. 

Crooked,  ky-wa. 

Cross,  la  clo-a. 

Crow,  caw-caw. 

Cry  (to),  cly. 

Cup,  oos-kan. 

Curly,  hunl-kih. 

Cut  (to),  tl-ko-pe. 


Dance,  tanse. 
Dark,  polak-lie. 
Daughter,    ni-ka    ten-as 

clooch-man. 
Day  (this),  o-kook  sun. 
Daybreak,  ten-as  sun. 
Dead,  mem-a-loos. 
Deaf,  ik-pooie  kwil-lan. 
Dear,  hy-as  ma-kook. 
Deep,  klip. 


Deer,  mow-itsh. 

Demon,  skoo-kum. 

Desert  (to  sneak  off),  swal- 

la  clat-a-wa  cap. 
Devil,  deaub. 
Different,  kull. 
Dig  (to),  mam-ook  il-1. 
Dime,  bit. 

Dirty,  pot-tie  il-la-he. 
Dish,  os-cun  (plural  la  pla). 


26 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


Dive    (in  water),   clat-a-wa 

keg-willy  chuck. 
Do  (to),  mam-ook. 
Doctor,  doc-tin. 
Dogs,  kam-ooks. 
Dollar,  dol-la. 
Door,  la  po-te. 
Down  stream,  mi-mie. 


Drink,  mam-ook  chuck. 
Drive   (to),  kish-kish. 
Drunk,  pot-tie  lum. 
Dry,   sun,   (dly). 
Duck,  kul-lak-a-la. 
Duck  (Mallard),  haht-huht. 
Dust,  po-lal-lie. 


Eagle,  chak  chak. 
Ear,  kwo-lann 
Early,  ten-as  sun. 
Earn,  lo-lo. 
Earth,  il-la-he. 
Eat  (to),  muck-a-muck. 
Egg,  la  sap. 
Elk,  moo-luck. 
Embrace,  ba-ba. 
Empty,  ha-lo  mit-lite. 
Enclosure,  kul-lagh. 
End,  o-boot. 


Enemies,    me-sa-chie    til-la- 

cums. 
Englishman,    King     Gawge 

man. 

Enlarge,  hy-as  mam-ook. 
Enough,  hy-u,  or  co-pet. 
Entrails,  ki-yah. 
Evening,  ten-as  polak-lie. 
Every,  kon-a-wa. 
Exchange,  huy-huy. 
Extinguish,  mam-ook  mem- 

a-loos,  (poh). 
Eyes,  see-a-host. 


Face,  see-a-host. 

Fade  (to),  cha-co  spo-ak. 

Faded,  spo-oh. 

Falsehood,  klim  in-a-whit. 

Falsify  (to),  cla-man-a-whit. 

Far,  si-ah. 

Far  off,  sy-ah. 

Fast  (quick),  hy-ak. 

Fast  (tight),  kwutl. 

Fasten  (to)^  kow. 

Fat,  glease. 

Fat  (to),  hy-as  gleece. 

Father,  pa-pa. 

Fathom,  it-Ian  (eth-low). 

Fear,  kwass. 

Feet,  la  pe-a. 

Fell  (to),  mam -ook-whim. 


Fence,  kul-lagh. 

Fetch,  mam-ook  cha-ko. 

Fever,  waum  sick. 

Few,  ten-as. 

Field,  klosh  il-la-he. 

Fight  (to),  mam-ook  sol-lux. 

Fight  (with  fists),  mam-ook 

puk-puk. 
Figured,  tzum. 
File,  la-leem. 
Fill  (to),  mam-ook  pahtl. 
Find  (to),  klap. 
Finished,  co-pet. 
Fingers,  le  doo. 
Fire,  pi-a. 
First,  e-lip. 
Fish,  pish  (sa-mon). 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


27 


Fish-hook,  ik-kik. 
Flag,  Sun-day. 
Flea,  en-e-poo. 
Flesh,  il-wil-lie. 
Flies,  le  moose. 
Flint,  kil-it  sut. 
Flour,  sap-o-lil. 
Flowers,  klosh  tip-so. 
Fly  (to),  ka-wak. 
Fog,  smoke. 
Food,  muck-a-muck. 
Foot,  le-pee. 
For  what,  pe-co-tu. 


Forever,  kwah-ne-sum. 
Forenoon,  clip  sit-cum  sun. 
Forget,  copet  cum-tux  (mah- 

lie). 

Fork,  la  poo-shet. 
Formerly,  an-kot-tie. 
Fox,  ta-la-pos. 
Frenchman,  pa-si-ooks 
Friend,  six. 
Frog,  swah-kuk. 
Fry  (to),  mam-ook  la  po-el. 
Frying-pan,  Id  po-el. 
Full,  pahtl. 


Gallop  (to),  kwa-lal  kwa-lal. 
Gamble  (to),  ith-el-coom. 
Gather  (to),  ko-ku-mulh. 
Get  (to),  is-kum. 
Get  out,  mash. 
Get  up,  ket-op. 
Ghost,  skoo-kum. 
Gift,  cultus  pot-lotch. 
Girl,  ten-as  clooch-man. 
Give  (to),  pot-latch. 
Glad,  kwarm. 
Glass,  she-lockum. 
Go,  clat-a-wa. 

Go   to    bed,    clat-a-wa  moo- 
sum. 

God,  sa-ha-lie  ty-ee. 
Gold,  pil  chick-a-min. 


Good,  klosh. 
Good-bye,  kla-how-i-am. 
Goods,  ic-tas. 
Goose,  kal-ak-a-lah. 
Grandfather,  chope. 
Grandmother,  chitz. 
Grass,  tip-so. 
Grease,  gleese. 
Great,  hy-as. 
Great  many,  hy-u. 
Green,  pe-chugh. 
Grey,  le-gley. 
Grizzly  bear,  se-am. 
Ground,  il-la-he. 
Gum-wood,  la  goom-stick. 
Gun,  suk-wal-lal. 


Hail,  cole-snass. 

Hair,  yak-so. 

Half,  sit-cum. 

Hallo,  nah. 

Hammer,  le-mah-to. 

Hand,  le-mah. 

Hand  (game  of),  it'lo-cum. 


Handkerchief,  kak.-at-chum 
Handsome,  hy-as  klo^h. 
Hard,  kull. 
Hare,  kwit-shad-ie. 
Harrow  (to),  mam-ook  comb 

il-la-he. 
Hat,  se-ah-po. 


28 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


Hazel  nuts,  tuk-wil-la. 

He  (she,  it,  his,  etc.),  yak-ka. 

Head,  la  tet. 

Heart,  turn-turn. 

Heaven,  sa-ha-lie  il-la-he. 

Heavy,  till. 

Help  (to),  mam-ook  e-lan. 

Hell,  ket  wit-la  pia-hy-as 

Hen,  la  pool. 

Here,  yock-wa. 

Hide,  skin. 

Hide  (to),  ip-soot. 

High,  sa-ha-lie. 

Hit  (to),  kwulh. 


Hoe,  la-pe  osh. 
Hog,  co-sho. 
Hole,  kla-whop. 
Holiday,  Sunday. 
Horn,  stone. 
Horse,  cu-i-tan. 
How,  kah-tah. 
How  large  ?  kon-si-ah. 
How  many  ?  kon-se-a. 
Hundred,  tuk-a-mo-nuk. 
Hungry,  o-lo. 
Hurry,  hy-ak. 
Husband,  man. 


I  (me,  my  or  mine),  ni-ka. 

Ice,  cole  chuck. 

If  (suppose),  spose. 

In,  ko-pa. 

Indian,  si-wash. 


Indian  corn,  e-salth. 
In  shore,  maht-wil-lie. 
Iron,  chick-a-min. 
Island,  ten-as  il-la-he. 
It  (this,  that),  o-cook. 


Jealous,  sick  turn-turn. 
Joke  (to),  mam-ook  lah-lah. 


Joy,  u-a-tle. 

Jump  (to),  so-pe-na. 


K 


Kamass  root,  la  ka-mas. 
Keep  off  (to),  maht-lin-nie. 
Kettle,  ket-ling. 
Key,  la  kley. 
Kick  (to),  chuck-kin. 
Kill    (to),    mam-ook   mim-a- 
loos. 


Kiss,  be-be. 
Knife,  6-pit-sah. 
Knock  (to),  ko-ko. 
Knotty,  hunl-kih. 
Know  (to),  cum-tux. 
Know    (not  to),    wake  cum- 
tux. 


Lad,  ten-as  man. 
Lame,  klook  te-ha  wit. 
Lamprey  eel,  skwak-wal. 
Land,  il-la-he. 
Land  otter,  in-a-mooks. 
Language,  la  lang. 
Large,  hyas. 


Last  (hindermost),  kimpta. 
Lately,  ten-as  an-cot-ta. 
Laughter,  hee-hee. 
Leap  (to),  so-pe-na. 
Leaf,  tip  so. 
Lean  (to),  lagh. 
Leave  (to),  mahsh. 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


29 


Leave  off  (to),  ko-pet. 

Leg,  te-ah-wit. 

Leggings,     mi-tas      (sa-kol- 

eks). 

Lend  (to),  a-yah-whul. 
Length,  youtl-kut. 
Lick  (to),  kla-wun. 
Lie  (to),  kla-man-a-wit. 
Lift  (to),  mam-ook  sa-ha-le. 
Light  (not  heavy),  wake-till. 
Light  (daylight),  sun  or  twa, 

(not  dark),  na  wa. 
Lightning,  sa-ha-le  pi-a. 
Like,  ka-kwa. 
Like  (to),  tik-egh. 


Listen  (to),  ne-wha. 

Little,  ten-as. 

Live  (to),  mit-lite. 

Liquor,  lum. 

Long  while  ago,  la-lee. 

Long,  youtl-kut. 

Long  ago,  an-cot-tie. 

Look,  nan-itch. 

Looking  glass,  she  lockum. 

Loose,  stoh. 

Lose  the  way  (to),  tso-lo. 

Lost,  mash. 

Love  (to),  tick-egh. 

Lower,   mam-ook-keg-wil-le. 


M 


Mad,  sol-lux. 

Magic,  ta  ma-na-was. 

Make  (to),  mam-ook. 

Many,  hy-u. 

Mark,  tsum. 

Mark  (to),  mam-ook  tsum. 

Marry  (to),  ma-li-egh. 

Mass  (ceremony  of)  la  mess. 

Mast,  ship  stick. 

Mat,  klis-kwis. 

Mattock,  la  peosh. 

Measure  (to),  ta  nim. 

Meat,  itl-wil-lie. 

Medicine,  la  med-sin. 

Men,  til-li-cums. 

Mend     (to),    mam-ook     tip-. 

shin. 

Metal,  chick-a-min. 
Middle  (the),  kat-sik. 
Mid-day,  sitcum  sun. 
Midnight,  sit-cum  pol-ak-lie. 
Milk,  to-toosh. 


Mill,  moo-la. 
Mind  (the),  turn-turn. 
Mire,  weght. 
Miss  (to),  see-pie. 
Mixed,  tzum. 
Moccasins,  skin-shoes. 
Molasses,  me-las. 
Money,  chick-a-min. 
Month,  moon. 
Mosquito,  mel-a-Kwa. 
Mother,  ma-ma. 
Mountain,  la  monti. 
Mountain,  hy-as  il-la-he. 
Mouse,  hool-hool. 
Mouth,  la  boss. 
Much,  hy-u. 
Mud,  cle-min  il-la-he. 
Mule,  la  mel. 
Music,  tin-tin. 
Mussels,  to-luks. 
Muskrat,  cul-tus  e-nah. 
My  (mine),  ni-ka. 


N 


Nails,  le  clou. 


Name,  yah-hul,  (nem), 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


Near,  wake  si-ah. 
Neck,  le  cou. 
Needle,  ca-pu-ut. 
New,  chee. 

Never,  wake  con-se-ah. 
Night,  polak-lie. 
No  (not),  wake. 
Nobody,  wake  clax-to. 
Noise,  la  tlah. 


None,  ha-lo. 

Nonsense,  cul-tus  wa-wa. 

Noon,  sit-cum  sun. 

Not  yet,  wake  al-ta. 

Nothing,  wake  ic-ta. 

Notwithstanding,kegh-tchie. 

Now,  al-ta. 

Nuts,  til-wil-la. 


Oak,  kull  stick. 

Oar,  la  lahm. 

Oats,  la  wen. 

Obtain,  is-kum. 

Ocean,  salt-chuck. 

Off,  klak. 

Off  shore,  mahtl-in-nie. 

Oil,  gleece  (la-kles). 

Old  man,  ole-man. 

Old  woman,  lam-mi-eh. 

On,  co-pa. 

One  eyed,  ict  see-a-host. 

Only,  co-pet,  ok-kook. 

Open,  hah-lakl. 


Open  (to),  he-luck. 

Opposite,  in-a-ti. 

Or,  pe. 

Order  (to),  mash  turn-turn. 

Other,  hul-o-i-ma. 

Otter,  e-mam-ooks. 

Our  (we,  us),  ne-si-ka. 

Out  doors   (outside),  klagh- 

a-nie. 

Over  (above),  sah-ha-le. 
Over  (other  side),  en-a-ti. 
Overcoat,  ka  po. 
Ox,  moos-moos. 
Oysters,  chet-lo. 


Paddle,  is-ick. 

Paddle  (to),  mam-ook  is-ick. 

Paint,  pent. 

Paint  (to),  mam-ook  pent. 

Pants,  se-ca-luk. 

Path,  o-e-hut. 

Paper,  pe-pah. 

Peas,  le  pwan. 

People,  til-li  cums. 

Perhaps,  klo-nas. 

Petticoat,  kal-a-kwah-tie. 

Piebald,  le  kye. 

Pin,  kwek-wi-eus  (keep-wot). 

Pipe,  la  peep. 

Pitch,  la  goom. 


Plate,  la  se-et. 

Pleased,  youtl. 

Plough  (to),  klugh  il-la-he. 

Pole,  le  pehsh. 

Poor,    ha-lo    ic-ta  (kla-how- 

yam). 

Pork,  co-sho. 
Porpoise,  qui-see-o. 
Potato,  wap-pa-to. 
Pour  (to),  wagh. 
Powder,  po-lal-lie. 
Prairie  wolf,  tul-a-pus. 
Present  (a),  cul-tus  pot-latch. 
Presently,  al-kie  (win-a-pie). 
Pretty,  tb-ke-ti. 


Jargon  V.ocabulary. 


Priest,  le  plet. 
Proud,  youti  (kwelth). 
Provided  that,  spose. 


Pull,  haul. 
Push,  Kwult. 


Quarter,  ten-as  sit-cum.  Quick,  hy-ak. 

iuarter  (of  a  dollar),  kwah-  j    Quills,  te-peh. 
ta. 


Rabbit,  kwit-shad-ie. 

Rain,  snass. 

Rat,  hole  hole. 

Rattle,  shugh. 

Rattlesnake,  shugh-6-poots. 

Razor  fish,  6-na. 

Reach,  ko. 

Red,  pil. 

Relate  (to),  yi-em. 

Report  (of  a  gun),  poo. 

Return,  cha-co  kil  a-pie. 

Ribbon,  le  lo-ba. 

Rice,  mit-whit. 

Rifle,  ca-li-peen. 

Ring  (a),  kweo-kweo. 

Ripe,  pi-ah. 


River,  hy-as  chuck. 
Road,  way-hut  (o-chut). 
Roan-colored,  san-de-lie. 
Roast,  mam-ook  la  pellah. 
Rock,  stone. 
Rooster,  la  cock. 
Root,  ka-mass. 
Rope,  lope. 
Rotten,  poo-lie. 
Round,  lo-lo. 

Row  (to),  mam-ook  le-lam. 
Rudder,  boat-o-poots. 
Rum,  lum. 
Run,  coo-ry. 

Run  away,  cap-swal-la  clat- 
a-wa. 


S 


Sack,  le  sak. 
Saddle,  la  sell. 
Saddle-housing,  le-pish-e-mo. 
Sailor,  ship-man. 
Salmon,  sa-mon. 
Sand,  po-lal-lie. 
Sandwich  Islander,  Oyee. 
Sash,  la  saw-jel. 
Saw,  la  see  (la  gwin). 
Say  (to),  wa-wa. 
Scarce,  quass. 
Scissors,  le  see-zo. 
Sea,  salt  chuck. 
Seal,  ol-hi-yu  si-wash  co-sho 
(ol-hy-in). 


See  (to),  nan-itch. 
Sell  (to),  man-cook. 
Send  (to),  clat-a-wa. 
Sew  (to),  mam-ook  tip-shin. 
Shake,  hul-hul. 
Shake  (to),  to-to. 
Shame,  shem. 
Sharp,  pah-kis-ilth. 
Sharpen  (to),  mam-ook  tsish. 
She,  ya-ka. 
Sheep,  le  moo-to. 
Shell    money  (small),  coop- 
coop. 

Shell  money  (large)  ai-qua. 
Shingle,  le  bah-do. 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


Shining,  to-wagh. 

Shirt,  shut. 

Shoot  (to),  mam-ook  poo. 

Short,  yutes-kut. 

Shot-pouch,  ki-li-tan  le-sac. 

Shout  (to),  hy-as  wa-wa. 

Shovel,  la-pell. 

Shut  (to),  ik-poo-ie. 

Sift  (to),  to-to. 

Silk,  la-sway. 

Silver,  t-kope  chik-a-min. 

Similar,  kah-kwa. 

Since,  kim  ta. 

Sing  (to),  shan-ti. 

Sink,  cli-a. 

Sister  (elder),  lik-po. 

Sister  (younger),  ats. 

Sit  (to),  mit-lite. 

Skunk,   hum-o-poots    (saub- 

boo). 

Sky,  koo-sah. 

Slave,  e-li-te  (mist-chi-mas). 
Sleep,  moo-sum. 
Slowly,  kla-wa. 
Small,  ten-as. 
Smell,  hum. 
Snake,  o-luk. 
Snare,  la  pe-age. 
Snow,  cole-snass. 
Soft,  cla-min. 
Sometimes,  ict-ict. 
Soon,  wake'le-ly. 
Sorrell  (color),  le-blau. 
Sorry,  sick  turn-turn. 
Sour,  kwates. 
Spade,  la  pell. 
Speak  (to),  wa-wa. 
Spill  (to),  wagh. 


Spirit     (guardian),    to  man- 

no-us. 

Spirits,  lum. 
Split,  tsugh. 

Split  (to),  mam-ook  tsugh. 
Spectacles,  dal-la  see-a-host. 
Spit  (to),  mam-ook  toh. 
Spotted,  le-kye. 
Spurs,  la  see-bio. 
Squirrel,  kwis-kwis. 
Stab  (to),  klem-a-rmm. 
Stag,  man-mow-a-itch. 
Stand,  mit-whit. 
Stars  (buttons),  tsil-tsil. 
Stay  (to),  mit-lite. 
Steal,  cap-swalla. 
Steam,  smoke. 
Steamer,  ship  (pia-ship). 
Stirrup,  sit-lay. 
Stockings,  kush-is. 
Stop,  ko  pet. 
Store,  ma-cook  house. 
Story,  eh-kah-nam. 
Straight,  si-pah  (de-late). 
Strawberries,  a-mo  te. 
Strike  (to),  cock-shet. 
Strong,  skoo-kum. 
Sturgeon,  stutch-un. 
Subdue,  quan. 
Sugar,  le  sook. 
Summer,  waum  il-la-he. 
Sun,  Ota-lagh. 
Sunset,  elip-sun. 
Suppose,  spose. 
Swan,  kah-loke. 
Sweep  (to),  mam-ook  bloom. 
Sweet,  tsee. 
Swim,  sit-shum. 


T 


Table,  la  tahb. 
Tail,  o-poots. 


Take  (to),  is-kum. 

Take  care,  klosh  nan-itch. 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


33 


Take  off,  mam-ook  klak. 

Tale,  yi-em. 

Talk,  wa-wa. 

Tame,  kwass. 

Tattle  (to),  ya-yim. 

Teach    (to),    mam-ook-cum- 

tux. 

Tear  (to),  klugh. 
Teeth,  le  tah. 
Tell  (to),  wa-wa. 
Thank  you,  mah-sie. 
That,  o-cook. 
That   way    (there,   beyond), 

yah-wa. 
They,  klas-ka. 
Thick,  pit-lilh. 
Thin,  pe-what-tie. 
Thing,  ic-ta. 
Thirsty,  o-lo  chuck. 
This,  o-cook. 
This  way,  yak-wa. 
Thou  (thy,  thine),  mi-ka. 
Thread,  kla-pite. 
Throw  (to),  mash. 
Throw  away,  mahsh. 
Tide,  chuck. 
Tie  (to),  kow. 


Tight,  kwutl. 
Tinware,  ma-lah. 
Tip  (to),  lagh. 
Tired,  till. 

To  (towards),  ko-pa. 
Tobacco,  ki-noos. 
To-day,  o-cook  sun. 
To-morrow,  to  ma-la. 
Tongue,  la  lang. 
Trade  (to)   hoe-hoe. 
Trail,  way-hut. 
Trap,  la  piege. 
Tree,  stick. 

Tree  (fallen),  whim  stick. 
Tremble,  hul-hul. 
Trot  (to),  teh-teh. 
Trouble,  mam-ook  till. 
Trowsers,  so-kol-eks. 
True,  de-late. 
Truth,  de-late  wa-wa. 
Tub,  ta-mo-litsh. 
Turn  (to),  howh. 
Turn  over  (to),  kil-a-pie. 
Twice,  moxt. 
Twilight,  twah. 
Twine,  ten-as  lope. 


Uncle,  tot. 

Under,  kee-kwil-lie.    . 
Understand  (to),  cum-tux. 
Unhappy,  sick  tum-tum. 
United  States,  Boston  il-la- 

he. 
Untamed,  le  mo-lo. 


Untie  (to),  mam-ook  stoh. 
Up  (above,  heavenward)   sa- 

ha-lie. 

Upset  (to),  kil-a-pi. 
Us,  ne-si-ka. 
Useless,  cul-tus. 


Vancouver,  kits-oat-qua. 
Venison,  mow-itch. 
Very,  hyas. 
Very  small,  hy-as  ten-as. 


Vessel,  ship. 
Vest,  la  west. 
Vomit  (to),  wagh. 


34 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


Wagon,  chik-chik. 

Wander  (to),  ts-o-lo. 

Warm,  waum. 

Wash  (to),  mam-ook  wash. 

Watch,  tik-tik. 

Watch  (to),  nan-itch. 

Water,  chuck. 

Waterfall,  turn-water. 

We,  ne  si-ka. 

Week  (one),  ict  Sunday. 

Weigh  (to),  mam-ook  til. 

Wet,  pahtl-chuck 

Whale,  eh-ko-lie. 

What,  ic-ta. 

What  color  ?  ka-ta  tsum, 

Wheat,  sap-o-lil. 

Wheel,  chik-chik. 

When,  kan-sih. 

Where,  kah. 

Whip,  la  whet. 

White,  t-kope. 

Who,  klax-ta. 

Whole,  lo-lo,  kwa-nice. 

Why,  kah-tah. 


Wicked,  me-sa-chie. 
Wide,  kluk-ulh. 
Wild,  le  mo-lo. 
Will  (the),  turn-turn. 
Willow,  ee-na  stick. 
Win  (to),  to-lo. 
Winter,  cole  il-la-he. 
Wipe  (to),  klak-wun. 
Wire,  chik-a-min  lope. 
Wire  (brass),  klik-wal-la. 
Wish  (to),  tick-ey. 
With,  co-pa. 
Without,  ha-lo. 
Wolf,  le-loo. 
Woman,  clootch-man. 
Woman,  (old)  lam-mi-eh. 
Wood,  sticK. 
Work  (to),  mam-ook. 
Worn  out,  ol-e-man. 
Worthless,  cul-tus. 
Wound  (to),  klem-a-hum. 
Write  (to),  mam-ook  tsum. 
Writing,  tsum. 


Year  (a),  ict  cole. 
Yellow,  kaw-ka-wak. 
Yes,  ah-ha. 
Yes  indeed,  na-wit-ka. 


Yesterday,  tahl-kie  sun. 
Young,  ten-as. 
You,  mi-ka. 
Yours,  me-sika. 


NUMERALS. 


One,  ict. 
Two,  moxt. 
Three,  klone. 
Four,  lak-it. 


Five,  kuin-num. 
Six,  tagh-hum. 
Seven,  sin-a-moxt. 
Eight,  sto-te-kin. 


Jargon  Vocabulary. 


35 


[ine,  kweest, 
Ten,  tah-tel-lum. 
Twenty,  moxt  tah-tel-lum.* 
Thirty,  klone  tah-tel-lum. 


One  hundred,  ict   ta-ka-mo- 

nuk. 
One  thousand,      tah-tel-lum 

ta-ka-mo-nuk. 


A 


EXAMPLES   OF   CHINOOK   CONSTRUCTION. 

Good  morning  (Good-evening  !   Good-day  !  How  are  you, 

etc.)  !  friend  ? — Kla-how-iam,  six  ? 
Are  you  sick  ? — Sick,  nah  mi-ka  ? 
A  severe  ague. — Hy-as  cole-sick. 
Are  you  thirsty  ? — Nah  ?  ol-o  chuck  mi-ka  ? 
Yes,  indeed  ! — Na-wit-ka  ! 

Here  is  something  to  eat. — Yock-wa  mit-lite  mi-ka  muck-a- 
muck. 
Thank  you  !     Bring  me  some  water. — Mah-sie.     Clat-a  w£ 

is-cum  chuck. 
In  what  ? — Ko-pa  kah  ? 
In  that  bucket. — Ko-pa  o-cook  ta-mo-litsh. 
Are  you  able  to  carry  it  ? — Nah    skoo-kum  mi-ka  lo-lo  o- 

cook. 

No  ;  it  is  too  heavy. — Wake.     Hyas  til  o-cook. 
Where  is  the  bottle  ? — Kah  la-boo-ti  ? 
I  don't  know.     No  ;  there  it  is. — Wake  cum-tux.  Wake,  ya- 

wa. 

Come  here,  boy  ? — Cha-co  yock-wa  ten-as  man. 
What  do  you  want  ? — Ic-ta  mi-ka  tick-ey  ? 
Carry  this  man  to  the  river. — Lo-lo  o-cook  man  ko-pa  hv- 

as  chuck. 

Is  he  tired  ? — Til  nah  yak-ka  ? 
Will  you  work  for  me  ? — Mi-ka  nah   tickey  mam  ook  ten-as 

icta? 
t  what?— Icta  ? 


^Greater  numbers  are  expressed  by  a  conjunction  of  the  words  expressing  the 
numbers  to  be  added,  thus  :  Sin-a-moxt  tah-tel-lum  (seven  times  ten)  express 
seventy. 


36  Jargon  Vocabulary. 

Come  to-morrow,  and  carry  this  box  to  the   steamboat. — 
Chaco  to-ma-la,  pee  lo-lo  o-cook  la-ca-sett  ko-pa  pia-ship. 
What  will  you  give  me  ? — Ic-ta  mi-ka  pot-latch  ? 
One  quarter,  or  two  bits. — let  quarter,  pe  moxt  bit. 
No  ;  give  half  a  dollar. — Wake  ;  pot-latch  sit-cum  dol-la. 
Very  well,  I'll  give  you  half  a  dollar. — Close  ca-qua,  ni-ka 

pot-latch  sit-cum  dolla. 
To  which  steamboat  ? — Clax-ta. 
That  large  one  ? — O-cook  hy-as  pia-ship  ? 
How  far  ? — Kou-se-a  si-ah  ? 
Not  very  far  (a  short  distance). — Wake  si-ah. 
Make  a  fire,  boil  the  water,  and  wash  the  dishes  to-day.— 

Mam-ook  pi-a,  mam-ook  lip-lip  chuck,  wash  o'cook  la- 

pla  o-cook  sun. 


THE   LORD'S   PRAYER   IN   JARGON. 

Our  father  who  stayeth  in  the  above,  good  in  oui 
Ne-si-ka  Papa  klax-ta  mit-lite  ko-pa  sa-ha-lie,  kiosk  ko-pa  ne 
hearts  (be)  thy  name  ;  good  thou  chief  among  al 
si-ka  turn-turn  mi-ka  nem ;  kiosk  mi-ka  ty-ee  ko-pa  kon-a-waj 
people  ;  good  thy  will  on  earth  as  in  the 
til-li-cum  j  klosh  mi-ka  turn-turn  ko-pa  il-la-he  kah-kwa  ko-pc 
above  ;  give  every  day  our  food  ;  If  we 

sa-ha-lie;  pot-latch  kon-a-way  sun  ne-si-ka  muck-a-muck  ;  SpoS( 
do  ill,  (be)  not  thou  very  angry,  and  if  anyone  evi 
•  ne-si-ka  mam-ook  me-sa-chie  wake  mi-ka  hy-as  sollux,  pee  sposi 
towards  us,  not  we  angry  towards  them  ;  senc 
klax-ta  me-sa-chie  ko-pa  ne-si-ka,  wake  ne-si-ka  sollux  ko-pc 
away  far  from  us  all  evil. 
klaxta  ;  mahsh  si-ah  ko-pa  ne-si-ka  kon-a-way  me-sa-chie. 


DEVLIN  *  CO., 


Reliable  Goods. 

Reasonable  Prices. 


MILITARY  AND  NAVAL 

UNIFORMS 

A  Specialty. 

Broadway,  cor.  Warren  St. 

MEW  YORK 


Conroy,  Bissett  and  Malleson, 

IMPORTERS   AND  MANUFACTURERS    OF 

FISHING  TACKLE, 

AND 

FINE  ARCHERY  GOODS, 
No.  <3£>   Fulton  Street,   IVe^v   York. 

,  SEND    FOR  ILLUSTRATED    CATALOGUE. 


ESTABLISHED  1830. 


MILITARY,  SPORTING 
AND 

HUNTING  REPEATING  RIFLES. 

SEND  FOB  CATALOGUE  AND  PRICE  LIST. 

E.  IfcEMIIVOTOIV    &     SO1VS, 

P.  O.  BOX  3,994.  283  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 

JOHN  BOYLE, 

TENTS    ^LJVI> 


Every  Article  that  can  be  made  of  Canvas    or    Canvas  and    Leather, 

Stitched  ~by  hand  or  machine,  or  both  combined,  Furnished 

at  Short  Notice. 

199,    201,    203    FULTON    ST.,  NEW   YORK. 
_  SEND   FOR  CATALOGUE.  _ 

C.  M.  MOSEMAN  &  BRO., 

MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS  OF 

,  SadLd-les,  Bx»iclles, 


128  CHAMBERS  ST.,  NEW  YORK. 


Grand,  Square  and  Upright  Piano-Fortes. 

These  Instruments  have  been  before  the  Public  for  nearly  Fifty 
Years,  and  upon  their  Excellence  alone  have  attained  an  UNPURCHASED 
PRE- EMINENCE,  which  establishes  them  as  UNEQUALED  in 

Tone,  Touch,  Workmanship  §•  Durability. 

Every  Piano  fully  warranted  for  Five  Years.  Small  Pianos  madt 
to  order  with  a  view  to  easy  transportation. 

SEND  FOR  CATALOGUE. 


WM.  KNABE  &  CO-, 

2O4  and  2O6  W.  Baltimore   St.,  Baltimore. 
112   Fifth  Avenue,  New  York. 

PACH, 
g 


'*  3 

NEW  YORK.  g 

g  fc 

a  841  Broadway,  Cor.  xsthSt.  Opposite  Wallack's  ® 

Theatre. 


BRANCH  ESTABLISHMENTS:          g 


Cambridge,  Mass., 

New  Haven,  Conn., 
%  Long  Branch  and 

g  Ocean  Grove,  N.  J. 

Photographer  to   the  Classes  of  U.  S.  M.  A.,  W.  P.,  of  '75, 
76,  '77,  '78,  '79,  '80,  '81,  '82. 


Howard  Manufacturing  Co. 

NEW    YORK, 


SOLE   MANUFACTURERS    OF 


NOVELTIES 

Required  by  Hunters,  Travelers  and  all 
Practical  Persons. 


SEND  FOR  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE. 

Webster's    Unabridged  Dictionary. 

3OOO     Engravings,    184O      Pages.       Quarto. 

A  WHOLE    LIBRARY  IN   ITSELF. 
Best  in  Definitions — Best  in    Etymology.     Published  by 

O.  &  €.  JtlJKRKlAIVl, 

Springfield,  Ma§§. 

Some  of  the  cuts  in  Chapter  XIII.  are  taken  from  this  work. 

Goodyear  Rubber  Company, 

488,  49O,  492  Broadway,  N.  Y. 

MANUFACTURERS  OF 

RUBBER  GOODS 

OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Campaign  and  Field  Outfits  a  Specialty. 

SEND  FOR  CATALOGUE. 


ROBERT  L.  BURNETT, 

FORMERLY 

Captain  12th  and  21st  V.  S.  In. 
and  Bet.  Major  U.  8.  A. 


HENR  Y  E.  SMITH, 

FORMERLY 

Captain  12th  and  21st  U.  S.  Inf. 
and  Bvt.  Major  U.  S.  A. 


58  Broadway, 


TRANSACT  ALL  CLASSES 

OF    FINANCIAL     BUSINESS     FOR 

ARMY    OFFICERS. 


York. 


Baltimore,   Light    and    German    Streets,    Baltimore,  Maryland. 

The  LARGEST,  LATEST  BUILT  and  MOST  CONVENIENT  HOTEL 
IN  THE  CITY  Rates,  $  3 . 0  O  and  $  2  .  5  O  per  day,  according  to  location  of  Rooms. 
Permanent  Board  by  the  Month  at  $40. OO  and  upwards.  Special  arrangements  witt 
always  be  made  satisfactory  for  families,  vr  for  parties  by  telegraph.  Dinner  tickets  $8 
per  dozen.  Officers  of  the  Army,  Navy  and  Marine  Corps  may  always  rely  upon  the  best 
of  accommodations  at  20  per  cent,  discount  on  advertised  transient  rates,  and  the  under- 
signed talces  the  liberty  of  referring  to  his  personal  record  in  the  Army,  as  evidence  the  best 
that  Army  and  Navy  patronage  is  especially  solicited,  and  will  be  properly  cared  for.  ^ 

F.  W.  COLEMAN,  Manager. 


WORKS  BY 

GEN.  0.  0.  HOWARD,   U.  S.  ARMY- 


COUNT  AGENOR  DE  GASPARIN— By  THOMAS  BOREL.  Trans- 
lated from  the  French  by  GEN.  O.  O.  HOWARD.  Octavo.  Cloth  $1. 
A  faithful  record  of  a  noble  life,  a  life  deserving  the  special  ap- 
preciation of  patriotic  Americans.  Published  and  for  sale  by 

G.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS, 

27  &  29  West   23d  St.,  New  York. 

DON  ALPS  SCHOOL  DAYS. 

A  story  of  New  England  school  life.  An  excellent  book  for 
boys.  Fully  illustrated.  $1.25. 

NEZ  PERCE  JOSEPH. 

An  account  of  his  ancestors,  his  lands,  his  confederates,  his  ene- 
mies, his  murders,  his  war,  his  pursuit  and  capture.  By  OLIVER 
O.  HOWARD,  Brig.  Gen.  U.  S.  A.,  and  Superintendent  West 
Point.  With  maps  and  portraits,  $2.50. 

For  these  books  send  orders  to  the  Publishers,  LEE  &  SHEPARD, 
Boston,  or  to  GEN.  HOWARD,  West  Point,  N.  Y. 

TARGET    AIR   GUNS. 

Especially  adapted  for  target  practice.  Equally  suited  for 
touching  up  trespassing  cats  and  dogs,  killing  rats  and  small  game. 
Our  guns  are  extremely  simple  in  construction,  well  made  and  hand- 
somely finished;  easily  operated,  and  shoot  with  force  and  accuracy, 
and  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order.  All  first-class  gun  dealers  sell  them. 
Illustrated  circular  sent  on  application.  Address  the  manufacturer, 
H.  M.  QUACKENBUSH,  Herkimer,  N.  Y.  Prices,  $9,  $10,  and  $12. 

[See  page  38  of  this  work.] 

ELECTROTYPES  OF  ANY  CUTS  APPEARING  IN  THIS  WORK,  OR  IN  ANY 
of  our  publications,  will  be  furnished  on  application.  Address 

METROPOLITAN  PUBLISHING  CO,, 

252  Broadway,  N   Tf 


WORKS  BY  THE  AUTHOR  OF 

MOUNTAIN  SCOUTING. 

FARROW'S  PACK  MULES  AND  PACKING. 

With  description  of  the  Packing  Gear  and  full  instructions  for 
Packing.  Fully  Illustrated. 

24  mo,  paper $    50 

34  mo,  cloth 100 

FARROW'S    NOTES    ON  THE    SALMON  RIVER   MOUNTAINS  OF 

IDAHO. 

With  maps,  fully  setting  forth  practicable  routes  over  the  ROCKY 
MOUNTAINS;  ana  copious  remarKS  upon  the  mineral  resources  of  that 
section. 

24  mo,  paper $    50 

24  mo,  cloth 100 

FARROW'S  WEST  POINT  AND  THE  MILITARY  ACADEMY. 

With  Requirements  for  Entering,  System  of  Training,  Regulations, 
Instructions,  Text  Books,  etc.,  etc. 

12  mo,  paper $1  00 

12  mo,  cloth  1  50 

FARROW'S  MILITARY  SYSTEM  OF  GYMNASTICS. 

A  complete  course  of  Gymnastics  and  a  system  of  Swimming.  Pre- 
pared for  the  use  of  the  Cadets  at  West  Point,  and  other  Military  Col- 
leges. Fully  Illustrated. 

16  mo,  paper $100 

16  mo,  cloth 1  50 

"Having  given  FARROW'S  MILITARY  SYSTEM  OF  GYMNASTICS  the  examination  it 
deserves,  I  have  great  pleasure  in  expressing  my  unqualified  approval.  The  exercises 
recommended  are  excellent,  and. their  progressive  arrangement  is  admirably  adapted 
to  proper  physical  development.  Haying  been  26  years  in  the  profession,  and  part  of 
the  time  Instructor  of  Gymnastics,  in  the  British  Army,  I  can  fully  appreciate  the 
fidelity  with  which  the  author  has  executed  his  work."  J.  R.  JUDD. 

Adopted  at  West  Point  and  many  of  the  Military  Colleges  in  the 
United  States. 

SENT  POST  PAID  BY 

METROPOLITAN  PUBLISHING  COMPANY. 
252  BROADWAY,  N.  Y. 


THE  IMPROVED  PARKER 

BREECH-LOADING   SHOT   GUN 


SIMPLE, 

DURABLE, 


EFFECTIVE 


THE 

HIGHEST  AWARD 


The  Parker  Won  the 

FIRST  PREMIUM, 

GRAND  MEDAL, 


AND 

DIPLOMA 


Over  All  Competitors, 


All  Hard  Rubber  Locks  with 
Checked  Stocks  and  Pat- 
ent Snap  Forend. 


Barrels, 

$75  to  $300. 

Damascus  or  Lami'i  BWs, 

$50  to  $70 

Send  Stamp  for  Illustra- 
ted Catalogue. 

PARKER    BROS., 

OOJVIV. 


Show  Rooms,  97  Chambers  Street,  New  York. 


FOX'S  PATENT 

Breech  Loading  Shot  Gun. 


WONDEKFULLY  SIMPLE. 

WOKDEKFULLY  STRONG. 


Prices  range  from  $45  to  $150. 

SEND   FOR  CIRCULAR  TO  AMERICAN  ARMS  COM- 
PANY, BOSTON,  MASS. 

We  would  respectfully  refer  to  the  following  testimonial  which 
explains  itself: 

WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  accede  to  your  request  for  a  few  words 
respecting  the  behavior  of  the  "  Fox  Gun,"  which  I  used  during  a  season 
in  Arizona.  It  is  proper  to  state  that  no  severer  test  could  be  given  a  gun 
than  the  service  it  necessarily  undergoes  in  the  rough  campaign  life  of  a 
Government  exploring  party.  It  must  not  only  stand  exposure  to  the  vicis- 
situdes of  the  weather,  especially  the  prolonged  wet  season,  but  when  in  use 
on  the  dry  plains,  where  the  air  is  often  filled  with  flying  sand,  it  is  next  to 
impossible  to  prevent  the  gritty  particles  from  lodging  between  the  barrels 
and  the  stock.  This,  as  every  sportsman  knows,  is  a  fruitful  source  of  an- 
noyance, and  often  of  positive  injury  to  the  weapon.  <  During  the  season,  at 
a  low  estimate,  not  less  than  fifteen  hundred  shots  were  fired.  Again,  as  all 
travelling  was  performed  on  horseback,  the  gun  was  constantly  carried  in  a 
sling  before  the  saddle  ;  this  alone  being  no  light  trial,  and  one  particularly 
liable  to  render  the  gun  shaky.  And  now,  at  the  end  of  its  six  month's 
service,  I  can  say  that  the  gun  is  practically  in  as  good  condition  as  when 
taken  from  the  shop  ;  a  statement  to  be  appreciated  when  it  is  understood 
that  three  other  breech-loaders,  from  makers  of  first-class  reputation,  with 
less  service,  were  either  partially  or  wholly  disabled  ere  leaving  the  field. 

H.  W.  HENSHAW,  of  Wheeler's  U.S.  Exploring  Expedition. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  5O  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


NOV  101946 


ApR  21  1942  Jl 

"*db     •  »*•?*  A 

280sc'« 

-™     * 

. 

3JAN'56PLC 

^  p  5 

MftV  Xl  ^6^ 

WU'     '1 

QQ1       3  1^5 

HOL  CIR.     OCT  1  1  1985 

LD  21-100m-7,'40  (6936s) 

GENERAL  LIBRARY  -  U.C.  BERKELEY 


BQOO'ltmflS 


M25521 


F3 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


